Arch. Specs PDF

BG EGYPT NEW ADMINISTRATION
BUILDING
“CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS”
SUBMISSION DATE : JULY 2012
ARCHITECTURAL SPECIFICATIONS
MAIN CONSULTANT:
BG Egypt EHAF Consulting Engineers
New Administration Building Dr.Ezz El-Din Fahmy
Interior Design Works Dr.Hussein Abbas
TENDER DOCUMENTS
Table of Content
DOCUMENT III : TECHNICAL CONDITIONS *

Part1 : Technical Specifications *
Volume 1: Arch. And Civil Specifications *
Volume 2: Mechanical works Specifications
Volume 3: Electrical Works Specifications
Part2 : Bill of Quantities
* Indicates the documents included in this book

Document III : Technical Conditions
Part 1 : Technical Specifications
Volume 1 : Architectural Technical Specifications
Table of Content
Division 02 Site Works

Section 02300 Earthwork
Section 02511 Hot- Mix Asphalt Paving
Section 02780 Unit Pavers
Section 02820 Fences and Gates
Section 02841 Active Vehicle Barriers
Section 02930 Lawns and Grasses
Section 02955 Trees and Shrubs
Division 03 Concrete Works

Section 03005 Concrete and Reinforced Concrete
Division 04 Masonry Works

Section 04220 Concrete Masonry Units
Section 04813 Thermal Brick Units
Division 05 Metal Works

Section 05500 Miscellaneous Metals
Division0 6 Wood and Plastics

Section 06200 Finish Carpentry
Division 07 Moisture and Thermal Protection

Section 07150 Damp Proofing
Section 07180 Traffic Coatings
Section 07410 Metal Roof & Wall Panels
Division 08 Doors and Windows

Section 08110 Steel Doors and Frames
Section 08200 Wood Doors
Section 08451 Glass Doors
Section 8460 Automatic Entrance Doors
Section 08700 Finish Hardwar
Section 08800 Glass and Glazing
Division 09 Finishes
Section 09200 Lath and Plaster
Section 09250 Gypsum Board
Section 09310 Ceramic Tiles
Section 09512 Acoustical Gypsum Ceilings
Section 09638 Stone Flooring
Section 09677 Vinyl Flooring
Section 09685 Carpet
Section 09900 Painting
Section 09960 High Performance Coats
Division 10 Specialties
Section 10260 Impact Resistant Wall Protection
Section 10270 Cable Management System
Section 10271 Access Flooring
Section 10425 Signs
Section 10540 Entrance Canopy
Section 10615 Demountable Partitions
Section 10651 Operable Partitions
Section 10800 Toilet & Bath Accessories
Division 11 Equipment
Section11140 Pedestrian Control Equipment
Section 11150 Parking Control Equipment
Division 12 Furnishing
Section 12492 Vertical Blinds
Section 12497 Draperies and Tracks
BG Egypt Architectural EHAF Consulting Engineers
New Administration Building Technical Specifications Dr.Ezz El-Din Fahmy
SECTION 02300
EARTHWORK
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Preparing subgrades for slabs-on-grade, walks, pavements, grasses and plants.

2. Excavating and backfilling for buildings and structures.
3. Drainage course for concrete slabs-on-grade.
4. Subbase course for concrete walks and pavements.
5. Subbase course and base course for asphalt paving.
6. Excavating and backfilling for utility trenches.
1.02 DEFINITIONS
A. Backfill: Soil material used to fill an excavation.

1. Initial Backfill: Backfill placed beside and over pipe in a trench, including haunches to support
sides of pipe.
2. Final Backfill: Backfill placed over initial backfill to fill a trench.
B. Base Course: Aggregate layer placed between the subbase course and hot-mix asphalt paving.
C. Bedding Course: Aggregate layer placed over the excavated subgrade in a trench before laying pipe.
D. Borrow Soil: Satisfactory soil imported from off-site for use as fill or backfill.
E. Drainage Course: Aggregate layer supporting the slab-on-grade that also minimizes upward capillary flow
of pore water.
F. Excavation: Removal of material encountered above subgrade elevations and to lines and dimensions
indicated.
1. Authorized Additional Excavation: Excavation below subgrade elevations or beyond indicated lines
and dimensions as directed by Architect. Authorized additional excavation and replacement
material will be paid for according to Contract provisions for changes in the Work.
2. Unauthorized Excavation: Excavation below subgrade elevations or beyond indicated lines and
dimensions without direction by Architect. Unauthorized excavation, as well as remedial work
directed by Architect, shall be without additional compensation.
G. Fill: Soil materials used to raise existing grades.
H. Structures: Buildings, footings, foundations, retaining walls, slabs, tanks, curbs, mechanical and electrical
appurtenances, or other man-made stationary features constructed above or below the ground surface.
I. Subbase Course: Aggregate layer placed between the subgrade and base course for hot-mix asphalt
pavement, or aggregate layer placed between the subgrade and a cement concrete pavement or a
cement concrete or hot-mix asphalt walk.
J. Subgrade: Uppermost surface of an excavation or the top surface of a fill or backfill immediately below
subbase, drainage fill, drainage course, or topsoil materials.
EHAF – CO – 01/03 -1 - Section 02300

June 2012 - Rev.(00) Earthwork
** Issued for Addendum No. 1
K. Utilities: On-site underground pipes, conduits, ducts, and cables, as well as underground services within
buildings.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. Earthwork shall be performed in strict accordance with the stipulations of the AASHTO Specifications,
tests, drawings and grades established by the Consultant.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 SOIL MATERIALS
A. General: Provide borrow soil materials when sufficient satisfactory soil materials are not available from
excavations.
B. Satisfactory Soils: Soil Classification Groups A-1, A-2-4, A-2-5, and A-3 according to AASHTO M 145, or
a combination of these groups; free of rock or gravel larger than 75 mm in any dimension, debris, waste,
frozen materials, vegetation, and other deleterious matter.
1. Liquid Limit: max 30%
2. Plasticity Index: max 8%
C. Unsatisfactory Soils: Soil Classification Groups A-2-6, A-2-7, A-4, A-5, A-6, and A-7 according to
AASHTO M 145, or a combination of these groups.
1. Unsatisfactory soils also include satisfactory soils not maintained within 2 percent of optimum
moisture content at time of compaction.
D. Subbase Material: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed stone, and
natural or crushed sand; ASTM D 2940; with at least 90 percent passing a 37.5-mm sieve and not more
than 12 percent passing a 0.075-mm sieve.
E. Base Course: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed stone, and
natural or crushed sand; ASTM D 2940; with at least 95 percent passing a 37.5-mm sieve and not more
F. Bedding Course: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed stone, and
natural or crushed sand; ASTM D 2940; except with 100 percent passing a 25-mm sieve and not more
G. Drainage Course: Narrowly graded mixture of washed crushed stone, or crushed or uncrushed gravel;
ASTM D 448; coarse-aggregate grading Size 57; with 100 percent passing a 37.5-mm sieve and 0 to 5
percent passing a 2.36-mm sieve.
2.02 ACCESSORIES
A. Warning Tape: Acid- and alkali-resistant, polyethylene film warning tape manufactured for marking and
identifying underground utilities, 150 mm wide and 0.1 mm thick, continuously inscribed with a description
of the utility; colored to comply with local practice or requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
EHAF – CO – 01/03 -2 - Section 02300
B. Detectable Warning Tape: Acid- and alkali-resistant, polyethylene film warning tape manufactured for
marking and identifying underground utilities, a minimum of 150 mm wide and 0.1 mm thick, continuously
inscribed with a description of the utility, with metallic core encased in a protective jacket for corrosion
protection, detectable by metal detector when tape is buried up to 750 mm deep; colored to comply with
local practice or requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
A. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities from damage caused by settlement,
lateral movement, undermining, washout, and other hazards created by earth moving operations.
B. Protect and maintain erosion and sedimentation controls during earth moving operations.
C. Protect subgrades and foundation soils from freezing temperatures and frost. Remove temporary
protection before placing subsequent materials.
3.02 EXCAVATION, GENERAL
A. Unclassified Excavation: Excavate to subgrade elevations regardless of the character of surface and
subsurface conditions encountered. Unclassified excavated materials may include rock, soil materials,
and obstructions. No changes in the Contract Sum or the Contract Time will be authorized for rock
excavation or removal of obstructions.
1. If excavated materials intended for fill and backfill include unsatisfactory soil materials and rock,
replace with satisfactory soil materials.
3.03 EXCAVATION FOR STRUCTURES

A. Excavate to indicated elevations and dimensions within a tolerance of plus or minus 25 mm. If applicable,
extend excavations a sufficient distance from structures for placing and removing concrete formwork, for
installing services and other construction, and for inspections.
1. Excavations for Footings and Foundations: Do not disturb bottom of excavation. Excavate by
hand to final grade just before placing concrete reinforcement. Trim bottoms to required lines and
grades to leave solid base to receive other work.
B. Excavations at Edges of Tree- and Plant-Protection Zones:
1. Excavate by hand to indicated lines, cross sections, elevations, and subgrades. Use narrow-tine
spading forks to comb soil and expose roots. Do not break, tear, or chop exposed roots. Do not
use mechanical equipment that rips, tears, or pulls roots.
2. Cut and protect roots according to requirements in Division 2 Section "Tree Protection and
Trimming."
EHAF – CO – 01/03 -3 - Section 02300

3.04 EXCAVATION FOR WALKS AND PAVEMENTS
A. Excavate surfaces under walks and pavements to indicated lines, cross sections, elevations, and
subgrades.
3.05 EXCAVATION FOR UTILITY TRENCHES
A. Excavate trenches to indicated gradients, lines, depths, and elevations.

B. Excavate trenches to uniform widths to provide the following clearance on each side of pipe or conduit.
Excavate trench walls vertically from trench bottom to 300 mm higher than top of pipe or conduit unless
otherwise indicated.
1. Clearance: 300 mm each side of pipe or conduit unless otherwise indicated.
C. Trench Bottoms: Excavate and shape trench bottoms to provide uniform bearing and support of pipes and
conduit. Shape subgrade to provide continuous support for bells, joints, and barrels of pipes and for joints,
fittings, and bodies of conduits. Remove projecting stones and sharp objects along trench subgrade.
1. Excavate trenches 150 mm deeper than elevation required in rock or other unyielding bearing
material, 100 mm deeper elsewhere, to allow for bedding course.
D. Trenches in Tree- and Plant-Protection Zones:
1. Hand-excavate to indicated lines, cross sections, elevations, and subgrades. Use narrow-tine
spading forks to comb soil and expose roots. Do not break, tear, or chop exposed roots. Do not
use mechanical equipment that rips, tears, or pulls roots.
2. Do not cut main lateral roots or taproots; cut only smaller roots that interfere with installation of
utilities.
3. Cut and protect roots according to requirements in Division 2 Section "Tree Protection and
Trimming."
3.06 SUBGRADE INSPECTION
A. Proof-roll subgrade below the building slabs, walks and pavements with a pneumatic-tired dump truck to
identify soft pockets and areas of excess yielding. Do not proof-roll wet or saturated subgrades.
B. Reconstruct subgrades damaged by freezing temperatures, frost, rain, accumulated water, or construction
activities, as directed by Architect, without additional compensation.
3.07 UNAUTHORIZED EXCAVATION
A. Fill unauthorized excavation under foundations or wall footings by extending bottom elevation of concrete
foundation or footing to excavation bottom, without altering top elevation. Lean concrete fill, with 28-day
compressive strength of 17.2 MPa, may be used when approved by Architect.
1. Fill unauthorized excavations under other construction, pipe, or conduit as directed by Architect.
EHAF – CO – 01/03 -4 - Section 02300

3.08 STORAGE OF SOIL MATERIALS
A. Stockpile borrow soil materials and excavated satisfactory soil materials without intermixing. Place,
grade, and shape stockpiles to drain surface water. Cover to prevent windblown dust.
1. Stockpile soil materials away from edge of excavations. Do not store within drip line of remaining
trees.
3.09 UTILITY TRENCH BACKFILL
A. Place backfill on subgrades free of mud, frost, snow, or ice.

B. Place and compact bedding course on trench bottoms and where indicated. Shape bedding course to
provide continuous support for bells, joints, and barrels of pipes and for joints, fittings, and bodies of
conduits.
C. Trenches under Footings: Backfill trenches excavated under footings and within 450 mm of bottom of
footings with satisfactory soil; fill with concrete to elevation of bottom of footings.
D. Trenches under Roadways: Provide 100-mm thick, concrete-base slab support for piping or conduit less
than 750 mm below surface of roadways. After installing and testing, completely encase piping or conduit
in a minimum of 100 mm of concrete before backfilling or placing roadway subbase course.
E. Place and compact initial backfill of subbase material , free of particles larger than 25 mm in any
dimension, to a height of 300 mm over the pipe or conduit.
1. Carefully compact initial backfill under pipe haunches and compact evenly up on both sides and
along the full length of piping or conduit to avoid damage or displacement of piping or conduit.
Coordinate backfilling with utilities testing.
F. Place and compact final backfill of satisfactory soil to final subgrade elevation.
G. Install warning tape directly above utilities, 300 mm below finished grade, except 150 mm below subgrade
under pavements and slabs.
3.10 SOIL FILL
A. Plow, scarify, bench, or break up sloped surfaces steeper than 1 vertical to 4 horizontal so fill material will
bond with existing material.
B. Place and compact fill material in layers to required elevations as follows:
1. Under grass and planted areas, use satisfactory soil material.
2. Under walks and pavements, use satisfactory soil material.
3. Under steps and ramps, use engineered fill.
4. Under building slabs, use engineered fill.
5. Under footings and foundations, use engineered fill.
EHAF – CO – 01/03 -5 - Section 02300

3.11 SOIL MOISTURE CONTROL
A. Uniformly moisten or aerate subgrade and each subsequent fill or backfill soil layer before compaction to
within 2 percent of optimum moisture content.
1. Do not place backfill or fill soil material on surfaces that are muddy, frozen, or contain frost or ice.
2. Remove and replace, or scarify and air dry, otherwise satisfactory soil material that exceeds
optimum moisture content by 2 percent and is too wet to compact to specified dry unit weight.
3.12 COMPACTION OF SOIL BACKFILLS AND FILLS
A. Place backfill and fill soil materials in layers not more than 200 mm in loose depth for material compacted
by heavy compaction equipment, and not more than 100 mm in loose depth for material compacted by
hand-operated tampers.
B. Place backfill and fill soil materials evenly on all sides of structures to required elevations, and uniformly
along the full length of each structure.
C. Compact soil materials to not less than the following percentages of maximum dry unit weight according to
ASTM D 698.
1. Under structures, building slabs, steps, and pavements, scarify and recompact top 300 mm of
existing subgrade and each layer of backfill or fill soil material at 95 percent.
2. Under walkways, scarify and recompact top 150 mm below subgrade and compact each layer of
backfill or fill soil material at 92percent.
3. Under turf or unpaved areas, scarify and recompact top150 mm below subgrade and compact
each layer of backfill or fill soil material at 85 percent.
4. For utility trenches, compact each layer of initial and final backfill soil material at 85 percent.
3.13 GRADING
A. General: Uniformly grade areas to a smooth surface, free of irregular surface changes. Comply with
compaction requirements and grade to cross sections, lines, and elevations indicated.
B. Site Rough Grading: Slope grades to direct water away from buildings and to prevent ponding. Finish
subgrades to required elevations within the following tolerances:
1. Turf or Unpaved Areas: Plus or minus 25mm.
2. Walks: Plus or minus 25 mm.
3. Pavements: Plus or minus 13 mm.
C. Grading inside Building Lines: Finish subgrade to a tolerance of 13 mm when tested with a 3-m
straightedge.
3.14 SUBBASE AND BASE COURSES UNDER PAVEMENTS AND WALKS
A. Place subbase course and base course on subgrades free of mud, frost, snow, or ice.
B. On prepared subgrade, place subbase course and base course under pavements and walks as follows:
EHAF – CO – 01/03 -6 - Section 02300

1. Shape subbase course and base course to required crown elevations and cross-slope grades.
2. Place subbase course and base course that exceeds 150 mm in compacted thickness in layers of
equal thickness, with no compacted layer more than 150 mm thick or less than 75 mm thick.
3. Compact subbase course and base course at optimum moisture content to required grades, lines,
cross sections, and thickness to not less than 95 percent of maximum dry unit weight according to
ASTM D 698.
3.15 DRAINAGE COURSE UNDER CONCRETE SLABS-ON-GRADE
A. Place drainage course on subgrades free of mud, frost, snow, or ice.

B. On prepared subgrade, place and compact drainage course under cast-in-place concrete slabs-on-grade
as follows:
1. Place drainage course that exceeds 150 mm in compacted thickness in layers of equal thickness,
with no compacted layer more than 150 mm thick or less than 75 mm thick.
2. Compact each layer of drainage course to required cross sections and thicknesses to not less than
95 percent of maximum dry unit weight according to ASTM D 698.
3.16 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified geotechnical engineering testing agency to perform tests
and inspections.
B. Allow testing agency to inspect and test subgrades and each fill or backfill layer. Proceed with subsequent
earth moving only after test results for previously completed work comply with requirements.
C. Footing Subgrade: At footing subgrades, at least one test of each soil stratum will be performed to verify
design bearing capacities. Subsequent verification and approval of other footing subgrades may be based
on a visual comparison of subgrade with tested subgrade when approved by Architect.
D. When testing agency reports that subgrades, fills, or backfills have not achieved degree of compaction
specified, scarify and moisten or aerate, or remove and replace soil materials to depth required;
recompact and retest until specified compaction is obtained.
3.17 PROTECTION
A. Protecting Graded Areas: Protect newly graded areas from traffic, freezing, and erosion. Keep free of
trash and debris.
B. Repair and reestablish grades to specified tolerances where completed or partially completed surfaces
become eroded, rutted, settled, or where they lose compaction due to subsequent construction operations
or weather conditions.
C. Where settling occurs before Project correction period elapses, remove finished surfacing, backfill with
additional soil material, compact, and reconstruct surfacing.
1. Restore appearance, quality, and condition of finished surfacing to match adjacent work, and
eliminate evidence of restoration to greatest extent possible.
EHAF – CO – 01/03 -7 - Section 02300

3.18 DISPOSAL OF SURPLUS AND WASTE MATERIALS
A. Remove surplus satisfactory soil and waste materials, including unsatisfactory soil, trash, and debris, and
legally dispose of them off Owner's property.
END OF SECTION
EHAF – CO – 01/03 -8 - Section 02300

SECTION 02511
HOT- MIX ASPHALT PAVING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.02 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:

1. Hot-mix asphalt paving.
2. Hot-mix asphalt patching.
3. Hot-mix asphalt overlays.
4. Asphalt surface treatments:
a.Fog seals.
b.Slurries.
5. Pavement-marking paint.
6. Hot-mix asphalt curbs.
7. Wheel stops.
B. Related Sections include the following:

List below only products and construction for this project that the reader might expect to find in this section
but are specified elsewhere. Verify that the section titles listed below are correct for this project's
specifications.
1. Division 2 Section "Earthwork" for aggregate subbase and base courses and aggregate pavement
shoulders.
2. Division 7 Section "Paving Joint Sealants" for joint sealants and fillers at paving terminations.
1.03 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Provide hot-mix asphalt pavement according to the materials, workmanship, and other
applicable requirements of the standard specifications of the state or of authorities having
jurisdiction.
1. Standard Specification: As indicated.
2. Measurement and payment provisions and safety program submittals included in standard
specifications do not apply to this Section.
EHAF – CO – 01/03 -1 - Hot- Mix Asphalt Paving

June 2012 - Rev.(00) Section 02511
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each product specified. Include technical data and tested physical and
performance properties.
B. Job-Mix Designs: Certification, by authorities having jurisdiction, of approval of each job mix
proposed for the Work.
C. Job-Mix Designs: For each job mix proposed for the Work.
D. Shop Drawings: Indicate pavement markings, lane separations, and defined parking spaces.
Indicate dedicated handicapped spaces with international graphics symbol.
E. Samples: 12 by 12 inches (300 by 300 mm) minimum, of paving fabric.
F. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in the "Quality Assurance" Article to
demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project
names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and other information
specified.
G. Material Test Reports: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance of materials with
requirements indicated.
H. Material Certificates: Certificates signed by manufacturers certifying that each material complies
with requirements.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced installer who has completed hot-mix asphalt
paving similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and with a record
of successful in-service performance.
B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Engage a firm experienced in manufacturing hot-mix asphalt
similar to that indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance.
1. Firm shall be a registered and approved paving mix manufacturer with authorities having jurisdiction
or with the DOT of the state in which Project is located.
C. Testing Agency Qualifications: Demonstrate to Architect's satisfaction, based on Architect's
evaluation of criteria conforming to ASTM D 3666, that the independent testing agency has the
experience and capability to satisfactorily conduct the testing indicated without delaying the
Work.
D. Regulatory Requirements: Conform to applicable standards of authorities having jurisdiction for
asphalt paving work on public property.
E. Asphalt-Paving Publication: Comply with AI's "The Asphalt Handbook," except where more
stringent requirements are indicated.
F. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements of
Division 1 Section "Project Meetings" Review methods and procedures related to asphalt
paving including, but not limited to, the following:
1. Review proposed sources of paving materials, including capabilities and location of plant that will
manufacture hot-mix asphalt.
2. Review condition of substrate and preparatory work performed by other trades.
3. Review requirements for protecting paving work, including restriction of traffic during installation
period and for remainder of construction period.
4. Review and finalize construction schedule for paving and related work. Verify availability of
materials, paving Installer's personnel, and equipment required to execute the Work without delays.

5. Review inspection and testing requirements, governing regulations, and proposed installation
procedures.
6. Review forecasted weather conditions and procedures for coping with unfavorable conditions.
1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver pavement-marking materials to Project site in original packages with seals unbroken and
bearing manufacturer's labels containing brand name and type of material, date of manufacture,
and directions for storage.
B. Store pavement-marking materials in a clean, dry, protected location and within temperature
range required by manufacturer. Protect stored materials from direct sunlight.
1.07 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not apply asphalt materials if substrate is wet or excessively

damp or if the following conditions are not met:
1. Prime and Tack Coats: Minimum surface temperature of 60 deg F (15.5 deg C).
2. Slurry Coat: Comply with weather limitations of ASTM D 3910.
3. Asphalt Base Course: Minimum surface temperature of 40 deg F (4 deg C) and rising at time of
placement.
4. Asphalt Surface Course: Minimum surface temperature of 60 deg F (15.5 deg C) at time of
placement.
B. Pavement-Marking Paint: Proceed with pavement marking only on clean, dry surfaces and at a
minimum ambient or surface temperature of 40 deg F (4 deg C) for oil-based materials,
50 deg F (10 deg C) for water-based materials, and not exceeding 95 deg F (35 deg C).
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 AGGREGATES
A. General: Use materials and gradations that have performed satisfactorily in previous
installations.
B. Coarse Aggregate: Sound; angular crushed stone; crushed gravel; or properly cured, crushed
blast-furnace slag; complying with ASTM D 692.
C. Fine Aggregate: Sharp-edged natural sand or sand prepared from stone; gravel, properly cured
blast-furnace slag, or combinations thereof; complying with ASTM D 1073.
1. For hot-mix asphalt, limit natural sand to a maximum of 20 percent by weight of the total aggregate
mass.
D. Mineral Filler: Rock or slag dust, hydraulic cement, or other inert material complying with
ASTM D 242.
2.02 ASPHALT MATERIALS
A. Asphalt Cement: ASTM D 3381 for viscosity-graded material; ASTM D 946 for penetration-
graded material.
B. Asphalt Cement: ASTM D 3381 for viscosity-graded material.
C. Undersealing Asphalt: ASTM D 3141, pumping consistency.

D. Prime Coat: ASTM D 2027; medium-curing cutback asphalt; MC-30, MC-70, or MC-250.
E. Prime Coat: Asphalt emulsion prime conforming to state DOT requirements.
F. Prime Coat: ASTM D 977, emulsified asphalt or ASTM D 2397, cationic emulsified asphalt, slow
setting, factory diluted in water, of suitable grade and consistency for application.
G. Tack Coat: ASTM D 977, emulsified asphalt or ASTM D 2397, cationic emulsified asphalt, slow
H. Fog Seal: ASTM D 977, emulsified asphalt or ASTM D 2397, cationic emulsified asphalt, slow
I. Water: Potable.
2.03 AUXILIARY MATERIALS
A. Herbicide: Commercial chemical for weed control, registered by Environmental Protection

Agency (EPA). Provide granular, liquid, or wettable powder form.
B. Sand: ASTM D 1073, Grade Nos. 2 or 3.
C. Paving Geotextile: No woven polypropylene, specifically designed for paving applications,
resistant to chemical attack, rot, and mildew.
D. Pavement-Marking Paint: Alkyd-resin type, ready-mixed, complying with FS TT-P-115, Type I,
or AASHTO M-248, Type N.
E. Pavement-Marking Paint: Latex, water-base emulsion, ready-mixed, complying with FS TT-P-
1952.
1. Color: As indicated.
2. Color: White.
3. Color: Yellow.
F. Glass Beads: AASHTO M-247.
G. Wheel Stops: Precast, air-entrained concrete, 2500-psi (17.2-MPa) minimum compressive
strength, approximately 6 inches (150 mm) high, 9 inches (225 mm) wide, and 84 inches (2130
mm) long. Provide chamfered corners and drainage slots on underside, and provide holes for
anchoring to substrate.
1. Dowels: Galvanized steel, diameter 3/4 inch (19 mm), minimum length 10 inches (254 mm).
2.04 MIXES
A. Hot-Mix Asphalt: Provide dense, hot-laid, hot-mix asphalt plant mixes approved by authorities
having jurisdiction; designed according to procedures in AI's "Mix Design Methods for Asphalt
Concrete and Other Hot-Mix Types"; and complying with the following requirements:
1. Provide mixes with a history of satisfactory performance in geographical area where Project is
located.
2. Base Course: As indicated.
3. Surface Course: As indicated.
B. Hot-Mix Asphalt: Provide dense, hot-laid, hot-mix asphalt plant mixes approved by authorities
having jurisdiction and designed according to procedures in AI's "Mix Design Methods for
Asphalt Concrete and Other Hot-Mix Types."
1. Provide mixes with a history of satisfactory performance in geographical area where Project is
located.

2. Provide mixes complying with the composition, grading, and tolerance requirements of
ASTM D 3515 for the following nominal, maximum aggregate sizes:
a. Base Course: 1 inch (25 mm).
b. Surface Course: 1/2 inch (13 mm).
C. Emulsified-Asphalt Slurry: ASTM D 3910, consisting of emulsified asphalt, fine aggregates, and
mineral fillers and as follows:
1. Composition: Type 1.
D. medium duty asphalt paving (use for passenger car parking areas)
1 one 250mm layer of 50mm diameter crusher run limestone compacted to 98% s.p.D. and 1
150mm layer of 19mm diameter crusher run limestone compacted to 98% s.p.D.
Medium duty (passenger car area) asphalt paving. Ordinary

asphalting course:
Contents :
4 cm thickness finishes asphalting layer laid on 5 cm thickness basic asphalting
course on 15cm compacted gravel layer on compacted soil.
E. To be placed at parking areas all over project site as shown on design and working drawings by
the following :
50mm compacted of hl8 asphalt and 40mm compacted hl3 asphalt.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that sub grade is dry and in suitable condition to support paving and imposed loads.
B. Proof-roll sub base using heavy, pneumatic-tired rollers to locate areas that are unstable or that
require further compaction.
C. Notify Architect in writing of any unsatisfactory conditions. Do not begin paving installation until
these conditions have been satisfactorily corrected.
3.02 COLD MILLING
A. Clean existing paving surface of loose and deleterious material immediately before cold milling.
Remove existing asphalt pavement, including hot-mix asphalt and, as necessary, unbound-
aggregate base course, by cold milling to grades and cross sections indicated.
1. Repair or replace curbs, manholes, and other construction damaged during cold milling.
3.03 PATCHING AND REPAIRS
A. Patching: Saw cut perimeter of patch and excavate existing pavement section to sound base.
Recompact new subgrade. Excavate rectangular or trapezoidal patches, extending 12 inches
(300 mm) into adjacent sound pavement, unless otherwise indicated. Cut excavation faces
vertically.
1. Tack coat faces of excavation and allow to cure before paving.

2. Fill excavation with dense-graded, hot-mix asphalt base mix and, while still hot, compact flush with
adjacent surface.
3. Partially fill excavation with dense-graded, hot-mix asphalt base mix and compact while still hot.
Cover asphalt base course with compacted, hot-mix surface layer finished flush with adjacent
surfaces.
B. Portland Cement Concrete Pavement: Break cracked slabs and roll as required to reseat
concrete pieces firmly.
1. Pump hot undersealing asphalt under rocking slabs until slab is stabilized or, if necessary, crack
slab into pieces and roll to reseat pieces firmly.
2. Remove disintegrated or badly broken pavement. Prepare and patch with hot-mix asphalt.
C. Leveling Course: Install and compact leveling course consisting of dense-graded, hot-mix
asphalt surface course to level sags and fill depressions deeper than 1 inch (25 mm) in existing
pavements.
1. Install leveling wedges in compacted lifts not exceeding 3 inches (75 mm) thick.
D. Crack and Joint Filling: Remove existing filler material from cracks or joints to a depth of 1/4
inch (6 mm). Refill with asphalt joint-filling material to restore watertight condition. Remove
excess filler that has accumulated near cracks or joints.
E. Tack Coat: Apply uniformly to existing surfaces of previously constructed asphalt or portland
cement concrete paving and to surfaces abutting or projecting into new, hot-mix asphalt
pavement. Apply at a uniform rate of 0.05 to 0.15 gal./sq. yd. (0.2 to 0.7 L/sq. m) of surface.
1. Allow tack coat to cure undisturbed before paving.
2. Avoid smearing or staining adjoining surfaces, appurtenances, and surroundings. Remove
spillages and clean affected surfaces.
3.04 SURFACE PREPARATION
A. General: Immediately before placing asphalt materials, remove loose and deleterious material
from substrate surfaces. Ensure that prepared sub grade is ready to receive paving.
1. Sweep loose granular particles from surface of unbound-aggregate base course. Do not dislodge
or disturb aggregate embedded in compacted surface of base course.
B. Herbicide Treatment: Apply herbicide according to manufacturer's recommended rates and
written application instructions. Apply to dry, prepared sub grade or surface of compacted-
aggregate base before applying paving materials.
1. Mix herbicide with prime coat when formulated by manufacturer for that purpose.
C. Prime Coat: Apply uniformly over surface of compacted-aggregate base at a rate of 0.15 to 0.50
gal./sq. yd. (0.7 to 2.3 L/sq. m). Apply enough material to penetrate and seal, but not flood,
surface. Allow prime coat to cure for 72 hours minimum.
1. If prime coat is not entirely absorbed within 24 hours after application, spread sand over surface to
blot excess asphalt. Use just enough sand to prevent pickup under traffic. Remove loose sand by
sweeping before pavement is placed and after volatiles have evaporated.
2. Protect primed substrate from damage until ready to receive paving.

3.05 GEOTEXTILE INSTALLATION
A. Apply bond coat, consisting of asphalt cement, uniformly to existing surfaces at a rate of 0.20 to
0.30 gal./sq. yd. (0.8 to 1.2 L/sq. m).
B. Place paving geotextile promptly according to manufacturer's written instructions. Broom or roll
geotextile smooth and free of wrinkles and folds. Overlap longitudinal joints 4 inches (100 mm)
and transverse joints 6 inches (150 mm).
1. Protect paving geotextile from traffic and other damage and place overlay paving the same day.
3.06 HOT-MIX ASPHALT PLACING
A. Machine place hot-mix asphalt mix on prepared surface, spread uniformly, and strike off.
Place asphalt mix by hand to areas inaccessible to equipment in a manner that prevents
segregation of mix. Place each course to required grade, cross section, and thickness, when
compacted.
1. Place hot-mix asphalt base course in number of lifts and thicknesses indicated.
2. Place hot-mix asphalt surface course in single lift.
3. Spread mix at minimum temperature of 250 deg F (121 deg C).
4. Begin applying mix along centerline of crown for crowned sections and on high side of one-way
slopes, unless otherwise indicated.
5. Regulate paver machine speed to obtain smooth, continuous surface free of pulls and tears in
asphalt-paving mat.
B. Place paving in consecutive strips not less than 10 feet (3 m) wide, except where infill edge
strips of a lesser width are required.
1. After first strip has been placed and rolled, place succeeding strips and extend rolling to overlap
previous strips. Complete asphalt base course for a section before placing asphalt surface course.
C. Promptly correct surface irregularities in paving course behind paver. Use suitable hand tools to
remove excess material forming high spots. Fill depressions with hot-mix asphalt to prevent
segregation of mix; use suitable hand tools to smooth surface.
3.07 JOINTS
A. Construct joints to ensure continuous bond between adjoining paving sections. Construct joints
free of depressions with same texture and smoothness as other sections of hot-mix asphalt
course.
1. Clean contact surfaces and apply tack coat.
2. Offset longitudinal joints in successive courses a minimum of 6 inches (150 mm).
3. Offset transverse joints in successive courses a minimum of 24 inches (600 mm).
4. Construct transverse joints by bulkhead method or sawed vertical face method as described in AI's
"The Asphalt Handbook."
5. Compact joints as soon as hot-mix asphalt will bear roller weight without excessive displacement.
6. Compact asphalt at joints to a density within 2 percent of specified course density.

3.08 COMPACTION
A. General: Begin compaction as soon as placed hot-mix paving will bear roller weight without
excessive displacement. Compact hot-mix paving with hot, hand tampers or vibratory-plate
compactors in areas inaccessible to rollers.
1. Complete compaction before mix temperature cools to 185 deg F (85 deg C).
B. Breakdown Rolling: Accomplish breakdown or initial rolling immediately after rolling joints and
outside edge. Examine surface immediately after breakdown rolling for indicated crown, grade,
and smoothness. Repair surfaces by loosening displaced material, filling with hot-mix asphalt,
and rerolling to required elevations.
C. Intermediate Rolling: Begin intermediate rolling immediately after breakdown rolling, while hot-
mix asphalt is still hot enough to achieve specified density. Continue rolling until hot-mix
asphalt course has been uniformly compacted to the following density:
1. Average Density: 96 percent of reference laboratory density according to ASTM D 1559, but not
less than 94 percent nor greater than 100 percent.
2. Average Density: 92 percent of reference maximum theoretical density according to ASTM D 2041,
but not less than 90 percent nor greater than 96 percent.
D. Finish Rolling: Finish roll paved surfaces to remove roller marks while hot-mix asphalt is still warm.
E. Edge Shaping: While surface is being compacted and finished, trim edges of pavement to
proper alignment. Bevel edges while still hot, with back of rake or smooth iron. Compact
thoroughly using tamper or other satisfactory method.
F. Repairs: Remove paved areas that are defective or contaminated with foreign materials.
Remove paving course over area affected and replace with fresh, hot-mix asphalt. Compact by
rolling to specified density and surface smoothness.
G. Protection: After final rolling, do not permit vehicular traffic on pavement until it has cooled and
hardened.
H. Erect barricades to protect paving from traffic until mixture has cooled enough not to become
marked.
3.09 INSTALLATION TOLERANCES
A. Thickness: Compact each course to produce the thickness indicated within the following
tolerances:
1. Base Course: Plus or minus 1/2 inch (13 mm).
2. Surface Course: Plus 1/4 inch (6 mm), no minus.
B. Surface Smoothness: Compact each course to produce a surface smoothness within the
following tolerances as determined by using a 10-foot (3-m) straightedge applied transversely or
longitudinally to paved areas:
1. Base Course: 1/4 inch (6 mm).
2. Surface Course: 1/8 inch (3 mm).
3. Crowned Surfaces: Test with crowned template centered and at right angle to crown. Maximum
allowable variance from template is 1/4 inch (6 mm).

3.10 ASPHALT CURBS
A. Construct hot-mix asphalt curbs over compacted pavement surfaces. Apply a light tack coat,
unless pavement surface is still tacky and free from dust. Spread mix at minimum temperature
of 250 deg F (121 deg C).
1. Asphalt Mix: Same as pavement surface-course mix.
B. Place hot-mix asphalt to curb cross section indicated or, if not indicated, to local standard
shapes, by machine or by hand in wood or metal forms. Tamp hand-placed materials and
screed to smooth finish. Remove forms after hot-mix asphalt has cooled.
3.11 SURFACE TREATMENTS
A. Fog Seals: Apply fog seal at a rate of 0.10 to 0.15 gal./sq. yd. (0.45 to 0.70 L/sq. m) to existing
asphalt pavement and allow to cure. Lightly dust areas receiving excess fog seal with a fine
sand.
B. Slurry Seals: Apply slurry coat in a uniform thickness according to ASTM D 3910 and allow to
cure.
1. Roll slurry seal to smooth ridges and provide a uniform, smooth surface.
3.12 PAVEMENT MARKING
A. Do not apply pavement-marking paint until layout, colors, and placement have been verified with
Architect.
B. Allow paving to cure for 30 days before starting pavement marking.
C. Sweep and clean surface to eliminate loose material and dust.
D. Apply paint with mechanical equipment to produce pavement markings of dimensions indicated
with uniform, straight edges. Apply at manufacturer's recommended rates to provide a
minimum wet film thickness of 15 mils (0.4 mm).
1. Broadcast glass spheres uniformly into wet pavement markings at a rate of 6 lb/gal. (0.72 kg/L).
3.13 WHEEL STOPS
A. Securely attach wheel stops into pavement with not less than 2 galvanized steel dowels
embedded in precast concrete at one-third points. Firmly bond each dowel to wheel stop and to
pavement.
1. Extend upper portion of dowel 5 inches (125 mm) into wheel stop and lower portion a minimum of 5
inches (125 mm) into pavement.
A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing agency to perform field
inspections and tests and to prepare test reports.

1. Testing agency will conduct and interpret tests and state in each report whether tested Work
complies with or deviates from specified requirements.
B. Additional testing, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of
corrected Work with specified requirements.
C. Thickness: In-place compacted thickness of hot-mix asphalt courses will be determined
according to ASTM D 3549.
D. Surface Smoothness: Finished surface of each hot-mix asphalt course will be tested for
compliance with smoothness tolerances.
E. In-Place Density: Samples of uncompacted paving mixtures and compacted pavement will be
secured by testing agency according to ASTM D 979.
1. Reference laboratory density will be determined by averaging results from 4 samples of hot-mix
asphalt-paving mixture delivered daily to site, prepared according to ASTM D 1559, and compacted
according to job-mix specifications.
2. Reference maximum theoretical density will be determined by averaging results from 4 samples of
hot-mix asphalt-paving mixture delivered daily to site, prepared according to ASTM D 2041, and
compacted according to job-mix specifications.
3. In-place density of compacted pavement will be determined by testing core samples according to
ASTM D 1188 or ASTM D 2726.
a. One core sample will be taken for every 1000 sq. yd. (836 sq. m) or less of
installed pavement, but in no case will fewer than 3 cores be taken.
b. Field density of in-place compacted pavement may also be determined by
nuclear method according to ASTM D 2950 and correlated with ASTM D 1188
or ASTM D 2726.
F. Remove and replace or install additional hot-mix asphalt where test results or measurements
indicate that it does not comply with specified requirements.
END OF SECTION

Technical Specifications
SECTION 02780
UNIT PAVERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions
and
B. Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.02 SUMMARY
1. Brick pavers setting beds.

2. Concrete pavers set in setting beds.
3. Asphalt-block pavers set in bituminous setting beds.
4. Rough-stone pavers set in setting beds.
5. Plastic edge restraints.
6. Cast-in-place concrete edge restraints.
7. Precast concrete curbs.
8. Stone curbs.
9. stone paving.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For materials other than water and aggregates.
B. Product Data: For the following:
1. Pavers.
2. Bituminous setting materials.
3. Mortar and grout materials.
4. Edge restraints.
6. Stone curbs.
C. Sieve Analyses: For aggregate setting-bed materials, according to ASTM C 136.
D. Samples for Initial Selection: For the following:
1. Each type of unit paver indicated.

2. Joint materials involving color selection.
3. Exposed edge restraints involving color selection.
5. Granite for stone curbs.
EHAF – CO – 01/03 -1 - Section 02780

May 2012 - Rev.(0) Unit Pavers
E. Samples for Verification:
1. Full-size units of each type of unit paver indicated. Assemble not less than five Samples of
each type of unit on suitable backing and grout joints.
2. Joint materials.
3. Exposed edge restraints.
5. Stone curbs.
F. Compatibility and Adhesion Test Reports: From latex-additive manufacturer for mortar and grout
containing latex additives.
A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of unit paver, joint material, and setting material from one
source with resources to provide materials and products of consistent quality in appearance and
physical properties.
B. Preconstruction Compatibility and Adhesion Testing: Submit to latex-additive manufacturer, for testing
indicated below, samples of paving materials that will contact or affect mortar and grout that contain
latex additives.
1. Use manufacturer's standard test methods to determine whether mortar and grout materials will
obtain optimum adhesion with, and will be nonstaining to, installed pavers and other materials
constituting paver installation.
C. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate
aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution.
1. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of
Substantial Completion.
D. Pre installation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in
Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination."
A. Store pavers on elevated platforms in a dry location. If units are not stored in an enclosed location,
cover tops and sides of stacks with waterproof sheeting, securely tied.
B. Store cementitious materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location. Do not use
cementitious materials that have become damp.
C. Store aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained and
contamination avoided.
D. Store liquids in tightly closed containers protected from freezing.
E. Store asphalt cement and other bituminous materials in tightly closed containers.
EHAF – CO – 01/03 -2 - Section 02780

A. Cold-Weather Protection: Do not use frozen materials or materials mixed or coated with ice or frost.
Do not build on frozen subgrade or setting beds. Remove and replace unit paver work damaged by
frost or freezing.
B. Weather Limitations for Bituminous Setting Bed:
1. Install bituminous setting bed only when ambient temperature is above 4 deg C and when base is
dry.
2. Apply asphalt adhesive only when ambient temperature is above 10 deg C and when
temperature has not been below 2 deg C for 12 hours immediately before application. Do not
apply when setting bed is wet or contains excess moisture.
C. Weather Limitations for Mortar and Grout:
1. Cold-Weather Requirements: Protect unit paver work against freezing when ambient temperature
is 4 deg C and falling. Heat materials to provide mortar and grout temperatures between 4 and 49
deg C. Provide the following protection for completed portions of work for 24 hours after installation
when the mean daily air temperature is as indicated: below 4 deg C, cover with weather-resistant
membrane; below minus 4 deg C, cover with insulating blankets; below minus 7 deg C, provide
enclosure and temporary heat to maintain temperature above 0 deg C.
2. Hot-Weather Requirements: Protect unit paver work when temperature and humidity conditions
produce excessive evaporation of setting beds and grout. Provide artificial shade and windbreaks
and use cooled materials as required. Do not apply mortar to substrates with temperatures of 38
deg C and higher.
a. When ambient temperature exceeds 38 deg C, or when wind velocity exceeds 13 km/h and
ambient temperature exceeds 32 deg C, set pavers within 1 minute of spreading setting-bed
mortar.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 BRICK PAVERS
A. Brick Pavers: Light-traffic paving brick; ASTM C 902. Provide brick without frogs or cores in surfaces
exposed to view in the completed Work.
1. Thickness: 30 mm-50 mm as indicated on drawings.
2. Face Size: As indicated on drawings.
3. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
B. Brick Pavers: Heavy vehicular paving brick; ASTM C 1272. Provide brick without frogs or cores in
surfaces exposed to view in the completed Work.
1. Basis-of-Design Product: The design for brick pavers is based on manufacturer's product and to
compliance with requirements.
a. Thickness: As indicated on drawings.

b. Face Size: As indicated on drawings.
c. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
C. Efflorescence: Brick shall be rated "not effloresced" when tested according to ASTM C 67.
EHAF – CO – 01/03 -3 - Section 02780

D. Temporary Protective Coating: Precoat exposed surfaces of brick pavers with a continuous film of a
temporary protective coating that is compatible with brick, mortar, and grout products and can be
removed without damaging grout or brick. Do not coat unexposed brick surfaces.
2.02 CONCRETE PAVERS
A. Concrete Pavers: Solid interlocking paving units complying with ASTM C 936 and resistant to freezing
and thawing when tested according to ASTM C 67, made from normal-weight aggregates.
1.Thickness: As indicated on drawings.
2.Face Size and Shape: As indicated on drawings.
3.Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
B. Concrete Pavers: Solid paving units, made from normal-weight concrete with a compressive strength
not less than 34 MPa, water absorption not more than 5 percent according to ASTM C 140, and no
breakage and not more than 1 percent mass loss when tested for freeze-thaw resistance according to
ASTM C 67.
1. Thickness: As indicated on drawings.
2. Face Size and Shape: As indicated on drawings.
C. ASPHALT-BLOCK PAVERS
Asphalt-Block Pavers: Solid units made from asphalt cement complying with ASTM D 312; inorganic stone
dust or cement filler; and coarse aggregate, consisting of clean, hard, unweathered stone crushed into
angular particles varying in size up to 9.5 mm.
2. Face Size and Shape: As indicated on drawings.
D. ROUGH - STONE PAVERS
A. Rough-Stone Pavers: Rectangular / tumbled paving stones, with split faces and edges, made from
granite complying with ASTM C 615.
1. Granite Color and Grain: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
3. Face Size: As indicated on drawings.
2.03 ACCESSORIES
A. Plastic Edge Restraints: Based on manufacturer's product and to compliance with requirements.
B. Steel Edge Restraints: Painted steel edging as indicated on drawings.
1. Color: as indicated on drawings.
C. Aluminum Edge Restraints: as indicated on drawings.
EHAF – CO – 01/03 -4 - Section 02780

D. Job-Built Concrete Edge Restraints: Comply with requirements in Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place
Concrete" for normal-weight, air-entrained, ready-mixed concrete with minimum 28-day compressive
strength of 20 MPa.
E. Precast Concrete Curbs: Made from normal-weight concrete with a compressive strength not less
than 34 MPa - 41 MPa and water absorption not more than 5 percent, in shapes and sizes indicated.
1.Color and Texture: as indicated on drawings.
F. Stone Curbs: Granite curbing, with face battered produced in random lengths not less than 900 mm
from granite complying with ASTM C 615 .
a. Varieties and Sources: Subject to compliance with requirements.

1. Granite Color and Grain: as indicated on drawings.
2. Top Width: as indicated on drawings.
3. Face Height: as indicated on drawings.
4. Total Height: as indicated on drawings.
5. Top Finish: as indicated on drawings.
6. Face Finish: as indicated on drawings.
G. Cork Joint Filler: Preformed strips complying with ASTM D 1752.
H. Compressible Foam Filler: Preformed strips complying with ASTM D 1056.
2.04 AGGREGATE SETTING-BED MATERIALS

A. Graded Aggregate for Subbase: Sound, crushed stone or gravel complying with ASTM
B. Graded Aggregate for Base: Sound, crushed stone or gravel complying with ASTM for base material.
C. Sand for Leveling Course: Sound, sharp, washed natural sand or crushed stone complying with
gradation requirements in ASTM C 33 for fine aggregate.
D. Stone Screenings for Leveling Course: Sound stone screenings complying with ASTM D 448 for Size
No. 10.
E. Sand for Joints: Fine, sharp, washed, natural sand or crushed stone with 100 percent passing sieve
and no more than 10 percent passing 0.075-mm sieve.
1. Provide sand of color needed to produce required joint color.
F. Separation Geotextile: Woven geotextile fabric, manufactured for separation applications; made from
polyolefins or polyesters, with elongation less than 50 percent; complying with AASHTO M 288 and the
following, measured per test methods referenced:
1. Survivability: Class 2; AASHTO M 288.

2. Apparent Opening Size: 0.250-mmsieve, maximum; ASTM D 4751.
3. Permittivity: 0.02 per second, minimum; ASTM D 4491.
4. UV Stability: 50 percent after 500 hours' exposure; ASTM D 4355.
G. Drainage Geotextile: Nonwoven needle-punched geotextile, manufactured for subsurface drainage

applications, made from polyolefins or polyesters; with elongation greater than 50 percent; complying
with AASHTO M 288 and the following, measured per test methods referenced:
EHAF – CO – 01/03 -5 - Section 02780

1. Survivability: Class 2; AASHTO M 288.

2. Apparent Opening Size: 0.425-mm sieve, maximum; ASTM D 4751.
3. Permittivity: 0.5 per second, minimum; ASTM D 4491.
4. UV Stability: 50 percent after 500 hours' exposure; ASTM D 4355.
H. Herbicide: Commercial chemical for weed control, registered with the EPA. Provide in granular,
liquid, or wet table powder form.
2.05 BITUMINOUS SETTING-BED MATERIALS

A. Primer for Base: ASTM D 2028, cutback asphalt, grade as recommended by unit paver manufacturer.
B. Fine Aggregate for Setting Bed: ASTM D 1073, No. 2 or No. 3.
C. Asphalt Cement: ASTM D 3381, Viscosity Grade AC-10 or Grade AC-20.
D. Neoprene-Modified Asphalt Adhesive: Paving manufacturer's standard adhesive consisting of oxidized
asphalt combined with 2 percent neoprene and 10 percent long-fibered mineral fibers containing no
asbestos.
E. Sand for Joints: Fine, sharp, washed, natural sand or crushed stone with 100 percent passing No. 16
1.18-mm sieve and no more than 10 percent passing No. 200 (0.075-mm) sieve.
1. Provide sand of color needed to produce required joint color.
2.06 MORTAR SETTING-BED MATERIALS

A. Portland cement: ASTM C 150.
B. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C 207.
C. Sand: ASTM C 144.
D. Latex Additive: As per Manufacturer's standard, water emulsion, serving as replacement for part or all
of gaging water, of type specifically recommended by latex-additive manufacturer for use with field-
mixed Portland cement mortar bed, and not containing a retarder.
E. Water: Potable.
F. Reinforcing Wire: Galvanized, welded, 1.57-mm diameter wire; 51-by-51-mm mesh; comply with
ASTM A 185 and ASTM A 82 except for minimum wire size.
2.07 GROUT MATERIALS
A. Sand-Portland Cement Grout: ANSI A108.10, composed of white or gray cement and white or colored
sand as required to produce required color.
1. Latex Additive: As per manufacturer's standard, water emulsion, serving as replacement for part
or all of gaging water, of type specifically recommended by latex-additive manufacturer for use
with field-mixed sand-portland cement grout.
2. Product Type: Dry mix, containing ethylene vinyl acetate, in dry, redispersible form,
prepackaged with other dry ingredients.
3. Product Type: Two-component mix, containing acrylic resin or styrene-butadiene rubber in
liquid-latex form and prepackaged dry-grout mix complying with ANSI A118.6 and recommended
by latex-additive manufacturer.
4. Product Type: Either dry mix, containing ethylene vinyl acetate, in dry, redispersible form,
prepackaged with other dry ingredients, or two-component mix, containing acrylic resin or
styrene-butadiene rubber in liquid-latex form and prepackaged dry-grout mix complying with
ANSI A118.6 and recommended by latex-additive manufacturer.
B. Grout Colors: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
C. Water: Potable.
EHAF – CO – 01/03 -6 - Section 02780

2.08 BITUMINOUS SETTING-BED MIX
A. Mix bituminous setting-bed materials at an asphalt plant in approximate proportion, by weight, of 7

percent asphalt cement to 93 percent fine aggregate, unless otherwise indicated. Heat mixture to (149
deg C).
2.09 MORTAR AND GROUT MIXES

A. General: Comply with referenced standards and with manufacturers' written instructions for mix
proportions, mixing equipment, mixer speeds, mixing containers, mixing times, and other procedures
needed to produce setting-bed and joint materials of uniform quality and with optimum performance
characteristics. Discard mortars and grout if they have reached their initial set before being used.
B. Mortar-Bed Bond Coat: Mix neat cement or cement and sand with latex additive / water to a creamy
consistency.
C. Portland Cement-Lime Setting-Bed Mortar: Type M complying with ASTM C 270, Proportion
Specification.
D. Latex-Modified, Portland Cement Setting-Bed Mortar: Proportion and mix portland cement, sand, and
latex additive for setting bed to comply with written instructions of latex-additive manufacturer and as
necessary to produce stiff mixture with a moist surface when bed is ready to receive pavers.
E. Latex-Modified, Portland Cement Slurry Bond Coat: Proportion and mix portland cement, sand, and
latex additive for slurry bond coat to comply with written instructions of latex-additive manufacturer.
F. Job-Mixed Portland Cement Grout: Proportion and mix job-mixed portland cement and sand to match
setting-bed mortar, except omit hydrated lime and use enough water to produce a pourable mixture.
G. Job-Mixed, Polymer-Modified Portland Cement Grout: Add liquid-latex additive to portland cement and
sand in proportion and concentration recommended by liquid-latex manufacturer. Proportion cement
and sand to comply with written instructions of latex-additive manufacturer.
1. Pigmented Grout: Select and proportion pigments with other ingredients to produce color
required. Do not exceed pigment-to-cement ratio of 1:10, by weight.
2. Colored-Aggregate Grout: Produce color required by combining colored sand with portland
cement of selected color.
H. Packaged, Polymer-Modified Grout Mix: Proportion and mix grout ingredients according to grout
manufacturer's written instructions.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas indicated to receive paving, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for
installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.
1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
2. Where pavers are to be installed over waterproofing, examine waterproofing installation, with
waterproofing Installer present, for protection from paving operations. Examine areas where
waterproofing system is turned up or flashed against vertical surfaces and horizontal
waterproofing. Proceed with installation only after protection is in place.
EHAF – CO – 01/03 -7 - Section 02780

3.02 PREPARATION
A. Clean concrete substrates to remove dirt, dust, debris, and loose particles.
B. Proof-roll prepared subgrade according to requirements in Division 2 Section "Earthwork" to identify
soft pockets and areas of excess yielding. Proceed with unit paver installation only after deficient
subgrades have been corrected and are ready to receive subbase and base course for unit pavers.
3.03 INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Do not use unit pavers with chips, cracks, voids, discolorations, and other defects that might be visible
in finished work.
B. Mix pavers from several pallets or cubes, as they are placed, to produce uniform blend of colors and
textures.
C. Cut unit pavers with motor-driven masonry saw equipment to provide clean, sharp, unchipped edges.
Cut units to provide pattern indicated and to fit adjoining work neatly. Use full units without cutting
where possible. Hammer cutting is not acceptable.
1. For concrete pavers, a block splitter may be used.
D. Exercise care in handling coated brick pavers to prevent coated surfaces from contacting backs or
edges of other units. Remove coating from bonding surfaces before setting brick.
E. Joint Pattern: [Running bond] [Herringbone] [Basket weave] [As indicated] [Match and continue
existing unit paver joint pattern].
F. Pavers over Waterproofing: Exercise care in placing pavers and setting materials over waterproofing
so protection materials are not displaced and waterproofing is not punctured or otherwise damaged.
Carefully replace protection materials that become displaced and arrange for repair of damaged
waterproofing before covering with paving.
1. Provide joint filler at waterproofing that is turned up on vertical surfaces unless otherwise
indicated; where unfilled joints are indicated, provide temporary filler or protection until
paver installation is complete.
G. Tolerances: Do not exceed 0.8-mm unit-to-unit offset from flush nor 3 mm in 3 m from level, or
indicated slope, for finished surface of paving.
H. Expansion and Control Joints: Provide for sealant-filled joints at locations and of widths indicated.
Provide foam filler as backing for sealant-filled joints[, unless otherwise indicated; where unfilled joints
are indicated, provide temporary filler until paver installation is complete]. Install joint filler before
setting pavers. Sealant materials and installation are specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants."
I. Expansion and Control Joints: Provide joint filler at locations and of widths indicated. Install joint filler
before setting pavers. Make top of joint filler flush with top of pavers.
J. Provide edge restraints as indicated. Install edge restraints before placing unit pavers.
1. Install edge restraints to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Install stakes at
intervals required to hold edge restraints in place during and after unit paver installation.
2. For metal edge restraints with top edge exposed, drive stakes at least 25 mm below top edge.
3. Install job-built concrete edge restraints to comply with requirements in Division 3 Section "Cast-
in-Place Concrete."
4. Where pavers set in mortar bed are indicated as edge restraints for pavers set in aggregate
setting bed, install pavers set in mortar and allow mortar to cure before placing aggregate setting
bed and remainder of pavers. Cut off mortar bed at a steep angle so it will not interfere with
aggregate setting bed.
5. Where pavers embedded in concrete are indicated as edge restraints for pavers set in aggregate
setting bed, install pavers embedded in concrete and allow concrete to cure before placing
aggregate setting bed and remainder of pavers. Hold top of concrete below aggregate setting
bed.
EHAF – CO – 01/03 -8 - Section 02780

K. Provide steps made of pavers as indicated. Install paver steps before installing adjacent pavers.
1. Where pavers set in mortar bed are indicated for steps constructed adjacent to pavers set in
aggregate setting bed, install steps and allow mortar to cure before placing aggregate setting
bed and remainder of pavers. Cut off mortar bed at a steep angle so it will not interfere with
aggregate setting bed.
3.04 AGGREGATE SETTING-BED APPLICATIONS
A. Compact soil subgrade uniformly to at least 95 percent of ASTM laboratory density.
B. Proof-roll prepared subgrade to identify soft pockets and areas of excess yielding. Excavate soft
spots, unsatisfactory soils, and areas of excessive pumping or rutting, as determined by Architect, and
replace with compacted backfill or fill as directed.
C. Place separation geotextile over prepared subgrade, overlapping ends and edges at least 300 mm.
D. Place aggregate subbase and base, compact by tamping with plate vibrator and screed to depth
indicated.
E. Place aggregate subbase and base, compact to 100 percent of ASTM D 1557 maximum laboratory
density, and screed to depth indicated.
F. Place drainage geotextile over compacted base course, overlapping ends and edges at least 300 mm.
G. Place leveling course and screed to a thickness of 25 to 38 mm, taking care that moisture content
remains constant and density is loose and constant until pavers are set and compacted.
H. Treat leveling course with herbicide to inhibit growth of grass and weeds.
I. Set pavers with a minimum joint width of 1.5 mm and a maximum of 3 mm, being careful not to disturb
leveling base. If pavers have spacer bars, place pavers hand tight against spacer bars. Use string
lines to keep straight lines. Fill gaps between units that exceed 10 mm with pieces cut to fit from full-
size unit pavers.
1. When installation is performed with mechanical equipment, use only unit pavers with spacer bars
on sides of each unit.
J. Vibrate pavers into leveling course with a low-amplitude plate vibrator capable of a 16- to 22-kN
compaction force at 80 to 90 Hz. Perform at least three passes across paving with vibrator. Vibrate
under the following conditions:
1. After edge pavers are installed and there is a completed surface or before surface is exposed to
rain.
2. Before ending each day's work, fully compact installed concrete pavers to within 900 mm of the
laying face. Cover pavers that have not been compacted, and leveling course on which pavers
have not been placed, with no staining plastic sheets to protect them from rain.
K. Spread dry sand and fill joints immediately after vibrating pavers into leveling course. Vibrate pavers
and add sand until joints are completely filled, then remove excess sand. Leave a slight surplus of
sand on the surface for joint filling.
L. Do not allow traffic on installed pavers until sand has been vibrated into joints.
M. Repeat joint-filling process 30 days later.
3.04.1 BITUMINOUS SETTING-BED APPLICATIONS

A. Apply primer to concrete slab or binder course immediately before placing setting bed.
EHAF – CO – 01/03 -9 - Section 02780

B. Prepare for setting-bed placement by locating 19-mm deep control bars approximately 3.3 m apart and
parallel to one another, to serve as guides for striking board. Adjust bars to subgrades required for
accurate setting of paving units to finished grades indicated.
C. Place bituminous setting bed where indicated, in panels, by spreading bituminous material between
control bars. Spread mix at a minimum temperature of 121 deg C. Strike setting bed smooth, firm,
even, and not less than 19 mm thick. Add fresh bituminous material to low, porous spots after each
pass of striking board. After each panel is completed, advance first control bar to next position in
readiness for striking adjacent panels. Carefully fill depressions that remain after removing depth-
control bars.
1. Roll setting bed with power roller to a nominal depth of 19 mm. Adjust thickness as necessary
to allow accurate setting of unit pavers to finished grades indicated. Complete rolling before
mix temperature cools to 85 deg C.
D. Apply neoprene-modified asphalt adhesive to cold setting bed by squeegeeing or troweling to a
uniform thickness of 1.6 mm. Proceed with setting of paving units only after adhesive is tacky and
surface is dry to touch.
E. Place pavers carefully by hand in straight courses, maintaining accurate alignment and uniform top
surface. Protect newly laid pavers with plywood panels on which workers can stand. Advance
protective panels as work progresses, but maintain protection in areas subject to continued
movement of materials and equipment to avoid creating depressions or disrupting alignment of
pavers. If additional leveling of paving is required, and before treating joints, roll paving with power
roller after sufficient heat has built up in the surface from several days of hot weather.
F. Joint Treatment: Place unit pavers with hand-tight joints. Fill joints by sweeping sand over paved
surface until joints are filled. Remove excess sand after joints are filled.
3.05 MORTAR SETTING-BED APPLICATIONS

A. Saturate concrete subbase with clean water several hours before placing setting bed. Remove
surface water about one hour before placing setting bed.
B. Apply mortar-bed bond coat over surface of concrete subbase about 15 minutes before placing setting
bed. Limit area of bond coat to avoid its drying out before placing setting bed. Do not exceed 1/16-
inch (1.6-mm) thickness for bond coat.
C. Apply mortar bed over bond coat immediately after applying bond coat. Spread and screed setting
bed to uniform thickness at subgrade elevations required for accurate setting of pavers to finished
grades indicated.
D. Place reinforcing wire over concrete subbase, lapped at joints by at least one full mesh and supported
so mesh becomes embedded in the middle of setting bed. Hold edges back from vertical surfaces
approximately 13 mm.
E. Place mortar bed with reinforcing wire fully embedded in middle of setting bed. Spread and screed
setting bed to uniform thickness at subgrade elevations required for accurate setting of pavers to
finished grades indicated.
F. Mix and place only that amount of mortar bed that can be covered with pavers before initial set. Cut
back, bevel edge, remove, and discard setting-bed material that has reached initial set before placing
pavers.
G. Wet brick pavers before laying if the initial rate of absorption exceeds 30 g/194 sq. cm per minute
when tested per ASTM C 67. Allow units to absorb water so they are damp but not wet at time of
laying.
H. Place pavers before initial set of cement occurs. Immediately before placing pavers on setting bed,
apply uniform 1.5-mm thick, slurry bond coat to bed or to back of each paver with a flat trowel.
EHAF – CO – 01/03 -10 - Section 02780

I. Tamp or beat pavers with a wooden block or rubber mallet to obtain full contact with setting bed and to
bring finished surfaces within indicated tolerances. Set each paver in a single operation before initial
set of mortar; do not return to areas already set or disturb pavers for purposes of realigning finished
surfaces or adjusting joints.
1. Spaced Joint Widths: as indicated on drawings.
J. Grout joints as soon as possible after initial set of setting bed.
1. Force grout into joints, taking care not to smear grout on adjoining surfaces.
2. Clean pavers as grouting progresses by dry brushing or rubbing with dry burlap to remove
smears before tooling joints.
3. Tool exposed joints slightly concave when thumbprint hard, using a jointer larger than joint
thickness, unless otherwise indicated.
4. If tooling squeezes grout from joints, remove excess grout and smears by dry brushing or
rubbing with dry burlap and tool joints again to produce a uniform appearance.
K. Cure grout by maintaining in a damp condition for seven days, unless otherwise recommended by
grout or liquid-latex manufacturer.
3.06 REPAIRING, POINTING, AND CLEANING

A. Remove and replace unit pavers that are loose, chipped, broken, stained, or otherwise damaged or
that do not match adjoining units. Provide new units to match adjoining units and install in same
manner as original units, with same joint treatment and with no evidence of replacement.
B. Pointing: During tooling of joints, enlarge voids or holes and completely fill with grout. Point up joints
at sealant joints to provide a neat, uniform appearance, properly prepared for sealant application.
C. Cleaning: Remove excess grout from exposed paver surfaces; wash and scrub clean.
1. Remove temporary protective coating from brick pavers as recommended by protective
coating manufacturer and as acceptable to unit paver and grout manufacturer. Trap and
remove coating to prevent it from clogging drains.
END OF SECTION
EHAF – CO – 01/03 -11 - Section 02780

SECTION 02820
FENCES AND GATES
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.02 SUMMARY
1. Decorative metallic-coated steel tubular picket fences.

2. Decorative metallic-coated steel security fences.
3. Decorative steel fences.
4. Horizontal-slide gates.
5. Gate operators, including controls.
B. Related Sections:
1. Division 03 Section "[Cast-in-Place Concrete] [Miscellaneous Cast-in-Place Concrete]" for concrete

[bases for gate operators, drives, and controls] [post concrete fill].
2. Division 26 Sections for electrical service and connections for motor operators, controls, limit and
disconnect switches, and safety features and for system disconnect switches.
3. Division 31 Section "Earth Moving" for site excavation, fill, and backfill where decorative metal
fences and gates are located.
1.03 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Lightning-Protection System: Maximum grounding-resistance value of 25 ohms under normal dry

conditions.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: For gates. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.
1. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring.
C. Samples: For each fence material and for each color specified.
EHAF – CO – 01/03 -1 - Section 02820

May 2012 - Rev.(0) Fences and Gates
1. Provide Samples [12 inches (300 mm)] in length for linear materials.
2. Provide Samples [12 inches (300 mm)] square for [wire mesh] [bar grating] [and] [sheet or plate
materials].
D. Welding certificates.
E. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing
agency, for decorative metallic-coated steel tubular picket fences, including finish, indicating compliance
with referenced standard[ and other specified requirements].
F. Maintenance Data: For gate operators to include in maintenance manuals.
A. Installer Qualifications: Fabricator of products.
B. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to [AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural
Welding Code - Steel] [AWS D1.2/D1.2M, "Structural Welding Code - Aluminum]."
C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a
qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
D. UL Standard: Provide gate operators that comply with UL 325.
E. Emergency Access Requirements: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction for
automatic gate operators on gates that must provide emergency access.
F. Mockups: Build mockups to [verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate
aesthetic effects] [and] [set quality standards for fabrication and installation].
1. Include [10-foot (3-m)] <Insert measurement> length of fence complying with requirements.
2. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial
Completion.
G. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at [Project site] <Insert location>.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 ALUMINUM
A. Aluminum, General: Provide alloys and tempers with not less than the strength and durability properties of
alloy and temper designated in paragraphs below for each aluminum form required.
B. Extrusions: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M), Alloy 6063-T5.
C. Tubing: ASTM B 429, Alloy 6063-T6.
D. Plate and Sheet: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M), Alloy 6061-T6.
EHAF – CO – 01/03 -2 - Section 02820

E. Die and Hand Forgings: ASTM B 247 (ASTM B 247M), Alloy 6061-T6.
F. Castings: ASTM B 26/B 26M, Alloy A356.0-T6.
2.02 STEEL AND IRON
A. Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.
B. Bars (Pickets): Hot-rolled, carbon steel complying with ASTM A 29/A 29M, Grade 1010.
C. Tubing: ASTM A 500, cold formed steel tubing.
D. Bar Grating: NAAMM MBG 531.
1. Bars: Hot-rolled steel strip, ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, Commercial Steel, Type B.
2. Wire Rods: ASTM A 510 (ASTM A 510M).
E. Uncoated Steel Sheet: [Hot-rolled steel sheet, ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, Structural Steel, Grade 45
(Grade 310)] [or] [cold-rolled steel sheet, ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Structural Steel, Grade 50 (Grade 340)].
F. Galvanized-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, structural quality, Grade 50 (Grade 340), with [G90
(Z275)] [G60 (Z180)] coating.
G. Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 792/A 792M, structural quality, Grade 50 (Grade 340),
with AZ60 (AZM180) coating.
H. Castings: Either gray or malleable iron unless otherwise indicated.
1. Gray Iron: ASTM A 48/A 48M, Class 30.

2. Malleable Iron: ASTM A 47/A 47M.
2.03 COATING MATERIALS
A. Shop Primers for Steel: Provide primers that comply with requirements.
B. Epoxy Zinc-Rich Primer for Steel: Complying with MPI #20 and compatible with coating specified to be
applied over it.
C. Epoxy Primer for Galvanized Steel: Complying with MPI #101 and compatible with coating specified to be
applied over it.
D. Epoxy Intermediate Coat: Complying with MPI #77 and compatible with primer and topcoat.
E. Polyurethane Topcoat: Complying with MPI #72 and compatible with undercoat.
2.04 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: Select according to AWS specifications for metal alloy welded.
EHAF – CO – 01/03 -3 - Section 02820

1. For aluminum, provide type and alloy as recommended by producer of metal to be welded and as
required for strength and compatibility in fabricated items.
B. Concrete: Normal-weight, air-entrained, ready-mix concrete complying with requirements in Division 03
C. Nonshrink Grout: Factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout complying with

ASTM C 1107 and specifically recommended by manufacturer for exterior applications.
2.05 GROUNDING MATERIALS
A. Grounding Conductors: Bare, solid wire for No. 6 AWG and smaller; stranded wire for No. 4 AWG and
larger.
1. Material above Finished Grade: Copper.

2. Material on or below Finished Grade: Copper.
3. Bonding Jumpers: Braided copper tape, 1 inch (25 mm) wide, woven of No. 30 AWG bare copper
wire, terminated with copper ferrules.
B. Grounding Connectors and Grounding Rods: Comply with UL 467.
1. Connectors for Below-Grade Use: Exothermic-welded type.

2. Grounding Rods: Copper-clad steel.
a. Size: 5/8 by 96 inches (16 by 2440 mm).
2.06 DECORATIVE METALLIC-COATED STEEL TUBULAR PICKET FENCES
A. Decorative Metallic-Coated Steel Tubular Picket Fences: Comply with ASTM F 2408, for [residential] [light
industrial (commercial)] [industrial] application (class) unless otherwise indicated.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, [provide products by one of the

following] [available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work
include, but are not limited to, the following]:
2. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide [product indicated on
Drawings] <Insert manufacturer's name; product name or designation> or comparable product by
one of the following:
a. Ameristar Fence Products.

b. Fortress Iron; a division of Woodmark International, LP.
c. Iron Eagle Industries, Inc.
d. Master Halco.
e. Merchants Metals; a division of MMI Products, Inc.
f. Payne Fence Products; a division of Payne Metal Works, Inc.
g. Xcel Fence.
h. <Insert manufacturer's name>.
B. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: Galvanized-steel sheet or aluminum-zinc alloy-coated steel sheet.
EHAF – CO – 01/03 -4 - Section 02820

C. Interior surface of tubes formed from uncoated steel sheet shall be [hot-dip zinc coated same as exterior]
[or] [coated with zinc-rich thermosetting coating to comply with ASTM F 2408].
D. Posts:
1. End and Corner Posts: Square tubes [2-1/2 by 2-1/2 inches (64 by 64 mm)] [3 by 3 inches (76 by
76 mm)] formed from 0.108-inch (2.74-mm) nominal-thickness, metallic-coated steel sheet or
formed from 0.105-inch (2.66-mm) nominal-thickness steel sheet and hot-dip galvanized after
fabrication.
2. Swing Gate Posts: Square tubes 3 by 3 inches (76 by 76 mm) formed from 0.108-inch (2.74-mm)
nominal-thickness, metallic-coated steel sheet or formed from 0.105-inch (2.66-mm) nominal-
thickness steel sheet and hot-dip galvanized after fabrication.
3. Swing Gate Posts: Square steel tubing [3 by 3 inches (76 by 76 mm)] [4 by 4 inches (102 by 102
mm)] <Insert size> with [3/16-inch (4.76-mm)] <Insert thickness> wall thickness, hot-dip
galvanized.
4. Horizontal-Slide Gate Post, Openings up to 12 Feet (3.7 m): Square steel tubing [3 by 3 inches (76
by 76 mm)] [4 by 4 inches (102 by 102 mm)] <Insert size> with [3/16-inch (4.76-mm)] <Insert
thickness> wall thickness, hot-dip galvanized.
5. Horizontal-Slide Gate Post, Openings Wider Than 12 Feet (3.7 m): Square steel tubing 4 by 4
inches (102 by 102 mm) with [3/16-inch (4.76-mm)] <Insert thickness> wall thickness, hot-dip
galvanized.
6. Guide Posts for Class 1 Horizontal-Slide Gates: Square tubes 3 by 3 inches (76 by 76 mm) formed
from 0.108-inch (2.74-mm) nominal-thickness, metallic-coated steel sheet or formed from 0.105-
inch (2.66-mm) nominal-thickness steel sheet and hot-dip galvanized after fabrication; installed
adjacent to gate post to permit gate to slide in space between.
7. Guide Posts for Class 1 Horizontal-Slide Gates: Square steel tubing [3 by 3 inches (76 by 76 mm)]
[4 by 4 inches (102 by 102 mm)] <Insert size> with [3/16-inch (4.76-mm)] <Insert thickness> wall
thickness, hot-dip galvanized; installed adjacent to gate post to permit gate to slide in space
between.
E. Post Caps: [Formed from steel sheet and hot-dip galvanized after forming] [UV-resistant plastic]
[Aluminum castings] [Aluminum castings with round ball finials].
F. Rails: [Square tubes] [Double-wall channels].
1. Size: [1-1/2 by 1-1/2 inches (38 by 38 mm)] [1-3/4 by 1-3/4 inches (45 by 45 mm)].
2. Metal and Thickness: 0.079-inch (2.01-mm) nominal-thickness, metallic-coated steel sheet or
0.075-inch (1.90-mm) nominal-thickness, uncoated steel sheet, hot-dip galvanized after fabrication.
G. Pickets: Square tubes.
1. [Terminate tops of pickets at top rail for flush top appearance] [Extend pickets beyond top rail as
indicated and terminate with UV-resistant plastic caps] [Extend pickets beyond top rail as indicated
and terminate with galvanized-steel caps] [Extend pickets beyond top rail as indicated and press
flat and trim to produce spear point shape].
2. Picket Spacing: [6 inches (152.4 mm)] [4 inches (101.6 mm)] [1-3/4 inches (44 mm)] <Insert
spacing> clear, maximum.
H. Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard concealed fastening system.
EHAF – CO – 01/03 -5 - Section 02820

I. Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard [tamperproof, ]corrosion-resistant, color-coated fasteners matching

fence components[ with resilient polymer washers].
J. Galvanizing: For components indicated to be galvanized and for which galvanized coating is not specified
in ASTM F 2408, hot-dip galvanize to comply with ASTM A 123/A 123M. For hardware items, hot-dip
galvanize to comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M.
K. Finish: [Organic coating complying with requirements in ASTM F 2408] [Powder coating].
2.07 DECORATIVE METALLIC-COATED STEEL SECURITY FENCES
A. Decorative Metallic-Coated Steel Security Fences:
1. Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Impasse by Ameristar Fence Products.
B. Posts: 1-3/4-by-4-inch (45-by-102-mm) double-thickness, I-shaped sections.

C. Post Caps: Aluminum castings.
D. Rails: 2-by-2-1/2-inch (50-by-64-mm) pentagon-shaped box channel designed to shed water and to
enclose wire rope reinforcement.

2. Wire Rope Reinforcement: 3/4-inch (19-mm) zinc-coated steel wire rope.
E. Pickets: 3/4-by-2-3/4-inch (19-by-70-mm) M-shaped pales.

2. Extend pickets beyond top rail as indicated and [terminate with rounded edge] [cut and split to form
three points].
3. Picket Spacing: 6 inches (152.4 mm) o.c.
F. Fasteners: Stainless-steel carriage bolts with tamperproof nuts.
G. Galvanizing: For components indicated to be galvanized, hot-dip galvanize to comply with

ASTM A 123/A 123M unless otherwise indicated. For hardware items, hot-dip galvanize to comply with
ASTM A 153/A 153M.
H. Finish: Powder coating.
2.08 DECORATIVE STEEL FENCES
A. Decorative Steel Fences: Fences made from steel tubing[ bars] and shapes[, hot-dip galvanized].
EHAF – CO – 01/03 -6 - Section 02820

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, [provide products by one of the

following] [available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work
include, but are not limited to, the following]:
2. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide [product indicated on
Drawings] <Insert manufacturer's name; product name or designation> or comparable product by
one of the following:
a. A & T Iron Works, Inc.

b. Ametco Manufacturing Corporation.
c. BarnettBates Corporation.
d. <Insert manufacturer's name>.
B. Posts: Square steel tubing.
1. Line Posts: [2 by 2 inches (50 by 50 mm)] [2-1/2 by 2-1/2 inches (64 by 64 mm)] [3 by 3 inches (76
by 76 mm)] <Insert size> with [1/8-inch (3.2-mm)] [3/16-inch (4.76-mm)] <Insert thickness> wall
thickness.
2. End and Corner Posts: [2-1/2 by 2-1/2 inches (64 by 64 mm)] [3 by 3 inches (76 by 76 mm)] [4 by
4 inches (102 by 102 mm)] <Insert size> with [1/8-inch (3.2-mm)] [3/16-inch (4.76-mm)] <Insert
thickness> wall thickness.
3. Swing Gate Posts: [3 by 3 inches (76 by 76 mm)] [4 by 4 inches (102 by 102 mm)] <Insert size>
with [3/16-inch (4.76-mm)] <Insert thickness> wall thickness.
4. Horizontal-Slide Gate Post, Openings up to 12 Feet (3.7 m): [3 by 3 inches (76 by 76 mm)] [4 by 4
inches (102 by 102 mm)] <Insert size> with [3/16-inch (4.76-mm)] <Insert thickness> wall
thickness.
5. Horizontal-Slide Gate Post, Openings Wider Than 12 Feet (3.7 m): 4 by 4 inches (102 by 102 mm)
with [3/16-inch (4.76-mm)] <Insert thickness> wall thickness.
6. Guide Posts for Class 1 Horizontal-Slide Gates: [3 by 3 inches (76 by 76 mm)] [4 by 4 inches (102
by 102 mm)] <Insert size> with [3/16-inch (4.76-mm)] <Insert thickness> wall thickness; installed
adjacent to gate post to permit gate to slide in space between.
C. Post Caps: [Formed from steel sheet] [Formed from steel sheet and hot-dip galvanized after forming]
[Aluminum castings] [Aluminum castings with round ball finials].
D. Rails:
1. Steel Tube Rails: Square steel tubing [2 by 2 inches (50 by 50 mm)] [2-1/2 by 2-1/2 inches (64 by
64 mm)] <Insert size> with [1/8-inch (3.2-mm)] <Insert thickness> wall thickness.
2. Steel Channel Rails: Steel channels [2 by 1 inch (50 by 25 mm)] [1-1/2 by 3/4 inch (38 by 19 mm)]
[1-1/2 by 1/2 inch (38 by 13 mm)] <Insert size>.
E. Pickets: [1/2-inch- (13-mm-) square steel bars] [3/4-inch- (19-mm-) square steel bars] [Decorative steel
bars of pattern and size indicated] [5/8 inch (16 mm) square by 0.065-inch (1.65-mm) steel tubes] [5/8 inch
(16 mm) square by 0.083-inch (2.11-mm) steel tubes] [3/4 inch (19 mm) square by 0.065-inch (1.65-mm)
steel tubes] [3/4 inch (19 mm) square by 0.083-inch (2.11-mm) steel tubes] [1 inch (25 mm) square by
0.065-inch (1.65-mm) steel tubes] [1 inch (25 mm) square by 0.083-inch (2.11-mm) steel tubes].
1. [Terminate tops of pickets at top rail for flush top appearance] [Extend pickets beyond top rail as
indicated and mill ends to pyramid shaped points] [Extend pickets beyond top rail as indicated and
press flat and trim to produce spear point shape] [Extend pickets beyond top rail as indicated and
EHAF – CO – 01/03 -7 - Section 02820

cap with metal spear point finial] [Extend pickets beyond top rail as indicated and cap with metal
tripoint finial].
2. Picket Spacing: [6 inches (152.4 mm)] [4 inches (101.6 mm)] [1-3/4 inches (44 mm)] <Insert
spacing> clear, maximum.
3. Treillage: Provide iron castings of pattern indicated between each pair of pickets.
F. Infill: Forge-welded steel bar grating.
1. Perimeter Bars: Steel flat bars [1 by 1/8 inch (25 by 3.2 mm)] <Insert size>.
2. Vertical Main Bars: Steel flat bars [1 by 1/8 inch (25 by 3.2 mm)] [1-3/16 by 5/32 inch (30 by 4
mm)] <Insert size>.
3. Vertical Main Bar Spacing: [1-21/32 inches (42 mm)] [1-7/8 inches (48 mm)] [2-7/16 inches (62
mm)] <Insert spacing> o.c.
4. Horizontal Cross Rods: [3/16-inch- (4.8-mm-)] [1/4-inch- (6.4-mm-)] diameter, steel rods.
5. Horizontal Cross Rod Spacing: [1-3/4 inches (45 mm)] [2-19/32 inches (66 mm)] [5-3/16 inches
(132 mm)] <Insert spacing> o.c.
G. Infill: Custom design as indicated on Drawings.
1. Bars: [1/2-inch- (12.7 -mm-) square steel bars] [3/4-inch- (19-mm-) square steel bars] [1/2-inch-
(12.7 -mm-) diameter, round steel bars] [3/4-inch- (19-mm-) diameter, round steel bars] [1-by-1/8-
inch (25-by-3.2-mm) steel flat bars] [1-by-1/4-inch (25-by-6.4-mm) steel flat bars] [1-by-1/2-inch
(25-by-12.7 -mm) steel flat bars] [ unless otherwise indicated].
2. Square Tubes: Square steel tubing [2 by 2 inches (50 by 50 mm)] [2-1/2 by 2-1/2 inches (64 by 64
mm)] <Insert size> with [1/8-inch (3.2-mm)] <Insert thickness> wall thickness[ unless otherwise
indicated].
3. Round Tubes: [1-inch- (25-mm-)] [1-1/2-inch- (38-mm-)] [2-inch- (50-mm-)] [2-1/2-inch- (64-mm-)]
<Insert size> diameter, round steel tubing with [1/8-inch (3.2-mm)] <Insert thickness> wall
thickness[ unless otherwise indicated].
4. Steel Plate: [1/8 inch (3.2 mm)] [3/16 inch (4.8 mm)] [1/4 inch (6.4 mm)] thick[ unless otherwise
indicated].
5. Perforated Metal Sheet: Uncoated steel sheet, perforated as indicated, [0.060-inch (1.52-mm)]
[0.075-inch (1.90-mm)] [0.105-inch (2.66-mm)] <Insert thickness> nominal thickness.
H. Fasteners: Stainless-steel carriage bolts and [tamperproof ]nuts.
I. Fabrication: Assemble fences into sections by welding pickets to rails.
1. Fabricate sections with clips welded to rails for fastening to posts in field.
2. Drill posts and clips for fasteners before finishing to maximum extent possible.
J. Fabrication: Fabricate bar grating infill into sections of size indicated.
1. Fabricate rails with clips welded to rails for fastening to posts in field.
2. Drill posts[, clips,] and bar grating for fasteners before finishing to maximum extent possible.
K. Finish exposed welds to comply with NOMMA Guideline 1, [Finish #2 - completely sanded joint, some
undercutting and pinholes okay] [Finish #3 - partially dressed weld with splatter removed] [Finish #4 -
good-quality, uniform undressed weld with minimal splatter].
EHAF – CO – 01/03 -8 - Section 02820

L. Galvanizing: For items other than hardware that are indicated to be galvanized, hot-dip galvanize to
comply with ASTM A 123/A 123M. For hardware items, hot-dip galvanize to comply with
ASTM A 153/A 153M.
1. Hot-dip galvanize posts[ and rails].

2. Hot-dip galvanize rail and picket assemblies after fabrication.
3. Hot-dip galvanize bar grating infill after fabrication.
4. Hot-dip galvanize custom-design rail and infill assemblies after fabrication.
M. Finish for Bar Grating Infill: Powder coating.
N. Finish for Steel Items[ Other than Bar Grating Infill]: [Primed] [Shop painted] [High-performance coating].
O. Finish for Metallic-Coated Steel Items[ Other than Bar Grating Infill]: [High-performance coating]
[Galvanized finish].
2. 10 HORIZONTAL-SLIDE GATES
A. Gate Configuration: [Single leaf] [Double leaf] [As indicated].
1. Type: Overhead slide.

2. Type: Cantilever slide, with [external] [internal] roller assemblies.
B. Gate Frame Height: [72 inches (1830 mm)] [As indicated] <Insert height>.
C. Gate Opening Width: [36 inches (914 mm)] [As indicated] <Insert width>.
D. Galvanized-Steel Frames and Bracing: Fabricate members from square tubing.
1. Frame Members: Square tubes [1-1/2 by 1-1/2 inches (38 by 38 mm)] [1-3/4 by 1-3/4 inches (45
by 45 mm)] [2 by 2 inches (50 by 50 mm)] [2-1/2 by 2-1/2 inches (64 by 64 mm)] formed from
0.108-inch (2.74-mm) nominal-thickness, metallic-coated steel sheet or formed from 0.105-inch
(2.66-mm) nominal-thickness steel sheet and hot-dip galvanized after fabrication.
2. Bracing Members: Square tubes [1-1/2 by 1-1/2 inches (38 by 38 mm)] [1-3/4 by 1-3/4 inches (45
by 45 mm)] [2 by 2 inches (50 by 50 mm)] [2-1/2 by 2-1/2 inches (64 by 64 mm)] formed from
0.108-inch (2.74-mm) nominal-thickness, metallic-coated steel sheet or formed from 0.105-inch
(2.66-mm) nominal-thickness steel sheet and hot-dip galvanized after fabrication.
E. Steel Frames and Bracing: Fabricate members from square tubing.[ Hot-dip galvanize frames after
fabrication.]
1. Frame Members: Steel tubing [1-1/2 by 1-1/2 inches (38 by 38 mm)] [2 by 2 inches (50 by 50 mm)]
[2-1/2 by 2-1/2 inches (64 by 64 mm)] <Insert size> with [1/8-inch (3.2-mm)] <Insert thickness> wall
thickness.
2. Bracing Members: Steel tubing [1-1/2 by 1-1/2 inches (38 by 38 mm)] [2 by 2 inches (50 by 50
mm)] [2-1/2 by 2-1/2 inches (64 by 64 mm)] <Insert size> with [1/8-inch (3.2-mm)] <Insert
thickness> wall thickness.
F. Aluminum Frames and Bracing: Fabricate members from square tubing.
EHAF – CO – 01/03 -9 - Section 02820

1. Frame Members: Extruded-aluminum tubes [1-1/2 by 1-1/2 inches (38 by 38 mm)] [2 by 2 inches
(50 by 50 mm)] [2-1/2 by 2-1/2 inches (64 by 64 mm)] <Insert size> with [0.100-inch (2.54-mm)]
[0.125-inch (3.18-mm)] [0.140-inch (3.56-mm)] [0.154-inch (3.91-mm)] <Insert thickness> wall
thickness.
2. Bracing Members: Extruded-aluminum tubes [1-1/2 by 1-1/2 inches (38 by 38 mm)] [2 by 2 inches
(50 by 50 mm)] [2-1/2 by 2-1/2 inches (64 by 64 mm)] <Insert size> with [0.100-inch (2.54-mm)]
[0.125-inch (3.18-mm)] [0.140-inch (3.56-mm)] [0.154-inch (3.91-mm)] <Insert thickness> wall
thickness.
G. Frame Corner Construction:
1. Welded frame [with panels assembled with bolted or riveted corner fittings] [and 5/16-inch- (7.9-
mm-) diameter, adjustable truss rods for panels 5 feet (1.52 m) wide or wider].
2. Overhead Slide Gates: Welded or assembled with corner fittings[ including 5/16-inch- (7.9-mm-)
diameter, adjustable truss rods for panels 5 feet (1.52 m) wide or wider].
H. Additional Rails: Provide as indicated, complying with requirements for fence rails.
I. Infill: Comply with requirements for adjacent fence.
J. Picket Size, Configuration, and Spacing: Comply with requirements for adjacent fence.
1. Treillage: Provide iron castings of pattern indicated between each pair of pickets. Finish as
specified for [adjacent fence] [gates].
K. Overhead Track Assembly: Manufacturer's standard track, with overhead framing supports, bracing, and
accessories, engineered to support size, weight, width, operation, and design of gate and roller
assemblies.
L. Hardware: Latches permitting operation from both sides of gate, [locking devices] [hangers] [roller
assemblies] <Insert hardware items and accessories> and stops fabricated from [galvanized steel]
[galvanized malleable iron] [mill-finished, Grade 319 aluminum-alloy casting with stainless-steel
fasteners].[ Fabricate latches with integral eye openings for padlocking; padlock accessible from both
sides of gate.]
1. <Insert requirements for padlocks and chains if not Owner furnished>.
M. Finish exposed welds to comply with NOMMA Guideline 1, [Finish #2 - completely sanded joint, some
undercutting and pinholes okay] [Finish #3 - partially dressed weld with splatter removed] [Finish #4 -
good-quality, uniform undressed weld with minimal splatter].
N. Galvanizing: For items other than hardware that are indicated to be galvanized, hot-dip galvanize to
comply with ASTM A 123/A 123M unless otherwise indicated. For hardware items, hot-dip galvanize to
comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M.
O. Metallic-Coated Steel Finish: [High-performance coating] [Galvanized finish].
P. Steel Finish: [Primed] [Shop painted] [High-performance coating].
Q. Aluminum Finish: Baked enamel or powder coating.
EHAF – CO – 01/03 -10 - Section 02820

2. 11 GATE OPERATORS
A. General: Provide factory-assembled automatic operating system designed for gate size, type, weight, and
operation frequency. Provide operation control system with characteristics suitable for Project conditions,
with remote-control stations, safety devices, and weatherproof enclosures; coordinate electrical
requirements with building electrical system.
1. Provide operator designed so motor may be removed without disturbing limit-switch adjustment
and without affecting auxiliary emergency operator.
2. Provide operator with UL[ approval] [-approved components].
3. Provide electronic components with built-in troubleshooting diagnostic feature.
4. Provide unit designed and wired for both right-hand/left-hand opening, permitting universal
installation.
5. Provide controllers, electrical devices, and wiring that comply with requirements specified in
Division 26 Sections.
B. Motors: Comply with NEMA designation, temperature rating, service factor, enclosure type, and efficiency
requirements for motors specified in Division 11 Section "Common Motor Requirements for Equipment."
1. Motor Sizes: Minimum size as indicated. If not indicated, large enough so driven load will not
require motor to operate in service factor range above 1.0.
2. Horsepower: Not less than [1/4] [1/3] [1/2] [3/4] <Insert horsepower>.
3. Enclosure: [Open dripproof] [Totally enclosed] [Manufacturer's standard].
4. Duty: Continuous duty at ambient temperature of 105 deg F (40 deg C) and at altitude of 3300 feet
(1005 m) above sea level.
5. Service Factor: 1.15 for open dripproof motors; 1.0 for totally enclosed motors.
6. Controllers, Electrical Devices, and Wiring: Comply with requirements for electrical devices and
connections specified in Division 26 Sections.
C. Gate Operators: [Gate] [Concrete base] [Post] [In-ground] mounted and as follows:
1. Hydraulic [Swing] [Slide] Gate Operators:
a. Duty: [Light] [Medium] [Heavy] duty, [residential] [commercial/industrial].

b. Gate Speed: Minimum [45 feet (13.7 m)] [60 feet (18.2 m)] per minute.
c. Maximum Gate Weight: <Insert weight>.
d. Frequency of Use: [10 cycles per hour] [25 cycles per hour] [Continuous duty] <Insert
cycles>.
e. Locking: Hydraulic in both directions.
f. Heater: Manufacturer's standard track and roller heater with thermostatic control.
g. <Insert feature>.
h. Operating Type: [Crank arm] [Wheel and rail drive] [Roller chain] [with manual release].
i. <Insert feature>.
2. Mechanical [Swing] [Slide] Gate Operators:
a. Duty: [Light] [Medium] [Heavy] duty, [residential] [commercial/industrial].

b. Gate Speed: Minimum [45 feet (13.7 m) per minute] [60 feet (18.2 m) per minute] [variable
speed] <Insert speed>.
c. Maximum Gate Weight: [600 lb (272 kg)] [800 lb (363 kg)] <Insert weight>.
EHAF – CO – 01/03 -11 - Section 02820

d. Frequency of Use: [10 cycles per hour] [25 cycles per hour] [60 cycles per hour]
[Continuous duty] <Insert cycles>.
e. Operating Type: [Crank arm] [Wheel and rail drive] [Roller chain], [with manual release].
f. Drive Type: Enclosed worm gear[ and chain-and-sprocket] reducers, roller-chain drive.
g. Drive Type: V-belt and [worm gear] [chain-and-sprocket] reducers, roller-chain drive.
h. <Insert feature>.
D. Remote Controls: Electric controls separated from gate and motor and drive mechanism, with
[NEMA ICS 6, Type 1] [NEMA ICS 6, Type 4] <Insert type of enclosure> enclosure for [surface] [recessed
or flush] [concrete base] [pedestal] <Insert mounting> mounting, and with space for additional optional
equipment. Provide the following remote-control device(s):
1. Control Station: Keyed, [two] [three]-position switch with open[, stop,] and close function; located
remotely from gate. Provide two keys per station.
2. Control Station: Momentary-contact, [single] [three]-button-operated with open[, stop,] and close
function; located remotely from gate.[ Key switch to lock out open and close buttons.]
3. Card Reader: Functions only when authorized card is presented. Programmable, [multiple]
[single]-code system[, permitting four different access time periods] [; face-lighted unit fully visible
at night].
a. Reader Type: [Touch plate] [Swipe] [Insertion] [Proximity].

b. Features: [Timed antipassback] [Limited-time usage] [Capable of monitoring and auditing
gate activity].
4. Digital Keypad Entry Unit: Multiple-[programmable, ]code capability of not less than [5] [500]
[2500] <Insert number> possible individual codes, consisting of [1- to 7] [4] [5]-digit codes[, and
permitting 4 different access time periods].
a. Features: [Timed antipassback] [Limited-time usage] [Capable of monitoring and auditing

gate activity].
b. Face-lighted unit with [metal-keyed] [keyless-membrane] keypad fully visible at night.
5. Radio Control: Digital system consisting of code-compatible universal receiver for each gate,
located where indicated, with remote antenna with coaxial cable and mounting brackets designed
to operate gates. Provide [1] [2] <Insert number> programmable transmitter(s) with multiple-code
capability permitting validating or voiding of not less than [1000] [10,000] <Insert number> codes
per channel configured for the following functions:
a. Transmitters: [Single] [Three]-button operated, with open [and close ]function.

b. Channel Settings: [Two] [Three] [Four] <Insert number> independent channel settings
controlling separate receivers for operating more than one gate from each transmitter.
6. Telephone Entry System: Hands-free, voice-communication system for connection to building

telephone system with digital-entry code activation of gate operator[ and auxiliary keypad entry].
a. Residential System: Designed to be wired to same line with telephone.

b. Multiunit System: Designed to be wired to a dedicated telephone line, with capacity to
access [20] [100] <Insert number> telephones[, and with electronic directory].
7. Vehicle Loop Detector: System including automatic closing timer with adjustable time delay before
closing[, timer cutoff switch,] and loop detector designed to [open and close gate] [hold gate open
EHAF – CO – 01/03 -12 - Section 02820

until traffic clears] [reverse gate] <Insert functions>. Provide electronic detector with adjustable
detection patterns, adjustable sensitivity and frequency settings, and panel indicator light designed
to detect presence or transit of a vehicle over an embedded loop of wire and to emit a signal
activating the gate operator. Provide number of loops consisting of multiple strands of wire,
number of turns, loop size, and method of placement at location shown on Drawings, as
recommended in writing by detection system manufacturer for function indicated.
a. Loop: Wire, in size indicated for field assembly, for [pave-over] [saw cut with epoxy-
grouted] installation.
b. Loop: Factory preformed in size indicated; style for [pave-over] [saw cut with epoxy-
grouted] installation.
8. Vehicle Presence Detector: System including automatic closing timer with adjustable time delay
before closing[, timer cutoff switch,] and presence detector designed to [open and close gate] [hold
gate open until traffic clears] [reverse gate] <Insert functions>. Provide [retroreflective]
[emitter/receiver] detector with adjustable detection zone pattern and sensitivity, designed to detect
the presence or transit of a vehicle in gate pathway when infrared beam in zone pattern is
interrupted, and to emit a signal activating the gate operator.
E. Obstruction Detection Devices: Provide each motorized gate with automatic safety sensor(s). Activation
of sensor(s) causes operator to immediately function as follows:
1. Action: Reverse gate in both opening and closing cycles and hold until clear of obstruction.
2. Action: Stop gate in opening cycle and reverse gate in closing cycle and hold until clear of
obstruction.
3. Internal Sensor: Built-in torque or current monitor senses gate is obstructed.
4. Sensor Edge: Contact-pressure-sensitive safety edge, profile, and sensitivity designed for type of
gate and component indicated, in locations as follows. Connect to control circuit using [take-up
cable reel] [self-coiling cable] [gate edge transmitter and operator receiver system].
a. Along entire gate leaf leading edge.

b. Along entire gate leaf trailing edge.
c. Across entire gate leaf bottom edge.
d. Along entire length of gate posts.
e. Along entire length of gate guide posts.
f. Where indicated on Drawings.
g. <Insert extent and location>.
5. Photoelectric/Infrared Sensor System: Designed to detect an obstruction in gate's path when

infrared beam in the zone pattern is interrupted.
F. Limit Switches: Adjustable switches, interlocked with motor controls and set to automatically stop gate at
fully retracted and fully extended positions.
G. Emergency Release Mechanism: Quick-disconnect release of operator drive system of the following type
of mechanism, permitting manual operation if operator fails. Design system so control-circuit power is
disconnected during manual operation.
1. Type: Integral fail-safe release, allowing gate to be pushed open without mechanical devices,
keys, cranks, or special knowledge.
2. Type: Mechanical device, key, or crank-activated release.
EHAF – CO – 01/03 -13 - Section 02820

H. Operating Features:
1. Digital Microprocessor Control: Electronic programmable means for setting, changing, and
adjusting control features[ with capability for monitoring and auditing gate activity]. Provide unit
that is isolated from voltage spikes and surges.
2. System Integration: With controlling circuit board capable of accepting any type of input from
external devices.
3. Master/Slave Capability: Control stations designed and wired for gate pair operation.
4. Automatic Closing Timer: With adjustable time delay before closing[ and timer cutoff switch].
5. Open Override Circuit: Designed to override closing commands.
6. Reversal Time Delay: Designed to protect gate system from shock load on reversal in both
directions.
7. Maximum Run Timer: Designed to prevent damage to gate system by shutting down system if
normal time to open gate is exceeded.
8. Clock Timer: [24-hour] [Seven-day] <Insert time period> programmable for regular events.
I. Accessories:
1. Warning Module: [Audio] [Visual], ADA/ABA-compliant, [constant] [strobe]-light alarm sounding

three to five seconds in advance of gate operation and continuing until gate stops moving.
2. Battery Backup System: Battery-powered drive and access-control system, independent of
primary drive system:
a. Fail Safe: Gate opens and remains open until power is restored.
b. Fail Secure: Gate cycles on battery power, then fail safe when battery is discharged.
3. External electric-powered [solenoid] [magnetic] lock with delay timer allowing time for lock to
release before gate operates.
4. [Fire] [Postal] box.
5. Fire [strobe] [siren] alarm.
6. Intercom System: <Insert requirements>.
7. Instructional, Safety, and Warning Labels and Signs: [According to UL 325] [Manufacturer's
standard for components and features specified] [As indicated on Drawings] <Insert requirements>.
2. 12 ALUMINUM FINISHES
A. Baked-Enamel or Powder-Coat Finish: AAMA 2603 except with a minimum dry film thickness of 2 mils
(0.05 mm). Comply with coating manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning, conversion coating, and
applying and baking finish.
1. Color and Gloss: [As indicated by manufacturer's designations] [Match Architect's sample] [As
selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range] <Insert color and gloss>.
2. 13 STEEL FINISHES
A. Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces according to [SSPC-SP 5/NACE No. 1, "White Metal Blast Cleaning]
[SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning]."
1. After cleaning, apply a conversion coating suited to the organic coating to be applied over it.
EHAF – CO – 01/03 -14 - Section 02820

B. Powder Coating: Immediately after cleaning, apply 2-coat finish consisting of epoxy primer and TGIC
polyester topcoat, with a minimum total dry film thickness of not less than 8 mils (0.20 mm). Comply with
coating manufacturer's written instructions.
C. Primer Application: Apply zinc-rich epoxy primer immediately after cleaning, to provide a minimum dry film
thickness of 2 mils (0.05 mm) per applied coat, to surfaces that will be exposed after assembly and
installation, and to concealed surfaces.
D. Shop-Painted Finish: Comply with [Division 09 Section "Exterior Painting."] [Division 09 Section "High-
Performance Coatings."]
E. High-Performance Coating: Apply epoxy intermediate and polyurethane topcoats to prime-coated

surfaces. Comply with coating manufacturer's written instructions and with requirements in SSPC-PA 1,
"Paint Application Specification No. 1: Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting of Steel," for shop painting.
Apply at spreading rates recommended by coating manufacturer.
1. Match approved Samples for color, texture, and coverage. Remove and refinish, or recoat work
that does not comply with specified requirements.
2. 14 METALLIC-COATED STEEL FINISHES
A. Galvanized Finish: Clean welds, mechanical connections, and abraded areas and repair galvanizing to
comply with ASTM A 780.
B. Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces with nonpetroleum solvent so surfaces are free of oil and other
contaminants. After cleaning, apply a [zinc-phosphate ]conversion coating suited to the organic coating to
be applied over it. Clean welds, mechanical connections, and abraded areas and repair galvanizing to
comply with ASTM A 780.
C. Powder Coating: Immediately after cleaning and pretreating, apply TGIC polyester powder-coat finish,
with a minimum dry film thickness of 2 mils (0.05 mm).
D. Powder Coating: Immediately after cleaning and pretreating, apply 2-coat finish consisting of [zinc-
rich ]epoxy prime coat and TGIC polyester topcoat, with a minimum dry film thickness of 2 mils (0.05 mm)
for topcoat. Comply with coating manufacturer's written instructions to achieve a minimum total dry film
thickness of 4 mils (0.10 mm).
2. Comply with surface finish testing requirements in ASTM F 2408[ except change corrosion-
resistance requirement to 3000 hours without failure].
E. High-Performance Coating: Apply epoxy primer, epoxy intermediate coat, and polyurethane topcoat to
prepared surfaces. Comply with coating manufacturer's written instructions and with requirements in
EHAF – CO – 01/03 -15 - Section 02820

SSPC-PA 1, "Paint Application Specification No. 1: Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting of Steel," for
shop painting. Apply at spreading rates recommended by coating manufacturer.
1. Match approved Samples for color, texture, and coverage. Remove and refinish, or recoat work
that does not comply with specified requirements.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for site clearing,
earthwork, pavement work, construction layout, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
B. Do not begin installation before final grading is completed unless otherwise permitted by Architect.
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Stake locations of fence lines, gates, and terminal posts. Do not exceed intervals of 500 feet (152.5 m) or
line of sight between stakes. Indicate locations of utilities, lawn sprinkler system, underground structures,
benchmarks, and property monuments.
1. Construction layout and field engineering are specified in Division 01 Section "Execution"
3.03 DECORATIVE FENCE INSTALLATION
A. Install fences according to manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Install fences by setting posts as indicated and fastening [rails] [and] [infill panels] to posts.[ Peen threads
of bolts after assembly to prevent removal.]
C. Post Excavation: Drill or hand-excavate holes for posts in firm, undisturbed soil. Excavate holes to a
diameter of not less than 4 times post size and a depth of not less than 24 inches (600 mm) plus 3 inches
(75 mm) for each foot (300 mm) or fraction of a foot (300 mm) that fence height exceeds 4 feet (1200
mm).
D. Post Setting: Set posts [in concrete] [with mechanical anchors] [by mechanically driving into soil] at
indicated spacing into firm, undisturbed soil.
1. Verify that posts are set plumb, aligned, and at correct height and spacing, and hold in position
during setting with concrete or mechanical devices.
2. Concrete Fill: Place concrete around [posts] [and] [sleeves] and vibrate or tamp for consolidation.
Protect aboveground portion of posts from concrete splatter.
a. Exposed Concrete: Extend 2 inches (50 mm) above grade. Finish and slope top surface to
drain water away from post.
EHAF – CO – 01/03 -16 - Section 02820

b. Concealed Concrete: Top [2 inches (50 mm)] <Insert dimension> below grade [as indicated
on Drawings ]to allow covering with surface material. Slope top surface of concrete to drain
water away from post.
3. Posts Set in Concrete: Extend post to within 6 inches (150 mm) of specified excavation depth, but
not closer than 3 inches (75 mm) to bottom of concrete.
4. Posts Set into Concrete in Sleeves: Use galvanized-steel pipe sleeves with inside diameter at
least 3/4 inch (20 mm) larger than outside diagonal dimension of post, preset and anchored into
concrete for installing posts.
a. Extend posts at least 5 inches (125 mm) into sleeve.

b. After posts have been inserted into sleeves, fill annular space between post and sleeve with
nonshrink grout, mixed and placed to comply with grout manufacturer's written instructions;
shape and smooth to shed water. Finish and slope top surface of grout to drain water away
from post.
5. Posts Set into Voids in Concrete: Form or core drill holes not less than 3/4 inch (20 mm) larger
than outside diagonal dimension of post.
a. Extend posts at least 5 inches (125 mm) into concrete.

b. Clean holes of loose material, insert posts, and fill annular space between post and
concrete with nonshrink grout, mixed and placed to comply with grout manufacturer's
written instructions. Finish and slope top surface of grout to drain water away from post.
6. Mechanically Driven Posts: Drive into soil to depth of [30 inches (762 mm)] [36 inches (914 mm)]
<Insert depth>. Protect post top to prevent distortion.
7. Space posts uniformly at [6 feet (1.83 m)] [8 feet (2.44 m)] <Insert dimension> o.c.
3.04 GATE INSTALLATION
A. Install gates according to manufacturer's written instructions, level, plumb, and secure for full opening
without interference. Attach hardware using tamper-resistant or concealed means. Install ground-set
items in concrete for anchorage. Adjust hardware for smooth operation and lubricate where necessary.
3.05 GATE OPERATOR INSTALLATION
A. General: Install gate operators according to manufacturer's written instructions, aligned and true to fence
line and grade.
B. Excavation for [Support Posts] [Pedestals] [Concrete Bases]: Hand-excavate holes for bases, in firm,
undisturbed soil to dimensions and depths and at locations as required by gate operator component
manufacturer's written instructions and as indicated.
C. Concrete Bases: Cast-in-place or precast concrete, [depth not less than 12 inches (300 mm)] <Insert
depth 6 to 12 inches (150 to 300 mm) below frost line or detail on Drawings>, dimensioned and reinforced
according to gate operator component manufacturer's written instructions and as indicated on Drawings.
D. Vehicle Loop Detector System: [Cut grooves in pavement and ]bury and seal wire loop according to
manufacturer's written instructions. Connect to equipment operated by detector.
EHAF – CO – 01/03 -17 - Section 02820

E. Comply with NFPA 70 and manufacturer's written instructions for grounding of electric-powered motors,
controls, and other devices.
3.06 GROUNDING AND BONDING
A. Fence Grounding: Install at maximum intervals of [1500 feet (450 m)] <Insert a lesser distance if
grounding resistance is high> except as follows:
1. Fences within 100 Feet (30 m) of Buildings, Structures, Walkways, and Roadways: Ground at
maximum intervals of [750 feet (225 m)] <Insert a lesser distance if grounding resistance is high>.
a. Gates and Other Fence Openings: Ground fence on each side of opening.
1) Bond metal gates to gate posts.

2) Bond across openings, with and without gates, except openings indicated as
intentional fence discontinuities. Use No. 2 AWG wire and bury it at least 18 inches
(460 mm) below finished grade.
B. Protection at Crossings of Overhead Electrical Power Lines: Ground fence at location of crossing and at a
maximum distance of 150 feet (45 m) on each side of crossing.
C. Fences Enclosing Electrical Power Distribution Equipment: Ground as required by IEEE C2 unless
D. Grounding Method: At each grounding location, drive a grounding rod vertically until the top is 6 inches
(150 mm) below finished grade. Connect rod to fence with No. 6 AWG conductor. Connect conductor to
each fence component at the grounding location.
E. Bonding Method for Gates: Connect bonding jumper between gate post and gate frame.
F. Connections: Make connections so possibility of galvanic action or electrolysis is minimized. Select

connectors, connection hardware, conductors, and connection methods so metals in direct contact will be
galvanically compatible.
1. Use electroplated or hot-tin-coated materials to ensure high conductivity and to make contact
points closer in order of galvanic series.
2. Make connections with clean, bare metal at points of contact.
3. Make aluminum-to-steel connections with stainless-steel separators and mechanical clamps.
4. Make aluminum-to-galvanized-steel connections with tin-plated copper jumpers and mechanical
clamps.
5. Coat and seal connections having dissimilar metals with inert material to prevent future penetration
of moisture to contact surfaces.
G. Bonding to Lightning-Protection System: If fence terminates at lightning-protected building or structure,

ground the fence and bond the fence grounding conductor to lightning-protection down conductor or
lightning-protection grounding conductor, complying with NFPA 780.
EHAF – CO – 01/03 -18 - Section 02820

A. Grounding-Resistance Testing: [Owner will engage] [Engage] a qualified testing agency to perform tests
and inspections.
1. Grounding-Resistance Tests: Subject completed grounding system to a megger test at each

grounding location. Measure grounding resistance not less than two full days after last trace of
precipitation, without soil having been moistened by any means other than natural drainage or
seepage and without chemical treatment or other artificial means of reducing natural grounding
resistance. Perform tests by two-point method according to IEEE 81.
2. Excessive Grounding Resistance: If resistance to grounding exceeds specified value, notify
Architect promptly. Include recommendations for reducing grounding resistance and a proposal to
accomplish recommended work.
3. Report: Prepare test reports certified by a testing agency of grounding resistance at each test
location. Include observations of weather and other phenomena that may affect test results.
3.08 ADJUSTING
A. Gates: Adjust gates to operate smoothly, easily, and quietly, free of binding, warp, excessive deflection,
distortion, nonalignment, misplacement, disruption, or malfunction, throughout entire operational range.
Confirm that latches and locks engage accurately and securely without forcing or binding.
B. Automatic Gate Operators: Energize circuits to electrical equipment and devices. Adjust operators,
controls, safety devices,[ alarms,] and limit switches.
1. Hydraulic Operators: Purge operating system, adjust pressure and fluid levels, and check for
leaks.
2. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper motor
rotation and unit operation.
3. Test and adjust controls[, alarms,] and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls
and equipment.
C. Lubricate hardware[, gate operators,] and other moving parts.
3.09 DEMONSTRATION
A. [Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train] [Train] Owner's personnel to adjust, operate,
and maintain gates.
END OF SECTION
EHAF – CO – 01/03 -19 - Section 02820

SECTION 02841
ACTIVE VEHICLE BARRIERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION
A. This section includes active High-Security Vehicle Barricades of wedge type, recessed and surface
mounted plate type, beam type, cable net type and manually, hydraulic of crash resistance rating.
1.02 RELATED WORK
A. Section 32 12 16, ASPHALT PAVING, for asphalt driveway and approach paving.
B. Section 32 05 23, CEMENT AND CONCRETE FOR EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS, for concrete driveway
and approach paving.
C. Section 03 30 00, CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE, for concrete islands and curbing.
D. Section 05 50 00, METAL FABRICATIONS, for pipe bollards to protect parking control equipment.
E. Division 26 sections for electrical wiring, connections and grounding of parking control equipment.
F. Section 28 13 11, PHYSICAL ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEMS.
G. Section 28 16 11, INTRUSION DETECTION SYSTEM.
H. Section 28 13 16, ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEM AND DATABASE MANAGEMENT.
A. Barricade system mounted in the ground as detailed on the drawings; Motors, Housings
1.04 SUBMITTALS

B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. Detail equipment
assemblies and indicate dimensions, required clearances and method of field assembly, components, and
location and size of each field connection.
C. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring.
D. Operation and Maintenance Data: For parking control equipment to include in emergency, operation, and
maintenance manuals.
E. Certificate test reports confirming compliance with specified resistive rating.
A. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and approved for installation
of units required for this Project.
B. Maintenance Proximity: Not more than two hours' normal travel time from Installer's place of business to
Project site.
C. Source Limitations: Obtain parking control equipment through one source from a single manufacturer.
EHAF – CO – 01/03 -1 - Section 02841

May 2012 - Rev.(0) Active Vehicle Barriers
1.06 PERFORMANCE
A. Performance Evaluation. All active vehicle barriers shall be certified for their resistance to ramming according
to “Test Method of Vehicle Crash Testing of Perimeter Barriers and Gates” SD-STD-02.01 Revision A March
2003.
B. The system shall have been certified by the United States Department of State to have a performance
evaluation per Department of State D.O.S. Specification SDSDT- 0201.
1. Stopping Capacity.
2. Normal Operation. Vehicle barrier(s) shall provide excellent security and positive control of normal
traffic in both directions by providing an almost insurmountable obstacle to non-armored or non-tracked
vehicles.
3. The Vehicle barrier(s) system shall be designed to stop a vehicle attacking from either direction.
4. High Energy Attack. Vehicle barrier(s) shall have been shown by certified dynamic non-linear analysis
to be capable of stopping and immobilizing non-armored or non-tracked vehicles with weight and
velocity characteristics as defined in paragraph 4.3.2.1. The Bollard system shall be designed to
destroy the front suspension system, steering linkage, engine crankcase and portions of the drive train.
5. The Vehicle barrier(s) shall be capable of stopping and destroying a vehicle(s) weighing: 15,000
pounds (6,800 Kg).
a. K4 = 30 mph (48 kph)
b. K8 = 40 mph (65 kph)
c. K12 = 50 mph (80 kph
1.07 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate installation of anchorages for parking control equipment. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and
directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral
anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for
installation.
B. Electrical System Roughing-in: Coordinate layout and installation of parking control equipment with
connections to power supplies perimeter security system and security access control system. Coordinate with
government.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

1. Hydraulic barricade system:
a. Wedge.
b. Plate.
EHAF – CO – 01/03 -2 - Section 02841

2. Hydraulic bollard system:

a. Power operated bollard system.
B. manually operated bollard system.
c. Fixed bollard system.
3. Cable drop arm barrier system.
2.02 HYDRAULIC BARRICADE SYSTEM
A. Coordinate dimension (mm) to road width per barrier requirements.

B. Barrier Material: High impact steel has the following properties:
1. Yield Strength: 100KSI
2. Tensile Strength 110/130 KSI
3. Elongation (2in): Long 18 Trans 16
C. This material produced in accordance with US ASTM Specification T-1 Type B
D. All barriers to be dipped galvanized on every surface of the unite to prevent the steel from rusting
E. Barrier Height: In the fully “secure” position, the barrier height above the ground as per manufacturer's data
sheet and compliance with Engineer requirements.
F. Barrier Dimensions: As shown on drawings
G. Response time: The barrier will erect to the fully “up” position in less than 5 seconds under normal operating
conditions. The barrier shall include additionally an emergency mode to allow for erection time in 1 second.
H. Cycling Time: The hydraulic pump is sized to complete six cycles (up/down) per minutes.
I. Normal Activation: Electrically-driven hydraulic pump operating at a pressure a flow rate as per design to
activate a double acting cylinder.
J. Operating Modes:
1. Raise and lower barrier, normal conditions, operating command, and momentary input.
2. Variable automatic cycling based on time periods set by the operation system
3. Default to manual operation
4. Raise barrier to up position in emergency condition.
K. System Controller relays and timers synchronized to properly operate a barrier. Optional programmable
microprocessor controller.
L. Control Panel
1. Momentary switch to raise or lower barrier
2. Audible alert to activate whenever an emergency exists
3. Key reset switch to “unlock” system from secure position in the event of emergency operation. The
system no longer responds to operator input
M. Power Source: Normal // 20 amp//, // 120 or 220 // vac, 1 phase, // 60 Hz //main power.
N. Foundation Pad: Reinforced concrete pad for the barrier must be calculated. The barrier is secured to the
blade by reinforced steel structure. The concrete (4000psi min) is poured around the steel structure, thus
securing the barrier in to the concrete foundation.
EHAF – CO – 01/03 -3 - Section 02841

O. Operation Features:
1. Heating and cooling equipment for the hydraulic and or electric systems.
2. Traffic lights at the entrance and exit to the barrier.
3. Remote operator stations
4. Indicator lights for barrier status.
5. Vehicle loop detector to indicate presence, velocity or direction
6. E-up operation (1 second)
7. Electric heat in slab
P. Installed Weight: as per technical selection and manufacturer's data sheet and Engineer approval.
2.03 HYDRAULIC POWER UNIT BOLLARD SYSTEM (HPU)
A. Hydraulic Circuit. Unit shall consist of an electrically driven hydraulic pump which shall pressurize a high
pressure manifold connected to a hydraulic type accumulator. Electrically actuated valves shall be installed
on the manifold to allow oil to be driven to the up and/or down side of a double acting hydraulic cylinder to
raise and lower the bollard. The hydraulic circuit shall include all necessary control logic, interconnected lines
and valves to override and lock out the normal speed control valve(s) for emergency fast operation of the
bollard(s).
B. Main Power. The electric motor driving the hydraulic pump shall be fed from determined source on site by
Engineer. Motor shall be sufficiently sized for the expected number of barricade operations.
C. Power-off Operation. The accumulator shall be sized to allow three full cycle operations of the bollard set in
the event of a power outage. The bi-directional control valves shall be manually operable in the event of a
power outage.
D. Manual Operation. A hand pump shall be furnished to allow the bollards to be raised manually in the event of
a prolonged power interruption.
E. The control circuits shall be provided at determined Location with all features.
F. Voltage: The control circuit shall operate from a 120 volt, 50/60 Hz supply (optionally 240 volt, 50/60 Hz or 24
VDC). An internally mounted transformer shall reduce this to 24 VAC (24 VDC) //Describe // for all external
control stations.
G. Power Consumption: The control circuit power consumption shall not exceed // 250 watts basic load, plus 200
watts//for each Bollard in the system.
H. Remote Control Panel: The following remote control panels shall be provided at determined location with all
panel features.
I. Voltage: The remote control panel shall operate on // 24 VAC (optionally 24 VDC)//, //Describe //.
J. Construction: The Hydraulic power unit accessories shall be mounted and wired on an integral steel skid. The
HPU shall fit in an envelope (dimension in mm as per technical selection and manufacturer's data sheet). The
HPU’s shall be mounted in a weather resistant enclosure. The control circuit shall be mounted within the
hydraulic power unit enclosure. All device interconnect lines shall be run to terminal strips. The remote control
station shall be housed in a countertop mounted, boxed enclosure with all devices wired to a terminal strip on
the back.
K. ACCESSORY EQUIPMENT:
1. Auxiliary Emergency Fast Operate Circuit: For each of the bollard sets, a separate hydraulic consisting
of a pressure reserve source, operating control logic and interconnect lines and valves shall be
supplied. This circuit shall provide an available source of power to operate the bollards at emergency
EHAF – CO – 01/03 -4 - Section 02841
fast speed, even after power off or manual operation or high frequency operation has depleted the
normal reserve capacity.
2. Electro-Mechanical Signal Gate: at determined Location with all features.
3. Stop/Go Traffic Lights: Red/Green (dimension in mm as per technical selection and manufacturer's
data) traffic lights shall be supplied to alert vehicle drivers of the bollard position where indicated on
the drawings. The green light shall indicate that the bollard is fully down. All other positions shall
cause the light to show red. Brackets shall be supplied to allow each light to be located on a
(dimension in mm as per technical selection and manufacturer's data sheet) OD post. The light
operating voltage shall be 120 volts (alternately 240 volts), power consumption 40 watts per light.
2.04 MANUALLY OPERATED BOLLARD SYSTEM
A. The system shall have a total of Bollards/arrayed; Individual bollards shall be manual, operated independently.
Each Bollard shall have its own controls.
B. Construction. Bollard shall be a below grade assembly containing a heavy steel cylindrical weldment capable
of being raised to an above grade position. The guard position shall present a formidable obstacle to
approaching vehicles. Upon impact, forces shall be first absorbed by the weldment and then transmitted to the
foundation of the unit.
C. Manual Operation. A hand pump shall be furnished to allow the Bollards to be raised and lowered manually.
D. Architectural Enhanced Outer Shells shall be cast from a free machining aluminum alloy and be free of cracks,
uneven surface texture, and excessive parting line offset or particle inclusions.
E. Bollard Diameter, with Architectural Enhancement in place shall not be greater than (dimension in mm as per
technical selection and manufacturer's data sheet).
F. Bollard Height: shall be (height in mm as per technical selection and manufacturer's data sheet).) as measured
from the top of the foundation frame to the top of the Bollard assembly.
G. Weather Resistant HPU Enclosure. A lockable weather resistant enclosure shall be provided for the HPU. The
design shall provide for easy access to the HPU for maintenance and emergency operation of the hydraulic
system.
H. Finish.
1. Steel Structure. The foundation and underside of the Bollard shall be asphalt emulsion coated for
corrosion protection. The roadway plates shall have a non-skid surface. The above grade portion of
the Bollard shall be finished with an industrial enamel primer.
2. Architectural Enhancement. Standard Aluminum Cast Outer Shells shall first be primed with an
industrial enamel primer then finished with industrial grade enamel. Highlight colors shall be of
equivalent quality.
3. Custom Architectural Enhancement Outer Shells shall be finished in accordance with customer
instructions.
2.05 Cable Drop Arm Barrier System
A. Barrier Construction: Barrier shall be an above grade assembly containing a rigid crash beam hinged at one
end, raised and lowered manually. The crash beam incorporates a high strength wire rope that is firmly
attached to both buttresses when the crash beam is in the down position. Upon vehicle impact, the force shall
first be absorbed by the beam assembly and then transmitted to the foundation bollards of the unit. In a
collision, the energy of the impact is transmitted through the crash beam to the buttress and the foundation.
EHAF – CO – 01/03 -5 - Section 02841

B. Operation: The drop arm will be capable of being manually raised with a force which must be calculated or
determined by Engineer. The Barrier shall be provided with a manual locking pin with padlock locking point to
secure the Barrier in the guard position. Padlock to be furnished by others.
C. Barrier Height: Height of the Barrier shall nominally in mm as per technical selection and manufacturer's data
sheet.
As measured from the roadway surface to the center line of the crash beam. Height can be varied during
installation to suit local security requirements.
D. Barrier Clear Opening: The standard clear opening shall be as indicated on the drawings, measured inside
face to inside face of the foundation bollard supports. The Barrier can be specified with a clear opening.
(dimension in mm as per technical selection and manufacturer's data sheet).
E. Finish: The foundation base of the Barrier shall be asphalt emulsion coated for corrosion protection. Barrier top
surface shall have a rust inhibiting painted surface. The drop arm beam shall be furnished with red reflective
tape sufficient to provide alternate dimension in mm as per technical selection and manufacturer's data sheet
bands on the Barrier tube and Barrier Yoke.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for
installation tolerances, critical dimensions, and other conditions affecting performance.
B. For the record, prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance.
C. Examine roughing-in for electrical systems to verify actual locations of connections before parking control
equipment installation.
D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install Gate in concrete foundation pad as outlined in manufactures installation instructions. Provide full
installation to power and related security systems.
B. Install manually operated bollards in concrete foundation as outlines in manufacturer’s installation instructions.

A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect, test, and adjust
field-assembled components and equipment installation, including connections, and to assist in field testing.
Report results in writing.
B. Remove and replace parking control equipment where test results indicate that it does not comply with
specified requirements.
C. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of
replaced or additional work with specified requirements.
EHAF – CO – 01/03 -6 - Section 02841

3.04 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

A. Adjust parking control equipment to operate smoothly, easily, and properly. Confirm that locks engage
accurately and securely without forcing or binding.
B. Lubricate hardware and other moving parts.
C. After completing installation of exposed, factory-finished parking control equipment, inspect exposed finishes
and repair damaged finishes.
D. Remove barrier-gate arms during the construction period to prevent damage, and install them immediately
before Substantial Completion.
3.05 DEMONSTRATION
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate,
and maintain parking control equipment.
END OF SECTION
EHAF – CO – 01/03 -7 - Section 02841

Technical Specifications Dr.Ezz El-Din Fahmy
New Administration Building
SECTION 02930
LAWNS AND GRASSES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 Related Documents
and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.02 Summary

1. Fine grading and preparing lawn areas.
2. Furnishing and applying new topsoil.
3. Furnishing and applying soil amendments.
4. Furnishing and applying fertilizers.
5. Seeding new lawns.
6. Sodding new lawns.
7. Planting new lawns with sprigs.
8. Planting new lawns with plugs.
9. Reconditioning existing lawn areas.
10. Replanting unsatisfactory or damaged lawns.
The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:
1. Division 2 Section "Site Clearing" for protection of existing trees and planting, topsoil
stripping and stockpiling, and site clearing.
2. Division 2 Section "Earthwork" for excavation, filling, rough grading, and subsurface
aggregate drainage and drainage backfill.
1.03 Submittals
A. General
Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1
Specification Sections.
B. Product data for the following:
1. Aluminum sulfate.
2. Fertilizers.
C. Certification of grass seed from seed vendor for each grass-seed mixture stating the
botanical and common name and percentage by weight of each species and variety, and
percentage of purity, germination, and weed seed. Include the year of production and date
of packaging.
1. Certification of each seed mixture for sod, identifying sod source, including name and
telephone number of supplier.
EHAF – CO – 01/03 -1 - Section 02930

May 2012 - Rev.(0) Lawns and Grasses
D. Certification by product manufacturer that the following products supplied comply with
requirements:
1. Limestone.
2. Fertilizers.
E. Qualification data for firms and persons specified in the "Quality Assurance" Article to
demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with
project names and addresses, names and address of architects and owners, and other
information specified.
F. Material test reports from qualified independent testing agency indicating and interpreting
test results relative to compliance of the following materials with requirements indicated.
1. Analysis of existing surface soil.
2. Analysis of imported topsoil.
G. Planting schedule indicating anticipated dates and locations for each type of planting.
H. Maintenance instructions recommending procedures to be established by Owner for
maintenance of landscaping during an entire year. Submit before expiration of required
maintenance periods.
1.04 Quality Assurance
A. Installer Qualifications
Engage an experienced Installer who has completed landscaping work similar in material,
design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and with a record of successful grass
establishment.
1. Installer's Field Supervision: Require Installer to maintain an experienced full-time
Consultant on the Project site during times that grass planting is in progress.
1.05 Testing Agency Qualifications
A. To qualify for acceptance, an independent testing agency must demonstrate to Architect's

satisfaction, based on evaluation of agency-submitted criteria conforming to ASTM E 699, that
it has the experience and capability to satisfactorily conduct the testing indicated without
delaying the Work.
1.06 Topsoil Analysis
A. Furnish a soil analysis made by a qualified independent soil-testing agency stating

percentages of organic matter, inorganic matter (silt, clay, and sand), deleterious material,
pH, and mineral and plant-nutrient content of topsoil.
1. Report suitability of topsoil for lawn growth. State recommended quantities of nitrogen,
phosphorus, and potash nutrients and any limestone, aluminum sulfate, or other soil
amendments to be added to produce a satisfactory topsoil.
1.07 Preinstallation Conference
A. Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements of Division 1 Section "Project
Meetings."
EHAF – CO – 01/03 -2 - Section 02930

1.08 Delivery, Storage, And Handling
A. Seed
Deliver seed in original sealed, labeled, and undamaged containers.
B. Sod
Harvest, deliver, store, and handle sod according to the requirements of the American Sod
Producers Association's (ASPA) "Specifications for Turfgrass Sod Materials and
Transplanting/Installing."
1.09 Coordination And Scheduling
A. Planting Season
Sow lawn seed and install sod during normal planting seasons for type of lawn work
required. Correlate planting with specified maintenance periods to provide required
maintenance from date of Substantial Completion.
B. Weather Limitations
Proceed with planting only when existing and forecast weather conditions are suitable for
work.
1.10 Maintenance
A. Begin maintenance of lawns immediately after each area is planted and continue until
acceptable lawn is established, but for not less than the following periods:
1. Seeded Lawns: 60 days after date of Substantial Completion.

a. When full maintenance period has not elapsed before end of planting season, or if
lawn is not fully established at that time, continue maintenance during next planting
season.
2. Sodded Lawns: 30 days after date of Substantial Completion.
3. Plug-Sodded Lawns: 30 days after date of Substantial Completion.
4. Sprigged Lawns: 30 days after date of Substantial Completion.
B. Maintain and establish lawns by watering, fertilizing, weeding, mowing, trimming, replanting,
and other operations. Roll, regrade, and replant bare or eroded areas and remulch to produce
a uniformly smooth lawn.
1. Replant bare areas with same materials specified for lawns.

2. Add new mulch in areas where mulch has been disturbed by wind or maintenance
operations sufficiently to nullify its purpose. Anchor as required to prevent displacement.
C. Watering
Provide and maintain temporary piping, hoses, and lawn-watering equipment to convey water
from sources and to keep lawns uniformly moist to a depth of 100 mm.
1. Lay out temporary lawn-watering system and arrange watering schedule to prevent
wilting, puddling, erosion, and displacement of seed or mulch. Lay out temporary
EHAF – CO – 01/03 -3 - Section 02930

watering system to avoid walking over muddy or newly seeded, plugged, or sprigged
areas.
2. Water lawn at the minimum rate of 25 mm per week.
D. Mow lawns as soon as there is enough top growth to cut with mower set at specified height for
principal species planted. Repeat mowing as required to maintain specified height without
cutting more than 40 percent of the grass height. Remove no more than 40 percent of grass-
leaf growth in initial or subsequent mowings. Do not delay mowing until grass blades bend
over and become matted. Do not mow when grass is wet. Schedule initial and subsequent
mowings to maintain following grass height:
1. Mow grass to 12 mm high or less.

2. Mow grass from 12 to 25 mm high.
4. Mow grass from to 50 mm high.
E. Postfertilization
Apply fertilizer to lawn after first mowing and when grass is dry.
1. Use fertilizer that will provide actual nitrogen of at least 0.5 kg per 100 sq. m of lawn area.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 Seed
A. Grass Seed: Fresh, clean, dry, new-crop seed complying with the Association of Official Seed
Analysts' "Rules for Testing Seeds" for purity and germination tolerances.
1. Seed Mixture: Provide seed of grass species and varieties, proportions by weight, and
minimum percentages of purity, germination, and maximum percentage of weed seed
as indicated on Schedules at the end of this Section.
2.02 Sod
A. Sod Certified
Turfgrass sod complying with ASPA specifications for machine-cut thickness, size, strength,
moisture content, and mowed height, and free of weeds and undesirable native grasses.
Provide viable sod of uniform density, color, and texture of the following turfgrass species,
strongly rooted, and capable of vigorous growth and development when planted.
1. Species: Provide sod of grass species and varieties, proportions by weight, and
minimum percentages of purity, germination, and maximum percentage of weed seed as
indicated on Schedules at the end of this Section.
B. Sod Plugs Certified
Turfgrass sod complying with ASPA specifications for machine-cut thickness, size, strength,
moisture content, and mowed height, and free of weeds and undesirable native grasses.
Provide sod plugs from viable sod of the following turfgrass species cut into square or round
EHAF – CO – 01/03 -4 - Section 02930

plugs of size indicated, strongly rooted, and capable of vigorous growth and development
when planted.
1. Species: Bermudagrass (Cynodon dactylon).

2. Species: Carpetgrass (Axonopus affinis).
3. Species: Centipedegrass (Eremochloa ophiuroides).
4. Species: St. Augustinegrass (Stenotaphrum secundatum).
5. Species: Zoysiagrass (Zoysia japonica).
6. Species: Zoysiagrass (Zoysia matrella).
7. Size: 50 mm.
8. Size: 75 mm.
9. Size: 100 mm.
C. Sod Sprigs
Healthy living stems, rhizomes, or stolons with a minimum of 2 nodes and any attached roots
free of soil, of the following turfgrass species:
1. Species: Bermudagrass (Cynodon dactylon).

2. Species: Carpetgrass (Axonopus affinis).
3. Species: Centipedegrass (Eremochloa ophiuroides).
4. Species: St. Augustinegrass (Stenotaphrum secundatum).
5. Species: Zoysiagrass (Zoysia japonica).
6. Species: Zoysiagrass (Zoysia matrella).
2.03 Topsoil
A. ASTM D 5268, pH range of 5.5 to 7, 4 percent organic material minimum, free of stones25
mm or larger in any dimension, and other extraneous materials harmful to plant growth.
1. Topsoil Source: Reuse surface soil stockpiled on the site. Verify suitability of surface
soil to produce topsoil meeting requirements and amend when necessary. Supplement
with imported topsoil when quantities are insufficient. Clean topsoil of roots, plants,
sods, stones, clay lumps, and other extraneous materials harmful to plant growth.
2. Topsoil Source: Import topsoil from off-site sources. Obtain topsoil from naturally well-
drained sites where topsoil occurs at least 100 mm deep; do not obtain from bogs or
marshes.
3. Topsoil Source: Amend existing surface soil to produce topsoil. Supplement with
imported topsoil when required.
2.04 Soil Amendments
A. Lime
ASTM C 602, Class T, agricultural limestone containing a minimum 80 percent calcium
carbonate equivalent, with a minimum 99 percent passing a 2.36 mm sieve and a minimum
75 percent passing a 50 micrometer sieve.
1. Provide lime in the form of dolomitic limestone.
B. Aluminum Sulfate
Commercial grade, unadulterated.
EHAF – CO – 01/03 -5 - Section 02930

C. Sand
Clean, washed, natural or manufactured sand, free of toxic materials.
D. Perlite
Horticultural perlite, soil amendment grade.
E. Peat Humus
Finely divided or granular texture, with a pH range of 6 to 7.5, composed of partially
decomposed moss peat (other than sphagnum), peat humus, or reed-sedge peat.
F. Sawdust or Ground-Bark Humus

Decomposed, nitrogen-treated, of uniform texture, free of chips, stones, sticks, soil, or toxic
materials.
1. When site treated, mix with at least 2.4 kg of ammonium nitrate or 4 kg of ammonium
sulfate per cu. m of loose sawdust or ground bark.
G. Manure
Well-rotted, unleached stable or cattle manure containing not more than 25 percent by volume
of straw, sawdust, or other bedding materials; free of toxic substances, stones, sticks, soil, weed
seed, and material harmful to plant growth.
H. Herbicides
EPA registered and approved, of type recommended by manufacturer.
I. Water
Potable.
2.05 Fertilizer
A. Bonemeal
Commercial, raw, finely ground; minimum of 4 percent nitrogen and 20 percent phosphoric
acid.
B. Superphosphate
Commercial, phosphate mixture, soluble; minimum of 20 percent available phosphoric acid.
2.05 Commercial Fertilizer
A. Commercial-grade complete fertilizer of neutral character, consisting of fast- and slow-release

nitrogen, 50 percent derived from natural organic sources of urea-form, phosphorous, and
potassium in the following composition:
1. Composition: 0.5 kg per 100 sq. m of actual nitrogen, 4 percent phosphorous, and 2
percent potassium, by weight.
3. Composition: Nitrogen, phosphorous, and potassium in amounts recommended in soil

reports from a qualified soil-testing agency.
EHAF – CO – 01/03 -6 - Section 02930

2.06 Slow-Release Fertilizer
A. Granular fertilizer consisting of 50 percent water-insoluble nitrogen, phosphorus, and

1. Composition: 20 percent nitrogen, 10 percent phosphorous, and 10 percent potassium,

by weight.

2.07 Mulches
A. Straw Mulch
Provide air-dry, clean, mildew- and seed-free, salt hay or threshed straw of wheat, rye, oats,
or barley.
B. Peat Mulch
Provide peat moss in natural, shredded, or granulated form, of fine texture, with a pH range of
4 to 6 and a water-absorbing capacity of 1100 to 2000 percent.
C. Fiber Mulch
Biodegradable dyed-wood cellulose-fiber mulch, nontoxic, free of plant growth- or

germination-inhibitors, with maximum moisture content of 15 percent and a pH range of 4.5
to 6.5.
D. Asphalt Emulsion Tackifier
Asphalt emulsion, ASTM D 977, Grade SS-1, nontoxic and free of plant growth- or
germination-inhibitors.
E. Nonasphaltic Tackifier
Colloidal tackifier recommended by fiber-mulch manufacturer for slurry application, nontoxic

and free of plant growth- or germination-inhibitors.
2.09 Erosion-Control Materials
A. Blankets
Biodegradable wood excelsior, straw, or coconut-fiber mat enclosed in a photodegradable

plastic mesh. Include manufacturer's recommended steel wire staples, 150 mm long.
B. Fiber Mesh
Biodegradable twisted jute or spun-coir mesh, 0.5 kg per sq. m minimum, with 50 to 65
percent open area. Include manufacturer's recommended steel wire staples,150 mm long.
EHAF – CO – 01/03 -7 - Section 02930

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 Examination
A. Examine areas to receive lawns and grass for compliance with requirements and for
conditions affecting performance of work of this Section. Do not proceed with installation until
unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.02 Preparation
A. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities, trees, shrubs, and
plantings from damage caused by planting operations.
1. Protect adjacent and adjoining areas from hydroseed overspraying.
B. Provide erosion-control measures to prevent erosion or displacement of soils and discharge of

soil-bearing water runoff or airborne dust to adjacent properties and walkways.
3.02 Planting Soil Preparation
A. Limit subgrade preparation to areas that will be planted in the immediate future.
B. Loosen subgrade to a minimum depth of 100 mm. Remove stones larger than 38 mm in any
dimension and sticks, roots, rubbish, and other extraneous matter.
C. Mixsoil amendments and fertilizers with topsoil at rates indicated. Delay mixing fertilizer if
planting does not follow placing of planting soil within a few days. Either mix soil before
spreading or apply soil amendments on surface of spread topsoil and mix thoroughly into top
100mm of topsoil before planting
1. A "Planting Soil Amendments Schedule" is included at the end of this Section.

2. Mix lime with dry soil prior to mixing fertilizer.
3. Apply superphosphate fertilizer directly to subgrade before tilling, at the rate indicated.
D. Spread planting soil mixture to depth required to meet thickness, grades, and elevations shown,
after light rolling and natural settlement. Do not spread if planting soil or subgrade is frozen.
1. Place approximately 1/2 the thickness of planting soil mixture required. Work into top of
loosened subgrade to create a transition layer and then place remainder of planting soil
mixture.
2. Allow for sod thickness in areas to be sodded.
E. Preparation of Unchanged Grades: Where lawns are to be planted in areas unaltered or

undisturbed by excavating, grading, or surface soil stripping operations, prepare soil as follows:
1. Remove and dispose of existing grass, vegetation, and turf. Do not turn over into soil
being prepared for lawns.
2. Till surface soil to a depth of at least 150 mm. Apply required soil amendments and
initial fertilizers and mix thoroughly into top 100 mm of soil. Trim high areas and fill in
depressions. Till soil to a homogenous mixture of fine texture.
EHAF – CO – 01/03 -8 - Section 02930

3. Clean surface soil of roots, plants, sod, stones, clay lumps, and other extraneous
materials harmful to plant growth.
4. Remove waste material, including grass, vegetation, and turf, and legally dispose of it
off the Owner's property.
F. Grade lawn and grass areas to a smooth, even surface with loose, uniformly fine texture. Roll
and rake, remove ridges, and fill depressions to meet finish grades. Limit fine grading to areas
that can be planted in the immediate future. Remove trash, debris, stones larger than 38 mm in
any dimension, and other objects that may interfere with planting or maintenance operations.
G. Moisten prepared lawn areas before planting when soil is dry. Water thoroughly and allow
surface to dry before planting. Do not create muddy soil.
H. Restore prepared areas if eroded or otherwise disturbed after fine grading and before planting.
3.03 Seeding New Lawns
A. Sow seed with a spreader or a seeding machine
Do not broadcast or drop seed when wind velocity exceeds 8 km/h. Evenly distribute seed by
sowing equal quantities in 2 directions at right angles to each other.
1. Do not use wet seed or seed that is moldy or otherwise damaged in transit or storage.
B. Sow seed at the following rates
1. Seeding Rate: 1 kg per 100 sq. m.

2. Seeding Rate: 1.5 to 2 kg per 100 sq. m.
3. Seeding Rate: 2 to 4 kg per 100 sq. m.
C. Rake seed lightly into top 3 mm of topsoil, roll lightly, and water with fine spray.
D. Protect seeded slopes exceeding 1:4 against erosion with erosion-control blankets installed
and stapled according to manufacturer's recommendations.
E. Protect seeded slopes exceeding 1:6 against erosion with jute or coir-fiber erosion-control
mesh installed and stapled according to manufacturer's recommendations.
F. Protect seeded areas with slopes less than 1:6 against erosion by spreading straw mulch after
completion of seeding operations. Spread uniformly at a minimum rate of 45 kg per 100 sq. m
to form a continuous blanket 38 mm loose depth over seeded areas. Spread by hand, blower,
or other suitable equipment.
1. Anchor straw mulch by crimping into topsoil by suitable mechanical equipment.

2. Anchor straw mulch by spraying with asphalt-emulsion tackifier at the rate of 41 to 53 L
per 100 sq. m. Take precautions to prevent damage or staining of structures or other
plantings adjacent to mulched areas. Immediately clean damaged or stained areas.
G. Protect seeded areas against hot, dry weather or drying winds by applying peat mulch within
24 hours after completion of seeding operations. Soak and scatter uniformly to a depth of
4.8 mm thick and roll to a smooth surface.
EHAF – CO – 01/03 -9 - Section 02930

3.04 Hydroseeding New Lawns
A. Hydroseeding
Mix specified seed, fertilizer, and fiber mulch in water, using equipment specifically designed
for hydroseed application. Continue mixing until uniformly blended into homogenous slurry
suitable for hydraulic application.
1. Mix slurry with nonasphaltic tackifier.
2. Apply slurry uniformly to all areas to be seeded in a 1-step process. Apply mulch at the
minimum rate of 16.5 kg per 100 sq. m dry weight but not less than the rate required to
obtain specified seed-sowing rate.
3. Apply slurry uniformly to all areas to be seeded in a 2-step process. Apply first slurry
application at the minimum rate of 5.5 kg per 100 sq. m dry weight but not less than the
rate required to obtain specified seed-sowing rate. Apply slurry cover coat of fiber mulch
at a rate of 11 kg per 100 sq. m.
3.06 Sodding New Lawns
A. Lay sod within 24 hours of stripping. Do not lay sod if dormant or if ground is frozen.
B. Lay sod to form a solid mass with tightly fitted joints. Butt ends and sides of sod; do not
stretch or overlap. Stagger sod strips or pads to offset joints in adjacent courses. Avoid
damage to subgrade or sod during installation. Tamp and roll lightly to ensure contact with
subgrade, eliminate air pockets, and form a smooth surface. Work sifted soil or fine sand into
minor cracks between pieces of sod; remove excess to avoid smothering sod and adjacent
grass.
1. Lay sod across angle of slopes exceeding 1:3.
2. Anchor sod on slopes exceeding 1:6 with wood pegs spaced as recommended by sod
manufacturer but not less than 2 anchors per sod strip to prevent slippage.
C. Saturate sod with fine water spray within 2 hours of planting. During first week, water daily or
more frequently as necessary to maintain moist soil to a minimum depth of 38 mm below the
sod.
3.07 Plug Sodding New Lawns
A. Cut plugs 50 to 100 mm in diameter or square, retaining maximum amount of soil on roots. Do
not tear or rip plug from sod mass. Keep roots moist and plant plugs immediately after cutting.
B. Plant plugs in holes or furrows. On slopes (if any), contour furrows to near level to prevent
washing away in heavy rains.
1. Plug Spacing: 300 mm apart in both directions.

2. Plug Spacing: 450 mm apart in both directions.
EHAF – CO – 01/03 -10 - Section 02930

3.08 Sprig Planting New Lawns
A. Plant freshly shredded sod sprigs in furrows approximately 75 mm deep. Place individual
sprigs with roots and portions of stem in moistened soil and fill furrows without covering
growing tips. Lightly roll and firm soil around sprigs after planting.
B. Broadcast sprigs uniformly over prepared surface and mechanically force sprigs approximately
50 mm into moistened soil. Lightly roll and firm soil around sprigs after planting.
1. Sprig Spacing: 150 mm apart in both directions.

2. Sprig Spacing: 300 mm apart in both directions.
C. Water sprigs immediately after planting and keep moist by frequent watering until well rooted.
3.09 Reconditioning Lawns
A. Recondition existing lawn areas damaged by Contractor's operations, including storage of

materials or equipment and movement of vehicles. Also recondition lawn areas where
settlement or washouts occur or where minor regrading is required.
1. Recondition other existing lawn areas.
B. Remove sod and vegetation from diseased or unsatisfactory lawn areas; do not bury into soil.
Remove topsoil containing foreign materials resulting from Contractor's operations, including
oil drippings, fuel spills, stone, gravel, and other construction materials, and replace with new
topsoil.
C. Where substantial lawn remains, mow, dethatch, core aerate, and rake. Remove weeds
before seeding. Where weeds are extensive, apply selective herbicides as required. Do not
use pre-emergence herbicides.
D. Remove waste and foreign materials, including weeds, soil cores, grass, vegetation, and turf,
and legally dispose of it off the Owner's property.
E. Till stripped, bare, and compacted areas thoroughly to a depth of 150 mm.
F. Apply required soil amendments and initial fertilizers and mix thoroughly into top 100 mm of
soil. Provide new planting soil as required to fill low spots and meet new finish grades.
G. Apply seed and protect with straw mulch as required for new lawns.
H. Apply sod as required for new lawns
I. Water newly planted areas and keep moist until new grass is established.
3.10 Satisfactory Lawn
A. Seeded lawns will be satisfactory provided requirements, including maintenance, have been
met and a healthy, uniform, close stand of grass is established, free of weeds, bare spots
exceeding 125 by 125 mm, and surface irregularities.
EHAF – CO – 01/03 -11 - Section 02930

B. Sodded lawns will be satisfactory provided requirements, including maintenance, have been
met and healthy, well-rooted, even-colored, viable lawn is established, free of weeds, open
joints, bare areas, and surface irregularities.
C. Plugged lawns will be satisfactory provided requirements, including maintenance, have been
met and the required number of plugs are established as well-rooted, viable patches of grass;
and areas between plugs are free of weeds and other undesirable vegetation.
D. Sprigged lawns will be satisfactory provided requirements, including maintenance, have been
met and the required number of sprigs are established as well-rooted, viable plants; and areas
between sprigs are free of weeds and other undesirable vegetation.
E. Replant lawns that do not meet requirements and continue maintenance until lawns are
satisfactory.
3.11 Cleanup And Protection
A. Promptly remove soil and debris created by lawn work from paved areas. Clean wheels of
vehicles before leaving site to avoid tracking soil onto surface of roads, walks, or other paved
areas.
B. Erect barricades and warning signs as required to protect newly planted areas from traffic.
Maintain barricades throughout maintenance period until lawn is established.
3.12 Planting Soil Amendments Schedule
A. Lawns
Provide soil amendments in not less than the following quantities:
1. Ratio of loose peat humus to topsoil by volume: <INSERT RATIO.>

2. Weight of lime per 100 sq. m: <INSERT WEIGHT.>
3. Weight of bonemeal per 100 sq. m: <INSERT WEIGHT.>
4. Weight of superphosphate per 100 sq. m: <INSERT WEIGHT.>
5. Weight of potash per 100 sq. m: <INSERT WEIGHT.>
6. Weight of commercial fertilizer per 100 sq. m: <INSERT WEIGHT.>
3.13 Seed Mixtures Schedule
A. Full-Sun Mixture
Provide certified grass-seed blends or mixes, proportioned by weight, as follows:
Proportion Name Min. Pct. Min. Pct. Max. Pct.

Germ. Pure Sd. Weed Sd.
00 pct. Bermudagrass 80 85 0.50

(Cynodon dactylon)
B. Sun and Partial Shade
EHAF – CO – 01/03 -12 - Section 02930

Proportion Name Min. Pct. Min. Pct. Pure Max. Pct.

Germ. Sd. Weed Sd.
50 pct. Kentucky bluegrass 80 85 0.50

(Poa pratensis)
30 pct. Chewings red fescue 85 98 0.50
(Festuca rubra variety)
10 pct. Perennial rye grass 90 98 0.50
(Lolium perenne)
10 pct. Redtop 85 92 1.00
(Agrostis alba)
C. Heavy Shade
Proportion Name Min. Pct. Min. Pct. Pure Max. Pct.

Germ. Sd. Weed Sd.
50 pct. Chewings red fescue 85 98 0.50

(Festuca rubra variety)
35 pct. Rough bluegrass 80 85 1.00
(Poa trivialis)
15 pct. Redtop 85 92 1.00
(Agrostis alba)
END OF SECTION
EHAF – CO – 01/03 -13 - Section 02930

SECTION 02955
TREES AND SHRUBS
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.02 SUMMARY
1. Trees.
2. Shrubs.
3. Topsoil and soil amendments.
4. Fertilizers and mulches.
5. Stakes and guys.
6. Landscape edgings.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. GENERAL
1. Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division1
Specification Sections.
2. Product certificates signed by manufacturers certifying that their products comply with
specified requirements.
a. Manufacturer's certified analysis for standard products.
b. Analysis for other materials by a recognized laboratory made according to methods
established by the Association of Official Analytical Chemists, where applicable.
3. Samples of each of the following:
a. 2 kg of mineral mulch for each color and texture of stone required for Project, in
labeled plastic bags.
b. Edging materials and accessories to verify color selected.
4. Qualification data for firms and persons specified in the "Quality Assurance" Article to
demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with
project names and addresses, names and address of architects and owners, and other
information specified.
5. Planting schedule indicating anticipated dates and locations for each type of planting.
6. Maintenance instructions recommending procedures to be established by Owner for
maintenance of landscape work during entire year. Submit before expiration of required
maintenance periods.
EHAF – CO – 01/03 -1 - Section 02955

May 2012 - Rev.(0) Trees And Shrubs
A. INSTALLER QUALIFICATIONS
Engage an experienced Installer who has completed landscaping work similar in material,
design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and with a record of successful tree and
shrub establishment.
1. Installer's Field Supervision: Require Installer to maintain an experienced full-time

supervisor on the Project site during times that tree and shrub planting is in progress.
B. TESTING AGENCY QUALIFICATIONS
1. To qualify for acceptance, an independent testing agency must demonstrate to

Architect's satisfaction, based on evaluation of agency-submitted criteria conforming to
ASTM E 699, that it has the experience and capability to satisfactorily conduct the
testing indicated without delaying the Work.
2. Provide quality, size, genus, species, and variety of trees and shrubs indicated,
complying with applicable requirements of ANSI Z60.1 "American Standard for Nursery
Stock."
3. Selection of trees and shrubs purchased under allowances will be made by Architect,
who will tag stock at their place of growth before they are prepared for transplanting.
C. TOPSOIL ANALYSIS
Furnish a soil analysis made by a qualified independent soil-testing agency stating

percentages of organic matter, inorganic matter (silt, clay, and sand), deleterious material, pH,
and mineral and plant-nutrient content of topsoil.
1. Report suitability of topsoil for growth of applicable planting material. State

recommended quantities of nitrogen, phosphorus, and potash nutrients and any
limestone, aluminum sulfate, or other soil amendments to be added to produce a
satisfactory topsoil.
D. MEASUREMENTS
Measure trees and shrubs according to ANSI Z60.1 with branches and trunks or canes in
their normal position. Do not prune to obtain required sizes. Take caliper measurements
150 mm above ground for trees up to 100-mm caliper size, and 300 mm above ground for
larger sizes. Measure main body of tree or shrub for height and spread; do not measure
branches or roots tip-to-tip.
E. OBSERVATION
Architect may observe trees and shrubs either at place of growth or at site before planting for
compliance with requirements for genus, species, variety, size and quality. Architect retains
right to observe trees and shrubs further for size and condition of balls and root systems,
insects, injuries, and latent defects and to reject unsatisfactory or defective material at any
time during progress of work. Remove rejected trees or shrubs immediately from Project site.
EHAF – CO – 01/03 -2 - Section 02955

F. PREINSTALLATION CONFERENCE
Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements of Division1 Section "Project
Meetings."
A. Deliver freshly dug trees and shrubs. Do not prune before delivery, except as approved by
Architect. Protect bark, branches, and root systems from sun scald, drying, sweating,
whipping, and other handling and tying damage. Do not bend or bind-tie trees or shrubs in
such a manner as to destroy natural shape. Provide protective covering during delivery. Do
not drop trees and shrubs during delivery.
1. Immediately after digging bare-root stock, pack root system in wet straw, hay, or other
suitable material to keep root system moist until planting.
B. Handle balled and burlapped stock by the root ball.
C. Deliver trees and shrubs after preparations for planting have been completed and install
immediately. If planting is delayed more than 6 hours after delivery, set trees and shrubs in
shade, protect from weather and mechanical damage, and keep roots moist.
1. Heel-in bare-root stock. Soak roots in water for 2 hours if dried out.
2. Set balled stock on ground and cover ball with soil, peat moss, sawdust, or other
acceptable material.
3. Do not remove container-grown stock from containers before time of planting.
4. Water root systems of trees and shrubs stored on site with a fine-mist spray. Water as
often as necessary to maintain root systems in a moist condition.
1.06 COORDINATION AND SCHEDULING
A. Coordinate planting of trees and shrubs during normal planting seasons for such work in
location of Project.
1. Plant frost-tender trees and shrubs only after danger of frost is past or before frost
season to allow establishment before first frost. Do not plant in frozen ground.
B. Coordination with Lawns: Plant trees and shrubs after finish grades are established and
before planting lawns, unless otherwise acceptable to Architect.
1. When planting trees and shrubs after lawns, protect lawn areas and promptly repair
damage caused by planting operations.
1.07 WARRANTY
A. GENERAL WARRANTY
The special warranty specified in this Article shall not deprive the Owner of other rights the
Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to,
and run concurrent with, other warranties made by the Contractor under requirements of the
Contract Documents.
EHAF – CO – 01/03 -3 - Section 02955

B. SPECIAL WARRANTY
1. Warrant living trees and shrubs for a period of one year after date of Substantial
Completion, against defects including death and unsatisfactory growth, except for defects
resulting from lack of adequate maintenance, neglect, or abuse by Owner, abnormal
weather conditions unusual for warranty period, or incidents which are beyond Contractor's
control.
2. Remove and replace dead trees and shrubs immediately unless required to plant in the
succeeding planting season.
3. Replace trees and shrubs that are more than 25 percent dead or in an unhealthy condition
at end of warranty period.
4. A limit of one replacement of each tree and shrub will be required, except for losses or
replacements due to failure to comply with requirements.
1.08 MAINTENANCE
A. Maintain trees and shrubs by pruning, cultivating, watering, weeding, fertilizing, restoring
planting saucers, tightening and repairing stakes and guy supports, and resetting to proper
grades or vertical position, as required to establish healthy, viable plantings. Spray as
required to keep trees and shrubs free of insects and disease. Restore or replace damaged
tree wrappings. Maintain trees and shrubs for the following period:
1. Maintenance Period: 12 months following Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 TREE AND SHRUB MATERIAL
A. GENERAL
Unless otherwise indicated, furnish nursery-grown trees and shrubs conforming to
ANSI Z60.1, with healthy root systems developed by transplanting or root pruning. Provide
well-shaped, fully branched, healthy, vigorous stock free of disease, insects, eggs, larvae,
and defects such as knots, sun scald, injuries, abrasions, and disfigurement.
B. GRADE
1. Provide trees and shrubs of sizes and grades conforming to ANSI Z60.1 for type of trees
and shrubs required. Trees and shrubs of a larger size may be used if acceptable to
Architect, with a proportionate increase in size of roots or balls.
2. Label each tree and shrub with securely attached, waterproof tag bearing legible
designation of botanical and common name.
3. Label at least 1 tree and 1 shrub of each variety and caliper with a securely attached,
waterproof tag bearing legible designation of botanical and common name.
4. Where formal arrangements or consecutive order of trees or shrubs are shown, select
stock for uniform height and spread, and number label to assure symmetry in planting.
EHAF – CO – 01/03 -4 - Section 02955

2.02 SHADE AND FLOWERING TREES
A. SHADE TREES
Single-stem trees with straight trunk, well-balanced crown, and intact leader, of height and
caliper indicated, conforming to ANSI Z60.1 for type of trees required.
1. Branching Height: 1/3 to 1/2 of tree height.
2. Branching Height: 1/2 of tree height.
B. SMALL TREES
1. Small upright or spreading type, branched or pruned naturally according to species and
type, and with relationship of caliper, height, and branching recommended by ANSI Z60.1,
and stem form as follows:
a. Form: Single stem.
b. Form: Multistem, clump, with 2 or more main stems.
c. Form: Multistem, shrub, with multiple stems.
2. Provide balled and burlapped trees.

3. Provide bare-root trees.
4. Provide balled and burlapped trees except where bare-root trees are indicated.
a. Container-grown trees will be acceptable in lieu of balled and burlapped trees subject to
meeting ANSI Z60.1 limitations for container stock.
2.03 DECIDUOUS SHRUBS
A. FORM AND SIZE
1. Deciduous shrubs with not less than the minimum number of canes required by and
measured according to ANSI Z60.1 for type, shape, and height of shrub.
2. Provide balled and burlapped deciduous shrubs.
3. Provide bare-root deciduous shrubs.
4. Provide balled and burlapped deciduous shrubs except where bare-root deciduous shrubs
are indicated.
1. Container-grown deciduous shrubs will be acceptable in lieu of balled and burlapped
deciduous shrubs subject to meeting ANSI Z60.1 limitations for container stock.
2.04 CONIFEROUS EVERGREENS
A. FORM AND SIZE
Normal-quality, well-balanced, coniferous evergreens, of type, height, spread, and shape

required, conforming to ANSI Z60.1.
EHAF – CO – 01/03 -5 - Section 02955

B. FORM AND SIZE
1. Specimen-quality, exceptionally heavy, tightly knit, symmetrically shaped coniferous

evergreens of the following grade:
a. Heavy Grade: "X."
b. Heavy Grade: "XX."
c. Heavy Grade: "XXX."
2. Provide balled and burlapped coniferous evergreens.
a. Container-grown coniferous evergreens will be acceptable in lieu of balled and

burlapped coniferous evergreens subject to meeting ANSI Z60.1 limitations for
container stock.
2.05 BROADLEAF EVERGREENS
A. FORM AND SIZE
1. Normal-quality, well-balanced, broadleaf evergreens, of type, height, spread, and shape

required, conforming to ANSI Z60.1.
2. Provide balled and burlapped broadleaf evergreens.
1. Container-grown broadleaf evergreens will be acceptable in lieu of balled and
burlapped broadleaf evergreens subject to meeting ANSI Z60.1 limitations for container
stock.
2.06 BALLED AND BURLAPPED STOCK
A. Provide trees and shrubs dug with firm, natural ball of earth in which they are grown.
B. BALL SIZE
Not less than sizes indicated.
C. BALL SIZE
Not less than diameter and depth recommended by ANSI Z60.1 for type and size of tree or
shrub required. Increase ball size or modify ratio of depth to diameter to encompass enough
fibrous and feeding-root system necessary for full recovery of trees and shrubs.
D. WRAP, TIE, AND RIGIDLY
Support earth ball as recommended by ANSI Z60.1 for size of balls required. Drum-lace balls
with a diameter of 760 mm or greater.
E. CONTAINER-GROWN STOCK
Provide healthy, vigorous, well-rooted trees or shrubs established in container. Provide

balled and burlapped stock when required trees or shrubs exceed maximum size
recommended by ANSI Z60.1 for container-grown stock.
EHAF – CO – 01/03 -6 - Section 02955

1. Established container stock is defined as a tree or shrub transplanted into container

and grown in container long enough to develop new fibrous roots, so that root mass will
retain its shape and hold together when removed from container.
F. CONTAINERS
Rigid containers that will hold ball shape and protect root mass during shipping. Provide trees
and shrubs established in containers of not less than minimum sizes recommended by
ANSI Z60.1 for kind, type, and size of trees and shrubs required.
2.07 BARE-ROOT STOCK
A. Provide trees and shrubs with a well-branched, fibrous-root system developed by transplanting
or root pruning and with not less than minimum root spread recommended by ANSI Z60.1 for
kind and size of trees and shrubs required.
2.08 TOPSOIL
A. ASTM D 5268, fertile, friable, naturally loamy, pH range of 5.5 to 7, 4 percent organic material
minimum, free of stones 25 mm or larger in any dimension, and other extraneous materials
harmful to plant growth.
1. Topsoil Source: Reuse surface soil stockpiled on the site. Verify suitability of surface
soil to produce topsoil meeting requirements and amend when necessary. Supplement
with imported topsoil when quantities are insufficient. Clean topsoil of roots, plants,
sods, stones, clay lumps, and other extraneous materials harmful to plant growth.
2. Topsoil Source: Import topsoil from off-site sources. Obtain topsoil from naturally well-
drained sites where topsoil occurs at least 100 mm deep; do not obtain from bogs or
marshes.
2.09 TOPSOIL SOURCE

A. Amend existing surface soil to produce topsoil. Supplement with imported topsoil
when required.
2.10 SOIL AMENDMENTS
A. LIME
ASTM C 602, Class T, agricultural limestone containing a minimum 80 percent calcium
carbonate equivalent, with a minimum 99 percent passing a 2.36 mm sieve and a minimum 75
percent passing a 250 micrometer sieve.
1. Provide lime in the form of dolomitic limestone.
B. ALUMINUM SULFATE
Commercial grade, unadulterated.
C. SAND
Clean, washed, natural or manufactured sand, free of toxic materials.
EHAF – CO – 01/03 -7 - Section 02955

D. PERLITE
Horticultural perlite, soil amendment grade.
E. PEAT HUMUS
Finely divided or granular texture, with a pH range of 6 to 7.5, composed of partially
decomposed moss peat (other than sphagnum), peat humus, or reed-sedge peat.
F. PEAT HUMUS
For acid-tolerant trees and shrubs, provide moss peat with a pH range of 3.2 to 4.5, coarse
fibrous texture, medium-divided sphagnum moss peat or reed-sedge peat.
G. SAWDUST OR GROUND-BARK HUMUS

Decomposed, nitrogen-treated, of uniform texture, free of chips, stones, sticks, soil, or toxic
materials.
1. When site treated, mix with at least 2.4 kg of ammonium nitrate or 4 kg of ammonium
sulfate per cu. m of loose sawdust or ground bark.
H. MANURE
Well-rotted, unleached stable or cattle manure containing not more than 25 percent by volume
of straw, sawdust, or other bedding materials; free of toxic substances, stones, sticks, soil,
weed seed, and material harmful to plant growth.
I. HERBICIDES
EPA registered and approved, of type recommended by manufacturer.
J. WATER
Potable.
2.11 FERTILIZER
A. BONEMEAL
Commercial, raw, finely ground; minimum of 4 percent nitrogen and 20 percent phosphoric
acid.
B. SUPERPHOSPHATE
Commercial, phosphate mixture, soluble; minimum of 20 percent available phosphoric acid.
C. COMMERCIAL FERTILIZER
Commercial-grade complete fertilizer of neutral character, consisting of fast- and slow-release
nitrogen, 50 percent derived from natural organic sources of urea-form, phosphorous, and
1. Composition5 percent nitrogen, 10 percent phosphorous, and 5 percent potassium, by
weight.
EHAF – CO – 01/03 -8 - Section 02955

D. SLOW-RELEASE FERTILIZER
Granular fertilizer consisting of 50 percent water-insoluble nitrogen, phosphorus, and
1. Composition: 5 percent nitrogen, 10 percent phosphorous, and 5 percent potassium,

by weight.
2.12 MULCHES
A. ORGANIC MULCH
Organic mulch, free from deleterious materials and suitable as a top dressing of trees and
shrubs, consisting of one of the following:
1. Type: Shredded hardwood.

2. Type: Ground or shredded bark.
3. Type: Pine straw.
4. Type: Salt hay or threshed straw.
5. Type: Wood and bark chips.
6. Type: Pine needles.
7. Type: Peanut, pecan, and cocoa-bean shells.
B. MINERAL MULCH
Hard, durable stone, washed free of loam, sand, clay, and other foreign substances, of
following type, size range, and color:
1. Type: Rounded riverbed gravel or smooth-faced stone.
2. Type: Crushed stone or gravel.
3. Type: Marble or granite chips.
C. SIZE RANGE
38 mm maximum, 19 mm minimum.
D. SIZE RANGE
19 mm maximum, 6 mm minimum.
E. COLOR
Uniform tan-beige color range, acceptable to Architect.
F. COLOR
Readily available natural gravel color range.
2.13 WEED-CONTROL BARRIERS
A. SHEET POLYETHYLENE
Black, 0.15-mm minimum thickness.
EHAF – CO – 01/03 -9 - Section 02955

B. NONWOVEN FABRIC
Polypropylene or polyester fabric, 100 g per sq. m minimum.
C. COMPOSITE FABRIC
Woven, needle-punched polypropylene substrate bonded to a nonwoven polypropylene fabric,
160 g per sq. m.
2.14 STAKES AND GUYS
A. UPRIGHT AND GUY STAKES

Rough-sawn, sound, new hardwood, redwood, or pressure-preservative-treated softwood, free
of knots, holes, cross grain, and other defects, 50 by 50 mm by length indicated, pointed at
one end.
B. GUY AND TIE WIRE

ASTM A 641M, Class1 , galvanized-steel wire, 2-strand, twisted, 2.7 mm in diameter.
C. GUY CABLE
5-strand, 4.8-mm diameter, galvanized-steel cable, with zinc-coated turn buckles, 75-mm long
minimum, with two 10-mm galvanized eyebolts.
D. HOSE CHAFING GUARD

Reinforced rubber or plastic hose at least 13 mm in diameter, black, cut to lengths required to
protect tree trunks from damage.
E. FLAGS
Standard surveyor's plastic flagging tape, white,150 mm long.
2.15 LANDSCAPE EDGINGS
A. WOOD EDGING
Wood edging and stakes of sizes shown and of the following wood species:
1. Species: All heart redwood.

2. Species: Western red cedar, all heart.
3. Species: Southern pine, pressure treated according to AWPA C2 with
waterborne preservative for soil and freshwater use.
4. Stakes: Wood, same species, 19 by 38 by 460 mm long in actual dry size,
with galvanized nails for anchoring headers and edging.
B. STEEL EDGING
ASTM A 569M, rolled edge, standard steel edging, fabricated in sections with loops stamped
from or welded to face of sections approximately 760 mm apart to receive stakes.
1. Edging Size: 4.8 mm wide by 102 mm deep.

2. Edging Size: As indicated.
3. Stakes: Tapered steel, 381 mm long.
4. Accessories: Standard tapered ends, corners, and splicers as required.
EHAF – CO – 01/03 -10 - Section 02955

45 SELECT APPROPRIATE FINISH FROM 3 SUBPARAS BELOW.
C. FINISH
Standard paint finish; color selected by Architect.
D. FINISH
ASTM A 525 M, Z 275 zinc coated.
E. FINISH
ASTM A525 M, Z275 zinc coated with standard paint finish; color
selected by Architect.
F. ALUMINUM EDGING
Standard profile extruded-aluminum edging,ASTM B221 M, alloy 6061-T6, fabricated in

interlocking sections with loops stamped from face of sections approximately 600 mm apart
to receive stakes.

3. Edging Size: As indicated.
4. Stakes: Aluminum, ASTM B221 M, alloy 6061-T6, approximately 38 mm
wide by 300 mm long.
5. Finish: Standard black-paint finish.
6. Finish: Mill finish.
7. Finish: Standard black-anodized finish.
G. POLYETHYLENE EDGING
Manufacturer's standard-grooved, base-black polyethylene edging, 2.5 mm thick by 125 mm

deep, unless otherwise indicated, extruded in standard lengths, with 225-mm steel angle
stakes.
1. Top Profile: Straight, with top 50 mm, 6 mm thick.

2. Top Profile: Rounded.
3. Accessories: Manufacturer's standard connecting clips or plugs.
A. ANTIDESICCANT
Water-insoluble emulsion, permeable moisture retarder, film forming, for trees and shrubs.
Deliver in original, sealed, and fully labeled containers and mix according to manufacturer's
instructions.
B. TRUNK-WRAP TAPE
Two layers of crinkled paper cemented together with bituminous material,
100-mm- wide minimum, with stretch factor of 33 percent.
EHAF – CO – 01/03 -11 - Section 02955
C. TREE GRATES AND FRAMES

ASTM A 48, Class35 or better, gray iron castings of shape, pattern, and size indicated.
D. TREE GRATES AND FRAMES

ASTM A 48, Class35 or better, gray iron castings and ASTM A 36M steel angle frames of
shape, pattern, and size indicated.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas to receive trees and shrubs for compliance with requirements and for
conditions affecting performance of work of this Section. Do not proceed with installation
until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Lay out individual tree and shrub locations and areas for multiple plantings. Stake locations,
outline areas, adjust locations when requested, and obtain Architect's acceptance of layout
before planting. Make minor adjustments as may be required.
B. Lay out trees and shrubs at locations directed by Architect. Stake locations of individual
trees and shrubs and outline areas for multiple plantings.
3.3 PLANTING SOIL PREPARATION
A. Before mixing, clean topsoil of roots, plants, sod, stones, clay lumps, and other extraneous
materials harmful to plant growth.
B. Mix soil amendments and fertilizers with topsoil at rates indicated. Delay mixing fertilizer if
planting does not follow placing of planting soil within a few days.
C. A "Planting Soil Amendments Schedule" is included at the end of this Section.
D. For tree pit and trench backfill, mix planting soil before backfilling and stockpile at site.
3.4 PLANTERS
A. Place at least a 100-mm layer of gravel in bottom of planters, cover with nonwoven fabric,
and fill with planter soil mixture. Place soil in lightly compacted layers to an elevation of 38
mm below top of planter, allowing natural settlement.
1. Planter Soil Mixture: 1 part topsoil, 1 part coarse sand, 1 part peat humus,
and 1.4 kg dolomitic limestone per cu. m of mix.
3.5 EXCAVATION
A. PITS AND TRENCHES

Excavate with vertical sides and with bottom of excavation slightly raised at center to assist
drainage. Loosen hard subsoil in bottom of excavation.
B. BARE-ROOT TREES AND SHRUBS

Excavate at least 300 mm wider than root spread and deep enough to allow setting of roots
on a layer of planting soil and with collar set at same grade as in nursery, but 25 mm below
finish grade, unless otherwise indicated.
EHAF – CO – 01/03 -12 - Section 02955
1. Setting Layer: Allow 75 mm of planting soil.

C. BALLED AND BURLAPPED TREES AND SHRUBS

Excavate approximately 1-1/2 times as wide as ball diameter and equal to ball depth, plus the
following setting layer depth:

D. CONTAINER-GROWN TREES AND SHRUBS

1. Excavate to container width and depth, plus the following setting-layer depth:
a. Setting Layer: Allow 75 mm of planting soil.
b. Setting Layer: Allow 150 mm of planting soil.
2. Where drain tile is shown or required under planted areas, excavate to top of
porous backfill over tile.
3. Dispose of subsoil removed from landscape excavations. Do not mix with
planting soil or use as backfill.
E. OBSTRUCTIONS
Notify Architect if unexpected rock or obstructions detrimental to trees or shrubs are
encountered in excavations.
F. HARDPAN LAYER
Drill 150-mm- diameter holes into free-draining strata or to a depth of 3 m, whichever is less,
and backfill with free-draining material.
G. DRAINAGE
1. Notify Architect if subsoil conditions evidence unexpected water seepage or retention
in tree or shrub pits.
2. Fill excavations with water and allow to percolate out, before placing setting layer and
positioning trees and shrubs.
3.6 PLANTING TREES AND SHRUBS
A. Set balled and burlapped stock plumb and in center of pit or trench with top of ball raised
above adjacent finish grades as indicated.
1. Place stock on setting layer of compacted planting soil.

2. Remove burlap and wire baskets from tops of balls and partially from sides, but do not
remove from under balls. Remove pallets, if any, before setting. Do not use planting
stock if ball is cracked or broken before or during planting operation.
3. Place backfill around ball in layers, tamping to settle backfill and eliminate voids and air
pockets. When pit is approximately 1/2 backfilled, water thoroughly before placing
remainder of backfill. Repeat watering until no more is absorbed. Water again after
placing and tamping final layer of backfill.
B. Set container-grown stock plumb and in center of pit or trench with top of ball raised above
adjacent finish grades as indicated.
1. Carefully remove containers so as not to damage root balls.
EHAF – CO – 01/03 -13 - Section 02955
2. Place stock on setting layer of compacted planting soil.

3. Place backfill around ball in layers, tamping to settle backfill and eliminate voids and air
pockets. When pit is approximately 1/2 backfilled, water thoroughly before placing
remainder of backfill. Repeat watering until no more is absorbed. Water again after
placing and tamping final layer of backfill.
C. Set bare-root stock on cushion of planting soil. Spread roots without tangling or turning
toward surface, and carefully work backfill around roots by hand. Puddle with water until
backfill layers are completely saturated. Plumb before backfilling, and maintain plumb while
working backfill around roots and placing layers above roots. Remove injured roots by
cutting cleanly; do not break.
1. Set collar 25 mm below adjacent finish grades, unless otherwise indicated.
D. Dish and tamp top of backfill to form a 75-mm- high mound around the rim of the pit. Do not
cover top of root ball with backfill.
E. Wrap trees of 50-mm caliper and larger with trunk-wrap tape. Start at base of trunk and
spiral cover trunk to height of first branches. Overlap wrap, exposing half the width, and
securely attach without causing girdling. Inspect tree trunks for injury, improper pruning, and
insect infestation and take corrective measures required before wrapping.
3.7 PRUNING
A. Prune, thin, and shape trees and shrubs as directed by Architect.

B. Prune, thin, and shape trees and shrubs according to standard horticultural practice. Prune
trees to retain required height and spread. Unless otherwise directed by Architect, do not cut
tree leaders; remove only injured or dead branches from flowering trees. Prune shrubs to
retain natural character. Shrub sizes indicated are size after pruning.
3.8 GUYING AND STAKING
A. Upright Staking and Tying: Stake trees of 50- through 125-mm caliper. Stake trees of less
than 50-mm caliper only as required to prevent wind tip-out. Use a minimum of 2 stakes of
length required to penetrate at least 450 mm below bottom of backfilled excavation and to
extend at least 1800 mm above grade. Set vertical stakes and space to avoid penetrating
balls or root masses. Support trees with 2 strands of tie wire encased in hose sections at
contact points with tree trunk. Allow enough slack to avoid rigid restraint of tree. Use
number of stakes as follows:
1. Two stakes for trees up to 3.6 m high and 63 mm or less in caliper. Use 3 stakes for
trees less than 4.2 m high and up to 100-mm caliper. Space stakes equally around
trees.
B. Guying and Staking: Guy and stake trees exceeding 4.2 m and more than 75-mm caliper
unless otherwise indicated. Securely attach no fewer than 3 guys to stakes 760 mm long,
driven to grade.
C. For trees over 150-mm caliper, anchor guys to pressure-preservative-treated deadmen 200
mm in diameter and 1200 mm long buried at least 900 mm below grade. Provide turn
buckles for each guy wire and tighten securely.
D. Attach flags to each guy wire, 760 mm above finish grade.
E. Paint turn buckles with luminescent-white paint.
EHAF – CO – 01/03 -14 - Section 02955

3.9 MULCHING
A. Mulch backfilled surfaces of pits, trenches, and other areas indicated.
B. WEED-CONTROL BARRIERS
Install the following weed-control barriers according to manufacturer's recommendations,

before mulching. Completely cover area to be mulched, lapping edges a minimum of 150
mm.
1. Material and Seam Treatment: Sheet polyethylene with seams taped.

2. Material and Seam Treatment: Nonwoven fabric with seams pinned.
3. Material and Seam Treatment: Composite fabric with seams pinned.
C. ORGANIC MULCH
Apply the following average thickness of organic mulch and finish level with adjacent finish
grades. Do not place mulch against trunks or stems.
1. Thickness: 50 mm.
D. MINERAL MULCH
Apply the following average thickness of mineral mulch and finish level with adjacent finish
grades. Do not place mulch against trunks or stems.
3.10 INSTALLATION OF EDGINGS
A. WOOD EDGINGS
Install wood headers or edgings where indicated. Anchor with wood stakes spaced up to
900 mm apart, driven at least 25 mm below top elevation of header or edging. Use 2
galvanized nails per stake to fasten headers and edging; length as needed to penetrate both
members and provide 13-mm clinch at point. Predrill stakes when needed to avoid splitting.
B. STEEL EDGING
Install steel edging where indicated according to manufacturer's recommendations. Anchor

with steel stakes spaced approximately 760 mm apart, driven below top elevation of edging.
C. ALUMINUM EDGING
Install aluminum edging where indicated according to manufacturer's recommendations.

Anchor with aluminum stakes spaced approximately 600 mm apart, driven below top
elevation of edging.
EHAF – CO – 01/03 -15 - Section 02955

D. PLASTIC EDGING
Install plastic edging where indicated according to manufacturer's recommendations. Anchor

with steel stakes spaced approximately 600 mm apart, driven through upper base grooves of
edging.
3.11 INSTALLATION OF MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Apply antidesiccant using power spray to provide an adequate film over trunks, branches,
stems, twigs, and foliage.
1. When deciduous trees or shrubs are moved in full-leaf, spray with antidesiccant at
nursery before moving and again 2 weeks after planting.
B. TREE GRATES
Set grate segments flush with adjoining surfaces as shown on Drawings. Shim up from
supporting substrate with soil-resistant plastic. Maintain a 75-mm- minimum growth radius
around base of tree; break away units of casting, if necessary, according to manufacturer's
instructions.
3.12 CLEANUP AND PROTECTION
A. During tree and shrub work, keep pavements clean and work area in an orderly condition.
B. Protect trees and shrubs from damage due to landscape operations, operations by other
contractors and trades, and trespassers. Maintain protection during installation and
maintenance periods. Treat, repair, or replace damaged landscape work as directed.
3.13 DISPOSAL OF SURPLUS AND WASTE MATERIALS
A. DISPOSAL
Remove surplus soil and waste material, including excess subsoil, unsuitable soil, trash, and
debris, and legally dispose of it off the Owner's property.
3.14 PLANTING SOIL AMENDMENTS SCHEDULE
A. TREE PITS OR TRENCHES
Provide soil amendments in not less than the following quantities:

1. Ratio of loose peat humus to topsoil by volume: <INSERT RATIO.>
2. Weight of lime per cu. m of backfill: <INSERT WEIGHT.>
3. Weight of bonemeal per cu. m: <INSERT WEIGHT.>
4. Weight of superphosphate per cu. m: <INSERT WEIGHT.>
5. Weight of potash per cu. m: <INSERT WEIGHT.>
6. Weight of commercial fertilizer per cu. m: <INSERT WEIGHT.>
END OF SECTION
EHAF – CO – 01/03 -16 - Section 02955

SECTION 03005
CONCRETE AND REINFORCED CONCRETE
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Special Conditions and
Division-1 Specification Sections, apply to work of this Section
1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. This section covers the specifications for cast-in-place concrete, including formwork, reinforcement,
concrete material, mix design, placement, procedures and finishes. The reinforced concrete for pre-
cast elements are covered by the attached separate specifications.
1.03 RELATED SPECIFICATIONS ELSEWHERE
A. The following sections include requirements which relate to this section:
01400 Quality Control

02200 Earthwork for Building
03410 Structural Precast Concrete
05120 Structural Steel
07900 Joint Sealers
09200 Plastering
13430 Reinforced Concrete Water Structure
15400 Plumbing Works
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. PRODUCT DATA
Submit data for proprietary materials and items, including reinforcement and forming accessories,
admixtures, patching compounds, waterstops, joint system, curing compounds, dry-shake finish
materials, and others as requested by the Engineer.
B. DESIGN MIX
1. Design Mixtures for each concrete mixture. Submit alternate design mixtures when
characteristics of materials, Project conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances
warrant adjustments. Indicate amounts of mixing water to be withheld for later addition at
Project site.
2. Design mixtures for each concrete mixture containing portland cement replacements and for
equivalent concrete mixtures that do not contain portland cement replacements.
3. Prepare design mixtures for each type and strength of concrete, proportioned on the basis of
laboratory trial mixture or field test data, or both.
EHAF – CO – 01/03 -1 - Section 03005

May 2012 - Rev.(0) Concrete and reinforced concrete
C. SHOP DRAWINGS; REINFORCEMENT:
Submit shop drawings for fabrication, bending, and placement of concrete reinforcement. Details for
reinforced concrete shall show bar schedules, stirrup spacing, diagrams of bent bars, arrangement
of concrete reinforcement, special reinforcement required and openings through concrete structures,
etc.
D. SHOP DRAWINGS; FORMWORK:
1. Submit shop drawings prepared by a registered professional Engineer for fabrication and
erection of forms for specific finished concrete surfaces as indicated. Show general
construction of forms including jointing, special form joint or reveals, location and pattern of
form tie placement, and other items which affect exposed concrete visually.
2. Engineer’s review is for general structural and Engineerural applications and features only.
Design of formwork for structural stability and efficiency is Contractor’s responsibility.
E. SAMPLES:
Submit samples of materials as specified and as otherwise requested by the Engineer, including
names, sources and description.
F. LABORATORY TEST REPORTS:
Submit laboratory test reports from a qualified testing agency for current materials and mix design
test as specified.
G. MATERIAL CERTIFICATES:
Provide materials certificates in lieu of material laboratory test reports when permitted by Engineer.
Each of the following material shall be signed by manufacturer and Contractor, certifying that each
material item complies with, or exceeds, specified requirements:
1. Cementitious materials.
2. Admixtures.
3. Form materials and form-release agents.
4. Steel reinforcement and accessories.
5. Fiber reinforcement.
6. Water stops.
7. Curing compounds.
8. Floor and slab treatments.
9. Bonding agents.
10. Adhesives.
1.05 CONCRETE TESTING LABORATORY
A testing laboratory to perform materials evaluation tests, design concrete mix and progress concrete
testing shall be founded on Site by the Contractor. Minimum equipment requirements shall be as
specified in Division-1, Section 01400 “Quality Control” and engage a testing laboratory acceptable to
the Engineer to perform special material evaluation tests and to design concrete mixes when required
by Engineer.
EHAF – CO – 01/03 -2 - Section 03005

1. All concrete work shall be performed in strict accordance with the specifications, drawings and the
stipulations of the Egyptian code of Practice, the British code of Practice as noted hereinbelow and
the corresponding Egyptian standard Specifications (ES) Latest Edition and British Standard
Specifications (BS) as noted herein below.
2. All materials used in the works shall be the best of their kind and shall conform to the
Specifications. The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer when required and at his own expense
representative samples and certificates of all materials to be used in the works.
3. The Contractor shall perform all such load testing of structure and laboratory tests for concrete
specimens at his own expense.
A. Egyptian Code of Practice

ECP No.
The Use of Reinforced Concrete in Buildings
B. British Code of Practice

BCP No.
114 The Structural Use of Reinforced Concrete in Buildings

115 The Structural Use of Prestressed Concrete in Buildings.
116 The Structural Use of Precast Concrete
C. American Concrete Institute

ACI No.
304 Recommended Practice for Measuring Mixing,

Transporting and Placing Concrete
318 Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete
350R Concrete Sanitary Engineering Structures.
American Society for Testing and Materials

ASTM No.
C 31 Standards. Method for Making and Curing Concrete Test

Specimens in the Field
C 33 Specifications for Aggregates
C 39 Test Method of Compressive Strength of Cylindrical
Concrete Specimens
C 40 Test Method for Organic Impurities in Fine Aggregates for Concrete
C 82 Test Methods of Sampling Freshly Mixed Concrete
C 94 Specification for Ready Mixed Concrete
C 192 Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the Laboratory
C 260 Air-entraining Admixtures for Concrete
C 309 Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds for Curing Concrete
C 494 Specifications for Chemical Admixtures for Concrete
C 615 Specification for Deformed and Plain Billet-steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement.
EHAF – CO – 01/03 -3 - Section 03005

American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials

AASHTO No.
T-96 Standard Method of Test for Abrasion.
Egyptian Standard Specifications

ES No.
262 Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement

373 Portland Cement (Ordinary and Rapid-Hardening)
534 Metal Scaffolding
541 Low Heat Portland cement.
583 Sulphate Resisting Portland cement
974 Portland Blast Furnace Cement
1109 Concrete Aggregates from Natural Sources
1289 Concrete Kerbs
1291 Concrete Flooring Tiles.
British Standard Specifications

BS No.
812 Sampling and Testing of Mineral Aggregates, sands and Fillers.

882 Aggregates from Natural Sources for Concrete
1881 Methods of Testing Concrete
3148 Tests for Water for Making Concrete
4461 Cold Worked Steel Bars for the Reinforcement of Concrete
4466 Bending Dimensions and scheduling of Bars for the Reinforcement.
4550 Methods of Testing Cement
5075 Concrete Admixtures
5896 High Tensile Steel wire and strand for the Prestressing of Concrete.
5973 Code of Practice for access and working Scaffolds and special
Scaffold structures in Steel.
5974 Code of Practice for Temporarily Installed Suspended scaffolds and
Access Equipment
8004 Code of Practice for Foundations
8110 Structural Use of Concrete.
1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
Steel Reinforcement: Deliver, store, and handle steel reinforcement to prevent bending and damage.
Water stops: Store water stops under cover to protect from moisture, sunlight, dirt, oil, and other
contaminants.
The cement shall be obtained directly from an approved manufacturer or an approved supplier. The cement
shall be delivered either in bulk by purpose-built vehicles or in sealed bags.
Cement bags must be stored on square shaped wood or metal platforms of (1.50x1.50)m and spaced
between each other from all sides by (1.0)m to permit movement of persons and wheels carrying cement
bags, thus size of each platform permits putting the bags in (10) layers each layer of (6) bags to form a
group.
EHAF – CO – 01/03 -4 - Section 03005

PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 CEMENT
A. The cement used shall be Portland Cement ES No. 373 (ordinary or rapid hardening). Portland Blast
Furnace Cement ES No. 974 may be used in plain concrete where no reinforcement is used only
where shown on the Drawings.
B. Other cements such as: Low Heat Portland Cement ES No. 541 and Sulphate Resisting Portland
Cement (Seawater) ES No. 583 shall only be used where shown on the Drawings, Bills of Quantities
or as directed by Engineer.
C. The source of supply of the cement shall be subject to the Engineer’s approval and the Contractor
shall at all times furnish the manufacturers’ test certificates and proof that the required standard
specification has been complied with, giving also the date of manufacture. These certificates shall be
from an independent agency in the country of origin.
D. The Engineer shall have the power to reject parts or the whole of any consignment of cement if he
considers it unsuitable for use in the Works. Cement shall be fully protected during handling and
transport from adverse weather conditions, moisture and over stacking.
E. Cement shall be delivered to the site in sealed bags or in water tight barrels bearing the manufacturers
name and the date of manufacture. Bulk cement delivered directly from the factory in special container
trucks and stored in steel, elevated weather tight silos is acceptable.
F. The cement shall be stored in piles not more than ten bags high in perfectly dry weatherproof sheds or
buildings approved by the Engineer. These buildings shall be used exclusively for the storage of
cement and shall have their floors raised above the ground.
G. Free passage one meter wide minimum shall be left between the stored bags of cement, and the
cement and side walls of the buildings, so that each bag shall be visible. Each consignment of cement
shall be stored apart from earlier ones, and consignments shall be used in the order in which they
were delivered. Any consignment which has become lumped caked or otherwise adversely affected
shall be removed from the site immediately. In general cement shall not be used in concrete work if
more than six months old from date of manufacture.
H. Cement used for exposed concrete elements shall be from the same source throughout the project for
colour and appearance consistency.
2.02 QUALITY CONTROL
A. FREQUENCY OF TESTS
1. Each consignment which comes from another source than the previous tested one shall be
tested before delivery to site (acceptance test).
2. If the source does not change, routine tests shall be carried out for each 1000th. ton delivered to
the site. Cement which has been stored for more than (2) months shall be examined by routine
testing before use.
B. STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS
The methods of sampling and testing mentioned in both ESS 474/1960 and ESS 373/1984 shall be
followed.
EHAF – CO – 01/03 -5 - Section 03005
2.03 AGGREGATES
A. GENERAL
Aggregates used for exposed concrete elements shall be from the same source throughout the
project for colour and appearance consistency.
B. COARSE AGGREGATE
1. The coarse aggregate shall consist of: gravel, crushed stone, or a combination thereof.
2. Gravel or crushed stone shall consist of durable particles of crushed or uncrushed gravel of
uniform quality throughout. Each of the materials shall have a wear of not more than 40% when
tested according to AASHTO Method T-96 Standard Method of Test for Abrasion.
3. The Coarse aggregate shall be free from salt, alkali, vegetable matter, or other objectionable
material, either free or as adherent coating on the aggregate. It shall not contain more than
0.25% of weight of clay, lumps, not more than 1.0% by weight of shale, not more than 5.0% by
weight laminated and/or friable soft particle.
4. The maximum size of aggregate shall be as large as possible within the limits specified in the
Egyptian code of practice.
C. FINE AGGREGATE
1. Fine aggregate shall consist of natural sand or a combination of natural sand and manufactured
sand or a combination of natural sand and mineral filler.
2. The fine aggregate prior to the addition of mineral filler shall conform to the following:
a) At the time of its use, it shall be free from frozen material and all foreign materials which
may become mixed with the aggregate in the stockpiles.
b) It shall be free from salt, alkali, or vegetable matter .It shall not contain more than 0.5% by
weight of clay lumps.
c) When subjected to the colour test for organic impurities (ASTM C40) it shall not show a
colour darker than the standard.
d) When tested by approved methods it shall conform to the grading and percentage
passing each sieve by weight as shown in Table2.
e) Sand shall consist of clean, hard durable, uncoated grains. The material removed by the
standard Test of Decantation shall not exceed 4%.
f) Mineral Filler shall consist of stone dust, crushed sand when tested for grading (90-100%)
will pass Sieve No. 25 and (15-60%) will pass Sieve No. 100.
g) Fine coarse and all-in aggregates used for concrete shall comply with the requirements of
their corresponding codes and specifications.
3. Aggregates shall not contain harmful materials such as salts, iron, pyrites, coal, mica, shale or
similar laminated materials or flaky or elongated particles which may reduce the strength or
durability of concrete. Moreover for reinforced concrete the aggregates shall not contain any
materials, which might attack the reinforcement.
4. The grading of aggregates shall be such as to produce a concrete of the specified proportions
which will work readily into position without segregation and without the use of excessive water
content. The grading limits for sand, gravel or all in aggregates given hereinafter in Table 1 may
EHAF – CO – 01/03 -6 - Section 03005

serve as a guide for this purpose. It shall be the Contractor’s responsibility to design and work
out the concrete mixes to attain the specified strengths.
5. Maximum Size of Aggregates: The maximum size of coarse aggregate shall be as large as
possible within the limits specified in the code of practice
D. ALL-IN AGGREGATE:
The proportions of fine to coarse aggregate and the maximum size of fine aggregate to be used in
each class of concrete shall be approved by the Engineer for each case.
E. AGGREGATE FOR GRANOLITHIC CONCRETE:
The specifications and grading of coarse and fine aggregates for granolithic concrete used as a
wearing surface for floors wherever shown on the Drawings shall be submitted by the Contractor for
approval. The aggregate shall be specially selected to suit its purpose for its hardness surface texture
and particle shape.
F. LIGHTWEIGHT AGGREGATE:
Lightweight Aggregate shall be accepted accordance with the specifications, and the stipulations of
the Egyptian code of Practice, the British code of Practice, ASTM and nominal maximum aggregate
size.
2.04 WATER
A. Water for reinforced concrete shall be clean and free from harmful matter, such as oil, salts, organic
materials, or any materials which may have harmful effect on concrete or reinforcing steel. Potable
water. (Except for bacteriological limits and conditions) is suitable for mixing of concrete in all
conditions.
B. The use of water which is not potable may be allowed if it satisfies the following conditions:
1. The initial setting time for samples using this water shall not exceed by 30 minutes the initial
setting time for samples with the same cement using potable water for mixing. At any conditions
the initial setting time shall not be less than 45 minutes.
2. Compressive strength after 7 and 28 days shall not be less than 90 of the compressive strength
of similar cubes mixed with potable water.
3. For ordinary concrete sea water may be used only after approval of the Engineer.
2.05 REINFORCEMENT
A. The reinforcement shall be as shown on the Drawings and shall comply with the requirements of the
corresponding Egyptian standard specifications for:
1. Normal Mild Steel

2. High Tensile steel (St 60 or more)
B. The standard tensile tests shall follow the Egyptian code of practice for reinforcement.
B. Steel used for reinforcing shall satisfy the following conditions:
1. Bars used shall be smooth or deformed bars as shown on the Drawings. If deformed bars are
used, the area of the non-continuous notches shall not be taken in consideration.
2. The kind and diameter of steel shall be as shown on the Drawings.

EHAF – CO – 01/03 -7 - Section 03005
3. For normal mild steel the anchorage and lap lengths shall be 35 times the bar diameter, for
compression and 40 time of bar diameter for tension unless otherwise indicated on Drawings.
4. For high tensile steel the anchorage and lap lengths shall be 45 times the bar diameter for
compression and 65 time of bar diameter for tension unless otherwise indicated on Drawings.
5. The outer surface of Steel ST 52 shall contain notches and deformations to give the required
bond.
C. Mill certificates shall be submitted for each consignment of reinforcing steel. Mill certificates shall state
the place of manufacture, details of composition, manufacture, strength and other qualities of the steel.
Follow up tests shall be carried out on samples taken from batches received on site.
2.06 TIE WIRE
A. Tie wire shall be galvanized, double annealed copper bearing steel wire. Except where otherwise
required Tie wire shall be 1 mm diameter.
2.07 ADMIXTURES
A. The Contractor may with the written permission and approval of the Engineer use admixtures in the
concrete for special reasons such as waterproofing, retarding initial setting time, improve workability,
etc. The contractor shall in every case submit full technical details on the admixtures proposed, and
Contractor shall strictly use the admixtures in accordance with manufacturer's instruction. The Engineer
shall have the right at any time to order the Contractor to stop using the admixtures or break out any
concrete containing them should he find that the resulting concrete is below the specified strength or
standard in any way whatsoever. The Contractor shall be allowed no extra payment for the use of
admixtures.
B. Admixtures shall not have harmful effect on concrete or steel. The maximum limit shall be given as a
ratio of the weight of cement. Concrete containing admixtures shall at least resist 85% of the
compression, bending and bond between steel and concrete stresses of the corresponding value for the
concrete prepared without admixtures.
C. Provide Chemical admixtures certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other admixtures and that
will not contribute water-soluble chloride ions exceeding those permitted in hardened concrete. Do not
use calcium chloride or admixtures containing calcium chloride.
D. Select one or more chemical admixtures from the followings:
1. Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type A.
2. Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type B.
3. Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type D.
4. High-Range, Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type F.
5. High-Range, Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type G.
6. Plasticizing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 1017/C 1017M, Type II.
2.08 CURING MATERIALS
A. Select curing aids and materials from the following:
EHAF – CO – 01/03 -8 - Section 03005

1. Absorptive Cover: AASHTO M 182, Class 2, burlap cloth made from jute or kenaf, weighing
approximately 9 oz. /sq. yd. (305 g/sq. m) when dry.
2. Moisture-Retaining Cover: ASTM C 171, polyethylene film or white burlap- polyethylene sheet.
Waterborne, Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type 1, Class B.
a) For integrally colored concrete, curing compound shall be[ pigmented type] approved by color
pigment manufacturer.
b) For concrete indicated to be sealed, curing compound shall be compatible with sealer.
2.09 CONCRETE MIXES
A. Designed mixes shall be used throughout the works, unless otherwise shown on the Drawings and Bills
of Quantities. Nominal concrete mixes can be used, if specifically called for and noted on the Drawings.
2.10 DESIGNED MIXES
A. GENERAL
1. It shall be the Contractor’s responsibility to design the concrete mixes to satisfy the strength and
workability requirements of the various classes of concrete to be used in the works.
2. Concrete mixes design shall start as soon as practical after the award of Contract, and well in
advance of any scheduled concreting work to allow adequate time for the design and testing of the
concrete cubes as defined hereinafter.
3. Quantities of cement, fine and coarse aggregate shall be measured by weight.
4. No concreting shall be allowed before the satisfactory completion of design and testing of the
designed mix samples. All data mix proportions and results shall be submitted to the Engineer for
approval prior to the commencement of any concreting in the works.
5. Approved designed mixes shall be maintained throughout the Duration of Contract unless
amended by Engineer as he considers necessary.
6. Design concrete mix to comply with structural design requirement for structural element in
Egyptian code practice
7. A minimum of six (6) cubes for each designed mix shall be prepared. A minimum of three (3)
cubes shall be tested for strength at 7-days and three cubes at 28-days. In order to allow for
unavoidable variations, the mix shall be designed to have a mean strength equal to or exceeding
125% of the specified works cube strength.
8. The concrete mix may be provisionally accepted on the basis of the 7-days results, when these
satisfy the requirements for the 28-days results, and the strengths shall not be less than eighty
percent of those required at 28-days.
B. TRIAL MIXES
1. Trial mixes shall be prepared under full-scale conditions and tested in accordance with ES
Methods of testing concrete, or BS 1881.
2. Representative samples of the materials to be used shall be taken and a trial mix using the
proposed proportions shall be made on each of three different days produced by the same plant
and under the same supervision. The workability of each of these three trial mixes shall be
determined, and a batch of six cubes from each shall be made, three for test at 7 days and three
for test at 28 days. The proposed mix proportions shall not be accepted if the average strength of
the three trial mixes is less than the specified works cube strength.
EHAF – CO – 01/03 -9 - Section 03005

C. WORKS CUBE TESTS FOR CONTROL PURPOSES
1. Work cube tests shall be made on concrete samples during the progress of the Works as specified
in CP3. Concrete for test specimens shall be taken at the point of deposit. Nine (9) cubes 150 mm
shall be taken for each day’s pour or each 100m3 of concrete poured whichever is smaller.
Separate samples shall be taken for each structural element if poured separately or as directed by
the Engineer. From each sample three (3) cubes shall be tested after 7 days, three (3) after 28
days and three (3) kept as spares.
2. The lowest results of each set of three cubes tested shall not exceed 20% below the average
strength of the three cubes and this average shall not be below the minimum required strength
specified.
3. When the results of the 7-day test are unsatisfactory the Contractor may elect to remove and
replace the defective concrete without waiting for the 28-day test. If the result of the 28-day test, is
unsatisfactory all concreting shall be stopped at the Contractor’s expense and shall not proceed
further without the written permission of the Engineer. The Contractor shall then, in accordance
with the Engineer’s instructions, conduct tests of the concrete in the suspected portions of the
structure in such a manner as may be appropriate to the particular conditions or parts of the work.
4. Should the tests prove that the concrete is not satisfactory or the Engineer judge that any sections
of the concrete work are defective, then the condemned concrete shall be cut out removed and
replaced by the Contractor at no cost to Owner.
5. When works cube tests shown concrete strengths consistently higher than those specified, the
Engineer may reduce the number of tests made.
D. QUALITY CONTROL
1. SUPERVISION
The Contractor shall employ a competent person and permanently keep him on site until the
completion of the concreting work. His first duty shall be to supervise all stages in the preparation and
placing of the concrete. He shall be directly responsible to the Engineer in supervising all tests on
materials, the making and testing of cubes and the maintenance and calibration of all mixing and
measuring plant.
2. AGGREGATES
a) Separate storage bins with adequate provision for drainage shall be provided for each size of
aggregate used (40-20mm, 30-20mm, 25-20mm, 20-20mm, 10-5mm, and 5 mm down).
b) The grading of the coarse and fine aggregates shall be determined at least once a week to check
whether the grading are similar to those of the samples used in the trial mixes.
3. BATCHING AND MIXING PLANT
a) All concrete shall be machine mixed. The location of the mixing plants shall be approved by the
Engineer. The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for approval before erection of any mixing
plant his proposed arrangements for the storing of aggregates batching and mixing of concertos.
Contractor shall also submit for approval details of the type (s) of mixers and machines to be used.
b) If centralized batching plants are planned for use by the Contractor, he shall submit full details of
his proposals to the Engineer for mixing and transporting the concrete for his approval and no
permission will be granted unless the Engineer is completely satisfied with the proposals. Such
permission if granted can be withdrawn at any time by the Engineer should any aspects of the
arrangements be unsatisfactory in his opinion. If centralized batching is permitted then all concrete
shall be mixed dry, transported to the place of work in transit mixers, and the water added and final
EHAF – CO – 01/03 -10 - Section 03005
mixing shall be carried at the place of work. If haulage distances are very short, then subject to the
Engineer’s approval, mixing can take place at the batching plant and the concrete transported in
agitators or transit mixers.
c) Whether permission shall be granted for the use of centralized batching, denied or granted and
later withdrawn the contractor shall receive no extra reimbursement.
d) If concrete is mixed at each place of work about 10% of the water required for the batch shall enter
the drum in advance of the cement and aggregates, and the remainder of the water shall be added
gradually while the drum is in action so that all the water is in the drum by the end of the first
quarter of the mixing time. The concrete shall be mixed until a mixture of uniform colour and
consistency is obtained, and mixing shall continue for at least 1.5 minutes after all the water has
been added. In no circumstances shall mixing time be less than that recommended by the
manufacturer of the mixer. Should mixing be determined by a certain number of revolutions of the
mixer, then adequate means and meters shall e provided to check on the number of revolutions,
before the discharge of each batch mix.
e) Where double drum high performance mixers of a type approved by the Engineer are used, a
minimum mixing time of 70 seconds may be allowed.
f) The amount of concrete mixed in any one batch is not to exceed the rated capacity of the mixer.
The whole of the batch is to be removed before materials for a fresh batch enter the drum. On
cessation of work, including all stoppages exceeding 20 minutes, the mixers and all handling plant
shall be washed with clean water, any deposits of old concrete in the drums shall be cleaned out
to the Engineer’s satisfaction by rotating clean aggregate and water in the drum, or any other
appropriate means, before any fresh concrete is mixed. Mixers shall be properly maintained and all
worn out blades shall be replaced with new ones or built up by welding.
g) With centralized batching plants, the ingredients shall be mixed and transported dry, and the water
added at the place of work, all as described hereinabove. The accuracy of weighting equipment
shall be ± 2 ½ % of the required weight of cement or of the total weight of the aggregate.
h) Concrete shall not be remixed if mixing water has been added to it for more than twenty (20)
minutes, No additions to the concrete shall be permitted once mixed.
4.CONTROL OF WATER CONTENT
Water/cement ratio shall be controlled at the values determined in the trial mixes and approved by the
Engineer. Appropriate allowances shall be made for water contained by the aggregates. Provisions
shall be made to determine the moisture content of the aggregates. Tests shall be made on the fine
aggregate at least once a day, and less frequently on the coarse aggregate. Further tests shall be
made whenever there is a noticeable difference in the moisture content of any of the aggregates.
5. WORKABILITY
a) The workability shall be controlled by direct measurement of water content making allowance for
any water in the fine and coarse aggregates.
b) The slump test is to be used as a guide.
c) The workability shall follow the Egyptian code of practice for workability.
6. STANDARD MIXES
a) For concreting work of non important items, and only by permission of the Engineer standard
mixes may be used where fine and coarse aggregates are measured by volume. Standard mixes
shall follow the Egyptian code of practice
b) Engineer may also permit hand mixing in some instances. However should his permission be given
to hand mix, denied or granted and later withdrawn by Engineer shall not entitle the Contractor to
any claims nor extra payments.
EHAF – CO – 01/03 -11 - Section 03005
c) The accuracy of volumetric weighting equipment shall be ± 2 ½ % of the indicated quantity. All
measuring equipment for water shall be maintained in a clean serviceable condition.
d) When approved by Engineer, manual mixing shall be carried as follows:
1. Cement and fine aggregate shall be mixed separately until the mixture is homogeneous in
colour, they shall then be added dry and mixed with the coarse aggregate.
1. The total mix shall be turned at least three laps, with the addition of the proper amount of water
specified for that mix, until the required workability is attained.
2.11 WATER STOPS FOR CONSTRUCTION JOINTS
A. Install water stops to form continuous diaphragm in joints specified by Drawings, make provision to
support and protect exposed water stops during progress of work.
A. FLEXIBLE RUBBER WATER STOPS
Install flexible rubber water stops in concrete joints where expansion and contraction cause the joints to
close and open, the water stop must be designed to accommodate itself to movement. Rubber water
stops shall continue returning to near original shape after repeated elongation and has a very low
compression set. The Contractor shall furnish to the Engineer current test reports from the
Manufacturer and a written certification that the material to be supplied meets the physical
requirements.
PART 3 EXECUTIONS
3.01 CONCRETE
A. TRANSPORTING
1. Concrete shall be handled from the place of mixing to the place of final deposit as rapidly as
practicable by methods which will prevent segregation or contamination loss of the ingredients.
2. It shall be deposited as nearly as practicable in its final position to avoid rehandling or flowing.
B. PLACING
1. ADVANCE NOTICE
The Contractor shall give the Engineer sufficient advance notice before starting to place concrete in
any unit to permit the inspection of forms, reinforcing steel placement and preparation for casting. No
concrete shall be placed in any unit, prior to the completion of the formwork and the placement of
steel.
2. DAYLIGHT
Unless the Contractor shall get all the necessary permits for working at dark, concrete mixing placing
and finishing shall be done in daylight hours only. Placement shall not commence when it is evident
that the work cannot be completed before dark unless adequate provisions are made to light the
entire site of all operations.
EHAF – CO – 01/03 -12 - Section 03005

3. WEATHER CONDITIONS
Concrete placement will not be permitted when impending weather conditions may result in rainfall or
low temperature which will impair the quality of finished work. In case rainfall should occur after
placing operations are started the contractor shall provide ample covering to protect the work.
4. PLACING
a) The concrete shall be placed in its final position before setting has commenced and shall not be
subsequently disturbed. Concrete shall be placed in layers not exceeding 500 mm in thickness to
ensure proper compaction and vibration. Concrete shall not be freely dropped from height
exceeding 1.5 m without the use of tremies.
b) Before any concrete is poured the formwork shall be thoroughly cleaned of all dirt, shavings,
loose stones etc., and the woodwork which will be in contact with the concrete shall be well
soaked with water. No free water shall be present on the woodwork when concreting. If special
plywood for forms (plyform) is used, then form oil shall be thinly applied to the plyform faces in
contact with the concrete.
c) A detailed record shall be kept by contractor for all concreting operations reflecting date, time,
shade, air temperature, relative humidity and weather conditions for every part of the works.
5. COMPACTION
a) Concrete shall be thoroughly compacted during placing operation and carefully worked around
the reinforcement, around embedded fixtures and into corners of the formwork so that it will be in
close contact with the reinforcement and free of honeycombs. The concrete shall be compacted
by approved immersion types mechanical or electromechanical vibrators of the proper sizes and
diameters best suited for the job. Over-vibration causing segregation shall be carefully avoided
and the redistribution of concrete in the formwork by means of vibrators shall not be permitted.
b) Formwork vibrators shall not be used for cast in place concrete. When formwork vibrators are
used for precast concrete units, the formwork shall be carefully and properly designed and
constructed so that the dimensions of the precast units are not affected by the vibrations.
C. CURING
1. The concrete shall be kept constantly wet for five days, except for rapid hardening cement; this
period may be reduced to 3 days. In hot, dry or windy climates concrete is to be covered by a layer
of waterproof material immediately after the concrete is placed and this material shall be kept in
contact with it for seven days.
2. Proper precautions and measures shall be taken to ensure proper curing of concrete by either
setting up a mechanical water fogspray system covering the total concreted surface; this system
shall operate continuously during the curing period or by covering the concreted surfaces with
burlap that shall be kept moist continuously during the curing period. Either method shall be
subject to the Engineer’s approval, and if found unsatisfactory to him, corrective measures shall be
taken immediately by the contractor. If the Contractor fails to take adequate corrective measures to
the satisfaction of the Engineer then the Engineer shall immediately order the stoppage of any
further concreting until such measures have been taken.
3. Curing shall start immediately after the disappearance of free surface water.
4. Test cubes of each portion or member shall be cured in the same place and exactly in the same
manner as the portions or members they represent. After seven days, they shall be transported to
the laboratory where they shall be kept in water until tested.
EHAF – CO – 01/03 -13 - Section 03005

5. Curing compound may be used for curing concrete in lieu of water. Curing compound used shall
be white pigmented liquid Membrane Forming Compound for Curing Concrete, and shall be
sprayed to all exposed concrete surfaces as soon as the surface of the freshly placed concrete
becomes dull, or immediately after form stripping of columns, vertical surface and walls and beam
sides. Curing compound shall be applied amply by means of sprayers and must result in a
continuous whitish film. Rate of spraying shall be in strict conformance to the manufacturers’
recommendations. Curing compound shall conform to ASTM C 309 These compounds are locally
produced. The approval in writing of the Engineer shall be obtained prior to the use of any curing
compounds. Such approval, if granted, may be withdrawn at any time by the Engineer should in his
opinion the curing may prove unsatisfactory. Whether permission be granted, denied or granted
and later withdrawn the Contractor shall receive no extra reimbursement.
3.02 JOINTS
A. CONSTRUCTION JOINTS
Concreting shall be carried out continuously up to construction joints, the position and arrangement of
which shall be predetermined by the Engineer. When work has to be resumed on a surface which has
hardened it shall be thoroughly hacked, swept clean, wetted, and covered with a coat of neat cement
grout freshly mixed and placed immediately before the placing of the concrete. Construction joints shall
be at right angles to the general direction of the member and provided with joggles where possible.
Additional reinforcement shall be placed at construction joints as shown on Drawings.
B. CONTRACTION JOINTS:
Form weakened-plane contraction joints true to line with faces perpendicular to surface plane of cast-in-
place Engineerural concrete so strength and appearance of concrete are not impaired, at locations
indicated or as approved by Engineer.
C. MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE ITEMS
1. FILLING IN:
Fill in holes and openings left in concrete structures, unless otherwise indicated, after work of other
trades is in place. Mix, place, and cure concrete, as specified, to blend with in-place construction.
Provide other miscellaneous concrete filling indicated or required to complete the Work.
2. CURBS:
Provide monolithic finish to interior curbs by stripping forms while concrete is still green and by
steel-troweling surfaces to a hard, dense finish with corners, intersections, and terminations slightly
rounded.
3. EQUIPMENT BASES AND FOUNDATIONS:

Provide machine and equipment bases and foundations as shown on Drawings. Set anchor bolts
for machines and equipment at correct elevations, complying with diagrams or templates from
manufacturer furnishing machines and equipment.
4. STEEL PAN STAIRS:

Provide concrete fill for steel pan stair treads, landings, and associated items. Cast-in inserts and
accessories as shown on Drawings. Screed, tamp, and trowel-finish concrete surfaces.
EHAF – CO – 01/03 -14 - Section 03005

D. WORK IN HOT WEATHER
1. When the shade air temperature is 35 C and rising, the coarse aggregate shall be sprayed with
water or cooled by appropriate measures. Special precautions must be taken during all concreting
operations so that the temperature of the concrete does not exceed 32 C when placed.
2. Fresh concrete placed at these temperatures shall be carefully shaded from the sun rays and wind
to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
3. No concrete shall be mixed or placed when the shade air temperature reaches 40 C or more unless
proper measures for cooling aggregates and mixing water are taken. Full details of cooling
procedure shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval prior to any cooling and concreting. Said
approval shall be withdrawn should the Engineer find that in his opinion the system does not perform
to his satisfaction.
3.03 STEEL REINFORCEMENT
A. CLEANING
Immediately before placing the concrete all metal for reinforcement shall be cleaned and freed from
loose mill scale, loose rust, oil and grease or other harmful matter that may destroy or reduce the
bond.
B. PLACING
1. Adequate concrete cover for reinforcement is to be provided in every section as noted and shown
on the Drawings. All reinforcement shall be placed and rigidly maintained in the positions shown on
the drawings. This shall be ensured by tying, welding, using spacing blocks, metal clips or
supports. No supports or metal clips shall be placed in contact with forms for exposed concrete
surfaces unless plastic coated, galvanized or rust proofed. All tie wire ends shall be turned away
from the forms to prevent rust staining on exposed concrete surfaces.
2. The placing of all reinforcement will be checked by the Engineer and in no case is the concrete to
be poured around any steel that has not been passed by him.
C. SPACING BLOCKS
Where concrete blocks are used to ensure the specified cover to the reinforcement, they shall be made
of mortar not leaner than 1 part cement to 2 parts sand. Steel tie wire shall be embedded in the spacing
blocks to securely tie them to the reinforcement.
D. BENDING
1. All bars shall be bent cold and in accordance with the bending schedules.
2. Bending by heat may be allowed for large diameter bars only after receiving a written permission
from the Engineer. This permission can be withdrawn any time at the discretion of the Engineer. If
in his opinion the heating process is not satisfactory to him.
3. If heating is permitted provisions shall be made so that bending temperature does not exceed 800
C and steel is left to cool gradually. Sudden cooling by water is strictly prohibited.
4. For rods of cold twisted bars such as “Tor steel” which have their strength increased by cold
working, bending by heat is forbidden.
5. Reinforcement shall not be bent or straightened in a manner that will injure the material.
6. Where reinforcement bars are bent aside at construction joints and afterwards bent back into
approximately their original positions, care shall be taken to ensure that at no time is the radius of
the bend less than 4 bar diameters for mild steel and 6 bar diameters for high-yield bars. Care
EHAF – CO – 01/03 -15 - Section 03005

shall also be taken when bending back bars to ensure that concrete around the bar is not
damaged.
7. No splices shall be made in the reinforcement except where shown on the Drawings and approved
by Engineer, and all splices and overlaps shall comply to CP 3 and the notes shown on the
Drawings.
E. WELDING
1. Welding may be permitted under suitable conditions and with suitable safeguards in accordance
with the code of practice. The centre line of the welded rods is to coincide at the welded joint.
Specimens of the welded rods are to be tested to make sure the stress at the weld is appropriate to
that of mild steel. Welding is prohibited for steel rods which have their strength increased by cold
working.
2. No welding shall be started before receiving the written permission of the Engineer. Should welding
be permitted then the Contractor shall follow all procedure and tests as described in ES 257
Electrical-Arc welding of structural steel and ES 917 Standard Tests for Approval of welders.
3.04 FORMWORK
A. GENERAL
1. It shall be constructed so as to remain sufficiently tight to prevent loss of grout or mortar from the
concrete. Forms for concrete surfaces can be of timber, plywood or metal. Wrought formwork shall
be used where shown on the drawings. Or directed by the Engineer.
2. Bolts and rods shall be used for internal ties. They shall be so arranged that when the forms are
removed no metal shall be within 30 mm of any surface. All holes shall be pointed with mortar after
the removal of the bolts and all external parts of the metals ties.
3. All exposed corners and edges of concrete shall be chamfered by insertion of 20x20mm triangular
fillets in the formwork. Chamfered fillets shall also be used at horizontal construction joints in
concrete walls.
B. STRUTTING
The design and erection of the formwork together with the adequacy of all bracing and strutting shall be
the responsibility of the contractor. He shall ensure that there will be no deformations or failure of the
shuttering during concreting. The Contractor shall include in his rates for all necessary scaffolding or
staging, boxing out for fittings, etc. and all other works incidental to the shuttering to be erected. The
Contractor shall submit to the Engineer detailed drawings and calculations of special shuttering work if
so requested and directed by Engineer for his approval. Said approval shall not relieve the Contractor
from his responsibilities in case of failure and his obligations to repair all defects at his own expense.
C. EMBEDDED ARTICLES
1. All pipes passing through concrete walls, beams or slabs shall pass through sleeves fixed into
position before concreting. All sleeves shall have steel flanges welded into them as shown on the
Drawings.
2. Bolts, brackets, step irons, nosings, frames etc., shall be built-in as the work proceeds. Where
impractical steel inserts shall be built in or holes and box cuts may be left for fixation after removal
of the formwork.
D. CLEANING AND TREATMENT OF FORMS
All rubbish, particularly chippings, shavings and sawdust shall be removed from the interior of the forms
before the concrete is placed and the formwork in contact with the concrete shall be cleaned and
EHAF – CO – 01/03 -16 - Section 03005
thoroughly wetted or treated with an approved composition or form oil. Care shall be taken that such
approved composition is kept out of contact with the reinforcement.
E. REMOVAL OF FORMS
1. The Engineer shall be informed in advance when the Contractor intends to remove any forms.
Though the Contractor is fully responsible for the safe removal of the forms. The Engineer shall
have the power to fix the time of striking.
2. In any case, the forms shall not be removed until the concrete has attained sufficient strength to
ensure structural stability and to carry both the dead load and any construction loads that may be
imposed on it. The concrete shall be hard enough so that the surfaces will not be injured in any
way when reasonable care is used in removing forms. The Engineer shall be given adequate proof
by the Contractor about the attained strength of the Concrete in each structural part that is to have
its forms removed.
3. The minimum period of time shall follow the Egyptian code of practice for removal of forms.
4. In no circumstances shall the forms be removed and struck until the concrete reaches a cube
strength of at least twice the stress to which the concrete may be subjected at the time of striking.
5. All forms shall be removed with due care and attention avoiding all shock or vibration that would
damage the concrete.
6. The Contractor shall make good the concrete surfaces after removal of forms to the satisfaction of
the Engineer.
3.05 TROWEL FINISH
A. After applying float finish, apply first troweling and consolidate concrete by hand or power-driven trowel.
Continue troweling passes and restraighten until surface is free of trowel marks and uniform in texture
and appearance. Grind smooth any surface defects that would telegraph through applied coatings or
floor coverings.
3.06 FAIR-FACE CONCRETE
A. The finished faces of concrete shall be sound, solid and free from defects arising from faulty formwork
or other causes.
B. The surface of fair-face concrete shall be free from honey-combing.
C. All shuttering to exposed faces shall be made of polyethane faced plywood, or metal shuttering.
D. Prior to placing the reinforcement, the internal surface of all formwork shall be treated with an adequate
approved mold-oil which shall not stain on concrete surfaces.
E. Curing with water is recommended, no curing materials shall be used.
1. SURFACE FINISH
All permanently visible exposed concrete surfaces shall have a regular dense finish of uniform
texture, colour and shade, free from holes, fins, form staining and rust staining.
3.07 CONCRETE SURFACE REPAIRS
A. DEFECTIVE CONCRETE:
1. Repair and patch defective areas when approved by Engineer. Remove and replace concrete that
cannot be repaired and patched to Engineer's approval.
2. Patching Mortar: Mix dry-pack patching mortar, consisting of one part portland cement to two and
one-half parts fine aggregate passing a No. 16 (1.18-mm) sieve, using only enough water for
handling and placing.
EHAF – CO – 01/03 -17 - Section 03005
3. Insert provision for testing repair technique on a mockup or surface to be concealed later, before
repairing surfaces.
B. PREPARING FORMED SURFACES:
1. Surface defects include color and texture irregularities, cracks, spalls, air bubbles, honeycombs,
rock pockets, fins and other projections on the surface, and stains and other discolorations that
cannot be removed by cleaning.
2. Immediately after form removal, cut out honeycombs, rock pockets, and voids more than 1/2 inch
(13 mm) in any dimension in solid concrete, but not less than 1 inch (25 mm) in depth. Make
edges of cuts perpendicular to concrete surface. Clean, dampen with water, and brush-coat holes
and voids with bonding agent. Fill and compact with patching mortar before bonding agent has
dried. Fill form-tie voids with patching mortar or cone plugs secured in place with bonding agent.
3. Repair defects on surfaces exposed to view by blending white portland cement and standard
portland cement so that, when dry, patching mortar will match surrounding color. Patch a test area
at inconspicuous locations to verify mixture and color match before proceeding with patching.
Compact mortar in place and strike off slightly higher than surrounding surface.
4. Repair defects on concealed formed surfaces that affect concrete's durability and structural
performance as determined by Engineer.
5. Repairing Unformed Surfaces: Test unformed surfaces, such as floors and slabs, for finish and
verify surface tolerances specified for each surface. Correct low and high areas. Test surfaces
sloped to drain for trueness of slope and smoothness; use a sloped template.
6. Repair finished surfaces containing defects. Surface defects include spalls, popouts, honeycombs,
rock pockets, crazing and cracks in excess of 0.01 inch (0.25 mm) wide or that penetrate to
reinforcement or completely through unreinforced sections regardless of width, and other
objectionable conditions.
7. After concrete has cured at least 14 days, correct high areas by grinding.
8. Correct localized low areas during or immediately after completing surface finishing operations by
cutting out low areas and replacing with patching mortar. Finish repaired areas to blend into
adjacent concrete.
9. Correct other low areas scheduled to receive floor coverings with a repair underlayment. Prepare,
mix, and apply repair underlayment and primer according to manufacturer's written instructions to
produce a smooth, uniform, plane, and level surface. Feather edges to match adjacent floor elevations.
A. TESTING AND INSPECTING:
Testing and Inspecting: The Contractor shall engage a qualified testing and inspecting agency to
perform tests and inspections and to submit reports.
B. TESTING OF CONCRETE
Testing for compression strength of concrete sampled during the progress of the work shall be as
follows:
1. SAMPLING THE CONCRETE
a) Concrete for the test specimens shall be taken at the point of deposit. To ensure that the
specimens are representative of the concrete in the structure a number of samples shall be
taken from different points.
EHAF – CO – 01/03 -18 - Section 03005

b) Each sample shall be large enough to make the number of test specimens required and shall
be taken from one point in the work. The location from which each sample is taken shall be
noted.
2. TEST SPECIMENS
The tests specimens shall be prepared as specified by Egyptian standard Specifications ES .
3. STORAGE OF TEST SPECIMENS
a) The test specimens shall be stored at the site, in the same place as of the concrete structural
elements they have been sampled form 24 hours after making the specimens, and they shall
be removed from the moulds, marked, stored, and cured typically as the concrete in the
structure itself. Specimens which are to be sent to a laboratory for testing shall be packed for
transit in damp sand, or other suitable damp material.
b) These specimens shall reach the laboratory at least 24 hours before the test. On arrival at
the laboratory they shall be similarly stored in water until the date of the test.
4. METHOD OF TESTING
The tests shall be made at the age of the concrete corresponding to that for which the strengths
are specified. Tests shall be made as specified in ECP No.3.
C. TESTING OF STEEL REINFORCEMENT

Steel reinforcement used in concrete is to be tested before use. The tests are to be carried on three
specimens for each different diameter, the results of which are to comply with the characteristics given
by the Egyptian standard specifications ES 262.
D. LOAD TESTING OF STRUCTURES
1. Should the Engineer have any doubts as to the workmanship and quality control of the
Contractor’s concreting work, then he may order the load testing of parts or whole sections of the
structures, such testing shall be performed in full compliance with the requirements of ECP No.3
as amended herein.
2. This test shall be made after the expiry of 56 days of effective hardening of the concrete. In such
tests the structure shall be subjected to a superimposed load equal to one and a quarter times the
specified superimposed load used for design and this load shall be maintained for a period of 24
hours before removal.
3. During the test struts strong enough to take the whole load shall be placed in position leaving a
gap under the members to allow for the expected deflection. If within 24 hours of the removal of
the load, the structure does not show a recovery of at least 75% of the maximum deflection shown
during the 24 hours under load, the test loading shall be repeated. The structure shall be
considered to have failed to pass the test if the recovery after the second test is not at least 75% of
the maximum deflection shown during the second test. IF during the test, or upon removal of the
load, the structure shows signs of weakness, undue deflection or faulty construction, it shall be
reconstructed or strengthened as necessary and ordered by the Engineer at contractor’s own
expense.
4. All such load testing shall be performed by the contractor and at his own expense.
3.09 TOLERANCES OF REINFORCED CONCRETE
A. The following are the allowable tolerances in reinforced concrete at locations that are not affecting
placing of pre-stressed and/or pre-cast concrete units.
EHAF – CO – 01/03 -19 - Section 03005
1. Variation in cross sectional dimensions) = + 4 mm for columns, beams, thickness of walls and
slabs and 10mm for foundations.
2. Variation in plan from specified location = + 15 mm in any panel at any location.
3. Deviation in plan from straight line parallel to specified building line: 2mm/m any panel or adjacent
panels less than 6 m apart with a maximum of 12 mm.
4. Deviation from plumb 2 mm/m of height with a maximum of 12 mm.
5. Deviation in elevation of bearing surfaces from line parallel to specified grade line = 2 mm/m for
adjacent panels less than 6 m apart with a maximum of 12 mm.
6. Variation in elevation of bearing surface from specified elevation + 15 mm any panel at any location.
7. Variation from specified joint width = ± 5 mm
END OF SECTION
EHAF – CO – 01/03 -20 - Section 03005

SECTION 04220
CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS
PART 1 GENERAL

Division-1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section.

A. Concrete masonry units (CMU).
B. Autoclaved aerated concrete blocks medium weight (AAC).
C. Autoclaved aerated concrete blocks light weight (AAC).

A. Field Constructed Mock-Ups: Prior to installation of masonry work, erect sample wall
representative of completed masonry work required for project with respect to qualities of
appearance, materials and construction. Locate mock-ups on site in locations indicated or, if not
indicated, as directed by Architect. Retain mock-ups during construction as standard for judging
completed masonry work. For the following types of masonry, build mock-ups which are
approximately 2 m long by 1.6 m high by full thickness. When directed, demolish mockups and
remove from site.
B. The Contractor shall submit at his own expense representative samples of materials to the
Architect for his approval before delivering supplies to the site. Materials and equipment
incorporated in the work shall match the approved samples. All materials used in the work shall
be the best of their kind and shall conform to the specifications.
C. The exposed surface of masonry blocks (IF specified) that will be left without plastering shall be
smooth and clean.
1.04 REFERENCES
A. Non-load bearing concrete unit masonry work shall be performed in strict accordance with the
stipulations of the Egyptian standards (ES) specifications latest edition and sound practice.
EGYPTIAN STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS ES NO.
261 Expanded Metal (steel) for General Purposes

262 Steel Bars for Concrete reinforcement
373 Portland Cement (ordinary and Rapid Hardening)
583 Sulphate Resisting Portland Cement
584 Quick and Hydrated Lime
619 Standard test Methods for Testing of Concrete Masonry Units
974 Portland Blast Furnace cement 35
1108 Sand for Fuilding Mortars
1292 Concrete Masonry Units
EHAF – CO – 01/03 -1 - Section 04220

May 2012 - Rev.(0) concrete masonry Units
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. PRODUCT DATA
Submit manufacturer’s product data for each type of masonry unit, accessory, and other
manufactured products, including certifications that each type complies with specified
requirements.
B. SAMPLES
1. Submit, for verification purposes, samples of each exposed masonry unit and colored
masonry mortar, if any. Include in each set of samples the full range of exposed colors and
textures to be expected in completed work.
2. Submittals shall be made in accordance with section 01300 and shall include the following
items:
a) Materials list and manufacturer’s data including test results and certificates of
compliance.
b) Detailed drawings of all construction details including fabrication, bending, reinforcing,
anchorage devices and setting of embedded items.
A. Cement shall be delivered in sealed bags or in water-tight barrels bearing the manufacturer’s
name and the date of manufacture. It shall be stored in piles not more than ten bags high in
perfectly dry weatherproof sheds approved by the Architect.
B. Sand, crushed stones or aggregate and lime shall be stored in separate stockpiles at areas
approved by the Architect and shall be free from all foreign materials which may become mixed
with them.
C. Masonry units shall be stored dry by stockpiling clear from the ground on planks or other suitable
supports and shall be covered with polythene or tarpaulin for protection against wetting. Masonry
units shall be handled carefully after manufacture and curing period not less than 35 days and till
laying in walls. Care shall be taken to protect edges and corners of masonry units or special
pieces from breakage or damage through storage or handling.
D. Masonry reinforcement shall be stored above ground and shall be protected from contact with
the soil. Anchors and ties shall be stored in containers in a weather tight structure.
E. If masonry units are to be imported, they shall be handled on pallets.
1.07 JOB CONDITIONS
A. PROTECTION OF WORK
1. During erection, cover top of walls with heavy waterproof sheeting at end of each days’ work.
Cover partially completed structures when work is not in progress.
2. Extend cover a minimum of 600 mm down both sides and hold cover securely in place.
3. Do not apply uniform floor or roof loading for at least 12 hours after building masonry walls or
columns.
4. Do not apply concentrated loads for at least 3 days after building masonry walls or columns.
EHAF – CO – 01/03 -2 - Section 04220

B. STAINING
1. Prevent grout or mortar or soil from staining the face of masonry to be left exposed or
painted. Remove immediately grout or mortar in contact with such masonry. Protect base of
walls from rain splashed mud and mortar splatter by means of coverings spread on ground
and over wall surface.
2. Protect sills, ledges and projections from droppings of mortar.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MASONRY UNITS, GENERAL
A. MANUFACTURER
Obtain masonry units from one manufacturer, of uniform texture and color for each kind required,
for each continuous area and visually related areas.
B. MASONRY UNIT CHARACTERISTICS
Provide units complying with standards referenced and requirements indicated.
2.02 TYPE OF MASONRY UNITS
A. CONCRETE MASONARY UNITS (CMU)
1. Unit Compressive Strength: Comply with the Egyptian code practice for masonry
2. Density Classification: Comply with the Egyptian code practice for masonry
3. Size (Width): as shown on drawings
B. AUTOCLAVED AERATED CONCRETE BLOCKS MEDIUM WEIGHT (AAC)

C. AUTOCLAVED AERATED CONCRETE BLOCKS LIGHT WEIGHT(AAC)
The weight of the wall including finishes shall not exceed the stated densities unless otherwise
stated in the Documents.
2.03 SPECIAL SHAPE
1. Provide where required for lintels, corners, jambs, sash, control joints, headers, bonding and
other special conditions.
2. Cure units by continuous fog spraying for 5 days, then air-dry in the atmosphere for not less
than 30 days before installation, to comply with Egyptian code for masonry.
A. Faces to Receive Plaster: Where units are indicated to receive a direct application of plaster,
provide textured-face units made with gap-graded aggregates.
EHAF – CO – 01/03 -3 - Section 04220

B. EXPOSED FACES
1. Provide manufacturer’s standard color and texture, unless otherwise indicated.

2. Match Architect’s sample for color and texture
3. Concrete masonry units shall conform the Egyptian code of practice for masonry.
2.04 MORTAR MATERIALS
A. PORTLAND CEMENT:
1. According to ES 373 provide natural color or white cement as required to produce required
mortar color.
2. Hydrated lime: ES 548
B. AGGREGATE FOR MORTAR
According to ES 1109, except for joints less than 6 mm use aggregate graded with 100 passing the
No. 16 sieve.
C. WATER:
Clean and potable, according to ES 190
2.05 MASONRY ACCESSORIES
A. HORIZONTAL JOINT REINFORCING AND TIES FOR MASONRY
Provide expanded metal prefabricated from 26 ga. Galvanized steel delivered in coils. Widths shall
be 200 mm and 100 mm for both wall thickness of 250 mm and 120 mm respectively, of
approximately 50 mm and 20 mm less than nominal width of walls and partitions as required to be
installed for full embedment in mortar with mortar coverage of not less than 10 mm. Expanded
metal shall be provided at each second course.
B. WIRE FINISH
Provide manufacturer’s standard mill galvanized finish except as otherwise indicated.
C. ANCHORS AND TIES
Provide straps, bars, and rods fabricated from not less than 16 ga. Sheet metal or 10 mm diameter
rod stock, unless otherwise indicated.
D. CONCRETE INSERTS FOR MASONRY
1. Unit Type: Furnish cast iron or malleable iron inserts of the type and size shown, hot-dip
galvanized after fabrication with 43 gm. Zinc coating, ASTM A 153 , class B-2 and/or ES 863.
2. Dovetail slots: furnish dovetail slots with filler strips where shown.
3. Fabricate from 24 ga. Galvanized steel unless otherwise indicated.
4. Provide hot-dip galvanized steel dovetail anchors of the size and type to suit construction
requirements.
5. For installation of concrete inserts, see concrete sections of these specifications.
6. Advise Concrete Installer of specific requirements regarding his placement of inserts which are to
be used by the masonry installer for anchoring of masonry work.
EHAF – CO – 01/03 -4 - Section 04220
2.06 MORTAR MIX
A. Mortar Used for solid concrete dricks and hollow concrete blocks shall consist of 300 kg cement to
one cubic meter of sand.
B. The ingredients for cement shall be measured in proper gauge boxes on a boarded platform, the
ingredients being turned over twice dry and twice whilst water is added through a hose.
Alternatively, mixing may be by means of an approved mechanical batch mixer. Mortars shall be
used within two hours of mixing.
2.07 TESTING
A. All materials and masonry units used shall comply with the requirements given in the standards
and specifications when tested in accordance with the methods indicated.
B. The contractor shall perform all such tests at his own expense.
PART 3 EXECUTIONS
A. THICKNESS:
1. Build masonry construction to the full thickness shown, using units of nominal thickness
shown or specified.
2. Build chases and recesses as shown and as required for the work of other trades. Provide
not less than 200 mm of masonry between chase or recess and jamb of openings, and
between adjacent chases and recesses.
3. Cut masonry units with motor-driven saw designed to cut masonry with clean sharp,
unshipped edges. Cut units as required to provide pattern shown and to fit adjoining work
neatly. Use full units without cutting wherever possible. Use dry cutting saws to cut concrete
masonry units.
4. Do not wet concrete masonry units.
B. PATTERN BOND
1. Lay exposed masonry in the bond pattern shown, or if not shown, lay in running bond vertical
joint in each course centered on units in courses above and below.
2. Match coursing, bonding, colour and texture of new masonry work with existing work, where
indicated.
3. Layout walls in advance for accurate spacing of surface bond patterns, with uniform joint
widths and to properly locate openings, movement-type joints, returns and offsets. Avoid the
use of less than half size units at corners, jambs and wherever possible at other locations.
4. Lay-up walls plumb and with courses level, accurately spaced and coordinated with other
work.
C. STOPPING AND RESUMING WORK
Rack back ½-masonry unit length in each course, do not tooth. Clean exposed surfaces of set
masonry, wet units lightly (if specified to be wetted), and remove loose masonry units and mortar
prior to laying fresh masonry.
EHAF – CO – 01/03 -5 - Section 04220

D. BUILT IN WORK
1. As the work progresses, build in items specified under this and other sections of these
specifications. Fill in solidly with masonry around built in items.
2. Fill space between hollow metal frames and masonry solidly with mortar. Where built-in items
are to be embedded in cores of hollow masonry units, place a layer of metal lath in the joint
below and rod mortar or grout into core.
3. Fill Masonry unit cores with grout 3 courses 600 mm under bearing plates, beams, lintels,
posts and similar conditions unless otherwise indicated
E. NON-LOAD BEARING INTERIOR PARTITION WALLS
Build full height of story to underside of solid structure above, unless otherwise indicated.
F. TOILET PARTITIONS & WALLS AND OTHER PARTITIONS KICKERS
All Toilet partitions and the first (3) three coarses (kickers) of all walls and other partitions shall be
built with solid concrete bricks or by grouting the first (3) three coarses (kickers) with bedding
mortar.
3.02 MORTAR BEDDING AND JOINTING
A. Lay hollow concrete masonry units with full mortar coverage on horizontal and vertical face shells.
Bed webe in mortar in starting course on footings and foundation walls and in all courses of piers,
columns and pilasters, and where adjacent to cells or cavities to be reinforced or to be filled with
concrete or grout. For starting courses on footings where cells are not grouted, spread out full
mortar bed including areas under cells.
B. JOINTS:
1. Maintain joint width shown, except for minor variations required to maintain bond alignment. If
not otherwise indicated, lay walls with 10 mm joints. Cut joints flush for masonry walls which
are to be concealed or to be covered by other materials. Tool exposed joints slightly concave
using a jointer larger than joint thickness. Rake out mortar in preparation for application of
caulking or sealant where shown.
2. Remove masonry units disturbed after laying; clean and relay in fresh mortar. Do not pound
corners at jambs to fit stretcher units which have been set in position. If adjustments are
required, remove units, clean off mortar, and reset in fresh mortar.
3.03 HORIZONTAL JOINT REINFORCING (IF REQUIRED)
A. Provide continuous horizontal joint reinforcing as shown and specified in Item 2.4.1 described
before. Lap reinforcement minimum of 150mm. Do not bridge control and expansion joints with
reinforcing, unless otherwise indicated. Cut and bend units as directed by manufacturer for
continuity at returns, offsets, column fireproofing, pipe enclosures and other special conditions.
B. Space continuous horizontal reinforcing for parapets, space reinforcing at 200 mm 0.c. vertically,
unless otherwise indicated.
3.04 LINTELS
A. Install loose reinforced concrete masonry lintels where shown. For openings not exceeding 1.2m
wide lintel’s section 0.15 m high resting 0.15 on each side, 4 bars10 mm diam .and 5 stirrups
φ8mm/m unless otherwise stated.
EHAF – CO – 01/03 -6 - Section 04220
B. Provide masonry lintels where shown and wherever openings of more than 0.3 m are shown
Provide precast or formed-in-place masonry lintels. Thoroughly cure precast lintels before handling
and installation. Temporarily support formed-in-place lintels.
3.05 CONTROL AND EXPANSION JOINTS
A. Provide vertical expansion, control and isolation joints in masonry where shown. Build-in related
masonry accessory items as the masonry work progresses.
B. See Division 7 sections for “Joint sealers”.
C. Build flanges of metal expansion strips into masonry. Lap each joint 100 mm in direction of flow.
Seal joints below grade and at junctures with horizontal expansion joints, if any.
D. Build- in joint fillers where shown, specified in a division 7 section “Joint sealers”. Joint width for
sealants: 10 mm unless otherwise indicated.
3.06 REPAIR, POINTING AND CLEANING
A. Remove and replace masonry units which are loose, chipped, broken, stained or otherwise
damaged, or if units do not match adjoining units as intended. Provide new units to match
adjoining units and install in fresh mortar or grout , pointed to eliminate evidence of replacement.
3.07 POINTING
A. During the tooling of joints, enlarge any voids or holes, except weep holes, and completely fill with
mortar. Point up all joints at corners, openings and adjacent work to provide a neat, uniform
appearance, properly prepared for application of caulking or sealant compounds.
B. Clean exposed brick masonry surfaces by the bucket and brush hand cleaning method or by high
pressure water method. Comply with requirements of BIA technical notes No. 20 “cleaning brick
masonry”.
C. Clean exposed masonry by dry brushing at the end of each day’s work and after final pointing to
remove mortar spots and droppings. Comply with recommendations in NCMA TEK bulletin No. 28.
END OF SECTION
EHAF – CO – 01/03 -7 - Section 04220

SECTION 04813
3T
THERMAL BRICK UNITS 2T
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Special Conditions and Division-1 Specifi-
cation sections, apply to work of this section.
A. This section covers the specifications of the following:
1. Thermal Concrete facing brick.
1.03 REFERENCES
A. Shall be performed in strict accordance with the stipulations of the Egyptian standards (ES) specifications latest
edition and sound practice Egyptian Standard Specifications (ES No.):
1. 1401 Concrete Facing Brick
2. 41 Thermal Bricks
3. 42 Sand Facing Solid Bricks
4. 43 Clay Facing Bricks
5. 373 Portland Cement (ordinary and Rapid Hardening)
6. 1108 Sand for Building Mortars
7. 190 Water
1.04 SUBMITTALS
B. The Contractor shall submit at least three (3) manufacturers or suppliers for each type of masonry unit approved
by the Engineer.
C. Submit the following documents:
1. Name of manufacturer.
2. Type of brick machinery.
3. Capacity of plant and present stocks.
4. Properties of each type and results of previous tests.
5. Means of identifications of bricks.
D. Samples: For each type and color of brick and colored mortar.
E. Material Certificates: For each type and size of product indicated.
EHAF-CO-01/03 -1 - Section 04813

May, 2012, Rev. (0) Thermal brick units
A. Masonry Standard: Comply with ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 unless modified by requirements in the Contract
Documents.
B. Sample Panels: Build sample panels to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate
aesthetic effects.
1. Build sample panels for each type of exposed unit masonry construction in sizes approximately 1500 5T
mm long by 1200 mm high by full thickness.

5T 5T 5T
A. Hot-Weather Requirements: Comply with hot-weather construction requirements contained in

ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602.
PART 2PRODUCTS
2.01 GENERAL
A. Defective Units: Referenced masonry unit standards may allow a certain percentage of units to contain chips,
cracks, or other defects exceeding limits stated in the standard. Do not use units where such defects will be
exposed in the completed Work.
2.02 THERMAL BRICKS (SORNAGA BRICKS)
A. Thermal Bricks: shall be obtained from approved manufacturers and shall conform to ES 41.
B. Facing bricks:
1. Shall be special glazed burnt clay types suitable for lining of building facades in project areas. The brick
shall be 20 mm thick and of well defined arises and perpendicular sides.
2. Water Absorption: Shall not exceed 8%.
3. Bending Strength: shall not be less than 200 Kg/cm2. P P
4. Total density: Shall not exceed 2.2 g/cm3.

P P
5. Dimension Tolerance: ±2%
6. Warepage: ±1%
7. Surface Hardness: MOHS 5
8. Acid Resistance: Resistant
9. Other Chemical Resistance: Resistant
C. Floor Tiles:

2. Bending Strength: shall not be less than 250 Kg/cm2. P P

P P
5. Warepage: ±0.8%
6. Surface Hardness: MOHS 5
D. Roof Tiles:
2. Bending Strength: shall not be less than 250 Kg/cm2.
2.03 CLAY FACING BRICKS ( Blue Bricks)

A. Facing Clay Bricks: shall be obtained from approved manufacturers and shall conform to ES 43.
B. Facing bricks shall be special glazed burnt clay types suitable for lining of building facades in project areas.
The brick shall be 20 mm thick and of well defined arises and perpendicular sides.
C. The percent of voids shall not exceed 25%.
D. Water Absorption: Shall not exceed 1%.
E. Bending Strength: 450-500 Kg/cm2.
F. Sio 2 Content: 59-60%

R R
G. Total Density: 2.3 g/cm3.
H. Acid Resistance: 100%

I. The typical nominal dimensions (length x width x height) of various types of bricks are as follows:
1. 250 x 120 x 60 mm
2. 250 x 120 x 65 mm
3. 250 x 120 x 95 mm
4. 250 x 120 x 130 mm

A. General:
5. For mortar that is exposed to view, use washed aggregate consisting of natural sand or crushed stone.
6. For joints less than 6 mm thick, use aggregate graded with 100 percent passing the No. 16 (1.18-mm)
sieve.
B. Cement:
1. Cement shall be According to Egyptian Specifications ES 373, ‘’Ordinary Portland Cement and rapid
hardening cement’’.
2. Hydrated lime: ES 548.
C. Sand: Shall be delivered from approved source and shall conform to ES 1108 « Sand for Building Mortars ».
The total soluble chlorides present in sand shall not exceed 0.06% of weight of dry sand. The total soluble
sulphates (as SO3) shall not exceed 0.044%.
D. Water: Shall be clean, fresh, and free from harmful matter, such as oil, salts, organic materials, or any mate-
rials which may have harmful effect according to ES 190, from mains or other sources approved by the Organ-
ization shall be used. When doubt exists, water shall be tested in approved laboratories.
2.05 MORTAR MIX
A. Mortar for facing bricks shall consist of 300 kg cement to one cubic meter of sand and shall be 450 kg cement
to one meter of sand for scratch coat. Where required for workability plasticizing additives approved by the
Organization shall be added according to manufacturer’s approved directions.
B. The cement and sand shall be measured in proper gauge boxes on a boarded platform. Ingredients including
admixtures shall be mixed by means of an approved mechanical batch mixer. Mortars shall be used within two
hours of mixing.
C. Do not use admixtures, including pigments, air-entraining agents, accelerators, retarders, water-repellent
agents, antifreeze compounds, or other admixtures unless otherwise indicated.
D. Do not use calcium chloride in mortar or grout.
2.06 TIES AND ANCHORS
A. Masonry ties shall be product of specialized manufacturer’s approved by Organization. The ties shall be made
of galvanized steel.
B. Dovetail joints of cross section 25 x 2.5 mm shall be used for connecting walls to concrete columns. The
anchor slots shall be securely fixed in concrete shutter before placement of concrete. The tail shall not be less
100 mm length. Unless otherwise shown on drawing, dovetail joints shall be installed every four courses.
2.07 MASONRY CLEANERS
A. Proprietary Acidic Cleaner: Manufacturer's standard-strength cleaner designed for removing mortar/grout
stains, efflorescence, and other new construction stains from new masonry without discoloring or damaging

masonry surfaces. Use product expressly approved for intended use by cleaner manufacturer and
manufacturer of masonry units being cleaned.
PART 3 EXECUTIONS
A. Thermal facing bricks shall be attached to walls using mortar specified in item (2.07).
B. Before installation, steel ties of shapes approved by the Organization shall be fixed into the original wall using
cement grout.
C. A scratch coat shall be applied where required to the walls before applying thermal bricks.
D. The mortar thickness shall be 2 to 3 cm. Bricks shall be installed with a bar grooved joints.
E. Horizontal and vertical joints shall be perfectly straight and plumb. The joints shall be pointed as required using
rich cement mortar.
F. Select and arrange units for exposed unit masonry to produce a uniform blend of colors and textures.
G. Wetting of Brick: Wet brick before lying if initial rate of absorption exceeds (30 g/194 sq. cm) per minute when
5T 5T
tested per ASTM C 67. Allow units to absorb water so they are damp but not wet at time of laying.
3.02 TOLERANCES
A. Dimensions and Locations of Elements:

1. For dimensions in cross section or elevation do not vary by more than +12 mm or - 6 mm.
2. For location of elements in plan do not vary from that indicated by more than ±12mm each 6 m or
±6mm total.
3. For location of elements in elevation do not vary from that indicated by more than ±6 mm in a story
height or ±19 mm total.
3.03 LAYING MASONRY WALLS
A. Lay out walls in advance for accurate spacing of surface bond patterns with uniform joint thicknesses and for
accurate location of openings, movement-type joints, returns, and offsets.
B. Avoid using less-than-half-size units, particularly at corners, jambs, and, where possible, at other locations.
C. Bond Pattern for Exposed Masonry: Unless otherwise indicated, lay exposed masonry in running bond; do not
use units with less than nominal 100 mm horizontal face dimensions at corners or jambs.
5T 5T
D. Built-in Work: As construction progresses, build in items specified in this and other Sections. Fill in solidly with
masonry around built-in items.
E. Fill space between steel frames and masonry solidly with mortar unless otherwise indicated.
3.04 REPAIR, POINTING, CURING, AND CLEANING
A. Remove and replace masonry units which are loose, chipped, broken, stained or otherwise damaged, or if units
do not match adjoining units as intended. Provide new units to match adjoining units and install in fresh mortar
or grout, pointed to eliminate evidence of replacement.

B. Pointing: During the tooling of joints, enlarge voids and holes, except weep holes, and completely fill with mor-
tar. Point up joints, including corners, openings, and adjacent construction, to provide a neat, uniform appear-
ance. Prepare joints for sealant application, where indicated.
C. Cure a scratch coat: by spraying with water twice a day for a minimum of seven days to comply with Egyptian
code for masonry.
D. Clean unit masonry as work progresses by dry brushing to remove mortar fins and smears before tooling joints.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 05500
MISCELLANEOUS METALS
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Special Conditions and Division-
1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section.
1.02 DESCRIPTION
A. This section covers specifications for all miscellaneous metal work as indicated on the Drawings,
specified herein and required for this contract, and shall include the following items:
1. Steel Frames
2. Inserts, sleeves and Anchors
3. Steel Handrail pipe
4. Steel Balustrade
5. Steel Grilles
6. Insect Screens
7. Floor Metal Dividers
A. Miscellaneous metals work shall be performed in strict accordance with the stipulations of the
Egyptian standard specifications (ES) latest Edition, or other equivalent International Standards and
sound practice.
Egyptian standards specifications

ES No.
243 Mechanical tests for welded joints

248 Brass Sheets, Bands and Strips
257 Electrical welding of structural steel
261 Expanded Metal (steel) for General Purposes
350 Steel Pipes suitable for screwing
435 Covered Electrodes for Welding Mild Steel
863 Galvanized Coating on Iron and Steel Articles by the Hot-Dip Method
917 Standard Tests for Approval of Welded Parts
1058 Structural Steel shapes (round sections)
1059 Structural steel shapes (non-round section)
1060 Structural steel shapes (angles)
1061 Structural steel shapes (beams)
1110 Cold Rolled steel sheets
1111 Cold Rolled Steel strips
EHAF – CO – 01/03 -1 - Section 05500

May 2012, Rev. (0) Miscellaneous Metals

ASTM No.
A27 Specification of Mild to Medium Strength Carbon Steel for General Application
A153 Specification of Zinc Coating
A167 Stainless Steel and Heat Resisting Chromium-Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet and Strip
A307 Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 6 000 psi Tensile
A312 Seamless and Austenitic Stainless Steel Pipe
A480 General Requirements for Flat Rolled Stainless Steel and Heat-Resisting Steel Plate, Sheet,
and Strip
A743 Castings, Iron-Chromium, Iron-Chromium-Nickel, and Nickel Base Corrosion-Resistant for
General Application
A780 Practice for Repair of Damaged Hot-Dip Galvanized Castings
A. The following related specifications will apply in their entirety to this section.
08490 Aluminum doors and windows

09900 Painting
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. Submittals shall be made in accordance with section 01330 and shall include the following items:
1. Materials list as manufacturer’s data, including specifications

2. Shop drawings including location, type, size and kind and gauge of metals extent of welding and
bolted connection and finishing
3. Certificates of compliance with mill certificates
4. Installation instructions
5. Samples
A. Unless otherwise specified, all work specified and shown on the Drawings shall conform to applicable
requirements.
B. Shop assembly shall be carried out to the greatest extent possible to minimize field splicing and
assembly.
1. Disassemble units only as necessary for transporting and handling limitations.
C. All welding shall be strictly in accordance with ES 257.
D. Perform all welding of steel assemblies under continuous inspection of the Engineer. Notify Engineer at
least 24 hours in advance of needed inspections. Such work must be left un-primed until the Engineer
gives his approval in writing.
EHAF – CO – 01/03 -2 - Section 05500

E. Work shall conform to the rules and practices of the best standard and local regulations.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Steel
1. Rolled shapes, plates and Bars.
Shall conform to the latest edition of standards.
2. Rectangular Hollow sections
All rectangular hollow section members must be sealed by welding to prevent ingress of moisture
inside the tubes No direct bolting to sides of tubes shall be allowed.
3. Non- Structural Work
The Contractor shall design to the Engineer’s approval any members shown on architectural
drawings, but, not being part of the structural frame, not shown on structural drawings.
4. Inserts, sleeves and Anchors
Inserts sleeves and anchors and other miscellaneous steel items shall be fabricated as shown on
drawings.
B. Aluminum
Shall be new and shall conform to standard specifications. All plates and sections shall be formed true
to detail and free from defects impairs appearance, strength or durability. Anchors for aluminum work
shall be aluminum or steel, provided the steel is properly insulated from the aluminum.
C. Brass
Shall be new and shall conform to standard specifications. All plates and sections shall be formed true
to detail and free from defects impairs appearance, strength or durability.
D. Shop Prime Coat
Miscellaneous ferrous metal work shall be cleaned of grease, rust, mill scale and other foreign matter,
and shall be given a shop coat of red inorganic zinc and oil paint. Subsequent painting is specified
under section 09900 specification of painting.
E. Galvanized Steel Articles
Shall have dip galvanized coatings after fabrication, coating shall be smooth, continuous and free from
flux strain. The coating shall be sufficiently adhesive to withstand normal handling conditions without
peeling or flaking.
F. Stainless Steel
Shall be new and shall conform to standard specifications and according to ASTM A167
EHAF – CO – 01/03 -3 - Section 05500

G. Welding Electrodes
Shall be new and shall conform to standard specifications and according to ES No. 435
H. Tie wire
Tie wire shall be galvanized, double annealed copper bearing steel wire. Except where otherwise
required Tie wire shall be 1 mm diameter.
I. Galvanized Steel Wire Mesh
The steel wire mesh shall be of suitable opening sizes and shall be galvanized steel ready to receive a
20 mm plaster layer.
PART 3 EXECUTIONS
3.01 GENERAL
1. Ferrous metals shall be thoroughly cleaned of loose scale, and rust before being fabricated.
2. Finished members shall be free of twists, bends or open joints, and shall present a neat
workmanlike appearance when completed.
A. Fabrication and Erection
Using specified new stock of standard sizes specified or detailed, fabricate items in shop producing
high grade metal work. Form and fabricate to meet required conditions. Include clips, straps, bolts,
screws and other fastenings necessary to secure the work. Conform applicable work to latest edition of
referenced standards. Accurately make and tightly fit joining and intersection in true planes with
adequate secure fastenings. All metal work shall be erected plumb, true on line and in its designated
location. Field welds on exposed surface shall be ground and finished smooth. Connections shall be
bolted or welded as indicated on Drawings, and if necessary temporarily braced, so as to make
adequate provision for all erection stresses and conditions including those due to erection equipment
and its operation. Permanent bolting shall not be undertaken until proper alignment has been achieved.
The contractor must allow for the provision and erection of all necessary cranes, winches, tackles, etc.
for the unloading and erection of the steelwork and removes the same when the work is completed.
After erection all work shall be left in a neat and clean condition, ready for filed painting or coating.
Coordinate work of the section with related trades. Particular attention is required for items to be
embedded in concrete work. Provide all punching and drillings indicated as required for attachment of
other work to that of this section.
B. Welding
1. Welding may be permitted under suitable conditions and with suitable safeguards in accordance
with the code of practice. The centre line of the welded rods is to coincide at the welded joint.
Specimens of the welded rods are to be tested to make sure the stress at the weld is appropriate to
that of mild steel. Welding is prohibited for steel rods which have their strength increased by cold
working.
2. No welding shall be started before receiving the written permission of the Engineer. Should welding
be permitted then the Contractor shall follow all procedure and tests as described in ES 257
Electrical-Arc welding of structural steel and ES 917 Standard Tests for Approval of welders.
EHAF – CO – 01/03 -4 - Section 05500

C. Setting Out Of Works
The Contractor shall be responsible for the accuracy of all the relevant setting out of work necessary in
the fabricating shops and on the site. He shall also check and agree with the Engineer the setting out of
these parts of the works which affect the erection of the steelwork, e.g. foundations, foundation bolts,
etc... The contractor shall provide all access staging and scaffolds necessary to enable this checking to
be carried out.
D. Protection
Provide and be responsible for protection and repair of adjacent surfaces and areas which may become
damaged as a result of work of this section. Protect work performed hereunder until completion and
final acceptance of work by Engineer. Repair or replace all damaged or defective work to original
specified condition, at no additional cost to the Employer. Exercise reasonable precaution to protect
finished floor surface and adjacent work from damage. Concrete floors shall not be overlooked. Mobile
equipment used in placing miscellaneous metal if required shall not be placed directly on floors; use
pads of timber or other material for cushioning. Where welding is done in proximity to glass or finished
surfaces, such surfaces shall be protected from damage due to weld sparks, spatter, or tramp metal.
E. Painting
1. All ferrous metals except cast iron, ductile iron, stainless steel and galvanized metals shall be given
one or more shop coats of paint. Before priming surfaces shall be cleaned. Shop coats shall be
allowed to dry before materials are loaded for delivery to the site. After erection, all areas where
the shop coats have been rubbed off or omitted, and all field bolting and welding shall be painted
as specified for shop priming. See section 09900 for surface preparation prime coatings, finish
painting and coatings.
2. Aluminum members shall be isolated from contact with dissimilar metals and concrete to provide
protection from electrolytic deterioration. Use non-absorptive tape or gaskets, heavy brush coat of
approved zinc chromate primer made with a synthetic resin vehicle; or apply a heavy coat of
approved zinc chromate alkali-resistant bituminous paint.
3.02 STEEL WORK
A. Inserts, sleeves and anchors
Shall be fixed in place before concerning as shown on drawings or as required.
B. Steel Handrail pipe
1. The contractor shall supply steel pipes with dimensions as shown on shop drawings fixed on 5 mm
thick steel supports, supports shall be fixed to the walls by steel plates 5 mm thick steel 80 mm X
80 mm.
2. Made of steel cross sections painted with an anti-rust and anti-corrosive paint, diameter. Fixation of
supports to stairs and steel sections thickness shall be as detailed or in such way as approved by
Engineer.
C. Steel Grilles
Grilles of welded steel bars surrounded by adequate frames with dimensions and shapes as shown
on drawings shall be located on the outside faces of windows, or in other places shown on drawings.
Grilles shall be fixed suing adequate fasteners.
EHAF – CO – 01/03 -5 - Section 05500

D. Ornament Steel Balustrade
Balustrades shall be constructed of forged steel sections of dimensions and configurations indicated on
shop drawings. Base and anchor plates shall be provided as shown on shop drawings and not less than
that required supporting structural loads. Drill plates to receive anchor bolts and for grouting as
required. Fixation of supports to stairs and steel sections thickness shall be as detailed or in such way
as approved by Engineer.
E. Circular Ornament Steel
Circular Ornament Steel shall be constructed of forged steel sections of dimensions and configurations
indicated on shop drawings. Base and anchor plates shall be provided as shown on shop drawings and
not less than that required supporting structural loads. Drill plates to receive anchor bolts and for
grouting as required. Fixation of supports and steel sections thickness shall be as detailed or in such
way as approved by Engineer.
3.03 GALVANIZED STEEL WORK
A. Perforated Metal Sheet
Perforated Metal Sheet shall be constructed of galvanized steel of 5 mm thick, galvanized metal tube of
40 x 20 mm and configurations as indicated on shop drawings. Base and anchor plates shall be
provided as shown on shop drawings. Fixation of supports to balustrade shall be as detailed or in such
3.04 BRASS WORK
A. Foot Stool Pipe
Brass foot stool of dimensions as shown on shop drawings shall be supplied and installed as and where
shown on drawings. Shape, size of the foot stool pipe and it supporting shall be as shown and detailed
on shop drawings or in such way as approved by Engineer.
3.05 ALUMINUM WORK
A. Handrails
Aluminum handrails shall be of shape and size as shown and detailed on shop drawings or in such way
as approved by Engineer.
3.06 STAINLESS STEEL WORK
A. Strip Dividers
Strip dividers of dimensions as shown on drawings shall be supplied and installed between each two
different flooring materials as and where shown on drawings.
B. Ladders
Stainless steel ladders shall be of shape and size as shown and detailed on shop drawings or in such
END OF SECTION
EHAF – CO – 01/03 -6 - Section 05500

SECTION 06200
FINISH CARPENTRY
PART 1 GENERAL
1 Specification sections, apply to the work of this section.
A. Definition: Finish carpentry includes carpentry work which is exposed to view, and which is not
specified as part of other sections.
B. Type of finish carpentry work in this section includes:
1. Wood suspended ceiling

2. Wood cladding
3. Wood skirting
A. Finish carpentry work shall be performed in strict accordance with the stipulations of the Egyptian
standard specifications (ES) latest Edition, and British standards (BS), as noted herein below or other
equivalent standards and sound practice.
Egyptian standard specifications

ES No.
- 906 wood chip boards and other particle boards

- 949 plywood
- 2/3/1/5 veneer
- 2/3/2 plastic laminate
British standard specifications

BS No.
- BS 1186: PART 2 for fabrication generally

- BS EN 1313: PART 1 for softwood
- BS EN 1313: PART 2 for hardwood
1.04 RELATED SPECIFICATIONS
A. The following related specifications will apply in their entirety to this section.
- 07150 Damp proofing

- 08200 Wood Doors
- 08710 Finish Hardware
- 08800 Glass and Glazing
- 09900 Painting
EHAF – CO – 01/03 -1 - Section 06200

May 2012, Rev. (0) Finish Carpentry
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data
Submit manufacturer’s shop drawings, specifications and installation instructions for each item of
factory fabricated siding and paneling.
B. Samples:
Submit samples for each species, hardware, accessory and cut or pattern of finish carpentry.
C. Wood Treatment Data:
Submit chemical treatment manufacturer’s instructions for handling, storage, installation and finishing
treated materials.
A. Protect finish carpentry materials during transit, delivery, storage and handling to prevent damage,
soiling and deterioration.
B. Do not deliver finish carpentry materials, until painting, wet work, grinding and similar operations
which could damage, soil or deteriorate woodwork has been completed in installation areas. If, due to
unforeseen circumstances, finish carpentry materials must be stored in other than installation areas,
store only in areas meeting requirements specified for installation areas.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 GENERAL MILLWORK REQUIREMENTS
A. All wood specified or indicated to receive stained finish shall be of the same species as indicated on
drawings. Grades of lumber used shall be the highest grade of the species for stain finish and the
second grade for paint finish. Wood for stain finish shall be uniform in color.
B. Lumber shall be machine sanded at the mill and sandpapered smooth at the building when installed.
Except where special profiles are shown, trim shall be standard-stock moldings and members
conforming to the following requirements, and approved design and type.
C. Joints shall be made in an approved manner to conceal shrinkage and shall be tight. Trim shall be
secured with fine finishing nails and with screws and with glue where required. Nails shall be set for
putty stopping. Wood finish shall be set straight, plumb or level, in perfect alignment, and shall be
closely fitted. Base shall be in as long lengths as possible.
D. Generally the Contractor shall assure that all woods used are well preserved and dried by special
furnaces so as to contain a maximum moisture content of 12 %, also all woods shall be free of the
following defects:
1. Juices, splits, wrapping and waviness.

2. Splits that exceed 30 mm in length.
3. Splits that exceed 25 mm in depth.
4. Knots in all surfaces that will be polished or painted.
5. Knots of diameter more than 20 mm.
EHAF – CO – 01/03 -2 - Section 06200

6. Decayed or dead knots.

7. Loose knots and knot holes.
8. Cavities and holes.
9. Decay and signs of termite.
E. In case of connecting two panels or boards the Contractor shall use wood of same species or veneer
to produce smooth amalgamated surface grains, such that graining shall be in one direction.
2.02 SOFT WOOD
A. SWEDISH YELLOW DEAL (MUSKI)
1. This wood is widely known as (Muski), shall be of grade – marked as indicated and of thoroughly
seasoned stock. These woods shall be of properly amalgamated fibers, compatible grains and shall
weigh 450 kg/m3.it is identified by its Bright yellow color with a low tendency towards the red.
P P
2. This type of woods shall be used in wooden doors, windows carpentry, wooden floorings etc. and
all items as indicated in drawings.
a. Rough Lumber No. 1 Boards and sheeting.

No. 1 Framing Joints, Plant and Small Timber
b. Finish lumber “B” and better vertical grain finish
B. PITCH PINE WOOD (AZZIZI)
1. This wood is widely known as Azzizi wood, shall be of grade – as indicated and of thoroughly
seasoned stock, these woods shall be rich by resinous materials and properly amalgamated fibers
and shall weigh 750 kg/m3 . It is identified by its dark yellow color with a reddish tint.
P P
2. This type of wood shall be used in wooden pergolas, trusses and pitched roofs, etc. and all items
as indicated in drawings and Bill of Quantities.
2.03 HARD WOOD
A. Teak Wood
1. Teak wood is high resistively to climatic conditions and is identified by its deep dark colors and
shall weigh 660 kg/m3, this wood shall be obtained from an approved wood supplier.
P P
2. General Mill work requirements mentioned earlier shall be applied on this wood ,in the meanwhile
a 19 % moisture content shall be optimum when using this wood in exterior wood work.
3. Special chemical preservation actions shall be taken into considerations to improve the chemical
resistance of such woods, paraffin oil is recommended for such preservations.
2.04 FABRICATED WOOD
A. Block Board
Shall be a composite board consisting of a core made up of strips not less than 8 mm width and not
more than 25 mm thick, laid separately or glued or otherwise jointed together to form a slab. Outer
EHAF – CO – 01/03 -3 - Section 06200

veneer grade 1 shall be glued to one side or more with the direction of the grain of the core strips
running to right-angles to that of the adjacent veneers. The veneer shall be free from knots, worm,
beetle holes and splits. Range of moisture content of boards shall be in the limit of 8 to 12%, shall be
free from bow, twist and wrap.
B. Beech Plywood Boards
1. Shall be made of beech wood and shall be free from twists and fissures for painted elements and
shall be of indicated thickness.
2. Boards are to be composed of a number of layers as stated in the approved drawings ,which
must ,which must not be less than three layers in the form of laminates placed opposite to one
another, pressed and glued together so as to obtain the required thickness.
3. Boards shall be rigid, durable and capable of being finished to a smooth surface.
C. Plywood For Natural Grain Finish Work

Shall be best quality of wood as indicated B/BB
2.05 WOOD VENEER
A. Conditions core material and veneer before bonding. Unless specified otherwise, apply to the reverse
side of flat boards a balancing veneer with the same moister and temperature movement
characteristics as the facing veneer.
B. Set out veneer so that features and pattern are aligned and in regular, uniform symmetry unless
specified otherwise. Apply veneer with edges tight butted, no gaps or other open defects and no
lipping.
C. Bond in presses whenever possible
D. Finished components shall be free from bow, twist, scratches, chipping, pimpling, depressions, glue
spill, staining, and the like.
E. Sand to the fine, smooth finish free from sanding marks.
2.06 MEDIUM DENSITY FIBER BOARDS (M.D.F)
A. Shall be manufactured of botanical fibers and cellulosic materials grinded and mixed properly with
artificial resins (as phenol formaldehyde) and waxy additives.
B. The produced mix shall be properly compacted in the form of boards of dimensions and thicknesses
as indicated in the approved drawings.
2.07 LAMINATED PLASTICS SHEETS
A. Plastic laminate facing to all works shall be high-pressure laminate to BS EN 438: Part 1
B. The durability shall be VGF as defined by BS EN 438: Part 1

C. Apply sheets in accordance with recommendations for the fabrication of decorative laminated sheets
published jointly by the British Plastics Federation and the British Laminated Plastics fabricators
association.
D. Condition sheets before bonding. Unless specified otherwise, apply to the reverse side of flat boards
a balancing sheet of similar construction to the decorative laminate sheet and from the same
manufacture.
EHAF – CO – 01/03 -4 - Section 06200

E. Bond in presses whenever possible

F. Finished components shall be free from bow, twist, scratches, chipping, pimpling, depressions, glue
spill, staining, and the like.
G. All joints exposed to view in the finished work shall be butted and true with no lipping. Chamfer edges
at all external angles.
2.08 WATERPROOF GLUE
A. Shall be first quality casein or phonemic resin glue, capable of withstanding extreme climatic
conditions of dampness, heat, cold and dryness.
2.09 FIRE RETARDANT TREATMENT
A. Where wood members and plywood are specified to be fire retardant treated, the treatment shall be
in accordance with Mil. Spec. MIL-L19140.
B. Treatment and performance inspection shall be by an independent and qualified testing agency that
establishes performance ratings.
C. Each piece of treated material shall bear identification of the testing agency and shall indicate
performance in accordance with such rating of flame spread and smoke developed.
D. Treat wood for maximum flame spread of 25 and smoke developed of 25.
E. Fire Resistant Softwood Plywood:
1. Use Grade A, Exterior, plywood for treatment.
2. Meet the following requirements when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.
a. Flame spread: 0 to 25.
b. Smoke developed: 100 maximum
F. Fire Resistant Hardwood Plywood:

1. Core: Fire retardant treated softwood plywood.
2. Hardwood face and back veneers untreated,
3. Factory seal panel edges, to prevent loss of fire retardant salts.
A. Fasteners and Anchorage’s:
1. Provide nails, screws bucks and other anchoring devices of the type, size, material, and
finish required for application indicated to provide secure attachment, concealed where
possible, firmly secured in precise position to receive, support, and engage the several parts
of the work. Bucks and nailing blocks embedded in concrete or masonry shall be formed of
lumber coated with hot bitumen and shall be securely anchored with bolts, spikes or other
anchorages.
2. Where finish carpentry is exposed on exterior or in areas of high relative humidity, provide
fasteners and anchorages with a hot dipped zinc coating.
EHAF – CO – 01/03 -5 - Section 06200

2.11 GROUNDS
A. Wood grounds shall be formed of Swedish yellow deal and shall be of proper thickness for the
plastering indicated. Provide continuous grounds for castings, chair rails, base, bumpers, metal
edging, trim as necessary to receive and engage millwork and wood finish. Grounds shall be solidly
wedged into position to ensure true planes in the completed work. Wood grounds on concrete or
masonry shall be secured to nailing blocks, or shall be secured by 50 mm long No. 8 screws, set in
raw plugs or other approved shields in drilled holes at 400 mm centers. Grounds for lath and plaster
shall be securely nailed at each nailing. Wood in contact with concrete, masonry, plaster, and roofing
shall be prime coated. Grounds for wall mirrors shall be installed back of joints in mirror sections and
shall be aligned to provide a true plane for the mirrors.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
A. Condition wood materials to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation areas prior to
installing.
B. Back prime lumber for painted finish exposed on the exterior or, where indicted, to moisture and high
relative humilities on the interior. Comply with requirements of section on painting within Division 9 for
primers and their application.
C. Pre-Installation Meeting: Meet at project site prior to delivery of finish carpentry materials and review
coordination and environmental controls required for proper installation and ambient conditioning in
areas to receive work.
D. In General all wood work and Assemblies shall follow the general Installation Procedures mentioned
herein.
3.02 WOOD WORK
A. Wood False Ceiling
Wood false ceiling shall be of walnut wood with dimensions, thickness, and fixation as indicated in the
drawings.
B. Wooden skirting & Cornice
Wood skirting & Cornice shall be of MDF or Swedish yellow deal - grade (1) with dimensions,
thickness, and fixation as indicated in the drawings.
C. Cladding
Cladding shall be of MDF or materials indicated otherwise with dimensions, thickness, and fixation as
indicated in the drawings.
D. Wood Balustrades
1. Balustrades shall be made of beech wood species on wooden battens of same species and
grade as the balustrades with dimensions, thickness, and fixation as indicated in the drawings.
Balustrades shall be painted by an approved paint.
2. Fixing Process shall be using galvanized steel screws (Fisher), nails and pivots when needed.
EHAF – CO – 01/03 -6 - Section 06200

3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Discard units of material which are unsound, warped, bowed, twisted, improperly treated, not
adequately seasoned or too small to fabricate work with minimum of joints or optimum jointing
arrangements, or which are of defective manufacture with respect to surfaces, sizes or patterns.
B. Install the work plumb level, true and straight with no distortions, shim as required using concealed
shims. Install to a tolerance of 3 mm in 2.4 m for plumb and level countertops; and with 2 mm
maximum offset in flush adjoining 3 mm maximum offsets in revealed adjoining surfaces.
C. Scribe and cut work to fit adjoining work, and refinish cut surfaces or repair damaged finish at cuts.
D. Standing and Running Trim
Install with minimum number of joints possible, using full length pieces from maximum length of
lumber available to the greatest extent possible. Stagger joints in adjacent and related members.
Cope at returns, miter at corners, to produce tight fitting joints with full surface contact throughout
length of joint. Use scarf joints for end to end joints.
E. Anchor finishes carpentry work
1. For anchorage devices or blocking built-in or directly attached to substrates. Secure to grounds,
stripping and blocking with countersunk, concealed fasteners and blind nailing as required for a
complete installation. Except where prefinished matching fasteners heads are required, use fine
finishing nail for exposed nailing, countersunk and filled flush with finished surface, and matching,
final finish where transparent is indicated.
2. Attach siding to framing to comply with siding manufacturer’s instructions including requirements
for type, size, materials, location and spacing of fasteners.
F. Pre-finished Hardwood Paneling, Board type:
1. Install in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions for concealed nailing. Arrange in random-
width pattern suggested by manufacturer, unless boards are of uniform width. Straggler end joints
in random pattern for best visual effect (uniformly distributed in each wall). Install with uniform
joints, with only tongued and grooved or end matched joints within each field of paneling.
2. Where grain character and color of boards very noticeable, select and arrange boards of best
visuals effect as directed by the Consultant.
G. Softwood Paneling, System, Board Type:
1. Install in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions by method indicated below , or if not

indicated, as recommended by manufacturer for substrate provided.
2. Fasten paneling to wood substrates using manufacturers concealed
3.04 ADJUSTMENT, CLEANING, FINISHING AND PROTECTION:
A. Repair damaged and defective finish carpentry work wherever possible to eliminate defects
functionally and visually; where not possible to repair properly, replace woodwork. Adjust joinery for
uniform appearance.
B. Clean Finish carpentry work on exposed and semi exposed surfaces. Touch up shop-applied finishes
to restore damaged or solid areas.
EHAF – CO – 01/03 -7 - Section 06200

C. Refer to Division-9 section 09900 “Painting” for final finishing of installed finish carpentry work.
3.05 PROTECTION:
A. Installer of finish carpentry work shall advise Contractor of final protection and maintain conditions
necessary to ensure that work will be without damage or deterioration at time of acceptance.
END OF SECTION
EHAF – CO – 01/03 -8 - Section 06200

BG Egyp EHAF Consulting Engineers
New Administration Building Dr. Ezz El-Din Fahmy
Interior Design Works Dr .Hussein Abbas
SECTION 07150
DAMP PROOFING
PART 1 GENERAL
Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Special Conditions
and Division -1 Specification Sections, apply to work of this section.
1.02.1 This section covers specifications of materials installed to provide resistance to moisture penetration
through foundation walls and similar surfaces subject to humidity, dampness, and direct water
contact, but not subject to hydrostatic pressure.
1.02.2 Extent of each type of damp-proofing work is indicated on Drawings.
Following types and applications of work are specified in this section:

1. Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Damp-Proofing membranes
2. Rubber/Bitumen Emulsion Damp-Proofing
3. Polymer Modified Cement Based Proofing Slurry
Damp-proofing work shall be performed in strict accordance with the stipulations of the British Code
of Practice as noted hereinbelow and the corresponding Egyptian Standard Specifications (ES) Latest
Edition, or other equivalent International Standards, and sound practice.
BRITISH CODE OF PRACTICE

BCP No.
102 Protection on buildings Against Water from the Ground
AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING MATERIALS

ASTM No.
D 449 Asphalt used in Damp-proofing and Waterproofing
EGYPTIAN STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS

ES No.
194 Cutback Bitumen
EHAF – CO – 01/03 -1- Section 07150

May 2012 - Rev.(0) Damp Proofing
The related specifications will apply in their entirety to this section as noted herein below:
EHAF CONSULTING ENGINEERS SPECIFICATIONS

EHAF No.
07100 Water Proofing

07200 Insulation
1.05.1 General
For each type of work, obtain primary materials from single manufacturer, to greatest extent possible.
Provide secondary materials only as recommended by manufacturer of primary materials.
1.05.2 Installer Qualifications
A firm which has specialized for not less than three years in installation of types of damp-proofing
required for project and which is acceptable to manufacturer of primary materials.
1.06 SUBMITTALS
1.06.1 Product Data
Submit manufacturer’s technical product data, installation instructions, and recommendations for each
damp-proofing material required. Include data substantiating that materials comply with requirements.
1.06.2 Shop Drawings
Submit Contractor’s shop drawings for each damp-proofing item required. These shop drawings shall
be submitted for approval by the Consultant prior to installation of materials.
1.06.3 Samples
The Contractor shall submit samples of all membranes and materials used in proofing systems;
samples shall be of suitable sizes and shall be presented in a proper manner such that the Consultant
could check its thickness and properties.
Samples shall be submitted in accordance with Contract Requirements

Section 1300.
1.06.4 Guarantee
The contractor shall submit guarantee certificate for the damp-proofing materials for a period not less
than ten years.
1.07 JOB CONDITIONS
1.07.1 Substrate
Proceed with damp-proofing work only after substrate construction and penetrating work have been
completed.
EHAF – CO – 01/03 -2- Section 07150

1.07.2 Weather
Proceed with damp-proofing work only when existing and forecasted weather conditions will permit
work to be performed in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations.
1.07.3 Ventilation
Provide adequate ventilation to prevent accumulation of hazardous fumes during application of

solvent-based components in enclosed spaces, and maintain ventilation until coatings have
thoroughly cured.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 DAMP-PROOFING MATERIALS
2.01.1 General
Provide damp-proofing materials which comply with the following requirements, or provide other
similar products which are certified in writing by manufacturer of primary damp-proofing materials to
be superior in performance for application indicated.
2.01.2 Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Damp-Proofing Membranes
These membranes shall be of types as follows:
A. Calendared PVC-P Water -proofing membrane, unreinforced, not resistant to bitumen, not
resistant to tar, not UV-resistant and mechanically fixed, Nominal thickness shall be 1.5 mm
according to approved manufacturer recommendation.
B. Calendared PVC-P damp-proofing membrane, reinforced, not resistant to bitumen, not resistant
to tar, UV-resistant and mechanically fixed roof floor damp-proofer, Nominal thickness shall be
1.2 mm according to approved manufacturer recommendation.
C. Calendared PVC-P damp-proofing membrane, unreinforced, not resistant against bitumen, not
UV-resistant and fixed by solvent welding as toilet floor damp-proofer, Nominal thickness shall be
1.00 mm.
2.01.3 Rubber/Bitumen Emulsion
It shall be cold applied proofer and protective coating, according to approved manufacturer
recommendation.
The emulsion shall be in such a condition that, with only light stirring, it is suitable for application
either by brushing or rollers or by spraying as ordered, or by dip application when thinned if
necessary, in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.
The emulsion shall allow for its application on dry and damp surfaces. It shall have excellent adhesion
properties to all surfaces and good elastic-plastic properties.
The emulsion shall be applied at temperature +8°C. to + 35°C. It shall have high resistance to
aggressive salts and mild soil acids, contain no solvents, and have very good weather resistance.
The emulsion when stored in the original sealed containers at normal room temperature shall retain
its properties for a period of not less than 18 months from date of manufacture.
EHAF – CO – 01/03 -3- Section 07150

All containers shall be marked with the manufacturer’s name or trade mark, the intended method or
methods of use, the number of the Specifications Standard and the date of manufacture.
2.01.4 Acrylic Polymer Modified Cement Based Proofing Slurry
This type of slurry shall be applied to concrete through two coats to prevent water infiltration.
Coverage of each coat shall be 1.5 kg/m2 for the first coat and 1.0 kg/m2 for the second coat. This
slurry is specified for proofing sub-structure’s floors and flower boxes, according to approved
manufacturer directions of use. shall be suitable against positive and negative water pressure.
2.02 ALTERNATIVES
Alternatives of materials proposed as equals to the above specifications shall be submitted in writing
to the Consultant in full detail together with explanation and reasons for such changes.
Alternatives will not be accepted until approved in writing by the Consultant.
Contractor shall submit certified evidence of at least five projects where work of similar kind and
scope of alternative material and workmanship has been performed by the Contractor within the past
five years.
2.03 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING MATERIALS
All damp-proofing materials shall be on the project site before commencement of work.
Only approved damp-proofing materials may be brought to, or stored at the site.
Materials shall be delivered to the site in the manufacturer’s unbroken labelled packages.
Liquid materials shall be used directly from the fully labelled cans in which they were shipped by the
manufacturer.
Roll goods shall be stored in a dry place protected from sun and weather. Rolls shall be always
placed on clean floors or platforms in such a way as to prevent damage to ends and embedment of
foreign matter in ends.
Handle roll goods with care. Dropping rolls on edges or ends damages and deforms the felt often
preventing proper application.
Materials subjected of moisture shall be permanently removed from the site.
All materials containing solvents shall be stored in dry, cool storage with proper fire and safety
precautions.
Storage locations of different materials shall be approved by the Consultant.
2.04 MANUFACTURER
Subject to compliance with requirements, offering damp-proofing membrane products which shall be
incorporated in the work limited to, the list of approved manufacturer.
2.05 TESTING
All materials used shall comply with the requirements of the standards of their country of origin when
tested in accordance with the methods indicated.
EHAF – CO – 01/03 -4- Section 07150

The Contractor shall perform all such tests at his own expense. All sampling and testing shall be
performed by an approved testing laboratory.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSPECTION
Examine substrate and conditions under which damp-proofing work is to be performed and notify
Contractor in writing of unsatisfactory conditions. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory
conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to Consultant.
3.01.2 Preparation of Substrate
A. Installation of metal fittings and similar work affecting the damp-proofing shall be finished before
work begins.
B. All internal angles shall be formed by angle fillets at 50 mm.

C. All cracks, breaks, holes, sharp projections or other unusual irregularities in the surfaces shall be
remedied before work is begun.
D. Surfaces must be clean, dry, free from grease, loose materials, excessive dust and foreign
materials which would interfere with the work application.
E. All vertical surfaces to which damp-proofing is applied shall be thoroughly chipped and wire
brushed, and then washed with clean water to present a new fresh and clean surface to which
damp-proofing will bond. Joints in masonry walls shall be flush filled with mortar before applying
the bitumen.
F. All cross sections of walls to receive damp-proofing shall be spread over by 10 mm thick
masonry mortar prior to damp-proof work.
G. All surfaces on which the damp-proofing is to be applied shall be firm, hard, smooth and dry.
3.02 INSTRUCTIONS FOR USAGE
3.02.1 General
Comply with manufacturer’s instructions, except where more stringent requirements are shown or
specified, and except where project conditions require extra precautions or provisions to ensure
satisfactory performance of work.
3.02.2 Instructions for Using Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Damp-Proofing Membrane for Roof Floor
This type of damp-proofing membrane shall be the main component of roof floor damp-proofing
system which is built up of geotextile 250 G/m2, PVC membrane 1.2 mm, at places indicated on
drawings and/or determined by Consultant. Roof floor damp-proofing system shall be laid out over
thermal insulation as follows:
A. Separation Layer
Shall be of geotextile fabric 250 g/m2 and shall comply with requirements
ASTM D 4555. Geotextile fabric sheets shall be unrolled and loosely laid out over polyethylene layer.
EHAF – CO – 01/03 -5- Section 07150

Geotextile fabric sheets shall be overlapped 100 mm at both directions and shall be welded with
adhesive tapes. A skirting of this layer shall be jointly fixed with polyethylene skirting to roof parapet.
B. PVC Damp-Proofing Membrane
Shall comply with requirements of DIN 16734. Shall be unrolled and loosely laid out over geotextile
fabric layer. Sheets shall be overlapped 50 mm at both directions and shall be welded with hot air. A
skirting of this membrane shall be jointly fixed with previous skirtings to roof parapet by at least 150
mm height.
C. Care shall be taken not to injure the damp-proofing membrane either during application or after
completion, and all finished work shall be approved by Consultant before construction of
permanent work.
D. The damp-proofing shall be immediately protected by tile, brick, concrete, or similar material as
specified.
3.02.3 Instructions for Using Polyvinyl Chloride (P.V.C.) Damp-Proofing Membrane for
Toilets Floor
This type of damp-proofing membrane shall be the main component of toilets floor damp-proofing,
1.00 mm thick, at places indicated on drawings and/or determined by Consultant. Toilets floor damp-
proofing system shall be laid out over reinforced concrete slabs as follows:
A. Separation Layer
Shall be of Geotextile fabric 150 g/m2 and shall comply with requirements
adhesive tapes. A skirting of this layer shall be jointly fixed with polyethylene skirting to wall.
B. PVC Damp-Proofing Membrane
Shall comply with requirements of DIN 16938. Shall be unrolled and loosely laid out over geotextile
fabric layer. Sheet shall be overlapped 50 mm at both directions and shall be welded with solvent
agent. A skirting of this membrane shall be jointly fixed with previous skirting to wall by at least 150
mm height.
C. Care shall be taken not to injure the damp-proofing membrane either during application or after
permanent work.
D. The damp-proofing shall be immediately protected by tile, concrete or similar material as

specified.
3.02.4 Instructions for Using Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Water-Proofing Membrane for Foundations,
Pile Caps, Pile Heads and Retaining walls
This type of Water-proofing membrane shall be the main component of foundation, pile caps and pile
heads Water-proofing system which is built up of Geotextile 500 G/m2, PVC membrane 1.5 mm, at
places indicated on drawings and/or determined by Consultant. Foundations, pile caps and pile heads
Water -proofing system shall be laid out over thermal insulation as follows:
A. Separation Layer
EHAF – CO – 01/03 -6- Section 07150

Shall be of Geotextile fabric 500 g/m2 and shall comply with requirements
adhesive tapes.
B. PVC Water -Proofing Membrane
Shall comply with requirements of DIN 16734. Shall be unrolled and loosely laid out over Geotextile
fabric layer. Sheets shall be overlapped 50 mm at both directions and shall be welded with hot air.
C. Care shall be taken not to injure the Water-proofing membrane either during application or after
permanent work.
D. The Water-proofing shall be immediately protected by tile, brick, concrete, or similar material as
specified.
3.02.5 Instructions for Using Rubber/Bitumen Emulsion
A. General: Except as otherwise indicated, and whether shown or not shown on Drawings, apply
damp-proofing to all exterior below grade surfaces of exterior underground walls in contact with
earthwork or other backfill, in any situation where space of any kind is enclosed on opposite
side.
B. Rubber/Bitumen Emulsion shall be applied on Exterior, Interior Surfaces and all around
concrete and wall elements under the ground surface. Emulsion shall be stirred to a
homogeneous liquid before use.
C. Apply 2 coats of bitumen emulsion using brushes, rollers or sprayers at a rate of about 0.2 - 0.3
kg/m2 to produce a uniform dry film thickness approved by Consultant. Allow recommended time
for complete drying between coats.
D. Care shall be taken not to injure the vertical proofing treatment either during application or after
completion, and all finished surfaces shall be approved by Consultant before construction of
permanent work.
3.02.6 Instructions for Using Cement Based Polymer Proofing Slurry
A. Surfaces required to be proofed shall be prepared according to surface preparation procedures.
B. Masonry and rock walls must be emery by brush or suitable emery tool, and well sprayed by
water, joint shall be filled and leveled by cementations mortar with special adhesion additives.
Also cracks should be treated according to section 03730 Concrete Repairs.
C. Water spraying shall take place before the proofing procedures; precedence period is based on
the climatic conditions.
D. Surfaces must be clean of grease or any other impurities.
E. Water – dry powder mix ratios shall be according to technical data sheets for the approved
materials and approved manufacturer. The result mix shall produce required consistency to result
putty mix.
F. All used tools in the waterproofing process shall be according to approved by Consultant and
recommended by approved manufacturer.
EHAF – CO – 01/03 -7- Section 07150

G. In case of porous surfaces a diluted layer of paint shall be applied to surfaces. Dilution
percentage is according to porosity degree.
H. Next layer shall be applied after 24 hours of the first layer, or according to instructions of the
approved manufacturer.
I. If the final surface is left without a protection layer, it should be surfaced with a nominal thickness
of 1 -2 mm in case of concrete penetrating proofing material.
J. Nominal temperature for application is 7-35 ° C, and in case of higher temperatures water
P P
treatment must take place after waterproofing works.
K. Water treatment work shall be applied in accordance with approved manufacturer instructions,
protection against the direct sun and rain must be applied to waterproofing layers using a water
dipped sacking.
L. Sand in fill works shall begin after 48 hours of water proofing works with clean sand according to
specified in Section 02220 Earth Work.
M. Waterproofing protection layers shall be applied also after 48 hours of waterproofing keeping into
consideration that the protection mix does not contain lime. Adhesion material must be added to
mortar mix to be spattered according to approved manufacturer instructions.
N. No sand or cement shall be added to waterproofing materials.
O. Used tools and machines must be well cleaned after usage directly.
P. Contractor is to follow the approved design for water proofing materials, the instructions of the
approved manufacturer and the notes of the Consultant.
3.03 PROTECTION, CLEAN-UP
The damp-proofing coats shall be immediately protected as specified. Contractor shall remove all
equipment, rubbish, debris and clean the site to the satisfaction of the Consultant.
END OF SECTION
EHAF – CO – 01/03 -8- Section 07150

SECTION 07180
TRAFFIC COATINGS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.02 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes traffic coatings for the following applications:
1. Interior and exterior, pedestrian traffic.

2. Vehicular traffic.
3. Pavement markings.
1. Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for concrete substrates.

2. Division 3 Section "Concrete Floor Topping" for traffic-bearing toppings applied over base slabs or
precast concrete units.
3. Division 5 Section "Steel Deck" for permanent metal forms for concrete substrates.
4. Division 5 Section "Architectural Joint Systems" for expansion and seismic joints in surfaces to
receive traffic coatings.
5. Division 6 Section "Rough Carpentry" for plywood substrates.
6. Division 9 Section "Resinous Flooring"
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each product indicated.

B. Shop Drawings: Show extent of each traffic coating. Include details for treating substrate joints and
cracks, flashings, deck penetrations, and other termination conditions.
1. Indicate layout of pavement markings.
C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of finish indicated.
D. Samples for Verification: For each type of traffic coating required, prepared on rigid backing and of
same thickness and material indicated for the Work.
1. Provide stepped Samples on backing large enough to illustrate buildup of traffic coatings.
E. Qualification Data: For Installer.
F. Material Test Reports: For each traffic coating.
G. Retain paragraph above or below. ASTM C 1127 notes that requiring test reports from an
independent agency may increase costs.
H. Material Certificates: For each traffic coating, signed by manufacturers.
I. Retain first paragraph below if Contractor is responsible for field quality-control testing.
J. Field quality-control test reports.
EHAF – CO – 01/03 -1 - Section 07180

May 2012 - Rev.(0) Traffic Coating
K. Maintenance Data: For traffic coatings to include in maintenance manuals. Identify substrates and
types of traffic coatings applied. Include recommendations for periodic inspections, cleaning, care,
maintenance, and repair of traffic coatings.
L. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section.
M. LEED Submittal:
1. Product Data for Credit EQ 4.2: For interior field-applied traffic coatings and pavement marking
paints, including printed statement of VOC content.
A. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and approved for
installation of traffic coatings required for this Project.
B. Source Limitations:
1. Obtain traffic coatings from a single manufacturer.
2. Obtain primary traffic coating materials, including primers, from traffic coating manufacturer.
Obtain secondary materials including aggregates, sheet flashings, joint sealants, and substrate
repair materials of type and from source recommended in writing by primary material
manufacturer.
C. Retain paragraph and subparagraphs below for traffic coatings that are roof coverings, and revise to
suit Project. Indicate class for each traffic coating when tested according to ASTM E 108. Verify
requirements of authorities having jurisdiction and of Owner's insurer.
D. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide traffic coating materials with the fire-test-response
characteristics as determined by testing identical products per test method below for deck type and
slopes indicated by an independent testing and inspecting agency that is acceptable to authorities
having jurisdiction.
1. Class [A] , [B] or [C] roof covering per ASTM E 108
E. Mockups: Apply mockups to set quality standards for materials and execution.
1. Architect will select one representative surface for each traffic coating and each substrate to
receive traffic coatings. Apply each coating to at least 200 sq. ft. (18.5 sq. m) of each substrate
to demonstrate surface preparation, joint and crack treatment, thickness, texture, color, and
standard of workmanship.
2. Remove and reapply mockups until they are approved by Architect.
Completion.
F. Pre installation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in
Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination."
1. Before installing traffic coatings, meet with representatives of authorities having jurisdiction,
manufacturer's technical representative, Owner, Architect, consultants, independent testing
agency, and other concerned entities. Review requirements for traffic coatings. Notify
participants at least seven days before conference.
A. Deliver materials in original packages and containers with seals unbroken and bearing manufacturer's
labels showing the following information:
1. Manufacturer's brand name.

2. Type of material.
EHAF – CO – 01/03 -2 - Section 07180

3. Directions for storage.

4. Date of manufacture and shelf life.
5. Lot or batch number.
6. Mixing and application instructions.
7. Color.
B. Store materials in a clean, dry location protected from exposure to direct sunlight. In storage areas,
maintain environmental conditions within range recommended in writing by manufacturer.
A. Environmental Limitations: Apply traffic coatings within the range of ambient and substrate
temperatures recommended in writing by manufacturer. Do not apply traffic coatings to damp or wet
substrates, when temperatures are below (5 deg C), when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent, or
when temperatures are less than (3 deg C) above dew point.
1. Do not apply traffic coatings in snow, rain, fog, or mist, or when such weather conditions are
imminent during the application and curing period. Apply only when frost-free conditions occur
throughout the depth of substrate.
B. Do not install traffic coating until items that will penetrate membrane have been installed.
1.07 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which traffic coating manufacturer agrees to repair
or replace traffic coatings that deteriorate during the specified warranty period. Warranty does not
include deterioration or failure of traffic coating due to unusual weather phenomena, failure of
prepared and treated substrate, formation of new substrate cracks exceeding 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) in
width, fire, vandalism, or abuse by snowplow, maintenance equipment, and truck traffic.
1. Deterioration of traffic coatings includes the following:
a. Adhesive or cohesive failures.

b. Abrasion or tearing failures.
c. Surface crazing or spalling.
d. Intrusion of water, oils, gasoline, grease, salt, deicer chemicals, or acids into deck substrate.
2. Verify available warranties and insert number in subparagraph below. Five years is maximum
offered in manufacturers' published data.
3. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Traffic Coatings: Complying with ASTM C 957.
B. Material Compatibility: Provide primers; base, intermediate, and topcoats; and miscellaneous
materials that are compatible with one another and with substrate under conditions of service and
application, as demonstrated by manufacturer based on testing and field experience.
EHAF – CO – 01/03 -3 - Section 07180

C. VOC Content: Provide traffic coatings and pavement marking paints, for use inside the
weatherproofing system, with VOC content of 150 g/L when calculated according to 40 CFR 59,
Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
2.02 TRAFFIC COATING
A. Traffic coating systems are available in various coating thicknesses and with different aggregate
spreading rates and topcoat compositions for light-, moderate- or normal-, heavy-, and extra heavy-
duty applications. Often, several systems are used in different areas of an installation to form a
single, seamless, wear-balanced membrane. Copy and re-edit this Article for each traffic coating
system required, and indicate locations of each on Drawings or in schedules.
B. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into
the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
C. Primer: Manufacturer's standard factory-formulated primer recommended for substrate and conditions
indicated.
1. Material: Epoxy/Urethane.
D. Preparatory and Base Coats: Single- or multicomponent, aromatic liquid urethane elastomer.
E. Intermediate Coat: [Single- or multicomponent, aromatic liquid urethane elastomer] [Single- or
multicomponent, aliphatic liquid urethane elastomer] [Liquid epoxy].
F. Coordinate materials for intermediate and topcoats with products and manufacturers selected. Insert
physical testing requirements and additional intermediate and topcoats to suit Project.
G. Topcoat: [Single- or multicomponent, aromatic liquid urethane elastomer] [Single- or multicomponent,
aliphatic liquid urethane elastomer] [Single- or multicomponent, aromatic liquid urethane elastomer
with UV inhibitors] [Liquid epoxy].
H. Color: Match Architect's sample.
I. Component Coat Thicknesses: As recommended by manufacturer for substrate and service
conditions .
J. Aggregate: Sizes, shape, and minimum hardness recommended in writing by traffic coating
manufacturer.
a. Spreading Rate: As recommended by manufacturer for substrate and service
A. Joint Sealants: As specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants."

B. Sheet Flashing: No staining.
1. Minimum Thickness: 1.5 mm
2. Material: Sheet material recommended in writing by traffic coating manufacturer.
C. Adhesive: Contact adhesive recommended in writing by traffic coating manufacturer.
D. Reinforcing Strip: Fiberglass mesh recommended in writing by traffic coating manufacturer.
2.04 PAVEMENT MARKINGS
A. Pavement-Marking Paint: Alkyd-resin ready mixed, complying with AASHTO M 248, Select colors
from options in first subparagraph below; show locations of each on Drawings if more than one color
is required.
EHAF – CO – 01/03 -4 - Section 07180

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements and for other conditions
affecting performance of traffic coatings.
1. For the record, prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to
performance.
2. Verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates.
3. Begin coating application only after minimum concrete curing and drying period recommended by
traffic coating manufacturer has passed, after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected, and
after surfaces are dry.
4. Verify that substrates are visibly dry and free of moisture.
a. Test for moisture vapor transmission by plastic sheet method according to ASTM D 4263.
b. Test for moisture content by method recommended in writing by manufacturer.
5. Application of coating indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Clean and prepare substrates according to ASTM C 1127 and manufacturer's written
recommendations to produce clean, dust-free, dry substrate for traffic coating application.
B. Mask adjoining surfaces not receiving traffic coatings, deck drains, and other deck substrate
penetrations to prevent spillage, leaking, and migration of coatings.
C. Concrete Substrates: Mechanically abrade concrete surfaces to a uniform profile according to
ASTM D 4259. Do not acid etch.
1. Remove grease, oil, paints, and other penetrating contaminants from concrete.
2. Remove concrete fins, ridges, and other projections.
3. Remove laitance, glaze, efflorescence, curing compounds, concrete hardeners, form-release
agents, and other incompatible materials that might affect coating adhesion.
4. Remove remaining loose material to provide a sound surface, and clean surfaces according to
ASTM D 4258.
3.03 TERMINATIONS AND PENETRATIONS
A. Prepare vertical and horizontal surfaces at terminations and penetrations through traffic coatings and
at expansion joints, drains, and sleeves according to ASTM C 1127 and manufacturer's written
recommendations.
B. Provide sealant cants at penetrations and at reinforced and nonreinforced, deck-to-wall butt joints.
C. Terminate edges of deck-to-deck expansion joints with preparatory base-coat strip.
D. Install sheet flashings at deck-to-wall expansion and dynamic joints, and bond to deck and wall
substrates according to manufacturer's written recommendations.
EHAF – CO – 01/03 -5 - Section 07180

3.04 JOINT AND CRACK TREATMENT
A. Prepare, treat, rout, and fill joints and cracks in substrates according to ASTM C 1127 and
manufacturer's written recommendations. Before coating surfaces, remove dust and dirt from joints
and cracks according to ASTM D 4258.
1. Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 1193 for joint-sealant installation.
3.05 TRAFFIC COATING APPLICATION
A. Apply traffic coating material according to ASTM C 1127 and manufacturer's written
recommendations.
1. Start traffic coating application in presence of manufacturer's technical representative.
2. Verify that wet film thickness of each component coat complies with requirements every 100 sq. ft.
(9 sq. m).
B. Apply traffic coatings to prepared wall terminations and vertical surfaces to height indicated, and omit
aggregate on vertical surfaces.
C. Cure traffic coatings according to manufacturer's written recommendations. Prevent contamination
and damage during application and curing stages.
3.06 PAVEMENT MARKINGS
A. Do not apply traffic paint for striping and other markings until traffic coating has cured according to
manufacturer's written recommendations.
B. Apply traffic paint for striping and other markings with mechanical equipment to produce uniform
straight edges. Apply at manufacturer's recommended rates for a (0.38-mm-) minimum wet film
thickness.
C. Spread glass beads uniformly into wet traffic paint at a rate of (0.72 kg/L).
A. Testing: [Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform the following field tests and
inspections and prepare test reports:
1. Samples of material delivered to Project site shall be taken, identified, sealed, and certified in
presence of Contractor.
2. Testing agency shall perform tests for characteristics specified, using applicable referenced
testing procedures.
3. Testing agency shall verify thickness of coatings during traffic coating application.
4. If test results show traffic coating materials do not comply with requirements, remove
noncomplying materials, prepare surfaces, and reapply traffic coatings.
B. Flood Testing: Flood test each deck area for leaks, according to recommendations in ASTM D 5957,
after traffic coating has completely cured. Install temporary containment assemblies, plug or dam
drains, and flood with potable water.
1. Flood to an average depth of (65 mm) with a minimum depth of (25 mm) and not exceeding a
depth of (100 mm).
2. Flood each area for 48 hours.
EHAF – CO – 01/03 -6 - Section 07180

3. After flood testing, repair leaks, repeat flood tests, and make further repairs until traffic coating
installation is watertight.
4. Owner will engage an independent testing agency to observe flood testing and examine underside
of decks and terminations for evidence of leaks during flood testing.
C. Final Traffic Coating Inspection: Arrange for traffic coating manufacturer's technical personnel to
inspect membrane installation on completion.
1. Notify Architect or Owner 48 hours in advance of date and time of inspection.
D. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance
of replaced or additional work with specified requirements.
3.08 PROTECTING AND CLEANING
A. Protect traffic coatings from damage and wear during remainder of construction period.
B. Clean spillage from adjacent construction using cleaning agents and procedures recommended by
manufacturer of affected construction.
END OF SECTION
EHAF – CO – 01/03 -7 - Section 07180

SECTION 07410
METAL ROOF & WALL PANELS
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Conditions of Particular
Applications and Conditions, and Division-1 Specification Sections, apply to work of this section.
A. This section covers the extent of each type of preformed roofing and siding indicated on the
Drawings and by provisions of this section. Preformed roofing/siding is hereby defined to include
panels which are structurally capable of spanning between supports spaced as indicated.
B. The types of panels required shall be factory assembled and include the following:
1. Insulated sandwich roof panels

2. Insulated sandwich wall cladding panels(for guest office)
3. Extent of Roofing and Siding is shown on Drawings.
A. Provide roof panel constructed and assembled to resist up-lift-wind and wind-loads.
1. Performance Test Standards:
Provide preformed panel systems which have been pre-tested according with specified tests
method and certified by recognized testing laboratory to provide specified resistance to air
and water infiltration or penetration into the building interior and withstanding structural
movement deflection and failure when installed as indicated and when tested in accordance
with Standard.
2. Fire Resistance:
Provide preformed panel systems which have been tested having a half (½) hour fire resistance
rating for roofs in accordance with NFPA.
3. Field Measurements:
Where possible, prior to delivery of prefabricated panels, take field measurements of

structure or substrates to receive panel system. Allow for trimming panel units where final
dimensions can not be established prior to fabrication.
4. Installation Qualifications:
Engage an experienced Installer who has completed metal roof panels similar in material, design
and extent to that indicated for this project and with a record of successful service performance.
EHAF – CO – 01/03 -1 - section 07410

May 2012, Rev. (0) Metal Roof & Wall Panels
5. Expansion Joints:
a. Provide necessary expansion joints as recommended by manufacturer.

b. Expansion joints in structures must coincide with expansion joints in the sandwich
panels roofing.
A. Work shall be performed in strict accordance with the specifications, Drawings and the
stipulations of the standards of country of origin and sound practice.
A. The following related specifications shall apply in their entirety to this section.

ASTM No.
ASTM C 578 Specifications for Preformed, Cellular Polystyrene

ASTM C 591-85 Specifications for Unfaced Preformed Rigid
Cellular Polyurethane
1.06 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data:
Submit manufacturer’s product specifications, standard details, certified product test results,
installation instructions and general recommendations, as applicable to materials and finishes for
each component and for total system of preformed panels.
B. Samples:
Provide color charts or chip showing full range of color and texture. Submit two (2) samples of
panels 600 mm square of each exposed finish in the profile, style color and texture indicated.
Include clips, fasteners closures and other panels accessories.
C. Shop Drawings:
Submit small-scale layouts of panels on walls and roofs, and large-scale details of edge
conditions, joints, corners, custom profiles, supports, anchorages, trim, flashings, closures, and
special details. Distinguish between factory and field assembly work.
1.07 RELATED SECTIONS
A. The following related specifications shall apply in their entirely to this sections:
05120 Structural Steel

07600 Flashing
07900 Joint Sealers
15430 Plumbing Specialties
A. Package roof panels for protection against transportation. Deliver panels and other components
so they shall not be damaged or deformed. Exercise care in unloading and storing panels to
prevent bending twisting and surface damage. Stock materials on platforms covered with
EHAF – CO – 01/03 -2 - section 07410
tarpaulins or other suitable weather-tight ventilated covering. Store panels so they will not
accumulate water, do not store panels in contact with other materials that might cause staining or
other surface damage.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 GENERAL
A. Provide a metal-roof panel system of type and profile indicated and that comply with
requirements, sandwich panel shall comprise an insulating web in rigid foam covered externally
by profiled galvanized steel sheets with a protection along each side.
B. Fabricate panels in a manner that eliminate condensation on the interior side.
C. Panels shall have groove and tongue at longitudinal sides and a water-proof joint on one side.
Design joints to form weather-tight seals.
D. Panel total weight shall be approximately 13 kg/m2.
E. Insulation material shall have the necessary thickness to obtain the required performance.
2.02 MANUFACTURER
A. Subject to compliance with requirements, experienced Manufacturer manufacturing preformed

roofing and siding products that may be incorporated in the work, includes but is not limited to
those mentioned on the attached list of Manufacturers.
2.03 PANEL FACE SHEET MATERIALS
A. Shall be fabricated to the profile or configuration indicated from a 0.8 mm thick metal sheet and
shall weigh approximately 11 kg/m2 for the two (2) external metal sheets and the external surfaces
shall be a baked-on enameled coating on galvanized continuous surfaces.
B. Color shall be as indicated on Drawings or as selected by Engineer from manufacturer’s full
range of color.
2.04 THERMAL INSULATION
A. Provide factory assembled panels consisting of a specified core material securely bonded to metal interior
and exterior face sheets with specified finish.
B. Insulating foam shall be either polyurethane or expanded polystyrene to achieve the required
performance.
C. Minimum density of polyurethane shall be 40 kg/m3.
D. Minimum density of polystyrene shall be 20 kg/m3.
A. Fasteners
1. Manufacturer’s standard non corrosive types with exterior head gasketed shall be used.
2. Use corrosion-resistant or stainless steel, steel hooks, minimal 7 mm diameter, steel staples
with folding end or steel bolts shall be used to fasten the panels into the purlins.
3. Self tapping screws (minimum diameter 6 mm) and head diameter not less than 10 mm,
EHAF – CO – 01/03 -3 - section 07410

galvanized steel washers (minimum diameter 20 mm), metal back neoprene washers, nuts
and caps shall be used to fix the hooks, staples or bolts into the panels.
4. Locate and space exposed fasteners in true vertical and horizontal alignment. Obtain
uniform compression for positive seal without rupture of neoprene washer.
B. Gutters:
Shall be manufactured from the same metal of the panel sheets, of thickness not less than 1.2 mm
and of shape as indicated on Drawings.
2.06 PANEL FABRICATION; PERFORMANCE
A. General:
Fabricate and finish panels and accessories at the factory to greatest extent possible, by
manufacturer’s standard procedures and processes, and as required to fulfill indicated
performance requirements, which have been demonstrated by factory testing. Comply with
indicated profile and dimensional requirements, and with structural requirements.
B. Required Performances:
Fabricate panels and other components of roof/wall system for the following installed as
indicated performances:
1. Structural:
Provide roof panel assemblies capable of supply supporting design loads indicated with
vertical deflection not greater than 1/140 of the span.
2. Wind Pressure:
Panels supporting spans shall not be more than 3.0 m for both wall and roof bracing to sustain a
wind pressure value of 100 kg/m2.
3. Roof Loading:
Not be more than 150 kg/m2.
2.07 ACCESSORIES
A. Provide components required for a complete roof panel system, including trim, copings, corner
units, gutters, sealants, gaskets, fillers, ridge closure, clips, etc…
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. ROOF :
1. General:
a. Examine roof framing to verify that purlins, angles, channels and other secondary structural
panel support members and anchorage have been installed according to Drawings and
panels manufacturer coordinate metal panel roofing with rain drainage work, flashing, trim
and construction of decks, parquets, walls and other adjoining work to provide a leak roof
secure and non corrosive installation.
EHAF – CO – 01/03 -4 - section 07410

b. Comply with panel fabricator’s and material manufacturer’s instructions and

recommendations for installation, as applicable to project conditions and supporting
substrates. Anchor panels and other components of the work securely in place, with
provisions for thermal/structural movement.
c. Install panels with exposed exterior and interior fasteners, prefinished to match panel
finished.
2. Installation Tolerances
a. Shim and align units within installed tolerance of 6 mm in 6 m on plumb/slope and

location/line as indicated, and within 3 mm offset of adjoining faces and of alignment of
matching profiles.
b. No movements of roof panels after fixation with concealed clips shall be permitted. The
sheet panels shall overlay at joints on top of purlins. Intermediate joints between purlins
are not permitted.
3. Seaming
Complete seaming of panel joints by operation of portable power-driven equipment of type

recommended by panel Manufacturer.
4. Joint Sealers:
Install gaskets, joint fillers and sealants where required for weatherproof performance of panel systems.
Provide type of gaskets and sealants/fillers indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, types recommended
by panel Manufacturer at end laps of panels, install tape caulk between panels.
5. Vertical Cladding
a. Exterior metal sheets of wall cladding must be supplied in a single length up to a height
equal to the total height of the wall cladding.
b. The sheet shall be formed to provide interlocking weatherproof and waterproof joints. The
sheets shall be horizontally fixed with sufficient number of suitable hot-dip galvanized steel
screws with plastic caps of color to match color of panels, and to resist wind pressure or wind
suction.
c. Pieces of flexible foam shall be fixed between the under steel sheet and the support in
order to obtain air-tight joint.
d. Minimal clearance of 15 mm shall be allowed between upper and lower panels.
6. Roof Cladding
Coordinate sandwich roof panels with rain drainage slope to provide a leakproof, secure a
non corrosive installation. Install panels over solid substrate with the specified slope.
a. The lower end of the hook shall be fixed around the bottom flange of the purlin.
b. The folding end of the staple, if used, shall be fastened into the top flange of the purlin.
c. The upper end of the hook, or the staple, shall be fixed into the upper external surface of
the purlin.
d. Fasteners shall be distributed as recommended by the Manufacturer.
EHAF – CO – 01/03 -5 - section 07410

e. Fasteners and fixing screw shall be always through the crown of the profile of the sheet
panel and in a position as close as possible to the back of the metal purlin.
7. Overlapping
f. Holes for fasteners shall be drilled and shall be 0.6 mm larger in diameter than the
diameter of the fastener.
g. Each overlap shall be made by extending the external metal sheet in relation to the
internal metal sheet and the foam.
h. Overlap distance shall be within 150 to 300 mm.
3.02 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Damage Units
Replace panels and other components of the work which have been damaged or have deteriorated
beyond successful repair by means of finish touch-up or similar minor repair procedures.
B. Cleaning
Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films as each panel is installed. Upon
completion of panel installation, clean finished surfaces as recommended by panel Manufacturer,
and maintain in a clean condition during construction.
END OF SECTION
EHAF – CO – 01/03 -6 - section 07410

SECTION 08110
STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract including General and Special Conditions and Division-
1 Specification Sections, apply to work of this Section.
B. This section covers the specifications for all steel doors required for this contract. Contractor shall
furnish all materials, equipment, transportation services and labour necessary to complete the works
as required and as indicated.
1.02 MATERIALS
A. All materials used in the work of this section shall conform to the requirements of the latest edition of
the appropriate Egyptian Standard Specifications.
A. The following related specifications will apply in their entirety to this section
05500 Miscellaneous Metals

08800 Glass And Glazing
08700 Finish Hardware
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Submittals shall be made in accordance with Contract Requirements Section 1300 and shall include
the following items:
1. SHOP DRAWINGS
The contractor shall submit shop drawings Indicating the general arrangement, design, kind and
gauge of metals, size, rubber seal, self-extinguishing material and finish, shall be submitted to the
Supervisor for approval. Work shall be fabricated and erected only in accordance with approved
shop drawings.
2. SAMPLES
a. Samples for initial selection in the form of manufacturer's color charts showing the full range
of colors available for factory-finished doors and frames.
b. Samples for verification of each type of exposed finish required, prepared on Samples not
less than 75 by 125 mm and of same thickness and material indicated for final unit of Work.
Where finishes involve normal color and texture variations, include Sample sets showing the
full range of variations expected.
EHAF – CO – 01/03 -1 - Section 08110

May 2012 - Rev.(0) Steel Doors and Frames
3. MANUFACTURERS LITERATURE AND DATA
Fire rated doors and frames, showing conformance with NFPA 80 and Underwriters Laboratory,
Inc., or Inchcape Testing Services or Factory Mutual fire rating requirements.
A. Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a
qualified testing agency, for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing at positive pressure as
close to neutral pressure as possible according to NFPA 252.
B. Temperature-Rise Limit: At vertical exit enclosures and exit passageways, provide doors that have a
maximum transmitted temperature end point of not more than 450 deg F (250 deg C) above ambient
after 30 minutes of standard fire-test exposure.
1.06 SHOP COAT
A. Miscellaneous ferrous metal work shall be cleaned of grease, rust, mill scale and other foreign matter,
and shall be given a shop coat of primer of high quality enameled paint.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 FABRICATION AND ERECTION
A. Work shall conform to the rules and practice of the best standard and local regulations. Form and
fabricate the work to meet installation conditions. Price includes all accessories necessary to
adequately secure the work in place, dimensions, conditions and existing limitations upon which the
work of this section might be contingent, shall be verified. Make provision to connect with the work of
other sections.
B. Sub frames and Operable Ventilators: Formed of hot-rolled steel of profile indicated. Miter or cope
corners, and mechanically fasten and seal joints.
2.02 DOORS
A. GENERAL
1. The Contractor shall furnish and install the metal doors and frames shown on the drawings or in
the door schedule.
2. Door shall be strong, vendal-proof and fire resistant; they shall not twist or wrap.
B. HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
1. REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES
a. Label requirements: fabricate doors and frames in accordance with requirements of American
fire regulations and applicable governing authorities for the class of door opening shown or
scheduled.
b. Provide fire labels permanently fastened on each door and frame which is within the size
limitation established by an independent laboratory.
EHAF – CO – 01/03 -2 - Section 08110

c. Provide anchors for labeled frames required by the authority having jurisdiction.
2. QUALIFICATIONS
a. Provide doors and frames manufactured by a firm specializing in the production of hollow
metal work.
b. Provide hollow metal doors and frames for fire rated openings manufactured by a firm whose
units are inspected, tested and listed by an independent laboratory for single point hardware.
C. HOLLOW METAL DOORS
1. Doors shall be flush panelled as shown on the drawing, constructed of not less than two sheets
1.6 mm thick cold-rolled and patent levelled furniture steel, rigidly connected and reinforced inside
with continuous interlocking members. Self-extinguishing polyurethane insulation with an R factor
of not less than 12.5 shall be foamed and placed between reinforcements.
2. Doors and frames shall be reinforced for all hardware, including checks, and mortises, recesses
and rabbets shall be included as required. Frames shall be combination buck and joints, same
materials as for doors 2 mm thick welded frames with approved anchors at sides and floor.
Adequate head reinforcement shall be provided for frames over 1 m wide.
3. Sealant caulking compound approved by Supervisor shall be used where metal trim or frames
contact concrete, masonry, where indicated, and at other locations where caulking is apparent or
required. Shall be gun grade, chemical resistance good in water, alcohol, mild bases and acids,
non-oxidizing, permanently elastic, non-migrating (Thixotropic) electrical and heat conductivity
conform to Standard Specifications of country of origin. Caulking compound shall not sustain
bacteria growth.
D. FIRE RATING
1. Fire rating grades shall be 90 or 60 minutes and as indicated in schedules and drawings.
2. Fire rated door sets shall comply with the requirements of an internationally recognized standards
and be tested and labeled according to ASTM E152 or equivalent Standards. Testing and labeling
shall be done by an authorized and independent Laboratory.
3. If louvers are required they shall be of standard size for fire rated doors and fuse linked for
automatic closing in case of fire.
4. Any vision glazing in these doors shall comply with the required fire rating.
5. Provide these doors complete with locks, bolting hardware and hinges.
6. Provide door closers of one non load-bearing spring hinge in the center of the door. Double leaf
doors shall have door closers for both leaves and a door closing regulator. Provide further
hardware according to ‘Hardware Schedule’ - see Section 8700 ‘Hardware’.
E. HOLLOW METAL DOOR FRAMES
1. Provide either combination type frames to be used as both door buck and trim to profiles shown.
Unless otherwise shown, comply with the following minimum gages:
a. Interior door frames: 18 gage galvanized steel.
b. Exterior door frames: 14 gage galvanized steel.
c. Acoustical frames: 14 gage steel.
d. Cased Opening frames: 14 gage steel.
e. Code requirements: As required.
EHAF – CO – 01/03 -3 - Section 08110

2. Provide tee shaped corrugated or perforated metal anchors into adjoining masonry or concrete
construction. Use adjustable anchors with friction fit for frames set in masonry. Weld to frames set
in concrete. Fabricate anchors of steel no lighter than the gage used for the frame, 62 mm wide by
250 mm long, three (3) per jamb up to 2.1m high and four (4) per jamb for 2.4m high, and for
openings over 2.4m high, provide 1 anchor for each 600mm of height or fraction thereof.
3. At fire rated frames in masonry construction, provide UL rated adjustable anchors consisting of
strap and anchor, same as frame. Minimum size anchors; 50 mm wide by 250 mm long. Number of
anchors shall be two (2) per jamb to 1.5m jamb height, with one additional anchor for each
additional 750mm or fraction thereof.
4. Anchor frame jambs to concrete or masonry which has been placed prior to setting of frames with
10mm countersink concealed flat head bolts into expansion type shields or inserts, provide one not
more than 150mm from the top and bottom of each jamb with intermediate anchors spaced a
maximum of 600mm o.c with a minimum of 4 per jamb. Apply removable stops to cover anchor
bolts.
5. Where frames are set into standard drywall (steel studs) weld 1.5 mm anchors clips. At head
provide two anchor clips 20 cm from jambs and an additional in between if spaced more than 60
cm. anchors clips shall match the size and type of studs in each wall.
6. Provide 18 gage steel channel temporary spreaders at the bottom of all 3 sided frames to prevent
distortion during shipment and storage and to hold frames in proper position till anchorage and
adjacent construction has been completed.
7. Terminate bottom of frames at the indicated finished floor level. Where floor fill or setting beds
occur support frame by adjustable clip anchored to the structural substrate. Angle floor clips shall
be 12 gage, welded to frame and punched two (2) 10mm fasteners.
8. Provide mullions and transom bars of closed or tubular construction, or as otherwise shown, attach
members to heads and jambs of frame with butt-welded joints unless shown to be removable.
Reinforce the joints with concealed clip angles of the same thickness as the frame.
9. Reinforce head of frames over 900mm wide with 12 gage steel channel unless a structural lintel is
provided to support the wall construction above the frame or unless there is no wall construction
above frame.
10. Provide full enclosing electrical junction boxes or mortar shields over all mortises for electrical
hardware items welded to back of frame. Provide removable access plates in the heads of frames
to receive concealed door closers. Offset reinforcement so that faces of hinges or keepers are
flush with face of the frame rebate.
11. Provide holes for rubber door silencers: 3 for single door and 4 for pairs of doors. Install plastic
plugs in silencer holes to keep holes clear during installation.
12. Where frames are to be fully grouted, coat the back of the frame with bituminous paint.
F. FIRE RATED DOOR FRAMES
1. Comply with specifications for hollow metal door frames per paragraph Requirements of
Regulatory Agencies.
2. Interior fire rated door frames shall be of 18 gage galvanized steel for 90 minutes fire rated.
G. STEEL DOOR FRAMES
1. Metal door frames shall be of types and styles according to the approved shop drawings.
2. Fabricate metal door frames to be rigid, neat in appearance and free from defects, warp or buckle.
Accurately form metal according to door schedules and drawings to required sizes and profiles.
3. Frames shall consist of jambs, head, and where applicable transom and sill. Corners shall be
mitered and welded, or rigidly joined together by mechanical means.
EHAF – CO – 01/03 -4 - Section 08110

4. Internal frames: The bases of internal frames shall be braced with adjustable base ties to hold the
frames rigid during transit and erection.
5. External frames: Provide a sill fixed to the base of the frame to suit the frame profile. Frames set
flush with the outside wall, shall have a weather-stripping bead at the top of the head to prevent
water penetration to the inside.
6. Fasteners: Each jamb shall be provided with three fastening devices, made of galvanized mild
steel of minimum thickness 1,5 mm. Fasteners shall be concealed wherever possible. For exposed
fastening provide countersunk flat head screws.
7. Steel frames for internal use shall be zinc-coated; and treated with one coat of suitable priming
paint.
8. Steel frames for external use and in corrosive atmosphere shall be hot-dip galvanized with a
minimum layer of 350 g/m2. Alternatively they may be made of hot-dip galvanized steel sheet. Cut
ends shall be protected with a metallic zinc-rich priming paint. Galvanized surfaces shall be treated
with one coat of suitable priming paint.
2.03 HARDWARE
A. Hardware specifications are stated in section 08700.
PART 3 EXECUTIONS
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Doors and frames complete with hardware shall be installed by qualified erectors in the prepared
openings. They shall be erected plumb and in true alignment. Frames shall be rigid and securely
anchored in place. Doors shall be installed in a manner to achieve the intended functional operation
and appearance.
B. Placing frames: Set frames accurately in position, plumbed and aligned. Fix each jamb with three
dowels and bolts of 8 mm diameter. Use four bolts for heights above 220 cm. Fix threshold and head
of double-leaf frames also to bottom or slab respectively.
C. Joints: Joints to surrounding construction shall be foamed and sealed. Use adequate elastic sealing
component. Joints shall be cleaned and if necessary be primed before filling. Width and depth of
sealer shall be similar.
D. Doors: Fit to frames for uniform clearance at each edge. Allow 6 mm clearance to finish floor level.
E. In case floor finish is not yet completed, door leaves shall be taken off and stored at a safe and
convenient place - coordinate with the Consultant.
3.02 HARDWARE APPLICATION
A. Mortar guards shall be welded in the frame where cut-outs are provided for lock strike plates, bolts and
hinges.
B. Hinges: Frames shall be prepared for mounting of screwed-on standard hinges with reinforcing plates
of 2,5 mm minimum thickness, adjustable in 3 ways, and fixed with countersunk screws. Provide
number of hinges as indicated.
C. Lock strike plates for single doors shall be adjustable satin chrome finish.
EHAF – CO – 01/03 -5 - Section 08110

3.03 PAINTING
A. All doors and frames shall be cleaned at works after fabrication by wire-brushing to remove all rust and
mill-scale and given one coat of inorganic zinc-rich primer paint before delivery to the site. At the site
any damage to the paint shall be brush-cleaned and re-sprayed and a further coat of approved paint
brush applied promptly after doors are received on the site and as recommended by manufacturer.
B. Doors and frames shall be painted with a quality enamel paint approved by Supervisor. Number and
thickness of priming coats shall be as recommended by paint manufacturer.
END OF SECTION
EHAF – CO – 01/03 -6 - Section 08110

SECTION 08200
WOOD DOORS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
1. Solid-core doors with wood-veneer / hardboard or MDF and plastic-laminate faces.

2. Hollow-core doors with wood-veneer/hardboard or MDF and plastic-laminate faces.
3. Shop priming and /or Factory finishing flush wood doors.
4. Factory fitting flush wood doors to frames and factory machining for hardware.
1. Division 8 Section "Glazing" for glass view panels in flush wood doors.
2. Division 13 Section "Radiation Protection" for lead-lined flush wood doors.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of door indicated include factory-finishing specifications.
B. Shop Drawings: Indicate location, size, and hand of each door; elevation of each kind of door;
construction details not covered in Product Data; location and extent of hardware blocking; and other
pertinent data.
1. Indicate dimensions and locations of mortises and holes for hardware.
2. Indicate dimensions and locations of cutouts.
3. Indicate requirements for veneer matching.
4. Indicate doors to be factory finished and finish requirements.
5. Indicate fire-protection ratings for fire-rated doors.
C. Samples: For plastic-laminate door faces and factory-finished doors.
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufacturer that is certified for chain of custody by an FSC-
accredited certification body.
B. Quality Standard: In addition to requirements specified, comply with AWI's "Architectural Woodwork
Quality Standards Illustrated."WDMA I.S.1-A, "Architectural Wood Flush Doors." and WI’s "Manual of
Millwork."
C. Forest Certification: Provide doors made with wood cores or veneers obtained from forests certified by an
FSC-accredited certification body to comply with FSC STD-01-001, "FSC Principles and Criteria for
Forest Stewardship."
EHAF – CO – 01/03 -1 - Section 08200

May 2012, Rev. (0) Wood Doors
D. Fire-Rated Wood Doors: Doors complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a qualified testing
agency, for fire-protection ratings indicated according to NFPA 252.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide available manufacturers that may be incorporated into
the Work.
2.02 DOOR CONSTRUCTION, GENERAL
A. Low-Emitting Materials: Provide doors made with adhesives and composite wood products that do not
contain urea formaldehyde.
B. Particleboard-Core Doors:
1. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, made with binder containing no urea-formaldehyde resin.

2. Blocking: Provide wood blocking in particleboard-core doors as needed to eliminate through-
bolting hardware.
3. Provide doors with either glued-wood-stave or structural-composite-lumber cores instead of
particleboard cores for doors indicated to receive exit devices.
C. Structural-composite-lumber-core doors:
1. Structural Composite Lumber: WDMA I.S.10.
a. Screw Withdrawal, Face: 3100 N.

b. Screw Withdrawal, Edge: 1780 N.
D. Fire-Protection-Rated Doors: Provide core specified or mineral core as needed to provide fire-protection
rating indicated.
1. Edge Construction: Provide edge construction with intumescent seals concealed by outer stile.
Comply with specified requirements for exposed edges.
2. Pairs: Provide fire-retardant stiles that are listed and labeled for applications indicated without
formed-steel edges and astragals. Provide stiles with concealed intumescent seals. Comply with
specified requirements for exposed edges.
E. Mineral-Core Doors:
1. Core: Noncombustible mineral product complying with requirements of referenced quality standard
and testing and inspecting agency for fire-protection rating indicated.
2. Blocking: Provide composite blocking with improved screw-holding capability approved for use in
doors of fire-protection ratings indicated as needed to eliminate through-bolting hardware.
3. Edge Construction: At hinge stiles, provide laminated-edge construction with improved screw-
holding capability and split resistance. Comply with specified requirements for exposed edges.
EHAF – CO – 01/03 -2 - Section 08200

F. Hollow-Core Doors:
1. Construction: Standard hollow core.
2.03 VENEERED-FACED DOORS FOR TRANSPARENT FINISH
A. Exterior Solid-Core Doors :

1. Grade: Premium, unless otherwise indicated on drawing details.
2. Species: As Indicated on the door schedule.
3. Cut: As indicated.
4. Assembly of Veneer Leaves on Door Faces: Balance match unless otherwise indicated on
drawings.
5. Pair and Set Match: Provide for doors hung in same opening or separated only by mullions.
6. Core: Particleboard, Glued wood stave or Structural composite lumber, as indicated on drawings.
7. Construction: Five plies. Stiles and rails are bonded to core, then entire unit abrasive planed
before veneering. Faces are bonded to core using a hot press.
8. Adhesives: Type I per WDMA TM-6.
9. WDMA I.S.1-A Performance Grade: Heavy Duty unless otherwise indicated.
B. Interior Solid-Core Doors :

2. Species: As indicated.
1. Match between Veneer Leaves: Slip match unless otherwise indicated on drawing details.
2. Assembly of Veneer Leaves on Door Faces: Balance match unless otherwise indicated.
3. Pair and Set Match: Provide for doors hung in same opening or separated only by mullions.
4. Core: Either glued wood stave or structural composite lumber] [Either glued or nonglued wood
stave or structural composite lumber].
5. Construction: Five to seven plies. Stiles and rails are bonded to core, then entire unit abrasive
planed before veneering.
6. Construction: Seven plies, either bonded or nonbonded construction.
C. Interior Hollow-Core Doors :

2. Species: as indicated on drawings and doors schedule
3. Match between Veneer Leaves: Slip match unless otherwise indicated on drawing details.
4. Assembly of Veneer Leaves on Door Faces: Balance match.
5. Pair and Set Match: Provide for doors hung in same opening.
6. Construction: Seven plies.
2.04 Doors For Opaque Finish
A. Exterior Solid-Core Doors :
EHAF – CO – 01/03 -3 - Section 08200


2. Species: As indicated.
3. Faces: Medium-density overlay, unless otherwise indicated on drawing details
4. Core: Either glued wood stave or structural composite lumber.
5. Construction: Five to seven plies. Stiles and rails are bonded to core, then entire unit abrasive
planed before veneering.
6. Adhesives: Type I per WDMA TM-6.
B. Interior Solid-Core Doors :

2. Faces: As Indicated
3. Exposed Vertical and Top Edges: Any closed-grain hardwood.
4. Core: Either glued wood stave or structural composite lumber, as per drawings and doors schedule
before veneering. Faces are bonded to core using a hot press.
6. Construction: Seven plies, either bonded or nonbonded construction.
7. WDMA I.S.1-A Performance Grade: Standard Duty unless otherwise indicated.
C. Interior Hollow-Core Doors :

2. First option in first subparagraph below is highest quality; last is most economical. Coordinate with
requirements of door grade selected.
3. Faces: Hardboard or MDF as indicted on drawings
4. Construction: Three to Seven plies.
2.05 PLASTIC-LAMINATE-FACED DOORS
A. Interior Solid-Core Doors :

2. Plastic-Laminate Faces: High-pressure decorative laminates complying with NEMA LD 3,
Grade HGS.
3. Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: As indicated.
4. Exposed Vertical Edges Hardwood edges for staining, Hardwood edges for painting or Plastic
laminate that matches faces, as indicated on drawings and doors schedule.
5. Core: Either glued wood stave or structural composite lumber.
before faces and cross bands are applied.
B. Interior Hollow-Core Doors :

2. Plastic-Laminate Faces: High-pressure decorative laminates complying with NEMA LD 3,
Grade HGS.
EHAF – CO – 01/03 -4 - Section 08200

3. Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: As indicated.

4. Exposed Vertical Edges: Hardwood edges for staining, Hardwood edges for painting or plastic
laminate that matches faces, as indicated on drawings and doors schedule.
5. Construction: Plastic-laminate faces glued directly to core.
2.06 LOUVERS AND LIGHT FRAMES
A. Metal Louvers:
1. Metal and Finish: Hot-dip galvanized steel, 1.0 mm thick, factory primed for paint finish or powder-
coated finish, all as per details.
2. Metal and Finish: Extruded aluminum with Class II, clear anodic finish, AA-M12C22A31.
B. Wood-Veneered Beads for Light Openings in Fire-Rated Doors: Manufacturer's standard wood-veneered
noncombustible beads matching veneer species of door faces and approved for use in doors of fire-
protection rating indicated. Include concealed metal glazing clips where required for opening size and
fire-protection rating indicated.
C. Metal Frames for Light Openings in Fire-Rated Doors: Manufacturer's standard frame formed of 1.2 mm
thick, cold-rolled steel sheet; factory primed for paint finish or powder-coated finish and approved for use
in doors of fire-protection rating indicated.
2.07 FABRICATION
A. Factory fit doors to suit frame-opening sizes indicated. Comply with clearance requirements of referenced
quality standard for fitting unless otherwise indicated.
1. Comply with requirements in NFPA 80 for fire-rated doors.
B. Factory machine doors for hardware that is not surface applied.
C. Openings: Cut and trim openings through doors in factory.
1. Light Openings: Trim openings with moldings of material and profile indicated.
2. Glazing: Factory install glazing in doors indicated to be factory finished. Comply with applicable
requirements in Division 8 Section "Glazing."
3. Louvers: Factory installs louvers in prepared openings.
2.08 SHOP PRIMING
A. Doors for Opaque Finish: Shop prime doors with one coat of wood primer specified in Division 9 Section
"Exterior Painting" and "Interior Painting". Seal all four edges, edges of cutouts, and mortises with
primer.
2.09 FACTORY FINISHING
A. General: Comply with referenced quality standard for factory finishing. Complete fabrication, including
fitting doors for openings and machining for hardware that is not surface applied, before finishing.
1. Finish faces, all four edges, edges of cutouts, and mortises. Stains and fillers may be omitted
on top and bottom edges, edges of cutouts, and mortises.
EHAF – CO – 01/03 -5 - Section 08200

B. Finish doors at factory that are indicated to receive transparent finish. Field finish doors indicated to
receive opaque finish.
C. Transparent Finish:

2. Finish: AWI conversion varnish system.
3. Staining: As indicated on drawing details.
4. Effect: As indicated on drawing details.
5. Sheen: As indicated on drawing details.
PART 3 - EXCUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Hardware: For installation, see Division 8 Section "Door Hardware."

B. Installation Instructions: Install doors to comply with manufacturer's written instructions and the
referenced quality standard, and as indicated.
1. Install fire-rated doors in corresponding fire-rated frames according to NFPA 80.
C. Job-Fitted Doors: Align and fit doors in frames with uniform clearances and bevels; do not trim stiles and
rails in excess of limits set by manufacturer or permitted for fire-rated doors. Machine doors for
hardware. Seal edges of doors, edges of cutouts, and mortises after fitting and machining.
1. Clearances: Provide 3.2 mm at heads, jambs, and between pairs of doors. Provide 3.2 mm from
bottom of door to top of decorative floor finish or covering unless otherwise indicated. Where
threshold is shown or scheduled, provide 6.4 mm from bottom of door to top of threshold unless
a. Comply with NFPA 80 for fire-rated doors.
D. Factory-Fitted Doors: Align in frames for uniform clearance at each edge.
E. Factory-Finished Doors: Restore finish before installation if fitting or machining is required at Project site.
END OF SECTION
EHAF – CO – 01/03 -6 - Section 08200

Interior Design Works Technical Specifications Dr.Hussein Abbas
SECTION 08411
ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.02 SUMMARY
1. Exterior and interior storefront framing.
2. Storefront framing for window walls.
3. Storefront framing for ribbon walls.
4. Storefront framing for punched openings.
5. Exterior and interior manual-swing and sliding entrance doors and door-frame units.
1. Division 8 Section "ICU/CCU Entrance Doors" for manual-sliding entrances.

2. Division 8 Section "All-Glass Entrances and Storefronts" for systems without aluminum support
framing.
3. Division 8 Section "Automatic Entrance Doors" for automatic entrances.
4. Division 8 Section "Revolving Entrance Doors" for revolving entrances.
6. Division 8 Section "Glazed Aluminum Curtain Walls" for curtain-wall systems that mechanically
retain glazing on four sides.
7. Division 8 Section "Structural-Sealant-Glazed Curtain Walls" for curtain-wall systems that retain
glazing with structural sealant.
8. Division 10 Section "Louvers and Vents" for units installed with aluminum-framed systems.
1.03 DEFINITIONS
A. ADA/ABA Accessibility Guidelines: U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's
"Americans with Disability Act (ADA) and Architectural Barriers Act (ABA) Accessibility Guidelines for
Buildings and Facilities."
A. General Performance: Aluminum-framed systems shall withstand the effects of the following performance
requirements without exceeding performance criteria or failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication,
installation, or other defects in construction:
EHAF – CO – 01/03 -1 - Section 08411

May 2012 - Rev.(0) Aluminum Framed Entrances and Store fronts
1. Movements of supporting structure indicated on Drawings including, but not limited to, story drift and
deflection from uniformly distributed and concentrated live loads.
2. Dimensional tolerances of building frame and other adjacent construction.
3. Failure includes the following:
a. Deflection exceeding specified limits.
b. Thermal stresses transferring to building structure.
c. Framing members transferring stresses, including those caused by thermal and structural
movements to glazing.
d. Glazing-to-glazing contact.
e. Noise or vibration created by wind and by thermal and structural movements.
f. Loosening or weakening of fasteners, attachments, and other components.
g. Sealant failure.
h. Failure of operating units.
B. Delegated Design: Design aluminum-framed systems, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a

qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated.
C. Structural Loads:
1. Design system to withstand Wind Loads, Seismic Loads and Blast Loadsas indicated by the
Egyptian Codes of Practice
D. Deflection of Framing Members:

1. Deflection Normal to Wall Plane: Limited to edge of glass in a direction perpendicular to glass
plane shall not exceed L/175 of the glass edge length for each individual glazing lite 1/175 of clear
span for spans up to 4.1 m and to 1/240 of clear span plus 6.35 mm for spans greater than 4.1 m.
2. Deflection Parallel to Glazing Plane: Limited to L/360 of clear span or 3.2 mm, whichever is
smaller] [amount not exceeding that which reduces glazing bite to less than 75 percent of design
dimension and that which reduces edge clearance between framing members and glazing or other
fixed components directly below them to less than 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) and clearance between
members and operable units directly below them to less than 1/16 inch (1.5 mm)] <Insert deflection
limit>.
E. Structural-Test Performance: Provide aluminum-framed systems tested according to ASTM E 330 as

follows:
1. When tested at positive and negative wind-load design pressures, systems do not evidence
deflection exceeding specified limits.
2. When tested at 150 percent of positive and negative wind-load design pressures, systems, including
anchorage, do not evidence material failures, structural distress, and permanent deformation of
main framing members exceeding 0.2 percent of span.
3. Test Durations: As required by design wind velocity, but not fewer than 10 seconds.
F. Windborne-Debris-Impact-Resistance Performance: Provide aluminum-framed systems that pass missile-

impact and cyclic-pressure tests when tested according to ASTM E 1886 and testing information in
ASTM E 1996orAAMA 506.
EHAF – CO – 01/03 -2 - Section 08411

1. Large-Missile Impact: For aluminum-framed systems located within 9.1 m of grade.

2. Small-Missile Impact: For aluminum-framed systems located more than 30 feet (9.1 m) above
grade.
G. Story Drift: Provide aluminum-framed systems that accommodate design displacement of adjacent stories
indicated.
1. Design Displacement: As indicated on Drawings.
2. Test Performance: Meet criteria for passing, based on building occupancy type, when tested
according to AAMA 501.4 at design displacement and 1.5 times design displacement.
H. Air Infiltration: Provide aluminum-framed systems with maximum air leakage through fixed glazing and
framing areas of 0.03 L/s per sq. m of fixed wall area when tested according to ASTM E 283 at a minimum
static-air-pressure difference from 75 Pa to 300 Pa.
I. Water Penetration under Static Pressure: Provide aluminum-framed systems that do not evidence water
penetration through fixed glazing and framing areas when tested according to ASTM E 331 at a minimum
static-air-pressure difference of 20 percent of positive wind-load design pressure, but not less than 300 Pa.
J. Water Penetration under Dynamic Pressure: Provide aluminum-framed systems that do not evidence water
leakage through fixed glazing and framing areas when tested according to AAMA 501.1 under dynamic
pressure equal to 20 percent of positive wind-load design pressure, but not less than (300 Pa).
1. Maximum Water Leakage: According to AAMA 501.1 No uncontrolled water penetrating aluminum-
framed systems or water appearing on systems' normally exposed interior surfaces from sources
other than condensation. Water leakage does not include water controlled by flashing and gutters
that is drained to exterior and water that cannot damage adjacent materials or finishes.
K. Thermal Movements: Provide aluminum-framed systems that allow for thermal movements resulting from
the following maximum change (range) in ambient and surface temperatures. Base engineering calculation
on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss.
1. Temperature Change (Range): (67 deg C), ambient; (100 deg C), material surfaces.
2. Test Performance: No buckling; stress on glass; sealant failure; excess stress on framing,
anchors, and fasteners; or reduction of performance when tested according to AAMA 501.5.
a. High Exterior Ambient-Air Temperature: That which produces an exterior metal-surface

temperature of 82 deg C.
b. Low Exterior Ambient-Air Temperature: minus 18 deg C.
3. Interior Ambient-Air Temperature: 24 deg C .
L. Condensation Resistance: Provide aluminum-framed systems with fixed glazing and framing areas having
condensation-resistance factor (CRF) from 45 to 53 when tested according to AAMA 1503.
M. Thermal Conductance: Provide aluminum-framed systems with fixed glazing and framing areas having an
average U-factor of not more than 3.23 W/sq. m x K to 3.92 W/sq. m x K when tested according to
AAMA 1503.
EHAF – CO – 01/03 -3 - Section 08411

N. Sound Transmission: Provide aluminum-framed systems with fixed glazing and framing areas having the
following sound-transmission characteristics:
1. Sound Transmission Class (STC): Minimum from 26 to 35 STC when tested for laboratory sound
transmission loss according to ASTM E 90 and determined by ASTM E 413.
2. Outdoor-Indoor Transmission Class (OITC): from 26 to 34 OITC when tested for laboratory sound
transmission loss according to ASTM E 90 and determined by ASTM E 1332.
O. Structural Sealant: Capable of withstanding tensile and shear stresses imposed by aluminum-framed
systems without failing adhesively or cohesively. When tested for preconstruction adhesion and
compatibility, cohesive failure of sealant shall occur before adhesive failure.
1. Adhesive failure occurs when sealant pulls away from substrate cleanly, leaving no sealant material
behind.
2. Cohesive failure occurs when sealant breaks or tears within itself but does not separate from each
substrate because sealant-to-substrate bond strength exceeds sealant's internal strength.
P. Structural-Sealant Joints: Designed to produce tensile or shear stress of less than (138 kPa).
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material descriptions,
dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for aluminum-framed systems.
B. LEED Submittal: Product Data for Credit EQ 4.1: For adhesives and sealants used inside of the
weatherproofing system, including printed statement of VOC content.
C. Shop Drawings: For aluminum-framed systems. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and
attachments to other work.
1. Include details of provisions for system expansion and contraction and for drainage of moisture in
the system to the exterior.
2. For entrance doors, include hardware schedule and indicate operating hardware types, functions,
quantities, and locations.
D. Samples for Initial Selection: For units with factory-applied color finishes.
E. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required, in manufacturer's standard sizes.
F. Fabrication Sample: Of each vertical-to-horizontal intersection of aluminum-framed systems, made from (300-
mm) lengths of full-size components and showing details of the following:
1. Joinery, including concealed welds.

2. Anchorage.
3. Expansion provisions.
4. Glazing.
5. Flashing and drainage.
G. Other Action Submittals:
1. Entrance Door Hardware Schedule: Prepared by or under the supervision of supplier, detailing
fabrication and assembly of entrance door hardware, as well as procedures and diagrams.
EHAF – CO – 01/03 -4 - Section 08411

Coordinate final entrance door hardware schedule with doors, frames, and related work to ensure
proper size, thickness, hand, function, and finish of entrance door hardware.
H. Delegated-Design Submittal: For aluminum-framed systems indicated to comply with performance

requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional
engineer responsible for their preparation.
1. Detail fabrication and assembly of aluminum-framed systems.
2. Include design calculations.
I. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer and testing agency.

J. Seismic Qualification Certificates: For aluminum-framed systems, accessories, and components, from
manufacturer.
1. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test of assembled
components or on calculation.
K. Welding certificates.
L. Preconstruction Test Reports: For sealant.
M. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency,
for aluminum-framed systems, indicating compliance with performance requirements.
N. Source quality-control reports.
O. Quality-Control Program for Structural-Sealant-Glazed System: Include reports.
P. Field quality-control reports.
Q. Maintenance Data: For aluminum-framed systems to include in maintenance manuals.
R. Warranties: Sample of special warranties.

A. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and approved for installation
of units required for this Project.
C. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM E 699 for testing indicated.
D. Engineering Responsibility: Prepare data for aluminum-framed systems, including Shop Drawings, based on
testing and engineering analysis of manufacturer's standard units in systems similar to those indicated for this
Project.
F. Quality-Control Program for Structural-Sealant-Glazed System: Develop quality control program specifically
for Project. Document quality-control procedures and verify results for aluminum-framed systems. Comply
with ASTM C 1401 recommendations including, but not limited to, system material-qualification procedures,
preconstruction sealant-testing program, procedures for system fabrication and installation, and intervals of
reviews and checks.
G. Product Options: Information on Drawings and in Specifications establishes requirements for systems'
aesthetic effects and performance characteristics. Aesthetic effects are indicated by dimensions,
arrangements, alignment, and profiles of components and assemblies as they relate to sightlines, to one
another, and to adjoining construction. Performance characteristics are indicated by criteria subject to
verification by one or more methods including preconstruction testing, field testing, and in-service
performance.
EHAF – CO – 01/03 -5 - Section 08411

1. Do not revise intended aesthetic effects, as judged solely by Architect, except with Architect's
approval. If revisions are proposed, submit comprehensive explanatory data to Architect for review.
Q. Preconstruction Sealant Testing: For structural-sealant-glazed systems, perform sealant manufacturer's

standard tests for compatibility with and adhesion of each material that will come in contact with sealants and
each condition required by aluminum-framed systems.
1. Test a minimum five samples each of metal, glazing, and other material.
2. Prepare samples using techniques and primers required for installed systems.
3. For materials that fail tests, determine corrective measures necessary to prepare each material to
ensure compatibility with and adhesion of sealants including, but not limited to, specially formulated
primers. After performing these corrective measures on the minimum number of samples required
for each material, retest materials.
R. ccessible Entrances: Comply with applicable provisions in the U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers
Compliance Board's ADA-ABA Accessibility Guidelines and ICC/ANSI A117.1.
S. Source Limitations for Aluminum-Framed Systems: Obtain from single source from single manufacturer.
T. Structural-Sealant Glazing: Comply with ASTM C 1401, "Guide for Structural Sealant Glazing" for design and
installation of structural-sealant-glazed systems.
U. Structural-Sealant Joints: Design reviewed and approved by structural-sealant manufacturer.
V. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.2, "Structural Welding Code -
Aluminum."
W. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic
effects and set quality standards for fabrication and installation.
1. Build mockup of typical wall area as shown on Drawings.
2. Field testing shall be performed on mockups according to requirements in "Field Quality Control"
Article.
3. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents
contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations in writing.
Completion.
X. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of structural supports for aluminum-framed systems by field
measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.
1.08 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace
components of aluminum-framed systems that do not comply with requirements or that fail in materials or
workmanship within specified warranty period.
1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:
EHAF – CO – 01/03 -6 - Section 08411

a. Structural failures including, but not limited to, excessive deflection.

b. Noise or vibration caused by thermal movements.
c. Deterioration of metals finishes and other materials beyond normal weathering.
d. Adhesive or cohesive sealant failures.
e. Water leakage through fixed glazing and framing areas.
f. Failure of operating components.
2. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.
B. Special Finish Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace
components on which finishes do not comply with requirements or that fail in materials or workmanship within
specified warranty period. Warranty does not include normal weathering.
1. Warranty Period: [Five] years from date of Substantial Completion.
1.09 MAINTENANCE SERVICE
A. Entrance Door Hardware:
1. Maintenance Tools and Instructions: Furnish a complete set of specialized tools and maintenance
instructions as needed for Owner's continued adjustment, maintenance, and removal and replacement
of entrance door hardware.
2. Initial Maintenance Service: Beginning at Substantial Completion, provide [six] months' full
maintenance by skilled employees of entrance door hardware Installer. Include quarterly preventive
maintenance, repair or replacement of worn or defective components, lubrication, cleaning, and
adjusting as required for proper entrance door hardware operation at rated speed and capacity.
Provide parts and supplies the same as those used in the manufacture and installation of original
equipment.
B. Structural-Sealant-Glazed Systems:
1. Initial Maintenance Service: Beginning at Substantial Completion, provide six months' full maintenance
by skilled employees of structural-sealant-glazed system Installer. Include monthly preventive
maintenance, repair or replacement to ensure long-term performance and durability of structural-
sealant-glazed system as required for proper entrance door hardware operation at rated speed and
capacity. Provide parts and supplies the same as those used in the manufacture and installation of
original system.
2. Continuing Maintenance Proposal: From Installer to Owner, in the form of a standard yearly (or other
period) maintenance agreement, starting on date initial maintenance service is concluded. State
services, obligations, conditions, and terms for agreement period and for future renewal options.
EHAF – CO – 01/03 -7 - Section 08411

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, use approved manufacturers offering products that
may be incorporated into the Work
2.02 MATERIALS
A. Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use and finish indicated.
1. Sheet and Plate: (ASTM B 209M).
2. Extruded Bars, Rods, Profiles, and Tubes: (ASTM B 221M).
3. Extruded Structural Pipe and Tubes: ASTM B 429.
4. Structural Profiles: ASTM B 308/B 308M.
5. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: AWS A5.10/A5.10M.
B. Steel Reinforcement: Manufacturer's standard zinc-rich, corrosion-resistant primer, complying with SSPC-
PS Guide No. 12.00; applied immediately after surface preparation and pretreatment. Select surface
preparation methods according to recommendations in SSPC-SP COM and prepare surfaces according to
applicable SSPC standard.
1. Structural Shapes, Plates, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.
2. Cold-Rolled Sheet and Strip: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M.
3. Hot-Rolled Sheet and Strip: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M.
2.03 FRAMING SYSTEMS
A. Framing Members: Manufacturer's standard extruded-aluminum framing members of thickness required and
reinforced as required to support imposed loads.
4. Construction: Structurally glazed.
5. Glazing System: [Retained mechanically with gaskets on four sides] [Retained by structural sealant at
vertical edges and mechanically with gaskets at horizontal edges] <Insert description>.
6. Glazing Plane: As indicated on drawings
B. Brackets and Reinforcements: Manufacturer's standard high-strength aluminum with nonstaining, nonferrous
shims for aligning system components.
C. Fasteners and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant, nonstaining, nonbleeding fasteners
and accessories compatible with adjacent materials.
1. Use self-locking devices where fasteners are subject to loosening or turning out from thermal and
structural movements, wind loads, or vibration.
2. Reinforce members as required to receive fastener threads.
3. Use exposed fasteners with countersunk Phillips screw heads, finished to match framing system
EHAF – CO – 01/03 -8 - Section 08411

D. Concrete and Masonry Inserts: Hot-dip galvanized cast-iron, malleable-iron, or steel inserts, complying with
ASTM A 123/A 123M or ASTM A 153/A 153M.
E. Framing System Gaskets and Sealants: Manufacturer's standard, recommended by manufacturer for joint
type.
1. Provide sealants for use inside of the weatherproofing system that have a VOC content of [250] g/L or
less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
2.04 GLAZING SYSTEMS
A. Glazing: As specified in Division 8 Section "Glazing."

B. Glazing Gaskets: Manufacturer's standard compression types; replaceable, molded or extruded, of profile and
hardness required to maintain watertight seal.
C. Spacers and Setting Blocks: Manufacturer's standard elastomeric type.
D. Bond-Breaker Tape: Manufacturer's standard TFE-fluorocarbon or polyethylene material to which sealants will
not develop adhesion.
E. .Glazing Sealants: For structural-sealant-glazed systems, as recommended by manufacturer for joint type, and
as follows:
1. Structural Sealant: ASTM C 1184, single-component neutral-curing silicone formulation that is

compatible with system components with which it comes in contact, specifically formulated and tested for
use as structural sealant and approved by a structural-sealant manufacturer for use in aluminum-framed
systems indicated.
a. Provide sealants for use inside of the weatherproofing system that have a VOC content of [100]
g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
b. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors.
2. Weatherseal Sealant: ASTM C 920 for Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Uses NT, G, A, and O; single-
component neutral-curing formulation that is compatible with structural sealant and other system
components with which it comes in contact; recommended by structural-sealant, weatherseal-sealant,
and aluminum-framed-system manufacturers for this use.
a. Provide sealants for use inside of the weatherproofing system that have a VOC content of [250]
g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
b. Color: Matching structural sealant.
2.05 ENTRANCE DOOR SYSTEMS
A. Entrance Doors: Manufacturer's standard glazed entrance doors for Automatic sliding operation.
1. Door Construction: (44.5-mm) overall thickness, with minimum (3.2mm to (50.8mm) overall
thickness, with minimum (4.8-mm to 50.8- to 57.2-mm overall thickness, with minimum 3.2-mm
thick, extruded-aluminum tubular rail and stile members. Mechanically fasten corners with reinforcing
brackets that are deeply penetrated and fillet welded or that incorporate concealed tie rods.
EHAF – CO – 01/03 -9 - Section 08411

a. Thermal Construction: High-performance plastic connectors separate aluminum members

exposed to the exterior from members exposed to the interior
2. Door Design: As indicated on drawings
a. Accessible Doors: Smooth surfaced for width of door in area within (255 mm) above floor or
ground plane.
3. Glazing Stops and Gaskets: Beveled / Square snap-on, extruded-aluminum stops and preformed
gaskets.
a. Provide nonremovable glazing stops on outside of door.
2.06 ENTRANCE DOOR HARDWARE
A. General: Provide entrance door hardware sets indicated in door and frame schedule for each entrance door
to comply with requirements in this Section.
1. Entrance Door Hardware Sets: Provide quantity, item, size, finish or color indicated.
2. Sequence of Operation: Provide electrified door hardware function, sequence of operation, and
interface with other building control systems indicated.
3. Opening-Force Requirements:
a. Egress Doors: Not more than 67 N to release the latch and not more than 133 N to set the door in
motion and not more than 67 N to open the door to its minimum required width.
b. Accessible Interior Doors: Not more than 22.2 N to fully open door.
B. Designations: Requirements for design, grade, function, finish, size, and other distinctive qualities of each type
of entrance door hardware are indicated in "Entrance Door Hardware Sets" Article. Products are identified by
using entrance door hardware designations as follows:
1. Named Manufacturers' Products: Manufacturer and product designation are listed for each door
hardware type required for the purpose of establishing minimum requirements. Manufacturers'
names are abbreviated in "Entrance Door Hardware Sets" Article.
2. References to BHMA Standards: Provide products complying with these standards and
requirements for description, quality, and function.
C. Opening-Force Requirements:
1. Delayed-Egress Locks: Lock releases within 15 seconds after applying a force of not more than
(67 N) for not more than 3 seconds.
2. Latches and Exit Devices: Not more than (67 N) required to release latch.
D. Pivot Hinges: BHMA A156.4, Grade 1.
1. Offset-Pivot Hinges: Provide top, bottom, and intermediate offset pivots at each door leaf.
EHAF – CO – 01/03 -10 - Section 08411
E. Butt Hinges: BHMA A156.1, Grade 1, radius corner.
1. Nonremovable Pins: Provide set screw in hinge barrel that, when tightened into a groove in hinge
pin, prevents removal of pin while entrance door is closed.
2. Exterior Hinges: Stainless steel, with stainless-steel pin.
3. Quantities:
a. For doors up to (2210 mm) high, provide 3 hinges per leaf.
b. For doors more than (2210 and up to 3048 mm) high, provide 4 hinges per leaf.
F. Continuous-Gear Hinges: Manufacturer's standard with stainless-steel bearings between knuckles, fabricated
to full height of door and frame.
G. Mortise Auxiliary Locks: BHMA A156.5, Grade 1.
H. Manual Flush Bolts: BHMA A156.16, Grade 1.
I. Automatic and Self-Latching Flush Bolts: BHMA A156.3, Grade 1.
J. Panic Exit Devices: BHMA A156.3, Grade 1, listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable
to authorities having jurisdiction, for panic protection, based on testing according to UL 305.
K. Cylinders: As specified in Division 8 Section "Door Hardware."
L. Strikes: Provide strike with black-plastic dust box for each latch or lock bolt; fabricated for aluminum framing.
M. Operating Trim: BHMA A156.6.
N. Removable Mullions: BHMA A156.3, extruded aluminum.
1. When used with panic exit devices, provide removable mullions listed and labeled by a testing and
inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for panic protection, based on
testing according to UL 305. Use only mullions that have been tested with exit devices to be used.
O. Closers: BHMA A156.4, Grade 1, with accessories required for a complete installation, sized as required by
door size, exposure to weather, and anticipated frequency of use; adjustable to meet field conditions and
requirements for opening force.
P. Concealed Overhead Holders: BHMA A156.8, Grade 1.
Q. Surface-Mounted Holders: BHMA A156.16, Grade 1.
R. Door Stops: BHMA A156.16, Grade 1, floor or wall mounted, as appropriate for door location indicated, with
integral rubber bumper.
S. Weather Stripping: Manufacturer's standard replaceable components.
1. Compression Type: Made of ASTM D 2000, molded neoprene, or ASTM D 2287, molded PVC.
2. Sliding Type: AAMA 701, made of wool, polypropylene, or nylon woven pile with nylon-fabric or
aluminum-strip backing.
T. Weather Sweeps: Manufacturer's standard exterior-door bottom sweep with concealed fasteners on
mounting strip.
U. Silencers: BHMA A156.16, Grade 1.
V. Thresholds: BHMA A156.21, raised thresholds beveled with a slope of not more than 1:2, with maximum
height of (13 mm).
W. Finger Guards: Manufacturer's standard collapsible neoprene or PVC gasket anchored to frame hinge-jamb
at center-pivoted doors.
EHAF – CO – 01/03 -11 - Section 08411

2.07 ACCESSORY MATERIALS
A. Joint Sealants: For installation at perimeter of aluminum-framed systems, as specified in Division 7 Section
"Joint Sealants."
1. Provide sealants for use inside of the weatherproofing system that have a VOC content of [250] g/L or
less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
B. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied, asphalt-mastic paint complying with SSPC-Paint 12 requirements except
containing no asbestos; formulated for (0.762-mm) thickness per coat.
2.08 FABRICATION
A. Form or extrude aluminum shapes before finishing.

B. Weld in concealed locations to greatest extent possible to minimize distortion or discoloration of finish.
Remove weld spatter and welding oxides from exposed surfaces by descaling or grinding.
C. Framing Members, General: Fabricate components that, when assembled, have the following characteristics:
1. Profiles that are sharp, straight, and free of defects or deformations.

2. Accurately fitted joints with ends coped or mitered.
3. Means to drain water passing joints, condensation within framing members, and moisture migrating
within the system to exterior.
4. Physical and thermal isolation of glazing from framing members.
5. Accommodations for thermal and mechanical movements of glazing and framing to maintain required
glazing edge clearances.
6. Provisions for field replacement of glazing from exterior / interior or interior for vision glass and exterior
for spandrel glazing or metal panels.
7. Fasteners, anchors, and connection devices that are concealed from view to greatest extent possible.
D. Mechanically Glazed Framing Members: Fabricate for flush glazing without projecting stops.
E. Structural-Sealant-Glazed Framing Members: Include accommodations for using temporary support device to
retain glazing in place while structural sealant cures.
F. Storefront Framing: Fabricate components for assembly using shear-block system / screw-spline system /
head-and-sill-receptor system with shear blocks at intermediate horizontal members.
G. Entrance Door Frames: Reinforce as required to support loads imposed by door operation and for installing
entrance door hardware.
1. At exterior doors, provide compression weather stripping at fixed stops.
2. At interior doors, provide silencers at stops to prevent metal-to-metal contact. Install three
silencers on strike jamb of single-door frames and two silencers on head of frames for pairs of
doors.
H. Entrance Doors: Reinforce doors as required for installing entrance door hardware.
1. At pairs of exterior doors, provide sliding-type weather stripping retained in adjustable strip and
mortised into door edge.
2. At exterior doors, provide weather sweeps applied to door bottoms.
EHAF – CO – 01/03 -12 - Section 08411

I. Entrance Door Hardware Installation: Factory install entrance door hardware to the greatest extent possible.
Cut, drill, and tap for factory-installed entrance door hardware before applying finishes.
J. After fabrication, clearly mark components to identify their locations in Project according to Shop Drawings.
2.09 ALUMINUM FINISHES
A. Clear Anodic Finish: AAMA 611, [AA-M12C22A41, Class I, 0.018 mm] [AA-M12C22A31, Class II, 0.010 mm]
or thicker.
B. Color Anodic Finish: AAMA 611, [AA-M12C22A42/A44, Class I, 0.018 mm] [AA-M12C22A32/A34, Class II,
0.010 mm] or thicker.
1. Color: As indicate on the drawing

2. Color: As selected by Architect from full range of industry colors and color densities.
C. Baked-Enamel or Powder-Coat Finish: AAMA 2603 except with a minimum dry film thickness of (0.04 mm).
Comply with coating manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning, conversion coating, and applying and
baking finish.
D. High-Performance Organic Finish: 2-coat fluoropolymer finish complying with [AAMA 2604] [AAMA 2605] and
containing not less than [50] percent PVDF resin by weight in color coat. Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating
to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions.
1. Color and Gloss: [As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range] .
E. High-Performance Organic Finish: [3] to [4]-coat fluoropolymer finish complying with AAMA 2605 and
containing not less than [50] [70] percent PVDF resin by weight in both color coat and clear topcoat. Prepare,
pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers' written
instructions.
1. Color and Gloss: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
2.10 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing Agency: A qualified testing agency to evaluate structural-sealant-glazed systems.
B. Structural-Sealant-Glazed Systems: Perform quality-control procedures complying with ASTM C 1401

recommendations, including, but not limited to, system material-qualification procedures, sealant testing, and
system fabrication reviews and checks.
C. Structural-sealant-glazed system will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.
D. Prepare test and inspection reports.
EHAF – CO – 01/03 -13 - Section 08411

PART 3 - EXECUTIONS
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation
tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. General:
1. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.
2. Do not install damaged components.
3. Fit joints to produce hairline joints free of burrs and distortion.
4. Rigidly secure nonmovement joints.
5. Install anchors with separators and isolators to prevent metal corrosion and electrolytic deterioration.
6. Seal joints watertight unless otherwise indicated.
B. Metal Protection:
1. Where aluminum will contact dissimilar metals, protect against galvanic action by painting contact
surfaces with primer or applying sealant or tape, or by installing nonconductive spacers as
recommended by manufacturer for this purpose.
2. Where aluminum will contact concrete or masonry, protect against corrosion by painting contact surfaces
with bituminous paint.
C. Install components to drain water passing joints, condensation occurring within framing members, and
moisture migrating within the system to exterior.
D. Set continuous sill members and flashing in full sealant bed as specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants"
to produce weathertight installation.
E. Install components plumb and true in alignment with established lines and grades, and without warp or rack.
F. Install glazing as specified in Division 8 Section "Glazing."
1. Structural-Sealant Glazing:
a. Prepare surfaces that will contact structural sealant according to sealant manufacturer's written
instructions to ensure compatibility and adhesion. Preparation includes, but is not limited to,
cleaning and priming surfaces.
b. Install weatherseal sealant according to Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" and according to
sealant manufacturer's written instructions to produce weatherproof joints. Install joint filler
behind sealant as recommended by sealant manufacturer.
G. Entrance Doors: Install doors to produce smooth operation and tight fit at contact points.
1. Exterior Doors: Install to produce weathertight enclosure and tight fit at weather stripping.
EHAF – CO – 01/03 -14 - Section 08411

2. Field-Installed Entrance Door Hardware: Install surface-mounted entrance door hardware according to
entrance door hardware manufacturers' written instructions using concealed fasteners to greatest extent
possible.
H. Install perimeter joint sealants as specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" to produce weathertight
installation.
3.03 ERECTION TOLERANCES
A. Install aluminum-framed systems to comply with the following maximum erection tolerances:
1. Location and Plane: Limit variation from true location and plane to (3 mm in 3.7 m); (6 mm) over total
length.
2. Alignment:
a. Where surfaces abut in line, limit offset from true alignment to (1.5 mm).
b. Where surfaces meet at corners, limit offset from true alignment to (0.8 mm).
B. Diagonal Measurements: Limit difference between diagonal measurements to (3 mm).
A. Testing Agency: A qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to perform field tests and inspections.
B. Testing Services: Testing and inspecting of representative areas to determine compliance of installed systems
with specified requirements shall take place as follows and in successive phases as indicated on Drawings.
Do not proceed with installation of the next area until test results for previously completed areas show
compliance with requirements.
1. Structural-Sealant Compatibility and Adhesion: Structural sealant shall be tested according to

recommendations in ASTM C 1401.
a. A minimum of four areas on each building face shall be tested.
b. Repair installation areas damaged by testing.
2. Structural-Sealant Glazing Inspection: After installation of aluminum-framed systems is complete,
structural-sealant glazing shall be inspected and evaluated according to recommendations in
ASTM C 1401.
3. Air Infiltration: Areas shall be tested for air leakage of [1.5 times the rate specified for laboratory testing
under "Performance Requirements" Article, but not more than 0.03 L/s per sq. mof fixed wall area when
tested according to ASTM E 783 at a minimum static-air-pressure difference of 75 Pa/300 Pa.
4. Water Penetration: Areas shall be tested according to ASTM E 1105 at a minimum uniform and cyclic
static-air-pressure difference of 0.67 times the static-air-pressure difference specified for laboratory
testing under "Performance Requirements" Article, but not less than 200 Pa and shall not evidence
water penetration.
5. Water Spray Test: Before installation of interior finishes has begun, a minimum area of 23 m by 1 story
of aluminum-framed systems designated by Architect shall be tested according to AAMA 501.2 and
shall not evidence water penetration.
EHAF – CO – 01/03 -15 - Section 08411

C. Repair or remove work if test results and inspections indicate that it does not comply with specified
requirements.
D. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of
replaced or additional work with specified requirements.
F. Aluminum-framed assemblies will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.
G. Prepare test and inspection reports.
3.05 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust operating entrance door hardware to function smoothly as recommended by manufacturer.
1. For entrance doors accessible to people with disabilities, adjust closers to provide a 3-second closer
sweep period for doors to move from a 70-degree open position to (75 mm) from the latch, measured to
the leading door edge.
END OF SECTION
EHAF – CO – 01/03 -16 - Section 08411

SECTION 08451
GLASS DOORS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.02 SUMMARY
1. Interior hinged, manual- sliding and swinging glass doors.
2. Glass sidelights and transoms.
3. Shower glass doors
1. Division 5 Section "Metal Fabrications" for overhead-steel support for glass doors systems.
2. Division 8 Section "Glazing" for general glass requirements
A. General Performance: glass doors systems shall withstand the effects of the performance requirements
without exceeding performance criteria or failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or
other defects in construction.
B. Structural Performance: Glass doors systems shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and the following
loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated according to manufacturer’s requirements.
1. Deflection Limits: Deflection normal to glazing plane is limited to 25 mm
C. Delegated Design: Design glass doors systems, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a
qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria required.
D. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements resulting from the following ambient and surface
temperature changes.
1. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F - 180 deg F.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material descriptions,
dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes.
B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details, including the following:
EHAF – CO – 01/03 -1 - Section 08451

May 2012 - Rev.(0) Glass Doors
1. Plans, elevations, and sections.

2. Details of fittings and glazing, including isometric drawings of patch fittings and rail fittings (if any).
3. Door hardware locations, mounting heights, and installation requirements.
C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of exposed finish indicated.
D. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required, prepared on Samples of size indicated
below.
1. Metal Finishes: (150-mm-) long sections of patch fittings, rail fittings, accessory fittings, and other
items.
2. Glass: (150 mm) square, showing exposed-edge finish and tint.
3. Door Hardware: For exposed door hardware of each type, in specified finish, full size.
E. Fabrication Sample: of glass door, made from (300-mm) lengths of full-size components and showing
details of the following:
1. Joinery.
2. Anchorage.
3. Glazing.
F. Delegated-Design Submittal: For glass doors systems indicated to comply with performance requirements
and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer
responsible for their preparation.
1. Detail fabrication and assembly of glass doors systems.

G. Field quality-control reports.
H. Maintenance Data: For glass doors systems to include in maintenance manuals.
I. Warranty: Sample of special warranty.
installation of units required for this Project.
B. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM E 699 for testing indicated.
C. Engineering Responsibility: Prepare data for glass doors and windows, including Shop Drawings, based
on testing and engineering analysis of manufacturer's standard units in systems similar to those indicated
for this Project.
D. Source Limitations: Obtain glass doors systems from single source from single manufacturer.
E. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic
effects and set quality standards for fabrication and installation.
1. Build mockup of glass doors systems as shown on Drawings.
2. Build mockups for glass doors systems including all required hardware, patch fittings, rail fittings
and accessory fittings.
a. Size: As indicated on drawings
3. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents
contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations in writing.
EHAF – CO – 01/03 -2 - Section 08451

Completion.
A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of walls and other construction contiguous with glass doors
systems by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.
1.07 WARRANTY
components of glass doors and windows that do not comply with requirements or that fail in materials or
workmanship within specified warranty period.
B. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Structural failures including excessive deflection, air infiltration, or water leakage.
2. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal weathering.
3. Failure of operating components.
C. Warranty Period: 365 days from date of Substantial Completion, except as follows:
1. Concealed Floor Closers: [10] years from date of Substantial Completion.
1.08 MAINTENANCE SERVICE
A. Initial Maintenance Service: Beginning at Substantial Completion, provide 12 months' full maintenance by
skilled employees of glass systems installer. Include monthly preventive maintenance, repair, or
replacement of worn or defective components, lubrication, cleaning, and adjusting as required. Provide
parts and supplies the same as those used in the manufacture and installation of original equipment.
B. Continuing Maintenance Proposal: From Installer to Owner, in the form of a standard yearly (or other
period) maintenance agreement, starting on date initial maintenance service is concluded. State
services, obligations, conditions, and terms for agreement period and for future renewal options.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements provide products that may be incorporated into
the Work.
2.02 MATERIALS
A. Glass: ASTM C 1048, Kind FT (fully tempered), Condition A (uncoated surfaces), Type I (transparent),
tested for surface and edge compression per ASTM C 1048 and for impact strength per 16 CFR 1201 for
Category II materials.
EHAF – CO – 01/03 -3 - Section 08451

1. Class 1: Clear monolithic.

a. Thickness: 10 mm to 19 mm
b. Locations: As indicated on drawings
2. Class 2: Tinted monolithic.

a. Color: As indicated on drawings.
b. Thickness: 10 mm to 13 mm unless other wise indicated on the drawing details.
c. Locations: As indicated on drawings.
d. Solar Heat Gain Coefficient: As indicated on drawings.
e. Outdoor Visible Reflectance: As indicated on drawings.
f. Exposed Edges: Machine ground and flat polished.
g. Butt Edges: Flat ground.
3. Corner Edges: Lap-joint corners with exposed edges polished.
B. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M), with strength and durability characteristics of not
less than Alloy 6063-T5.
1. Bronze Cladding: ASTM B 36/B 36M, alloy matching Architect's sample

2. Brass Cladding: ASTM B 36/B 36M, alloy matching Architect's sample
3. Stainless-Steel Cladding: ASTM A 666, Type 304.
2.03 METAL COMPONENTS
A. Fitting Configuration:
1. Manual-Swinging, Glass Doors, windows, Sidelights and Transoms: (Patch fittings at head and sill
on pivot side only), (Patch fittings at head and sill on pivot side, and for lock at sill of swing side)
(Patch fitting at top and continuous rail fitting at bottom) or (Continuous rail fitting at top and
bottom)], as per design and manufacturer’s requirements
2. Manual-Sliding, -Glass Doors, windows, Sidelights and Transoms: Continuous rail fitting at top and
bottom.
B. Patch Fittings: [Aluminum] [Bronze-clad aluminum] [Brass-clad aluminum] [Stainless-steel-clad
aluminum].
B. Rail Fittings:
1. Material: [Match patch-fitting metal and finish] [Aluminum] [Bronze-clad aluminum] [Brass-clad
aluminum] [Stainless-steel-clad aluminum].
2. Height:
a. Top Rail: 89 mm unless otherwise indicated.

b. Bottom Rail: 89 mm to 255 mm unless otherwise indicated.
3. Profile: As indicated on the drawings.

4. End Caps: Manufacturer's standard precision-fit end caps for rail fittings.
C. Accessory Fittings: Match patch- and rail-fitting metal and finish for the following:
EHAF – CO – 01/03 -4 - Section 08451

1. Overhead stop.
2. Center-housing lock.
3. Glass-support-fin brackets.
D. Anchors and Fastenings: Concealed.
2.04 HARDWARES
A. General: Heavy-duty hardware units in sizes, quantities, and types recommended by manufacturer for all-
glass entrance systems indicated.
B. Concealed Floor Closers and Top Pivots: Center hung; BHMA A156.4, Grade 1; including cases, bottom
arms, top walking beam pivots, plates, and accessories required for complete installation.
1. Swing: Single and Double acting.
a. Positive Dead Stop: Coordinated with hold-open angle if any, or at angle selected.
2. Hold Open: Selective.
3. Opening-Force Requirements:
a. Accessible Interior Swinging and Sliding Doors: Not more than 5 lbf (22.2 N) to fully open
door.
C. Concealed Overhead Holder: BHMA A156.8, Grade 1, with dead-stop setting coordinated with concealed
floor closer.
D. Push-Pull Set: As selected from manufacturer’s full range.
E. Single-Door and Active-Leaf Locksets: [Center-housing deadbolt with pulls), (Center-housing combination
deadbolt and latch bolt with lever handles), or (Bottom-fitting deadbolt) as per design and manufacturer’s
requirements
1. Deadbolt operated by key outside and key or thumb turn inside.
F. Inactive-Leaf Locksets: Bottom-fitting or bottom-rail deadbolt.
1. Deadbolt operated by key outside and key or thumb turn inside.
E. Cylinders: As specified in Division 8 Section "Door Hardware."
1. .
F. Threshold: Not more than 13 mm high.
G. Manual-Sliding Door Hardware: Manufacturer's standard for sliding action indicated and with twin rollers.
2.05 FABRICATION
A. Provide holes and cutouts in glass to receive hardware, fittings, and accessory fittings before tempering
glass. Do not cut, drill, or make other alterations to glass after tempering.
1. Fully temper glass using horizontal (roller-hearth) process, and fabricate so that when glass is
installed, roll-wave distortion is parallel with bottom edge of door or lite.
B. Factory assembles components and factory install hardware and fittings to greatest extent possible.
EHAF – CO – 01/03 -5 - Section 08451

A. Clear Anodic Finish: AAMA 611, [AA-M12C22A41, Class I, 0.018 mm] [AA-M12C22A31, Class II, 0.010
mm] or thicker.
B. Color Anodic Finish: AAMA 611, [AA-M12C22A42/A44, Class I, 0.018 mm] [AA-M12C22A32/A34,
Class II, 0.010 mm] or thicker.
1. Color: As selected by Architect from full range of industry colors and color densities.
2.07 STAINLESS-STEEL FINISHES
A. Surface Preparation: Remove tool and die marks and stretch lines, or blend into finish.
B. Polished Finishes: Grind and polish surfaces to produce uniform finish, free of cross scratches.
1. Run grain of directional finishes with long dimension of each piece.
2. When polishing is completed, passivate and rinse surfaces. Remove embedded foreign matter and
leave surfaces chemically clean.
3. Directional Satin Finish: No. 4.
4. Mirror like Reflective, No directional Polish
2.08 COPPER-ALLOY FINISHES
A. Buffed Finish, Lacquered: M21-O6x (Mechanical Finish: buffed, smooth specular; Coating: clear organic,
air drying, as specified below).
1. Clear, Organic Coating: Lacquer specified for copper alloys, applied by air spray in 2 coats per
manufacturer's written instructions, with interim drying, to a total thickness of 1 mil (0.025 mm).
B. Hand-Rubbed Finish, Lacquered: M31-M34-O6x (Mechanical Finish: directionally textured, fine satin;
Mechanical Finish: directionally textured, hand rubbed; Coating: clear organic, air drying, as specified
below).
1. Clear, Organic Coating: Lacquer specified for copper alloys, applied by air spray in 2 coats per
manufacturer's written instructions, with interim drying, to a total thickness of 1 mil (0.025 mm).
C. Statuary Conversion Coating over Satin Finish: M31-C55 (Mechanical Finish: directionally textured, fine
satin; Chemical Finish: conversion coating, sulfide).
1. Color: Match Architect's sample.
PART 3 - EXECUTIONS
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation
tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
EHAF – CO – 01/03 -6 - Section 08451

3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Glass doors systems and associated components according to manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Set units level, plumb, and true to line, with uniform joints.
C. Maintain uniform clearances between adjacent components.
D. Lubricate hardware and other moving parts according to manufacturer's written instructions.
E. Set, seal, and grout floor closer cases as required to suit hardware and substrate indicated.
F. Install joint sealants as specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" and to produce weather tight
installation].
A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.
B. After completion of glass doors systems installation and nominal curing of sealant and glazing
compounds, but before installation of interior finishes, test for water leaks according to AAMA 501.2.
C. Perform test for total areas as designated by Architect.
D. Work will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.
E. Prepare test and inspection reports.
3.04 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Adjust glass doors systems and hardware to produce smooth operation and tight fit at contact points and
weather stripping.
1. For glass doors accessible to people with disabilities, adjust closers to provide a 3-second closer
sweep period for doors to move from a 70-degree open position to 75 mm from the latch measured
to the leading door edge.
B. Remove excess sealant and glazing compounds and dirt from surfaces.
END OF SECTION
EHAF – CO – 01/03 -7 - Section 08451

SECTION 08460
AUTOMATIC ENTRANCE DOORS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1. Exterior sliding, power-operated automatic entrances, integrated with the entrance canopy using
the same glazing profile.
A. Windborne-Debris-Impact-Resistance-Test Performance: Provide automatic entrances that pass

pressure tests of ASTM E 1996 according to the IBC.
B. Opening-Force Requirements:
1. Power-Operated Doors: Not more than 222 N required to manually set door in motion if power
fails, and not more than 67 N required to open door to minimum required width.
C. Entrapment Force Requirements:
1. Power-Operated Sliding Doors: Not more than 133 N required to prevent stopped door from
closing.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
B. Shop Drawings: For automatic entrances. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, hardware
mounting heights, and attachments to other work.

2. Activation and safety devices.
3. Include hardware schedule and indicate hardware types, functions, quantities, and locations.
C. Sample: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified.
D. Product certificates.
E. Product test reports.

EHAF – CO – 01/03 -1 - Section 08460
May 2012 - Rev.(0) Automatic Entrance Doors
F. Field quality-control reports.
G. Maintenance data.
H. Warranties: Sample of special warranties.
installation and maintenance of units required for this Project .
B. Certified Inspector Qualifications: Certified by AAADM.
C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a
D. Power-Operated Door Standard: BHMA A156.10.
1.5 WARRANTY
components of automatic entrances that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty
period.
1. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.
B. Special Finish Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or
replace components that show evidence of deterioration of factory-applied finishes within specified
warranty period.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Biparting Sliding Units:

1) Schmidlin
2) Vista Wall
3) Schucco Corp.
4) DORMA Automatics; Div. of DORMA Group North America.
5) Raynaers Aluminum
EHAF – CO – 01/03 -2 - Section 08460

2.2 MATERIALS
A. Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use and finish indicated.
1. Extruded Bars, Rods, Profiles, and Tubes: ASTM B 221M

2. Sheet and Plate: ASTM B 209M
B. Steel Reinforcement: With manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant primer complying with SSPC-PS
Guide No. 12.00 applied immediately after surface preparation and pretreatment. Select surface
preparation methods according to recommendations in SSPC-SP COM and prepare surfaces according
to applicable SSPC standard.
1. Structural Shapes, Plates, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.

2. Cold-Rolled Sheet and Strip: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M.
3. Hot-Rolled Sheet and Strip: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M.
C. Stainless-Steel Bars: ASTM A 276 or ASTM A 666, Type 304.
D. Stainless-Steel Tubing: ASTM A 554, Grade MT 304.
E. Glazing: to conform with glazing specifications and requirements of the entrance canopy –section
10540
F. Sealants and Joint Fillers: As specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants."
G. Nonmetallic, Shrinkage-Resistant Grout: Premixed, nonmetallic, noncorrosive, nonstaining grout;

complying with ASTM C 1107; of consistency suitable for application.
H. Fasteners and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant, nonstaining, nonbleeding

fasteners and accessories compatible with adjacent materials.
2.3 SLIDING AUTOMATIC ENTRANCES
A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard automatic entrances including doors[, sidelites], framing,
headers, carrier assemblies, roller tracks, door operators, activation and safety devices, and
accessories required for a complete installation.
B. Sliding Automatic Entrance:

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on
Drawings by one of the following:
2. Configuration: as indicated on drawings
3. Operator Features:
a. Power opening and closing.

b. Drive System: Chain or belt
c. Adjustable opening and closing speeds.
EHAF – CO – 01/03 -3 - Section 08460
d. Adjustable hold-open time between 0 and 30 seconds.

e. Obstruction recycle.
f. On-off/hold-open switch to control electric power to operator.
4. Sliding Door Carrier Assemblies and Overhead Roller Tracks: Manufacturer's standard carrier
assembly that allows vertical adjustment; consisting of nylon- or delrin-covered, ball-bearing-
center steel wheels operating on a continuous roller track, or ball-bearing-center steel wheels
operating on a nylon- or delrin-covered, continuous roller track. Support doors from carrier
assembly by cantilever and pivot assembly.
a. Rollers: Minimum of two ball-bearing roller wheels and two antirise rollers for each active
leaf.
5. Sliding Door Threshold: Manufacturer's standard threshold members and bottom-guide track
system, with stainless-steel, ball-bearing-center roller wheels.
6. Combination Activation and Safety Device: Combination motion/presence sensor.
7. Safety Devices: Two photoelectric beams mounted in sidelite jambs to detect pedestrians in
presence zone and to prevent door from closing.
8. Sidelite Safety Device: Presence sensor, mounted above each sidelite on side of door opening
through which doors travel, to detect obstructions and to prevent door from opening.
9. Finish: Finish framing, door(s), finish matching adjacent curtain wall.
2.4 ENTRANCE COMPONENTS
A. Framing and Transom Members: Manufacturer's standard extruded aluminum, minimum 3.2 mm thick
and reinforced as required to support imposed loads.
1. Nominal Size: As indicated on Drawings.

2. Extruded Glazing Stops and Applied Trim: Minimum 1.6-mm wall thickness.
B. Stile and Rail Doors: Manufacturer's standard. Mechanically fasten corners with reinforcing brackets
that are welded, or incorporate concealed tie-rods that span full length of top and bottom rails.
C. All-Glass Sliding Doors: Fabricated from 13-mm-thick tempered glass, with polished vertical edges and
minimum 3.2-mm thick, extruded-aluminum top and bottom rails.
D. Sidelites and Transom: Manufacturer's standard, extruded-aluminum tubular stile and rail members
matching door design and finish.
1. Glazing Stops and Gaskets: Same materials and design as for stile and rail door.
2. Glazing Stops and Gaskets: extruded-aluminum stops and manufacturer's standard preformed
gaskets.
3. Muntin Bars: Horizontal tubular rail members for each sidelite; match stile design.
EHAF – CO – 01/03 -4 - Section 08460

E. Headers: Fabricated from minimum 3.2-mm thick, extruded aluminum and extending full width of
automatic entrance units to conceal door operators and controls. Provide hinged or removable access
panels for service and adjustment of door operators and controls. Secure panels to prevent
unauthorized access.
2.5 DOOR OPERATORS AND ACTIVATION AND SAFETY DEVICES
A. Door Operators: Provide door operators of size recommended by manufacturer for door size, weight,
and movement; for condition of exposure; and for long-term, maintenance-free operation under normal
traffic load for type of occupancy indicated.
1. Door Operator Performance: Provide door operators that will open and close doors and maintain
them in fully closed position when subjected to Project's design wind loads.
2. Electromechanical Operators: Concealed, self-contained, overhead unit powered by fractional-
horsepower, permanent-magnet dc motor; with closing speed controlled mechanically by gear
train and dynamically by braking action of electric motor; with solid-state microprocessor
controller; UL 325; and with manual operation with power off.
B. Motion Sensors: Self-contained, K-band-frequency, microwave-scanner units with metal or plastic

housing; adjustable to provide detection field sizes and functions required by BHMA A156.10; with relay
hold time of not less than 2 to 10 seconds.
1. Provide capability for switching between bidirectional and unidirectional detection.

2. For one-way-traffic entrances, sensor on egress side shall not be active when doors are fully
closed.
C. Presence Sensors: Self-contained, infrared-scanner units with metal or plastic housing; adjustable to
provide detection field sizes and functions required by BHMA A156.10; with relay hold time of not less
10 seconds. Sensors shall remain active at all times.
D. Combination Motion/Presence Sensors: Self-contained units; consisting of both motion and presence
sensors in a single metal or plastic housing; adjustable to provide detection field sizes and functions
required by BHMA A156.10.
1. Motion Sensor: K-band-frequency, microwave-scanner units; with relay hold time of not less
than 2 to 10 seconds.
a. Provide capability for switching between bidirectional and unidirectional detection.

b. For one-way-traffic entrances, sensor on egress side shall not be active when doors are
fully closed.
2. Presence Sensor: Infrared-scanner units; with relay hold time of not less than 10 seconds.
Sensors shall remain active at all times.
E. Photoelectric Beams: Pulsed infrared, sender-receiver assembly for recessed mounting. Beams shall
not be active when doors are fully closed.
EHAF – CO – 01/03 -5 - Section 08460

2.6 HARDWARE
A. General: Provide units in sizes and types recommended by automatic entrance and hardware
manufacturers for entrances and uses indicated. Finish exposed parts to match door finish.
B. Manual Opening for Power-Operated Swinging Doors: Provide hardware that in a power failure allows
door to open with a manual force not to exceed 133 N according to BHMA A156.10.
C. Breakaway Device for Power-Operated Doors: Provide breakaway device that allows door to swing out
in direction of egress to full 90 degrees from any operating position. Maximum force to open door shall
be 222 N according to BHMA A156.10. Interrupt powered operation of door operator while in
breakaway mode.
D. Hinges:
1. Center-Pivot Sets: BHMA A156.4, Grade 1, with exposed parts of cast-aluminum alloy.
2. Offset Pivots: BHMA A156.4, Grade 1, with exposed parts of cast-aluminum alloy.
3. Butt Hinges: BHMA A156.1, Grade 1, 5-knuckle, 114-by-102-mm ball-bearing butts.
a. Provide nonremovable pins at hinges exposed on outside of door.

b. Provide nonferrous hinges for doors exposed to weather.
c. Provide 3 hinges at each leaf for doors up to 914 mm wide and 2032 mm tall; provide 4
hinges at each leaf for taller doors.
E. Deadlocks: Manufacturer's standard deadbolt operated by exterior cylinder and interior thumb turn, with
minimum 1-inch- (25-mm-) long throw bolt; BHMA A156.5, Grade 1.
1. Cylinders: [BHMA A156.5, Grade 1, six-pin mortise type.] [As specified in Division 8
Section "Door Hardware."]
a. Keying: [No master] [Integrate into building master] key system.
2. Deadbolts: [Laminated-steel hook] [Steel], mortise type, BHMA A156.5, Grade 1.

3. Two-Point Locking for Sliding Doors: Mechanism in stile of active door leaf that automatically
extends second lockbolt into [overhead carrier assembly] [threshold].
4. Two-Point Locking for Swinging Doors: Mechanism in stile of active door leaf that automatically
extends second lockbolt into [header] [threshold].
5. Two-Point Locking for Single-Folding Doors: BHMA A156.5, Grade 1, mortise-type, laminated-
steel hookbolt mounted in stile of active door leaf that engages strike jamb when operated by
cylinder; and with concealed, vertical flush bolt mounted in hinge stile that engages header when
operated by cylinder.
6. Two-Point Locking for Biparting-Folding Doors: BHMA A156.5, Grade 1, mortise-type,
laminated-steel hookbolt mounted in stile of active door leaf that engages active leaf of opposite
door when operated by cylinder; and with concealed, vertical flush bolts mounted in each hinge
stile that engage header when operated by cylinders.
F. Dustproof Strikes for All-Glass Sliding Doors: [Recessed, floor-type, BHMA A156.16, Grade 1, to
receive deadbolt.] [As specified in Division 8 Section "Door Hardware."]
EHAF – CO – 01/03 -6 - Section 08460

G. Push Bars: [As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of full-door-width, single]
[Manufacturer's standard surface-mounted, aluminum] push bars.
H. Pull Handles: [As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of pull handles and plates]
[Manufacturer's standard aluminum pull handles].
I. Thresholds: BHMA A156.21, extruded-aluminum raised thresholds; with beveled edges with a slope of
not more than 1:2 and a maximum height of 13 mm. Provide cutouts as required for door operating
hardware.
J. Weather Stripping: Manufacturer's standard replaceable components.
1. Sliding Type: AAMA 701, made of wool, polypropylene, or nylon woven pile with nylon-fabric or
aluminum-strip backing.
2. Compression Type: Made of ASTM D 2000, molded neoprene, or ASTM D 2287, molded PVC.
3. Weather Sweeps: Manufacturer's standard nylon brush sweep mounted to underside of door
bottom.
K. Finger Guards: Manufacturer's standard collapsible neoprene or PVC gasket.
2.7 ACCESSORIES
A. Guide Rails: Fabricated from anodized-aluminum, minimum 762 mm high; positioned and projecting
from face of door jamb for distance as indicated, but not less than that required by BHMA A156.10 for
type of door and direction of travel
1. Provide intermediate guide rail suitable for supporting photoelectric beams.

2. Mounting: Jamb and floor
2.8 FABRICATION
A. General: Factory fabricate automatic entrance components to designs, sizes, and thicknesses indicated
and to comply with indicated standards.
B. Framing: Provide automatic entrances as prefabricated assemblies. Complete fabrication, assembly,

finishing, hardware application, and other work before shipment to Project site.
C. Doors: Factory fabricated and assembled in profiles indicated. Reinforce as required to support
imposed loads and for installing hardware.
D. Door Operators: Factory fabricated and installed in headers, including adjusting and testing.
E. Glazing: Fabricate framing with minimum glazing edge clearances for thickness and type of glazing
indicated, according to GANA's "Glazing Manual."
EHAF – CO – 01/03 -7 - Section 08460

F. Hardware: Factory install hardware to greatest extent possible; remove only as required for final
finishing operation and for delivery to and installation at Project site. Cut, drill, and tap for factory-
installed hardware before applying finishes.
1. Provide sliding-type weather stripping, mortised into door, at perimeter of doors.

2. Provide compression-type weather stripping at fixed stops of exterior doors. At locations without
fixed stops, provide sliding-type weather stripping retained in adjustable strip mortised into door
edge.
3. Provide weather sweeps mounted to underside of door bottoms of exterior doors.
4. Provide finger guards at each pivoted entrance door that has clearance at hinge side greater
than 6 mm and less than 19 mm with door in any position. Anchor guards to hinge-jamb frame.
G. Activation and Safety Devices:
1. General: Factory install devices in doors and headers as required by BHMA A156.10 for type of
door and direction of travel.
2. Install photoelectric beams in vertical jambs of sidelites, with dimension above finished floor as
follows:
a. Top Beam: 1219 mm.

b. Bottom Beam: 610 mm.
3. Install photoelectric beams in sides of guide rails, with dimension above finished floor not less
than 610 mm.
A. Baked-Enamel or Powder-Coat Finish: AAMA 2603 except with a minimum dry film thickness of 1.5
0.04 mm.
1. Color and Gloss: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. General: Do not install damaged components. Fit frame joints to produce hairline joints free of burrs
and distortion. Rigidly secure nonmovement joints. Seal joints watertight.
1. Where aluminum will contact dissimilar metals, protect against galvanic action by painting
contact surfaces with primer or by applying sealant or tape recommended by manufacturer for
this purpose.
2. Where aluminum will contact concrete or masonry, protect against corrosion by painting contact
surfaces with bituminous paint.
EHAF – CO – 01/03 -8 - Section 08460

B. Entrances: Install automatic entrances plumb and true in alignment with established lines and grades
without warp or rack of framing members and doors. Anchor securely in place.
1. Install surface-mounted hardware using concealed fasteners to greatest extent possible.

2. Set headers, carrier assemblies, tracks, operating brackets, and guides level and true to location
with anchorage for permanent support.
3. Install components to drain water passing joints, condensation occurring within framing
members, and moisture migrating within system to exterior.
4. Level recesses for recessed thresholds using nonshrink grout.
5. Provide thresholds at exterior doors.
C. Door Operators: Connect door operators to electrical power distribution system as specified in
D. Access-Control Devices: Connect access-control devices to access-control system as specified in

E. Activation and Safety Devices: Install and adjust devices to provide detection field and functions
indicated.
F. Guide Rails: Install rails according to BHMA A156.10 including Appendix A and manufacturer's written
instructions unless otherwise indicated.
G. Glazing: Install glazing as specified in Division 8 Section "Glass and Glazing "
H. Adjusting: Adjust door operators, controls, and hardware for smooth and safe operation and for
weathertight closure; comply with requirements in BHMA A156.10.
1. Readjust door operators and controls after repeated operation of completed installation
equivalent to 3 days' use by normal traffic (100 to 300 cycles). Lubricate hardware, operating
equipment, and other moving parts.
I. Demonstration: Engage a certified inspector to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate,
and maintain automatic entrances.
END OF SECTION
EHAF – CO – 01/03 -9 - Section 08460

SECTION 08700
FINISH HARDWARE
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Special and Division 1
Specification Sections, apply to work of this section.
A. Definition: “Finish Hardware” includes items known commercially as finish hardware which are
required for doors and removable partitions, except special types of unique and non-matching
hardware specified in the same section as the door and door frame.
B. Extent of finish hardware required is indicated on Drawings and in schedules.
C. Types of finish hardware required include the following:
1. Hinges
2. Pivots
3. Spring hinges
4. Lock Cylinders and keys
5. Lock and latch sets
6. Door Stoppers
7. Bolts
8. Push/pull units
9. Closers
10. Miscellaneous door control devices
11. Protection plates
12. Weather-stripping for exterior doors
13. Intumesced strip
14. drop seals
D. Silencers included integral with hollow metal frames are specified with door frames elsewhere in
Division 8.
E. Weather stripping included integrals with hollow metal frames are specified with door frames
elsewhere in Division 8.
F. Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a
testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire ratings indicated,
based on testing according to NFPA 252.
A. Manufacturer: Obtain each type of hardware (latch and locksets, hinges, closers, etc.) from a single
manufacturer, although several may be indicated as offering products complying with requirements.
EHAF – CO – 01/03 -1 - Section 08700

May 2012 - Rev.(0) Finish Hardware
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturers technical product data for each item of hardware in accordance
with Division-1 section “Submittals”. Include whatever information may be necessary to show
compliance with requirements, and include instructions for installation and for maintenance of
operating parts and finish.
B. Hardware Schedule: Submit final hardware schedule in the manner indicated below. Coordinate
hardware with doors, frames and related work to ensure proper size, thickness, function and finish of
hardware.
C. Final Hardware Schedule Content: Based on finish hardware indicated, organize hardware schedule
into “hardware sets” indicating complete designations of every item required for each door or
opening. Include the following information:
1. Type, style, function, sizes and finish of each hardware item.

2. Name and manufacturer of each item.
3. Fastenings and other pertinent information.
4. Location of hardware set cross-referenced to indications on Drawings both on floor plans and
in door and frame schedule.
5. Explanation of all abbreviations symbols codes, etc. contained in schedule.
6. Mounting locations for hardware.
7. Door and frame sizes and materials.
8. Keying information.
D. Submittal Sequence: Submit schedule at earliest possible date particularly where acceptance of
hardware schedule must precede fabrication of other work (e.g., hollow metal frames) which is
critical in the project construction schedule. Include with schedule the product data, samples, shop
drawings of other work affected by finish hardware, and other information essential to the
coordinated review of hardware schedule.
E. Keying Schedule: Submit separate detailed schedule indicating clearly how the Employer’s final
instructions on keying of locks has been fulfilled.
F. Samples: Prior to submittal of the final hardware schedule and prior to final ordering finish hardware,
submit one sample of each type of exposed hardware unit, finished as required, and tagged with full
description for coordination with schedule.
1.05 PRODUCT HANDLING
A. Inventory hardware jointly with representatives of hardware supplier and hardware installer until
each is satisfied that count is correct.
B. Deliver individually packaged hardware items at the proper times to the proper locations (shop or
project site) for installation.
EHAF – CO – 01/03 -2 - Section 08700

PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS AND FABRICATION
A. GENERAL
1. Hand of door: Drawings show direction of slide, swing or hand of each door leaf. Furnish each
item of hardware for proper installation and operation of door movement as shown.
2. Base Metals: Produce hardware units of basic metal and forming method indicated, using
manufacturer’s standard metal alloy, composition, temper and hardness, but in no case of lesser
(commercially recognized) quality than specified for the applicable hardware units by applicable
standard for each type hardware item and with standard for finish designations indicated. Do not
furnish “optional” materials or forming methods for those indicated, except as otherwise specified.
3. Fasteners: Provide hardware manufactured to conform to published templates generally
prepared for machine screw installation. Do not provide hardware which has been prepared for
self-tapping sheet metal screws, except as specifically indicated.
4. Furnish screws for installation, with each hardware item. Provide Phillips flat-head screws except
as otherwise indicated. Finish exposed (exposed under any condition) screws to match hardware
finish or, if exposed in surfaces of other work, to match finish of such other work as closely as
possible, including “prepared for paint” in surfaces to receive painted finish.
5. Tools and maintenance Instructions for Maintenance: Furnish a complete set of specialized tools
and maintenance instructions as needed for Employer’s continued adjustment, maintenance, and
removal and replacement of finish hardware.
2.02 HINGES, BUTTS AND PIVOTS
A. Templates: Except for hinges and pivots to be installed entirely (both leaves) into wood doors and
frames provide only template-produced units.
B. Screws: Furnish Phillips flat-heat or machine screws for installation of units, except furnish Phillips
flat-head or wood screws for installation of units into wood. Finish screw heads to match surface of
hinges or pivots.
C. Hinge Pins: Except as otherwise indicated, provide hinge pins as follows:
1. Steel Hinges: Steel Pins
2. Non-ferrous Hinges: Stainless steel pins.
3. Exterior Doors: Non-removable pins.
4. Out -swing Corridor Doors: Non-removable pins.
5. Interior Doors: Non-resing pins.
D. Tips: flat button and matching plug, finished to match leaves.
Number of hinges: Provide number of hinges indicated but not less than 3 hinges for door leaf for
doors 2.20 m or less in height and one additional hinge for each 0.75 m of additional height.
2.03 LOCK CYLINDERS AND KEYING
A. General: Supplier will meet with Consultant to finalize keying requirements and obtain final
instructions in writing.
B. Standard System: Except if otherwise indicated, provide new master key system for project as per
recommended manufacturers by Employer and his instructions according to the manufacturer data
sheets
C. Metals: Construct locks cylinder parts from brass/bronze, stainless steel or nickel silver.
EHAF – CO – 01/03 -3 - Section 08700

D. Comply with Employer’s instructions for master keying and, except as otherwise indicated, provide
individual change key for each lock which is not designated to be keyed alike with a group of related
locks.
E. Permanently inscribe each key with number or lock that identifies cylinder manufacturer key symbol,
and notation “DO NOT DUPLICATE”.
F. Key Material: Provide keys of nickel silver only.
G. Key Quantity: furnish 3 change keys for each lock; 5 sub-master key for each sub-master system, 5
master keys for each master system; and 5 grandmaster keys for the grandmaster system.
H. Deliver keys to Employer’s representative.
I. Provide a key control system including envelopes, labels, tags with self-locking key clips, receipt
forms, 3-way visible card index, temporary markers permanent markers, and standard metal cabinet,
all as recommended by system manufacturer, with capacity for 150% of the number of locks
required for the project.
J. Provide hinged-panel type cabinet, for wall mounting.
K. Master key system: the master key system (M.K.S.) has to be manufactured and supplied according
to the following:
1. The M.K.S. which will be submitted to the Employer by the Contractor has to be manufactured
in a certain method able to cancel the M.K.S. used by the Contractor before date of taking over
of the building.
2. The M.K.S. shall consist of the following levels:
a. Grand master key : for the whole building
b. Master key : for the whole floor
c. Sub-master key : for a certain type of rooms of space
d. Single Door key : for a certain room of space
2.04 LOCKS, LATCHES AND BOLTS
A. Strikes: Provide manufacturer’s standard wrought box strike for each latch or lock bolt, with curved
lip extended to protect frame, finished to match hardware set.
B. Provide standard (open) strike plates for interior doors where wood doorframes are used.
C. Flush Bolt Heads: Minimum of 12 mm diameter rods of brass, bronze or stainless steel, with
minimum 300 mm long rod for doors up to 2.10 m in height. Provide longer rods as necessary for
doors exceeding 2.10 m in height.
D. Rabbeted Doors: Where rabbeted door stiles are indicated, provide special rabbeted front on lock
and latch units and bolts.
2.05 PUSH/PULL UNITS
A. Exposed Fasteners: Provide manufacturer’s standard exposed fasteners for installation; through-
bolted for matched pairs, but not for single units.
EHAF – CO – 01/03 -4 - Section 08700

2.06 CLOSERS AND DOOR CONTROL DEVICES
A. Size of Units: Except as otherwise specifically indicated, comply with the manufacturer’s
recommendations for size of door control unit, depending upon size of door, exposure to weather
and anticipated frequency of use.
B. Where parallel arms are indicated for closers, provide closer unit one size larger than recommended
for use with standard arms.
C. Provide parallel arms for all overhead closers, except as otherwise indicated.
D. Flush floor Plates: Provide finished metal flush floor plates for floor closers except where thresholds
are indicated and cover plate is specified to be an integral part of threshold. Finish floor plate to
match hardware sets, unless otherwise indicated.
E. Recessed floor Plates: Provide recessed floor plates where not thresholds are indicated and floor
closers are located in an area of resilient flooring. Recess plates to receive an insert of the floor
finish material, of the normal thickness as indicated. Provide extended spindle on closer as may be
necessary to accommodate thick floor finish inserts.
F. Provide black resilient parts for exposed bumpers.
2.07 DOOR TRIM UNITS
A. Fasteners: Provide manufacturer’s standard exposed fasteners for door trim units (kick plates, edge
trim, viewers, and similar units); either machine screws of self-tapping screw.
B. Fabricate protection plates (armor, kick or mop) not more than 37 mm less than door width on stop
side and not more than 12 mm less than door width on pull side, x the height indicated.
C. Plastic Plates: Plastic laminate (polyester), 3 mm thick.
2.08 WEATHER-STRIPPING
A. General: Except as otherwise indicated, provide continuous weather-stripping at each edge of every
exterior steel and aluminum doors leaf. Provide type, sizes and profiles shown on schedules.
B. Provide non-corrosive fasteners as recommended by manufacturer for application indicated.
C. Replaceable Seal Strips: Provide only those units where resilient or flexible seal strip is easily
replaceable and readily available from stocks maintained by manufacturer.
D. Weather-stripping at Jambs and Heads: Provide bumper-type resilient insert and metal retainer
strips, surface-applied unless shown as mortised or semi-mortised, of following metal, finish and
resilient bumper material.
E. Weather-stripping at Door Bottoms: Provide threshold consisting of contract type resilient insert and
metal housing of design and size shown; of following metal, finish, and resilient seal strip.
2.09 HARDWARE FINISHES
A. Provide matching Manufacturer's finishes for hardware units at each door or opening, to the greatest
extent possible and except as otherwise indicated. Reduce differences in colour and textures as
much as commercially possible where the base metal or metal forming process is different for
individual units of hardware exposed at the same door or opening.
B. Provide Manufacturer's finishes, which match the Engineer’s sample.
EHAF – CO – 01/03 -5 - Section 08700

PART 3 EXECUTIONS
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Mount hardware units at heights indicated or required to comply with governing regulations, and
except as may be otherwise directed by Consultant.
B. Install each hardware item in compliance with the manufacturer’s instructions and recommendations.
Wherever cutting and fitting is required to install hardware onto or into surfaces which are later to be
painted or finished in another way, coordinate removal, storage and reinstallation or application of
surface protections with finishing work specified in the Division 9 sections. Do not install surface
mounted items until finishes have been completed on the substrate.
C. Set units level, plumb and true to line and location. Adjust and reinforce the attachment substrate as
necessary for proper installation and operation.
D. Drill and countersink units, which are not factory-prepared for anchorage fasteners. Space fasteners
and anchors in accordance with industry standards.
E. Set thresholds for exterior doors in full bed of butyl-rubber or polyisobutylene mastic sealant.
3.02 ADJUST AND CLEAN
A. Adjust and check each operating item of hardware and each door, to ensure proper operation or
function of every unit. Replace units which cannot be adjusted to operate freely and smoothly as
intended for the application made.
B. Clean adjacent surfaces soiled by hardware installation.
C. Final Adjustment: Wherever hardware installation is made more than one month prior to acceptance
or occupancy of a space or area, return to the work during the week prior to acceptance or
occupancy, and make final check and adjustment of all hardware items in such space or area. Clean
operating items as necessary to restore proper function and finish or hardware and doors. Adjust
door control devices to compensate for final operation of heating and ventilating equipment.
D. Instruct Employer’s personnel in proper adjustment and maintenance of hardware and hardware
finishes, during the final adjustment of hardware.
E. Continued maintenance Service: Approximately six months after the acceptance of hardware in
each area, the Installer, accompanied by the representative of the latch and lock manufacturer, shall
return to the project and re-adjust every item of hardware to restore proper function of doors and
hardware. Consult with and instruct Employer’s personnel in recommended additions to the
maintenance procedures. Replace hardware items which have deteriorated or failed due to faulty
design, materials or installation of hardware units. Prepare a written report of current and predictable
problems (of substantial nature) in the performance of the hardware.
END OF SECTION
EHAF – CO – 01/03 -6 - Section 08700

SECTION 08800
GLASS AND GLAZING
PART 1 GENERAL
Division -1 Specification Sections, apply to work of this section.
A. DEFINITIONS
1. “Glass” includes both primary and fabricated glass products. “Glazing” includes glass
installation and materials used to install glass.
2. Extent of glass and glazing work is indicated on drawings and schedules.
3. Types of work in this section include glass and glazing for:
a. Window units.
b. Window wall construction.
c. Entrance and other doors.
d. Curtain walls.
e. Service window nits – bullet resistant.
f. Glass doors and partitions
B. Labels
1. Temporary labels:
a. Provide temporary label on each light of glass identifying manufacturer or brand and
glass type, quality and nominal thickness.
b. Label in accordance with NFRC (National Fenestration Rating Council) label
requirements.
c. Temporary labels shall remain intact until glass is approved by Consultant.
2. Permanent labels:
a. Locate in corner for each pane.

b. Label in accordance with ANSI Z97.1 and SGCC (Safety Glass Certification Council)
label requirements.
c. Tempered glass.
d. Laminated glass or have certificate for panes without permanent label.
e. Organic coated glass.
f. Bullet resistance glass or plastic assemblies in accordance with UL 752 requirements
for power rating specified.
EHAF – CO – 01/03 -1 - Section 08800

May 2012 - Rev.(00) Glass and Glazing
1.03 SYSTEM PERFORMANCES
A. Provide glass and glazing that has been produced, fabricated and installed to withstand normal
temperature changes, wind loading, impact loading (where applicable), without failure including
loss or breakage of glass, failure of Sealants or gaskets to remain watertight and airtight,
deterioration of glass and glazing materials, and other defects in the work.
A. GLAZING STANDARDS
Comply with recommendations of Egyptian Standard Specification and/or British Standard

Specifications.
EGYPTIAN STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS

ES No.
353 Sheet or Plate Glass
B. FIELD-CONSTRUCTED MOCK-UP
Prepare mock-ups for the following types of glass in locations directed by Consultant.
Construct mock-ups to match glazing systems required for project, including typical lite size,
framing system, and glazing materials and methods. Obtain Consultant’s acceptance of visual
qualities before proceeding with the work. Retain mock-ups in undisturbed condition during
construction as a standard for judging completed work.
C. SINGLE SOURCE RESPONSIBILITY
Provide materials obtained from one source for each type of glass and glazing product
indicated.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. PRODUCT DATA
Submit manufacturer’s technical data for each glazing material, Bullet resistive assemblies and
fabricated glass product required, including installation and maintenance instructions.
B. SAMPLES
Submit, for verification purposes, 300 mm square samples of each type of glass indicated
except for clear single pane units, and 300 mm long samples of each color required (except
black_ for each type of sealant or gasket exposed to view. Install sealant or gasket sample
between two strips of material representative of adjoining framing system in color.
EHAF – CO – 01/03 -2 - Section 08800

C. CERTIFICATE
Submit certificates from respective manufacturers at testing that glass and glazing materials
furnished for project comply with requirements.
D. TEST REPORTS
1. Submit sealant ubstrate adhesion and sealant compatibility test reports, including glazing
sealant manufacturer’s findings and recommendations.
2. Submit bullet resistant assembly test reports
A. Protect glass and glazing materials during delivery, storage and handling to comply with
manufacturer’s directions and as required to prevent edge damage to glass, and damage to
glass and glazing materials from effects of moisture including condensation, of temperature
changes, of direct exposure to sun, and from other causes.
A. ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS
1. Do not proceed with glazing when ambient and substrate temperature conditions are
outside the limits permitted by glazing material manufacturer or when joint substrates are
wet due to rain, condensation of other causes. Install glazing Sealants only when
temperatures are in middle third of manufacturer’s recommended installation temperature
range.
2. Field measure openings before ordering tempered glass products. Be responsible for
proper fit of field measured products.
1.08 GUARANTEE
A. The Contractor shall submit a guarantee for bullet resistive plastic material to remain visibly
clear without discoloration for 10 years.
B. The Contractor shall submit a guarantee for insulating glass units to remain sealed for 10
years.
C. The Contractor shall submit a guarantee for laminated glass units to remain laminated for 5
years.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of

the following:
1. Ford (U.S.A Product)
EHAF – CO – 01/03 -3 - Section 08800

2. Gloverbell (Belgium Product )

3. Saint Goban (France Product )
4. Pilkington (U.K Product)
2.02 GLASS PRODUCTS, GENERAL
A. PRIMARY GLASS STANDARD
Provide primary glass which complies with E.S 353 and/or B.S 952 requirements, including
those indicated by reference to type, class, quality, and form.
B. HEAT-TREATED GLASS ES STANDARD
Provide heat-treated glass which complies with Standard Specifications requirements,

including those indicated by reference to grade, style, type, quality, and class.
C. SIZES
Fabricate glass to sizes required for glazing openings indicated, with edge clearances and
tolerances complying with recommendations of glass manufacturer. Provide thicknesses
indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, as recommended by glass manufacturer for application
indicated.
2.03 PRIMARY GLASS PRODUCTS
A. CLEAR FLOAT GLASS
Type I, class 1, transparent.
B. TINTED FLOAT GLASS
Type I, class 2, heat absorbing and light reducing of tint and with performance characteristics
for 6 mm thick glass listed below:
C. BLUE-GREEN OR GREEN
Manufacturer’s standard tint, with visible light transmittance of 74-76% and shading coefficient
of 0.69-0.71.
D. GRAY
of 0.67-0.69.
E. BRONZE
of 0.69-0.71.
EHAF – CO – 01/03 -4 - Section 08800

F. PATTERNED AND WIRED GLASS
Class 1 (translucent), finish (patterned one side), 6 mm thick.
2.04 HEAT-TREATED GLASS PRODUCTS
A. HEAT STRENGTHENED GLASS
1. Unless otherwise specified , all heat strengthened glass shall comply with the requirements
of BS EN 1863.
2. Visual quality testing of heat strengthened glass for dimensional requirement and visual
defects shall be in accordance with BS EN 1863: Part 1.
3. When subject to a fracture test in accordance with BS 6206, the fracture characteristics
shall be similar to annealed glass and therefore, heat strengthened glass shall not be
considered as a safety glass. If heat strengthened glass is proposed for use in a situation
which requires a safety glazing material , it shall be laminated.
2.05 GLAZING SEALANTS
A. GENERAL
1. Comply with recommendations of sealant and glass manufacturers for selection of glazing
Sealants which have performance characteristics suitable for applications indicated and
conditions at time of installation.
2. Provide colors indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, as selected by Consultant from
manufacturer’s standard colors. Select modulus of elasticity and hardness or grade
recommended by manufacturer for each application indicated.
B. COMPATIBILITY
Select Sealants with proven compatibility with surfaces contacted in the installation and under
service conditions indicated, as demonstrated by testing and field experience.
C. COLORS
Provide color of exposed Sealants indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, as selected by
Consultant from manufacturer’s standard colors.
D. SILICONE GLAZING SEALANT
Single component elastomeric silicone sealant, nonsag; and with the following requirements
E. LOW-MODULUS SILICONE GLAZING SEALANT
Manufacturer’s standard low-modulus non-acid curing sealant that can withstand an increase
and decrease of 50% of joint width as measured at time of application when tested.
EHAF – CO – 01/03 -5 - Section 08800

2.06 MISCELLANEOUS GLAZING MATERIALS
A. COMPATIBILITY
Provide materials with proven record of compatibility with surfaces contacted in installation.
B. CLEANERS, PRIMERS AND SEALERS
Type recommended by sealant or gasket manufacturer.
C. SETTING BLOCKS
Neoprene, EPDM or silicone blocks as required for compatibility with glazing Sealants, 80 to
90 Shore A durometer hardness.
D. SPACERS
Neoprene, EPDM or silicone blocks, or continuous extrusions, as required for compatibility with
glazing sealant, of size, shape and hardness recommended by glass and sealant
manufacturers for application indicated.
E. EDGE BLOCKS
Neoprene, EPDM or silicone blocks as required for compatibility with glazing sealant, of size
and hardness required to limit lateral movement (side-walking) of glass.
2.07 COATED GLASS
A. TRANSPARENT MIRROR (ONE –WAY -VISION GLASS).

1. As per ASTM C1036, Type I, Class 1, Quality q2 or Class 3, Quality q3; Grey Glass.
2. Thickness, min. 6 mm.
3. Coated one face with a hard adherent reflective film of chromium or other coating of proven
equivalent durability.
4. Visible light transmittance; eight percent, plus or minus two percent.
5. Visible reflectance; sixty percent, plus or minus five percent.
6. Light ratio; mirror side 10 or more; observer side one or less.
7. Assemble with coating covered and protected with a layer of clear glass not less than 1/8
inch (3 mm) thick.
8. Clean interface glass prior to assembly.
9. Tape edge to seal interface and hold panes together.
2.08 GLASS CLAD POLYCARBONATE SECURITY GLAZING ASSEMBLY
A. CLEAR HEAT STRENGTHENED GLASS CLAD POLYCARBONATE (SECURITY GLASS)

1. Use ASTM C1048, Kind HS, Condition A, Type I, Class 1, Quality q3, outer glass panes.
2. Use clear polycarbonate sheet of 3 mm thick core.
EHAF – CO – 01/03 -6 - Section 08800

3. Thickness of 11 mm at least.
2.09 BULLET RESISTIVE ASSEMBLY
A. Provide protection listed by UL ABPMED as bullet resisting, with a power rating of Super-Power
Small Arms and automatic rifle ballistic level in accordance with UL 752.
B. Thickness of 51.1 mm at least.
PART 3 EXECUTIONS
3.01 INSPECTION
A. Require Glazier to inspect work of glass framing erector for compliance with manufacturing and
installation tolerances, including those for size, squareness, offsets at corners; for presence
and functioning of weep system; for existence of minimum required face or edge clearances;
and for effective sealing of joinery. Obtain Glazier’s written report listing conditions detrimental
to performance of glazing work. Do not allow glazing work to proceed until unsatisfactory
conditions have been corrected.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. PRE-INSTALLATION MEETING
1. At Contractor’s direction, Glazier, sealant and gasket manufacturers’ technical

representative, glass framing erector and other trades whose work affects glass and
glazing shall meet at project site to review procedures and time schedule proposed for
glazing an coordination with other work.
2. Clean glazing channels and other framing members to receive glass, immediately before
glazing. Remove coatings which are not firmly bonded to substrates. Remove lacquer from
metal surfaces where elastomeric Sealants are indicated for use.
3.03 GLAZING, GENERAL
A. Comply with combined printed recommendations of glass manufacturers, of manufacturers of

Sealants, gaskets and other glazing materials, except where more stringent requirements are
indicated, including those of referenced glazing standards.
B. Glazing channel dimensions as indicated in details are intended to provide for necessary bite
on glass, minimum edge and face clearances, and adequate sealant thicknesses, with
reasonable tolerances. Adjust as required by job conditions at time of installations.
C. Protect glass from edge damage during handling and installation; use a rolling block in
rotating glass units to prevent damage to glass corners. Do not impact glass with metal
framing. Use suction cups to shift glass units within openings; do not raise or drift glass with a
pry bar. Rotate glass with flares or bevels along one horizontal edge which would occur in
vicinity of setting blocks so that these are located at top of opening. Remove from project and
dispose of glass units with edge damage or other imperfections of kind that, when installed,
weakens glass and impairs performance and appearance.
D. Apply primers to joint surfaces where required for adhesion of Sealants, as determined by
preconstruction sealant-substrate testing.
EHAF – CO – 01/03 -7 - Section 08800

3.04 GLAZING
A. Install setting blocks of proper size in sill rabbet, located one quarter of glass width from each
corner, but no closer than 150 mm, unless otherwise required. Set blocks in thin course of
sealant which is acceptable for heel bead use.
B. Provide spacers inside and out, of correct size and spacing to preserve required face
clearances, for glass sizes larger than 1.25 mm, except where gaskets or glazing tapes with
continuous spacer rods are used for glazing. Provide 3 mm minimum bite of spacers on glass
and use thickness equal to sealant width, except with sealant tape use thickness slightly less
than final compressed thickness of tape.
C. Provide edge blocking to comply with requirements of referenced glazing standard, except
where otherwise required by glass unit manufacturer.
D. Set units of glass in each series with uniformity of pattern, draw, bow and similar
characteristics.
E. Force Sealants into glazing channels to eliminate voids and to ensure complete “wetting” or
bond of sealant to glass and channel surfaces.
F. Tool exposed surfaces of Sealants to provide a substantial “wash” way from glass. Install
pressurized tapes and gaskets to protrude slightly out of channel, so as to eliminate dirt and
moisture pockets.
3.05 PROTECTION AND CLEANING
A. Protect exterior glass from breakage immediately upon installation by use of crossed
streamers attached to framing and held away from glass. Do not apply markers to surfaces of
glass. Remove nonpermanent labels and clean surfaces.
B. Protect glass from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction
operations. If, despite such protection, contaminating substances do come into contact with
glass, remove immediately by method recommended by glass manufacturer.
C. Examine glass surfaces adjacent to or below exterior concrete and other masonry surfaces at
frequent intervals during construction, but not less often than once a month, for build-up of
dirt, scum, alkali deposits or staining. When examination reveals presence of these forms of
residue, remove by method recommended by glass manufacturer.
D. Remove and replace glass which is broken, chipped, cracked, abraded or damaged in other
ways during construction period, including natural causes, accidents and vandalism.
E. Wash glass on both faces not more than 4 days prior to date scheduled for inspections
intended to establish date of substantial completion in each area of project. Wash glass by
method recommended by glass manufacturer.
END OF SECTION
EHAF – CO – 01/03 -8 - Section 08800

SECTION 09200
LATH AND PLASTER
PART 1 GENERAL
1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section.
1.02 DESCRIPTION
A. This section covers the lathing and plastering work as indicated on the Drawings and specified herein
and required for this Contract.
A. Work shall be performed in strict accordance with the stipulations of the Egyptian Code of Practice
and the corresponding Egyptian Standard Specifications (ES) Latest Edition as noted herein below or
other international standards and sound practice.
Egyptian standards specifications

ES NO.
188 Gypsum
261 Expanded Metal (Steel)
373 Portland Cement (Ordinary and Rapid-Hardening)
584 Quick and Hydrated Lime
974 Portland Blast Furnace Cement
1031 White Portland Cement.
1108 Sand for Building Mortars
1.04 SUBMITTALS
1. Materials list as manufacturer’s data, including test results and certificates of compliance.
2. Copy of installation manual written by the manufacturers.
3. Samples of all materials.
4. 1-metre square samples of panels for each type of plaster finish.
5.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 CEMENT
A. Shall be a standard brand of Ordinary Portland Cement.
EHAF – CO – 01/03 -1 - Section 09200

May 2012 - Rev.(0) Lath and Plaster
2.02 LIME
A. Shall be high calcium lime, containing not less than 90 percent by weight of calcium oxide.
2.03 LIME PUTTY
A. Shall be made from quick lime. The lime shall properly slaked and screened through a 3 mm mesh
sieve, then stored and protected for 15 days before using.
2.04 GRAVIATO
A. Shall be a paste of quartz particles and pigments mixed with permanent coloured adherents of acrylic
base, ready to be applied. Graviato shall be kept in its original well closed air tight containers of 3 kg
capacity each. These containers shall have manufacturer’s name, production and expiry dates. They
shall also be stored in a weather tight and dry place until ready for application.
2.05 SAND
A. Shall be graded within the following limits:
Sieve Size Percent Passing (By Weight)
8 95
16 75 - 85
30 45 - 55
50 10 - 25
100 0- 7
Except as otherwise indicated, for finish coat of cement plaster, use sand passing No. 12 sieve. For
floated sand finish coat use sand passing No. 16 sieve. For toweled sand finish coat use sand
passing No. 20 sieve.
2.06 WATER
A. Shall be free from oil, salt, acid, alkali, organic or other deleterious matter, fresh, clean and from a
source used for domestic purposes.
2.07 Pre-blended Dry Mortar
A. In order to reduce the application time for construction, use per-blended dry mortar with manufacturer
data sheet which must be Comply with Standard Specification
2.08 STORAGE OF MATERIALS
A. Materials shall be stored in their original, unbroken package or container in a weather tight and dry
place, until ready for installation. Metals shall be kept free from dirt, grease, and other foreign matter,
and shall be protected from corrosion. Immediately upon receipt at the site, cement shall be stored in
dry, weather tight properly ventilated structures. Sand shall be piled in a manner that will provide good
drainage and prevent inclusion of foreign matter. Sand may not be placed directly on the ground.
EHAF – CO – 01/03 -2 - Section 09200

PART 3 EXECUTIONS
3.01 WORKMANSHIP
A. GENERAL
1. The whole of the work shall be executed in a workmanlike manner, to the satisfaction of the
Consultant. Any work rejected through non-compliance with the specification shall be removed
and replaced at the expense of the Contractor. The Contractor shall commence work when
instructed and shall clear all unused materials and plaster waste from the site when the work is
complete.
2. Surfaces of masonry or concrete shall be thoroughly wetted with water and well cleaned by wire
brush, and joints on masonry shall be raked out at least 15 mm before spatter-dash is applied.
B. SAMPLES
Samples shall be prepared and approved by the Consultant for finishing coat of different items.
3.02 WOOD NAILING BLOCKS
A. Provide, prior to lathing, wood nailing blocks behind lines of wood grounds, as necessary for the
support and fastening of standing trim, millwork, fixtures, shelving, and other work installed against
plaster.
3.03 CORNER ANGLES
A. Corner angles shall be provided on external angles of the interior plastered surfaces, including heads
and jambs of openings having plastered reveals in the workshop, warehouse and where shown on
the Drawings. Corner angles shall be mitred, closely fitted and welded, and shall be securely
anchored at intervals along each side. Corner angles shall be carried from floor to a height of two (2)
meters.
3.04 MIXING OF PLASTER
A. The plaster ingredients shall be thoroughly mixed together, and no more shall be mixed at one time
than can be properly incorporated in the work within ½ hour after mixing. No material shall be allowed
to remain overnight in the mixers or mixing boxes, and tools and implements used in the mixing or
transporting of plaster shall be thoroughly cleaned after each use. Do not retemper or use retempered
plaster.
3.05 CURING
A. All plaster coats made of mortar containing cement shall be kept in a constant moistened condition by
being sprayed as often as required for five (5) days.
3.06 DRYING
A. Protect plaster from too rapid drying, and provide air circulation when drying is too slow.
EHAF – CO – 01/03 -3 - Section 09200

3.07 PLASTER RINGS
A. The recessed lights will be furnished under the appropriate section on electrical work, but the
corresponding plaster rings shall be installed under this section. Rings shall be rigidly secured to the
ceiling framing.
3.08 APPLICATION OF PLASTER
A. Unless otherwise specified plaster shall be two-coat work as follows:
B. Spatter-dash (Tartasha) shall be done by forcibly throwing on wet mix of Portland Cement and
Coarse Sand in the proportion of 450 kg cement to 1 m3 sand, and shall be allowed to harden before
the next coat is applied.
C. Undercoat shall be proportioned as specified and applied to the thickness of 15 mm (including dash
coat) unless otherwise mentioned. The surface shall be brought to true planes with rod and darby,
well scored, combed or cross-scratched in two directions to prepare a good mechanical key for the
coat to follow.
D. Finishing coat shall be 5 mm thick except where otherwise mentioned. Steel trowel to uniformly
smooth surfaces or wood float as directed, except where other finish is required.
E. Except for cement and sand finish coats, the undercoat shall stand at least seven days before the
finish coat is applied.
F. Full coats of plastering, finished the same as adjoining plaster shall be provided back of interior wood
finish cabinets, cases, fixtures, counters, shelving, fixed wood finish and equipment, or other wall
covering material and shall be brought out to face of grounds but not beyond.
3.09 CEMENT-LIME-SAND PLASTER (TAKHSHEEN)
A. FOR INTERNAL WALLS

Shall be a mix of:
1 Part Cement
3 Parts Lime Putty
9 Parts Sand (By volume)
For a mono coat of 15 mm thickness min.
B. FOR INTERNAL CEILINGS

Shall be a mix of:
1 Part Cement
3 Parts Lime Putty
6 Parts Sand (By volume)
For a mono coat of 15 mm thickness min.
EHAF – CO – 01/03 -4 - Section 09200

3.10 TOUCHED TARTASHA
A. UNDERCOAT:
Shall be applied of cement, sand and lime putty in the proportion of 300 kg cement to 1 m3 sand
mixed with lime putty to the thickness of 15 mm (including dash coat).
B. FINISHING COAT:
Shall be applied by mechanical spattering for a mix of
2 Parts White Cement + Pigment

5 Parts Sand
¼ Part Lime
For a mono coat to be touched gently be a trowel.
3.11 ARTIFICIAL SANDSTONE PLASTER
A. UNDERCOAT:
Shall be applied of cement, sand and lime putty in the proportion of 450 kg cement to 1 m3 sand
mixed with lime putty to the thickness of 20 mm (including dash coat). The surface shall be brought to
true planes with rod and Darby, well scored, combed or cross-scratched in two directions to prepare a
good mechanical key for the coat to follow.
3.11.2 FINISHING COAT:
A. Shall be a plaster coat of 6 mm thickness after sculpting applied using trowel, rods, and all special
tools to give the required texture using the following components:
2 Parts White Cement

1 Part of Sandstone powder
Or
White Cement + Pigment (color oxide powder)
B. Hammering and texturing of the artificial sandstone shall take place within the suitable time to produce
the required patterns and textures using hammer and all special tools
3.12 ADMIXTURES
A. The Contractor may with the written permission and approval of the Consultant use admixtures in
undercoat and finishing coat for special reasons such as waterproofing. The Contractor shall in every
case submit full technical details on the admixtures proposed, and Contractor shall strictly use the
admixtures in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. The maximum limit shall be given as a
ratio of the weight of cement. The Consultant shall have the right at any time to order the Contractor
to stop using the admixtures or remove any coating below the specified standard in any way
whatsoever. The Contractor shall be allowed no extra payment for the use of admixtures.
EHAF – CO – 01/03 -5 - Section 09200

3.13 PATCHING AND REPAIRS
A. Prior to the start of the painting operations damaged portions of plastering shall be repaired. Patching
and repairing shall be neatly and accurately done, and shall match the finish of the adjoining work.
Where plaster surfaces are marred, discolored, stained or otherwise damaged, patching and repairing
shall be carried to the limits as determined and where necessary the finish coat shall be removed and
be replaced with new and acceptable work. Patching repairing and joining work shall be neatly done.
Cut out broken or damaged portions of plaster and repair with new work. Cut out cracks not less than
25 mm wide and plaster full and smooth. Moisten edge of patch area before new plaster is applied.
Match plaster patches to adjacent existing work that is to remain.
3.14 CLEANING
A. Upon completion of the lathing and plastering work, sweep and clean floors throughout, including
ledges or other surfaces carrying plaster droppings.
END OF SECTION
EHAF – CO – 01/03 -6 - Section 09200

SECTION 09250
GYPSUM BOARD
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
1. Interior gypsum board.

2. Exterior gypsum board for ceilings and soffits.
3. Tile backing panels.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
B. Samples: For the following products:
1. Trim Accessories: Full-size Sample in 300-mm long length for each trim accessory indicated.
2. Textured Finishes: Manufacturer's standard size for each textured finish indicated and on same
backing indicated for Work.
A. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: For fire-resistance-rated assemblies, provide materials and

construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 119 by an independent
testing agency.
B. STC-Rated Assemblies: For STC-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical to those
tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 90 and classified according to ASTM E 413 by an
independent testing agency.
C. Mockups: Before beginning gypsum board installation, install mockups of at least (9 sq. m) in surface
area to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution.
1. Install mockups for the following:
a. Each level of gypsum board finish indicated for use in exposed locations.
b. Each texture finish indicated.
2. Apply or install final decoration indicated, including painting and wallcoverings, on exposed
surfaces for review of mockups.
3. Simulate finished lighting conditions for review of mockups.
Completion.
EHAF – CO – 01/03 -1 - Section 09250

May 2012 - Rev.(0) Gypsum Board
1.04 STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against damage from weather,
condensation, direct sunlight, construction traffic, and other causes. Stack panels flat to prevent sagging.
A. Environmental Limitations: Comply with ASTM C 840 requirements or gypsum board manufacturer's
written recommendations, whichever are more stringent.
B. Do not install interior products until installation areas are enclosed and conditioned.
C. Do not install panels that are wet, those that are moisture damaged, and those that are mold damaged.
1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration,
sagging, or irregular shape.
2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface
contamination and discoloration.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD
A. General: Complying with ASTM C 36/C 36M or ASTM C 1396/C 1396M, as applicable to type of gypsum
board indicated and whichever is more stringent.
1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering

products that may be incorporated into the Work and as shown on the Approved Vendors List for
the Project.
B. Regular Type:
1. Thickness: 12.00 mm unless otherwise indicated on drawings.

2. Long Edges: Tapered and featured (rounded or beveled) for prefilling.
C. Type X:
1. Thickness: 15.9 mm unless otherwise indicated on drawings.

D. Special Type X: Having improved fire resistance over standard Type X, and complying with requirements
of fire-resistance-rated assemblies indicated on Drawings.
1. Thickness: As required by fire-resistance-rated assembly indicated on Drawings.

2. Long Edges: Tapered.
E. Flexible Type: Manufactured to bend to fit radii and to be more flexible than standard regular-type gypsum
board of same thickness.
EHAF – CO – 01/03 -2 - Section 09250

1. Thickness: (6.4 mm) unless otherwise indicated on drawings.

2. Long Edges: Tapered unless otherwise indicated on drawings.
F. Ceiling Type: Manufactured to have more sag resistance than regular-type gypsum board.
1. Thickness: (12.7 mm) unless otherwise indicated on drawings.

2. Long Edges: Tapered unless otherwise indicated on drawings.
G. Foil-Backed Type:
1. Core: As manufacturer standard.

H. Abuse-Resistant Type: Manufactured to produce greater resistance to surface indentation and through-
penetration (impact resistance) than standard, regular-type and Type X gypsum board.
1. Core: As indicated on Drawings.

I. Moisture- and Mold-Resistant Type: With moisture- and mold-resistant core and surfaces.
2.03 EXTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD FOR CEILINGS AND SOFFITS
A. Exterior Gypsum Soffit Board: ASTM C 931/C 931M or ASTM C 1396/C 1396M, with manufacturer's
standard edges.
1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide manufacturers offering

products that may be incorporated into the Work .
2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements according to the approved manufacturer
list.
B. Glass-Mat Gypsum Sheathing Board: ASTM C 1177/C 1177M.
1. Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide "Dens-Glass Gold" by G-P Gypsum.
2.04 TILE BACKING PANELS
A. Water-Resistant Gypsum Backing Board: ASTM C 630/C 630M or ASTM C 1396/C 1396M.
1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products

that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
EHAF – CO – 01/03 -3 - Section 09250

2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements according to the approved manufacturer

list.
B. Glass-Mat, Water-Resistant Backing Board:
1. Complying with ASTM C 1178/C 1178M.
a. Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products that may be incorporated into
the Work.
b. Complying with ASTM C1177/C 1177M.
a. Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products that may be

incorporated into the Work.
b. Core: As indicated on Drawings.
C. Cementitious Backer Units: ANSI A108.1.
1. Available Products: according to the approved manufacturer list.

2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements and manufacturer standard.
3. Thickness: As indicated on Drawings.
2.05 TRIM ACCESSORIES
A. Interior Trim: ASTM C 1047.
1. Material: Galvanized or aluminum-coated steel sheet, rolled zinc, plastic, or paper-faced

galvanized steel sheet, as indicated on drawings.
2. Shapes
a. Cornerbead.
b. Bullnose bead.
c. LC-Bead: J-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound.
d. L-Bead: L-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound.
e. U-Bead: J-shaped; exposed short flange does not receive joint compound.
f. Expansion (control) joint.
g. Curved-Edge Cornerbead: With notched or flexible flanges.
B. Exterior Trim: ASTM C 1047.
1. Material: Hot-dip galvanized steel sheet, plastic, or rolled zinc as indicated on drawings.
2. Shapes:
a. Cornerbead.
b. LC-Bead: J-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound.
EHAF – CO – 01/03 -4 - Section 09250

c. Expansion (Control) Joint: One-piece, rolled zinc with V-shaped slot and removable strip
covering slot opening.
C. Aluminum Trim: Extruded accessories of profiles and dimensions indicated.
1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide manufacturers offering

products that may be incorporated into the Work.
2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products that may be
3. Aluminum: Alloy and temper with not less than the strength and durability properties of
ASTM B 221M , Alloy 6063-T5.
4. Finish: Corrosion-resistant primer compatible with joint compound and finish materials specified
unless otherwise indicated on drawings.
2.06 JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS
A. General: Comply with ASTM C 475/C 475M.
B. Joint Tape:
1. Interior Gypsum Wallboard: Paper.

2. Exterior Gypsum Soffit Board: Paper.
3. Glass-Mat Gypsum Sheathing Board: 10-by-10 glass mesh.
4. Tile Backing Panels: As recommended by panel manufacturer.
C. Joint Compound for Interior Gypsum Wallboard: For each coat use formulation that is compatible with
other compounds applied on previous or for successive coats.
1. Prefilling: At open joints, rounded or beveled panel edges and damaged surface areas, use
setting-type taping compound.
2. Embedding and First Coat: For embedding tape and first coat on joints, fasteners, and trim
flanges, use compound.
a. Use setting-type compound for installing paper-faced metal trim accessories.
3. Fill Coat: For second coat, use drying-type, all-purpose compound unless otherwise indicated.
4. Finish Coat: For third coat, use drying-type, all-purpose compound unless otherwise indicated.
5. Skim Coat: For final coat of Level 5 finish, use drying-type, all-purpose compound unless
D. Joint Compound for Exterior Applications:
1. Exterior Gypsum Soffit Board: Use setting-type taping compound and setting-type, sandable
topping compound.
2. Glass-Mat Gypsum Sheathing Board: As recommended by sheathing board manufacturer.
EHAF – CO – 01/03 -5 - Section 09250

E. Joint Compound for Tile Backing Panels:
1. Water-Resistant Gypsum Backing Board: Use setting-type taping compound and setting-type,
sandable topping compound.
2. Glass-Mat, Water-Resistant Backing Panel: As recommended by backing panel manufacturer.
3. Cementitious Backer Units: As recommended by backer unit manufacturer.
2.07 AUXILIARY MATERIALS
A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards and manufacturer's
written recommendations.
B. Laminating Adhesive: Adhesive or joint compound recommended for directly adhering gypsum panels to
continuous substrate.
1. Use adhesives that have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59,
C. Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C 1002, unless otherwise indicated.
1. Use screws complying with ASTM C 954 for fastening panels to steel members from 0.84 to 2.84
mm thick.
2. For fastening cementitious backer units, use screws of type and size recommended by panel
manufacturer.
D. Sound Attenuation Blankets: Refer to Section 01440 – Acoustic Performance Testing.
1. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Comply with mineral-fiber requirements of assembly.
E. Acoustical Sealant: As specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants."
F. Thermal Insulation: As specified in Division 7 Section "Building Insulation."
G. Vapor Retarder: As specified in Division 7 Section "Building Insulation."
2.08 TEXTURE FINISHES
A. Primer: As recommended by textured finish manufacturer.
B. Polystyrene Aggregate Ceiling Finish: Water-based, job-mixed, polystyrene aggregate finish with flame-
spread and smoke-developed indexes of not more than 25 when tested according to ASTM E 84.

2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products that may be incorporated
into the Work:
3. Texture: as indicated on drawings.
C. Aggregate Finish: Water-based, job-mixed, aggregated, drying-type texture finish for spray application.
EHAF – CO – 01/03 -6 - Section 09250


2. Products: manufacturer standard.
3. Texture: as indicated on drawings.
4. Acoustical Finish: Water-based, chemical-setting or drying-type, job-mixed texture finish for spray
application.

6. Products: manufacturer standard.
7. Application Thickness: 12.7 mm.
8. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Indices when tested according to ASTM E 84 as follows:
a. Flame Spread: Less than 25.

b. Smoke Developed: Less than 450.
9. NRC: 0.55 according to ASTM C 423.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas and substrates, with Installer present, and including welded hollow-metal frames and
framing, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance.
B. Examine panels before installation. Reject panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged.
3.02 APPLYING AND FINISHING PANELS, GENERAL
A. Comply with ASTM C 840.
B. Examine panels before installation. Reject panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged.
C. Install panels with face side out. Butt panels together for a light contact at edges and ends with not more
than 1.5 mm of open space between panels. Do not force into place.
D. Locate edge and end joints over supports. Do not place tapered edges against cut edges or ends.
Stagger vertical joints on opposite sides of partitions. Do not make joints other than control joints at
corners of framed openings.
E. Form control and expansion joints with space between edges of adjoining gypsum panels.
F. Cover both faces of support framing with gypsum panels in concealed spaces (above ceilings, etc.),
except in chases braced internally.
EHAF – CO – 01/03 -7 - Section 09250

1. Unless concealed application is indicated or required for sound, fire, air, or smoke ratings,
coverage may be accomplished with scraps of not less than 0.7 sq. m in area.
2. Fit gypsum panels around ducts, pipes, and conduits.
3. Where partitions intersect structural members projecting below underside of floor/roof slabs and
decks, cut gypsum panels to fit profile formed by structural members; allow 6.4- to 9.5-mm wide
joints to install sealant.
G. Isolate perimeter of gypsum board applied to non-load-bearing partitions at structural abutments, except
floors. Provide 6.4- to 12.7-mm wide spaces at these locations, and trim edges with edge trim where
edges of panels are exposed. Seal joints between edges and abutting structural surfaces with acoustical
sealant.
H. Attachment to Steel Framing: Attach panels so leading edge or end of each panel is attached to open
(unsupported) edges of stud flanges first.
I. Wood Framing: Install gypsum panels over wood framing, with floating internal corner construction. Do
not attach gypsum panels across the flat grain of wide-dimension lumber, including floor joists and
headers. Float gypsum panels over these members, or provide control joints to counteract wood
shrinkage.
J. STC-Rated Assemblies: Seal construction at perimeters, behind control joints, and at openings and
penetrations with a continuous bead of acoustical sealant. Install acoustical sealant at both faces of
partitions at perimeters and through penetrations. Comply with ASTM C 919 and with manufacturer's
written recommendations for locating edge trim and closing off sound-flanking paths around or through
assemblies, including sealing partitions above acoustical ceilings.
K. Install sound attenuation blankets before installing gypsum panels, unless blankets are readily installed
after panels have been installed on one side.
3.03 APPLYING INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD
A. Install interior gypsum board As indicated on Drawings
3.04 APPLYING EXTERIOR GYPSUM PANELS FOR CEILINGS AND SOFFITS
A. Apply panels perpendicular to supports, with end joints staggered and located over supports.
1. Install with 6.4-mm open space where panels abut other construction or structural penetrations.
2. Fasten with corrosion-resistant screws.
3.05 APPLYING TILE BACKING PANELS
A. Water-Resistant Gypsum Backing Board: Install at showers, tubs, and where indicated. Install with 6.4-
mm gap where panels abut other construction or penetrations.
B. Glass-Mat, Water-Resistant Backing Panel: Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions
and install at showers, tubs, and where indicated. Install with 6.4-mm gap where panels abut other
construction or penetrations.
EHAF – CO – 01/03 -8 - Section 09250

C. Cementitious Backer Units: ANSI A108.1, at showers, tubs, and where indicated.
D. Areas Not Subject to Wetting: Install regular-type gypsum wallboard panels to produce a flat surface
except at showers, tubs, and other locations indicated to receive water-resistant panels.
E. Where tile backing panels abut other types of panels in same plane, shim surfaces to produce a uniform
plane across panel surfaces.
3.06 INSTALLING TRIM ACCESSORIES
A. General: For trim with back flanges intended for fasteners, attach to framing with same fasteners used for
panels. Otherwise, attach trim according to manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Control Joints: Install control joints according to ASTM C 840 and in specific locations approved by
Architect for visual effect.
C. Interior Trim: Install in the following locations:
1. Cornerbead: Use at outside corner, unless otherwise indicated.

2. Bullnose Bead: Use at outside corner, unless otherwise indicated.
3. LC-Bead: Use at exposed panel edges, unless otherwise indicated.
4. L-Bead: Use :where indicated] .
5. U-Bead: Use: at exposed panel edges, unless otherwise indicated.
6. Curved-Edge Cornerbead: Use at curved openings.
D. Exterior Trim: Install in the following locations:
1. Cornerbead: Use at outside corners.

2. LC-Bead: Use : at exposed panel edges, unless otherwise indicated.
3. Aluminum Trim: Install in locations indicated on Drawings.
3.07 FINISHING GYPSUM BOARD
A. General: Treat gypsum board joints, interior angles, edge trim, control joints, penetrations, fastener
heads, surface defects, and elsewhere as required to prepare gypsum board surfaces for decoration.
Promptly remove residual joint compound from adjacent surfaces.
B. Prefill open joints, rounded or beveled edges, and damaged surface areas.
C. Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints, except those with trim having flanges not intended for tape.
D. Gypsum Board Finish Levels: Finish panels to levels indicated below:
1. Level 1: Ceiling plenum areas, concealed areas, and where indicated.

2. Level 2: Where indicated on Drawings
3. Level 3 is suitable for surfaces receiving medium- or heavy-textured finishes before painting or
heavy wallcoverings where lighting conditions are not critical.
4. Level 3: Where indicated on Drawings.
5. Level 4: At panel surfaces that will be exposed to view, unless otherwise indicated.
EHAF – CO – 01/03 -9 - Section 09250

a. Primer and its application to surfaces are specified in other Division 9 Sections.
6. Level 5: Where indicated on Drawings.
a. Primer and its application to surfaces are specified in other Division 9 Sections.
E. Glass-Mat Gypsum Sheathing Board: Finish according to manufacturer's written instructions for use as
exposed soffit board.
F. Glass-Mat, Water-Resistant Backing Panels: Finish according to manufacturer's written instructions.
G. Cementitious Backer Units: Finish according to manufacturer's written instructions.
3.08 APPLYING TEXTURE FINISHES
A. Surface Preparation and Primer: Prepare and apply primer to gypsum panels and other surfaces
receiving texture finishes. Apply primer to surfaces that are clean, dry, and smooth.
B. Texture Finish Application: Mix and apply finish using powered spray equipment, to produce a uniform
texture matching approved mockup and free of starved spots or other evidence of thin application or of
application patterns.
C. Prevent texture finishes from coming into contact with surfaces not indicated to receive texture finish by
covering them with masking agents, polyethylene film, or other means. If, despite these precautions,
texture finishes contact these surfaces, immediately remove droppings and overspray to prevent damage
according to texture-finish manufacturer's written recommendations.
3.09 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed products from damage from weather, condensation, direct sunlight, construction, and
other causes during remainder of the construction period.
B. Remove and replace panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged.
1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration,
sagging, or irregular shape.
2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface
contamination and discoloration.
END OF SECTION
EHAF – CO – 01/03 -10 - Section 09250

SECTION 09310
CERAMIC TILE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
1. Ceramic and porcelain tile.

2. Stone thresholds.
3. Crack isolation membrane.
4. Tile backing panels.
5. Metal edge strips.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
B. Samples:
1. Each type and composition of tile and for each color and finish required.
2. Assembled samples, with grouted joints, for each type and composition of tile and for each color
and finish required.
3. Stone thresholds in 150 mm lengths.
A. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic
effects and set quality standards for materials and execution.
1. Build mockup of each type of floor tile installation unless otherwise recommended by Engineer.
2. Build mockup of each type of wall tile installation unless otherwise recommended by Engineer.
Completion.
1.04 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish extra materials that match and are from same production runs as products installed and that are
packaged with protective covering and identified with labels describing contents.
1. Tile and Trim Units: Furnish quantity of full-size units equal to 3 percent of amount installed for
each type, composition, color, pattern, and size indicated.
EHAF – CO – 01/03 -1 - Section 09310

May 2012, Rev. (0) Ceramic Tiles
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 TILE PRODUCTS
A. ANSI Ceramic Tile Standard: Provide Standard grade tile that complies with ANSI A137.1 for types,
compositions, and other characteristics indicated.
B. Factory-Mounted Glazed Ceramic Mosaic Tile
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide available manufacturers offering
Drawings.
3. Composition: Glass
4. Module Size: 20mm x 20mm
5. Thickness: 4mm
6. Face: Pattern of design indicated.
7. Surface: Glass mosaic of square and beveled surface suitable either for walls or floor use in wet
areas and as selected by the Architect
8. Finish: Glass mosaic
9. Tile Color and Pattern: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
10. Grout Color: Match Architect's sample and as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
11. Trim Units: Coordinated with sizes and coursing of adjoining flat tile where applicable and
matching characteristics of adjoining flat tile.
12. Paper face mounted or back mounted on mesh with a joint of 1.57mm.
13. Overall sheet dimensions: 322 x 322 mm.
C. Square-Edged Quarry Tile Unglazed / Glazed.

Drawings.
3. Unglazed Tiles:
4. Face Size: As selected by Architect and indicated on drawings and finish schedule.
5. Thickness: As per manufacturer’s full range.
6. Wearing Surface: Nonabrasive, smooth or Abrasive aggregate embedded in surface, as selected
by Architect from manufacturer’s full range and indicated on drawings and finish schedule.
7. Glazed tiles:
8. Finish: Bright, Mat, Semimat, Vellum or Crystalline glaze, as selected by Architect and indicated
on drawings and finish schedule.
10. Grout Color: Match Architect's sample from manufacturer's full range.
EHAF – CO – 01/03 -2 - Section 09310

matching characteristics of adjoining flat tile.
D. Paver Tile Unglazed/Glazed.

Drawings
3. Composition: Porcelain.
4. Face Size: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
5. Face: Pattern of design indicated with square or cushion edges as selected by Architect.
1. Finish: Bright, Mat, Semimat, Vellum or Crystalline glaze as selected by Architect and indicated on
drawings and finish schedule.
3. Grout Color: Match Architect's sample from manufacturer's full range.
E. Glazed Wall Tile / Decorative Thin Wall Tile.

Drawings.
3. Module Size: 200 by 200 mm
4. Face: square and beveled edges.
1. Finish: Bright or Crystalline glazed as selected by Architect and indicated on drawings and finish
schedule.
3. Grout Color Match Architect's sample from manufacturer's full range.
4. Mounting: Paper face mounted or back mounted on mesh with a joint of 1.57mm.
5. Mounting: Pre-grouted sheets of tiles factory assembled and grouted with manufacturer's standard
white silicone rubber.
matching characteristics of adjoining flat tile]. Provide shapes as follows, selected from
manufacturer's standard shapes:
a. Base: Coved / Straight.

b. Wainscot Cap: Bullnose cap / Surface bullnose.
c. External Corners for Thin-Set Mortar Installations: Bullnose shape / Surface bullnose.
d. Internal Corners: Field-butted square corners. For coved base and cap use angle pieces
designed to fit with stretcher shapes.
e. Overall sheet dimension: 322 by 322 mm.
F. Accessories: Provide vitreous china accessories of type and size indicated, suitable for installing by
same method as adjoining wall tile.
EHAF – CO – 01/03 -3 - Section 09310

2.02 THRESHOLDS
A. General: Fabricate to sizes and profiles indicated or required to provide transition between adjacent floor
finishes.
B. Marble Thresholds: ASTM C 503, with a minimum abrasion resistance of 12 per ASTM C 1353 or
ASTM C 241 and with honed finish.
2.03 SETTING MATERIALS
A. Portland cement Mortar (Thickset) Installation Materials: ANSI A108.02.
B. Dry-Set Portland cement Mortar (Thin Set): ANSI A118.1.

Drawings
3. For wall applications, provide non sagging mortar.
C. Latex-Portland Cement Mortar (Thin Set): ANSI A118.4.

Drawings.
3. Prepackaged, dry-mortar mix to which only water must be added.
4. Prepackaged, dry-mortar mix combined with liquid-latex additive.
5. For wall applications, provide nonsagging mortar.
D. EGP (Exterior Glue Plywood) Latex-Portland Cement Mortar (Thin Set): ANSI A118.11.

Drawings.
3. Prepackaged, dry-mortar mix to which only water must be added.
4. Prepackaged, dry-mortar mix combined with liquid-latex additive.
E. Water-Cleanable, Tile-Setting Epoxy: ANSI A118.3, with a VOC content of 65 g/L or less when calculated
according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

Drawings.
F. Organic Adhesive: ANSI A136.1, Type I, with a VOC content of 65 g/L or less when calculated according
to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
EHAF – CO – 01/03 -4 - Section 09310

Drawings.
2.04 GROUT MATERIALS
A. Sand-Portland Cement Grout: ANSI A108.10.
B. Standard Cement Grout: ANSI A118.6.

Drawings.
C. Polymer-Modified Tile Grout: ANSI A118.7.

Drawings.
3. Polymer Type: Dry, redispersible form, prepackaged with other dry ingredients.
4. Polymer Type: Liquid-latex form for addition to prepackaged dry-grout mix.
D. Water-Cleanable Epoxy Grout: ANSI A118.3.

Drawings.
E. Grout for Pregrouted Tile Sheets: Same product used in factory to pregrout tile sheets.
2.05 ELASTOMERIC SEALANTS
A. General: Provide sealants, primers, backer rods, and other sealant accessories that comply with the
following requirements and with the applicable requirements in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants."
1. Use sealants that have a VOC content of 250 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59,
B. One-Part, Mildew-Resistant Silicone Sealant: ASTM C 920; Type S; Grade NS; Class 25; Uses NT, G, A,
and, as applicable to nonporous joint substrates indicated, O; formulated with fungicide, intended for
sealing interior ceramic tile joints and other nonporous substrates that are subject to in-service exposures
of high humidity and extreme temperatures.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide available products that may be
EHAF – CO – 01/03 -5 - Section 09310
C. Multipart, Pourable Urethane Sealant for Use T: ASTM C 920; Type M; Grade P; Class 25; Uses T, M, A,
and, as applicable to joint substrates indicated, O.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide available products that may be
A. Trowel able Underlayment's and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement-based

formulation provided or approved by manufacturer of tile-setting materials for installations indicated.
B. Metal Edge Strips: Angle or L-shape, half-hard brass, white zinc alloy, nickel silver or stainless steel,
according to ASTM A 666, 300 Series, exposed-edge material.
C. Grout Sealer: Manufacturer's standard, silicone product for sealing grout joints and that does not change
color or appearance of grout.
1. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide available products that may be incorporated into
the Work.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions where tile will be installed, with Installer present, for
compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of
installed tile.
1. Verify that substrates for setting tile are firm, dry, clean, and free of coatings that are incompatible
with tile-setting materials including curing compounds and other substances that contain soap,
wax, oil, or silicone; and comply with flatness tolerances required by ANSI A108.01 for installations
indicated.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in concrete substrates for tile floors installed with adhesives or thin-set
mortar with trowelable leveling and patching compound specifically recommended by tile-setting material
manufacturer.
B. Where indicated, prepare substrates to receive waterproofing by applying a reinforced mortar bed that
complies with ANSI A108.1A and is sloped 1:50 toward drains.
C. Blending: For tile exhibiting color variations, use factory blended tile or blend tiles at Project site before
installing.
EHAF – CO – 01/03 -6 - Section 09310

D. Field-Applied Temporary Protective Coating: If indicated under tile type or needed to prevent grout from
staining or adhering to exposed tile surfaces, precoat them with continuous film of temporary protective
coating, taking care not to coat unexposed tile surfaces.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with TCA's "Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation" for TCA installation methods specified in tile
installation schedules. Comply with parts of the ANSI A108 Series "Specifications for Installation of
Ceramic Tile" that are referenced in TCA installation methods, specified in tile installation schedules,
and apply to types of setting and grouting materials used.
1. For the following installations, follow procedures in the ANSI A108 Series of tile installation
standards for providing 95 percent mortar coverage:
a. Exterior tile floors.

b. Tile floors in wet areas.
c. Tile swimming pool decks.
d. Tile floors in laundries.
e. Tile floors composed of tiles 200 by 200 mm or larger.
f. Tile floors composed of rib-backed tiles.
B. Extend tile work into recesses and under or behind equipment and fixtures to form complete covering
without interruptions unless otherwise indicated. Terminate work neatly at obstructions, edges, and
corners without disrupting pattern or joint alignments.
C. Accurately form intersections and returns. Perform cutting and drilling of tile without marring visible
surfaces. Carefully grind cut edges of tile abutting trim, finish, or built-in items for straight aligned joints.
Fit tile closely to electrical outlets, piping, fixtures, and other penetrations so plates, collars, or covers
overlap tile.
D. Jointing Pattern: Lay tile in grid pattern unless otherwise indicated. Lay out tile work and center tile fields
in both directions in each space or on each wall area. Lay out tile work to minimize the use of pieces that
are less than half of a tile. Provide uniform joint widths unless otherwise indicated.
E. Joint Widths: Unless otherwise indicated, install tile with the following joint widths:
1. Ceramic Mosaic Tile: 1.6 mm.

2. Quarry Tile: 6.35 mm.
3. Paver Tile: 6.35 mm.
4. Glazed Wall Tile: 1.6 mm.
5. Decorative Thin Wall Tile: 1.6 mm.
F. Lay out tile wainscots to dimensions indicated or to next full tile beyond dimensions indicated.
G. Expansion Joints: Provide expansion joints and other sealant-filled joints, including control, contraction,
and isolation joints, where indicated. Form joints during installation of setting materials, mortar beds,
and tile. Do not saw-cut joints after installing tiles.
1. Where joints occur in concrete substrates, locate joints in tile surfaces directly above them.
EHAF – CO – 01/03 -7 - Section 09310

2. Prepare joints and apply sealants to comply with requirements in Division 7 Section "Joint
Sealants."
H. Stone Thresholds: Install stone thresholds in same type of setting bed as adjacent floor unless otherwise
indicated.
1. At locations where mortar bed (thickset) would otherwise be exposed above adjacent floor finishes,
set thresholds in latex-portland cement mortar (thin set).
I. Metal Edge Strips: Install [at locations indicated] [where exposed edge of tile flooring meets carpet,
wood, or other flooring that finishes flush with top of tile] [where exposed edge of tile flooring meets
carpet, wood, or other flooring that finishes flush with or below top of tile and no threshold is indicated].
J. Grout Sealer: Apply grout sealer to cementitious grout joints in tile floors according to grout-sealer
manufacturer's written instructions. As soon as grout sealer has penetrated grout joints, remove excess
sealer and sealer from tile faces by wiping with soft cloth.
K. Install cementitious backer units and fiber-cement underlayment and treat joints according to
ANSI A108.11 and manufacturer's written instructions for type of application indicated. Use latex-
portland cement mortar for bonding material unless otherwise directed in manufacturer's written
instructions.
L. Install waterproofing to comply with ANSI A108.13 and manufacturer's written instructions to produce
waterproof membrane of uniform thickness and bonded securely to substrate.
M. Install crack isolation membrane to comply with ANSI A108.17 and manufacturer's written instructions to
produce membrane of uniform thickness and bonded securely to substrate.
END OF SECTION
EHAF – CO – 01/03 -8 - Section 09310

SECTION 09512
ACOUSTICAL GYPSUM CEILINGS
PART 1 GENERAL
Division-1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section.
A. This section covers the acoustical gypsum ceilings work as indicated on Drawings and specified
herein.
A. Gypsum board sheeting shall be performed in strict accordance with the specifications,
Drawings and the stipulations of the British Code of Practice (CP), the British Standard
Specifications (BS) and the specifications of the American Society of Testing Materials (ASTM)
as noted below.
AMERICAN SOCIETY OF TESTING AND MATERIALS.

ASTM NO
C11 Terminology Relating to Gypsum and related Building Materials and Systems
C 79 Specifications for Gypsum Sheating Board
C635 Manufacture, Performance, and Testing of Metal Suspension System for
Acoustical Tile and Lay-in Panel Ceilings
C636 Installation of Metal Ceiling Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay-in
Panels
C 645 Non-Load bearing Steel Studs, Runners etc.. for Screw application of Gypsum
Board.
C 646 Screws for the Application of Gypsum Board to Steel Studs
C 754 Installation of Steel Framing to Receive Screw Attached Gypsum Wallboard.
C 840 Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board
C841 Installation of Interior Lathing and Furring
C954 Steel Drill Screws for the Application of Gypsum Panel Products or Metal
Plaster Bases to Steel Studs from 0.033 in. (0.84 mm) to 0.112 in. (2.84 mm)
in Thickness
C1002 Steel Drill Screws for the Application of Gypsum Panel Products or Metal
Plaster Bases
A123 Zinc (Hot-dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products
A653/A653M Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy Coated
(Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process
BRITISH STANDARD SPECIFICATION

BS.NO.
1230 Gypsum Plasterboard
EHAF – CO – 01/03 -1 - Section 09512

May 2012 - Rev.(0) Acoustical Gypsum Ceilings
1.04 RELATED SECTIONS.
A. The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section.
05500 Miscellaneous Metals

07900 Joint Sealants
09900 Painting
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of the Contract and Division –1 Specification
Sections :
1. Product data: Signed by manufacturers for each type of product specified of gypsum
board components certifying that their products comply with specified requirements.
2. Shop drawings: showing locations and complete installations of controls and expansion
joints and including plans, Sections, details of components and attachments to other units
of work.
3. Samples: in triplicate 50 X 50 cm of all gypsum board in each manufacturer’s texture
including tape, studs, access panels, grilles, etc.
4. 500 mm long of steel studs, hat-shaped furring etc.
5. Material Test: Reports from qualified testing laboratory indicating test results relative to
compliance of gypsum board with specified requirement.
6. Test Results: Fire rating test designation, each fire rating required for each assembly.
7. Installation and maintenance instructions
1.06 QUALIFICATION OF INSTALLERS
A. Acoustical ceilings work shall be performed by an installer thoroughly experienced in the

installation of the herein specified work. The Contractor shall submit in writing the qualifications
and a list of previous work performed by the proposed installer for review and approval of the
Consultant.
B. Fire-Resistance Ratings:
Where indicated, provide materials and construction which are identical to those of assemblies
whose fire resistance rating has been determined per ASTM E 119 by a testing laboratory
acceptable to the Consultant.
C. Single Source Responsibility
1. Obtain each type of gypsum board and related joint treatment materials from a single
manufacturer.
2. Obtain steel framing members for gypsum board assemblies from a single manufacturer.
D. Mockup
Construct a mockup of at least 9.0 m2 in surface area to demonstrate aesthetic effects of
finishes, qualities of materials and execution.
E. Simulate finished lighting conditions for review of inplace unit of Work.
EHAF – CO – 01/03 -2 - Section 09512

A. Deliver acoustical ceiling units to site in original, unopened packages and store them in a fully
enclosed space where they will be protected against damage from moisture, direct sunlight,
surface contamination or other causes.
B. Before installing acoustical ceiling units, permit them to reach room temperature and stabilised
moisture content.
C. Handle acoustical ceiling units carefully to avoid chipping edges or damaging units in any way.
D. Do not bend or otherwise damage metal corner beads and trim.
A. Establish and maintain environmental conditions for application and finishing gypsum board to
comply with ASTM C 840 and with gypsum board manufacturer’s recommendations.
B. Minimum Room Temperatures

For adhesive attachment and finishing of gypsum board maintain a uniform temperature of not
less than 10 °C in the structure at least for 48 hours prior to, during and following the application
and continuously there after until drying is complete.
C. Ventilation
Ventilate building spaces to remove water not required for drying joint treatment materials.
Avoid drafts, sunlight, hot weather to prevent materials from drying too rapidly.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 SUSPENSION SYSTEM
A. Direct hung grid suspension system composed of main beams and cross furring members that
interlock to form a modular supporting network.
B. Refer to metal studs, runners and furring which serve as a base to receive gypsum board, steel
framing shall be light gage, non-load bearing complying with ASTM C 645, manufactured from
cold rolled sheet with a minimum thickness of 0.8 mm before application of protective coating.
C. Studs, runners, etc., shall have a protective coating to prevent corrosion in normal use.
D. Steel Studs and Runners
U shape, with flange edges of studs bent back 90 °C and doubled over to form 10 mm wide
minimum lip (return) minimum width of flanges shall be 35 mm and complying with minimum
thickness of base (uncoated) metal.
E. Furring Channels
20 mm deep adjustable, fabricated from cold rolled steel corrosion resistant-steel sheet, of 1.5
mm minimum thickness of base (uncoated) metal and 12 mm wide flange.
F. Fasteners
Provide fasteners of type, material, size, corrosion resistance, holding power and other
properties required to fasten steel framing and furring members complying with the
recommendations of gypsum boards manufacturers for applications indicated.
EHAF – CO – 01/03 -3 - Section 09512

G. Use screw to fasten gypsum board to steel members, they shall be straight, neatly formed free
of defects and deformations.
H. Wire Hangers
Zinc-coating, soft temper 4.0 mm diameter.
2.02 GYPSUM BOARD
A. Provide gypsum board which complies with ASTM C 79, in maximum length available to
minimize end to end joints. Free from any cracks and imperfections with edge and ends straight
and solid, square or V-tongue and groove gypsum board must be one of the types indicated on
Drawings.
1. Regular
2. (Special – fire resistant) shall be a gypsum sheating that provides at least 1hour fire resistance
rating for board 12.5 mm thick.
3. Width not less than 1.20 m.
B. Edges shall be tapered a featured for prefilling.
C. Thickness
Provide gypsum board in thicknesses indicated on Drawings or if not otherwise indicated, in

12.5 mm to comply with ASTM C 840 for application system and support spacing indicated. The
permissible variations in the nominal thickness shall not exceed + 0.8 mm.
D. Plasterboard
Aerated gypsum core plasterboard to BS 1230: Part 1, classification type 1, with exposed
surface suitable for decoration and tepered edges for smooth seamless jointing.
E. Water proofing Plasterboard
Gypsum plasterboard to BS 1230: Part 1, classification type 3 and 4, with silicone additive water
protection and water repellent paper liners with exposed surface suitable for decoration and
tepered edges for smooth seamless jointing.
F. Fire resistant Plasterboard
1. Gypsum plasterboard with glass fiber and additives in core to improve fire resistant to BS
1230: Part 1, classification type 5 (gypsum wallboard F), and tested to BS 476: Parts 6 and
7, with exposed surface suitable for decoration and tepered edges for smooth seamless
jointing.
2. Shall be a gypsum sheating that provides at least 1 hour fire resistance rating for board 12.5
mm thick.
EHAF – CO – 01/03 -4 - Section 09512

2.03 Joint Treatment Materials
A. General
Provide joint treatment materials complying with recommendations of manufacturer of both

gypsum board and joint treatment materials for the application indicated.
B. Joint Tape
Perforated, cross laminated, tapered edge, minimum 53 mm wide shall be of reinforced paper or
special tape with compatible joint compound as recommended by the manufacturer of gypsum
board.
C. Setting- Type Joint Compounds
1. Factory packaged, job-mixed, chemical hardening powder products formulated for uses
indicated. Use formulation recommended for this purpose that shall develop greatest bond
strength and crack resistance and is compatible with other joint compounds applied over it,
shall comply with BS 8212 with respect to shrinkage and consistency.
2. Ready-mixed, factory mixed product for all purpose compound formulated for embedding
tape, for first coat over fasteners and finishing compound and shall be compatible with the
tape and the substrate.
2.04 Miscellaneous Materials
A. General
Provide auxiliary materials for gypsum boards construction which comply with referenced
standards and the recommendations of the manufacturer of the gypsum board.
B. Fastening Adhesive for Metal
Special adhesive recommended for laminating gypsum boards to steel framing.
C. Gypsum Board Screws
Steel self-drilling and self-tapping screw specially designed for the screw application of gypsum
board to steel framing and complying with ASTM C 646
D. Acoustical Sealant
Manufacturer’s standard nondrying nonhardening, nonskining, nonstaining, gunnable, synthetic

rubber sealant recommended for sealing interior concealed joints to reduce transmission of
airborne sound.
E. Air Pressure Sealant
Air Pressure Sealant to be applied to perimeter junctions with walls, floors, ceiling, air gaps
around openings and other potential leakage points including framing members and around fire
stops, applied as a continous beads.
EHAF – CO – 01/03 -5 - Section 09512

2.05 Access Door, Recessed Panel
A. Door Panel:
1. Form of 1.2 mm (0.0478 inch) thick steel sheet to form a 25 mm (one inch) deep recessed
pan to accommodate the installation of acoustical units or other materials where shown in
walls and ceiling.
2. Reinforce as required to prevent sagging.

B. Frame
1. Form of 1.5 mm thick steel sheet of depth and configuration to suit installation in suspension
system of ceiling or wall framing.
2. Extend sides of frame to protect edge of acoustical units when panel is in open position.
3. Provide shims, bushings, clips and other devices necessary for installation.
C. Hinge
Continuous steel hinge with stainless steel pin or concealed hinge.
D. Lock
1. Flush screwdriver operated cam lock.
2. Provide sleeve of plastic or stainless steel grommet to protect hole made in acoustical unit for
screwdriver access to lock.
2.06 Noise Control
A. Acoustical materials shall have sound absorption coefficient, according to DIN 4109, DIN 52210
and DIN 52212, ISO 354.
2.07 Maintenance Materials
A. Spare acoustical tile in the quantity of 5 percent of that installed shall be provided. Tile shall be
provided in the manufacturer’s original unopened cartons and shall be suitably identified.
Part 3 EXECUTIONS
3.01 General
A. Acoustical ceilings including the suspension shall be installed in accordance with the approved
shop drawings, manufacturer’s detailed installation instructions, and as specified hereinafter.
B. Acoustical material shall not be used as support for or carry loading of additional insulation
recessed lighting fixtures, etc.
3.02 Conditions at Building
A. All mechanical work, electrical work, and other work above the ceiling line shall be completed,
inspected, and approved prior to the start of acoustical work. Acoustical materials shall be
installed only when temperatures and humidity conditions closely approximate the interior
conditions at the building that will exist when the building is occupied.
EHAF – CO – 01/03 -6 - Section 09512

3.03 Items Embedded in Other Construction
A. Items which are to be embedded in other construction, such as hanger inserts, embedded in
cast-in-place concrete shall be delivered to the site in time to be installed before the start of
cast-in-place concrete operations. Placing locations and installation instructions shall be
provided for the installation of items embedded in other construction.
3.04 Suspended Ceiling (General)
A. When acoustic tiles are to be mounted forming a suspended ceiling, standard channels and
main runners and accessories shall be used, and shall be prefinished exposed grid system or
concealed grid system with firerated hold down clips. Additional grid reinforcement shall be used
as recommended by the manufacturer for more than 2.0 m hanging height.
B. Manufacturer’s recommendations for installation, governing regulations, fire- resistance rating

requirements and industry standards applicable to work shall be strictly followed.
3.05 Installing Furred and Suspended Ceilings or Soffits
A. Install furred and suspended ceilings or soffits in accordance with ASTM C754 or ASTM C841
except as otherwise specified or shown for screw attached gypsum board ceilings and for
plaster ceilings or soffits.
1. Space framing at 400 mm centers for metal lath anchorage.
2. Space framing at 600 mm centers for gypsum board anchorage.
3.06 New exposed concrete slabs:

A. Use metal inserts required for attachment and support of hangers or hanger wires with tied wire
loops for embedding in concrete.
B. Suspended ceilings under concrete rib construction shall have runner channels at right angles to
ribs and be supported from ribs with hangers at ends and at 1200 mm maximum intervals along
channels. Stagger hangers at alternate channels.
3.07 Concrete slabs on steel decking composite construction:
A. Use pull down tabs when available.

B. Use power activated fasteners when direct attachment to structural framing can not be accomplished.
C. Where bar joists or beams are more than 1200 apart, provide intermediate hangers so that spacing
between supports does not exceed 1200 mm. Use clips, bolts, or wire ties for direct attachment to steel
framing.
D. Existing concrete construction exposed or concrete on steel decking:
1. Use power actuated fasteners either eye pin, threaded studs or drive pins for type of
hanger attachment required.
2. Install fasteners at approximate mid height of concrete beams or joists. Do not install in
bottom of beams or joists.
E. Steel decking without concrete topping:
1. Do not fasten to steel decking 0.76 mm or thinner.

2. Toggle bolt to decking 0.9 mm or thicker only where anchorage to steel framing is not
possible.
EHAF – CO – 01/03 -7 - Section 09512

F. Installing suspended ceiling system for gypsum board (ASTM C635 Option):
1. Install only for ceilings to receive screw attached gypsum board.
2. Install in accordance with ASTM C636.
a. Install main runners spaced 1200 mm on center.
b. Install 1200 mm tees not over 600 mm on center; locate for edge support of gypsum board.
c. Install wall track channel at perimeter.
G. Installing Ceiling Bracing System:

Brace suspended ceiling or soffit framing in seismic areas in accordance with ASTM E580.
3.08 Installation of acoustical Ceilings
E. 3.08.1 Gypsum Board Application and Finishing Standard
A. Locate exposed end-butt joints as far from center of ceilings as possible and stagger not less
than 600 mm in alternate courses of board.
B. Install ceiling boards across framing in manner which minimizes the number of end butt joints or
avoids them entirely where possible.
C. Install exposed gypsum board with face side out. Do not install imperfect, damaged or damp
boards. Butt boards together for a light contact at edges and ends with not more than 1.5 mm
open space between boards. Do not force into place.
D. Acoustical units shall be so arranged that acoustical units less than one half width do not occur,
unless otherwise indicated or required to suit construction conditions.
E. Acoustical tile shall be installed so that joint is parallel with room axes, in both directions, straight
and in alignment.
F. In small rooms, make borders less than 150 mm wide, and in large rooms make borders less
than 800mm with but over 150 mm wide.
G. Locate either edge or end joints over supports, or provide intermediate supports or gypsum
board back blocking behind end joints. Position boards so that like edges abut, tapered edges
against tapered edges and mill cut or field cut ends against mill cut or field cut ends. Do not
place tapered edges against cut edges or ends.
H. Attach gypsum board to supplementary framing and blocking provided for additional support at
openings and cutouts.
I. Fit gypsum board around ducts, pipes, and conduits.
J. Fasten with corrosion resistant screw. Space screws or fasteners a maximum of 200 mm.
3.09 Finishing of Gypsum Board

A. Apply joint treatment at gypsum board joints (both directions), penetrations, fastener heads,
surface defects and elsewhere as required to prepare work for decoration.
B. Prefill open joints, rounded or bevelled edges and damaged areas, if any, using setting- type
joint compound.
C. Apply joint tape at joints between gypsum boards.
D. Finish interior gypsum board by applying the following joint compounds in 3 coats (not including
prefill of openings in base ),and sand between coats and after last coat:
EHAF – CO – 01/03 -8 - Section 09512

1. Embedding and first Coat: Setting-type joint compound.

2. Fill (Second) Coat: Setting-type joint compound.
3. Finish (third) Coat: Ready-mix drying type all
purpose or topping compound.
E. Prepare and apply primer to gypsum panels, apply primer only to surfaces are clean, dry and
smooth.
F. Painting of gypsum soffit board after finish coat has dried is specified in Division-9 Section 09900
“Painting”
3.10 Adjusts and Clean
A. Clean exposed surfaces of acoustical ceilings, and remove foreign matter and debris, comply
with manufacturer’s instruction for cleaning. Remove and replace work, which cannot be
successfully cleaned and repaired to permanently evidence of damage.
B. Clean up of all masking materials, equipment and debris from work area is the responsibility of
the Contractor.
END OF SECTION
EHAF – CO – 01/03 -9 - Section 09512

SECTION 09638
STONE FLOORING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section includes the following applications of dimension stone:
1. Exterior paving.
2. Interior flooring.
3. Stair treads and risers.
4. Thresholds.
1. Division 2 Section "Unit Pavers" for rough stone pavers.

2. Division 9 Section "Dimension Stone Tile" for stone tile used as flooring.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each variety of stone and for each type of product indicated.
B. LEED Submittal:
1. Product Data for Credit EQ 4.1: For adhesives, including printed statement of VOC content.
C. Shop Drawings: Include plans, sections, details, and attachments to other work.
D. Samples:
1. For each stone type indicated. Two or more Samples in each set and show the full range of variations
in appearance characteristics expected in completed Work.
2. For each color of grout or pointing mortar required.
E. Maintenance data.
A. Fabricator Qualifications: A qualified fabricator that custom fabricates stone.
B. Mockups: Build mockups to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and
execution.
1. Build mockup of typical interior floor area as shown on Drawings about 2400 mm square.
EHAF – CO – 01/03 -1 - Section 09638

May 2012, Rev. (0) Stone Flooring
2. Build mockup of typical exterior pavement area as shown on Drawings2400 mm) square.
Completion.
A. Cold-Weather Requirements for Interior Stone Flooring:
1. Do not set stone when air or material temperature is below 10 deg C.

2. Maintain temperature at 10 deg C or above in installation areas during installation and for 7 days
after completion.
B. Cold-Weather Requirements for Exterior Stone Paving: Comply with cold-weather construction
requirements contained in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602.
C. Hot-Weather Requirements for Exterior Stone Paving: Comply with hot-weather construction
requirements contained in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 and with the following:
1. Maintain temperature of materials and substrates below 38 deg C.

2. When the ambient temperature exceeds 32 deg C, fog spray installed stone paving until damp at
least 3 times a day until paving is 3 days old.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 STONE
A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide stone of varieties and from sources
complying with Division 4 Section "Dimension Stone Cladding."
2.02 GRANITE
A. Granite: Comply with ASTM C 615.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings.
B. Finish: Polished, Honed or Thermal As indicated on drawings.
2.03 LIMESTONE
A. Limestone: Comply with ASTM C 568.

2. Stone Abrasion Resistance: Minimum value of 10 based on testing according to ASTM C 241 or
ASTM C 1353.
B. Finish: Smooth, Sand rubbed, Chat sawed or Shot sawed As indicated on drawings
EHAF – CO – 01/03 -2 - Section 09638

2.04 MARBLE
A. Marble: Comply with ASTM C 503.
2. Stone Abrasion Resistance: Minimum value of 10 based on testing according to ASTM C 241 or
ASTM C 1353.
B. Finish: Polished or Honed As indicated on drawings.
2.05 QUARTZ-BASED STONE
A. Quartz-Based Stone: Comply with ASTM C 616.
2. Stone Abrasion Resistance: Minimum value of 10, based on testing according to ASTM C 241 or
ASTM C 1353.
B. Finish: Sand rubbed, Natural cleft or Thermal As indicated on drawings.
2.06 SLATE
A. Slate: Comply with ASTM C 629, Classification I Exterior and II Interior, with a fine, even grain and
unfading color, from clear, sound stock.
2. Color: Black, Blue-black, Gray, Blue-gray, Green, Purple, Mottled purple and green or Red as per
indicated on drawings.
ASTM C 1353.
B. Finish: Honed, Sand rubbed or Natural cleft As indicated on drawings.
2.07 TRAVERTINE
A. Travertine: Comply with ASTM C 1527, Classification I Exterior and II Interior.

1. Products: to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings.
ASTM C 1353.
B. Cut: Vein cut.
C. Filling: Fill pores on faces of stone with cementitious filler.
EHAF – CO – 01/03 -3 - Section 09638

D. Finish: Polished or Honed as indicated on drawings.
A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or II. Provide natural color or white cement as required to produce
mortar color indicated.
1. Low-Alkali Cement: Not more than 0.60 percent total alkali when tested according to ASTM C 114.
B. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C 207, Type S.
C. Aggregate: ASTM C 144; except for joints narrower than 6 mm and pointing mortar, use aggregate
graded with 100 percent passing 1.18-mm sieve.
1. White Aggregates: Natural white sand or ground white stone.

2. Colored Aggregates: Natural-colored sand or ground marble, granite, or other durable stone; of
color necessary to produce required mortar color.
D. Mortar Pigments: Natural and synthetic iron oxides, compounded for use in mortar mixes. Use pigments
with a record of satisfactory performance in mortar and containing no carbon black.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated
into the Work .
E. Latex Additive: Manufacturer's standard water emulsion, serving as replacement for part or all of gaging
water, of type specifically recommended by latex-additive manufacturer for use with field-mixed portland
cement mortar bed, and not containing a retarder.

F. Thin-Set Mortar:
1. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide available manufacturers offering products that
may be incorporated into the Work.
2. Dry-Set Portland cement Mortar: ANSI A118.1.

3. Latex-Portland Cement Mortar: ANSI A118.4.
G. Water: Potable.
2.10 GROUT
A. Grout Colors: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
B. Sand-Portland Cement Grout: ANSI A108.10.
C. Standard Cement Grout: ANSI A118.6.
EHAF – CO – 01/03 -4 - Section 09638

1. Unsanded grout mixture for joints 3 mm and narrower.

2. Sanded grout mixture for joints wider than 3 mm.
D. Polymer Modified Cement Grout: ANSI A118.7.

2. Unsanded grout mix for joints 3 mm and narrower.

3. Sanded grout mix for joints wider than 3 mm.
2.11 ACCESSORIES
A. Water-Cleanable Epoxy Adhesive: ANSI A118.3, with a VOC content of 65 g/L or less when calculated
according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

B. Cleavage Membrane: Polyethylene sheeting, ASTM D 4397, 0.1 mm thick or unperforated asphalt felt,
ASTM D 226, Type I (No. 15).
C. Reinforcing Wire: Galvanized, welded, 1.57-mm diameter wire; 50-by-50-mm mesh; comply with
ASTM A 185 and ASTM A 82 except for minimum wire size.
D. Divider Strips and Edging: Metal or combination of metal and PVC or neoprene base, designed
specifically for flooring applications, in longest lengths available.
E. Cork Joint Filler: Preformed strips complying with ASTM D 1752, Type II.
F. Cleaner: Stone cleaner specifically formulated for stone types, finishes, and applications indicated, as
recommended by stone producer and, if a sealer is specified, by sealer manufacturer. Do not use
cleaning compounds containing acids, caustics, harsh fillers, or abrasives.
G. Floor Sealer: Colorless, slip- and stain-resistant sealer that does not affect color or physical properties of
stone surfaces, as recommended by stone producer for application indicated.

2.12 MORTAR AND GROUT MIXES
A. Mortar: Comply with referenced standards and with manufacturers' written instructions to produce mortar
of uniform quality and with optimum performance characteristics.
1. Do not use admixtures unless otherwise indicated. Do not use calcium chloride.
2. Mixing Pointing Mortar: Thoroughly mix cementitious and aggregate materials together before
adding any water. Add only enough water to produce a damp, unworkable mix that will retain its
form when pressed into a ball. Maintain mortar in this dampened condition for one to two hours.
EHAF – CO – 01/03 -5 - Section 09638

Add remaining water in small portions until mortar reaches desired consistency. Use mortar within
30 minutes of final mixing; do not retemper or use partially hardened material.
B. Portland Cement-Lime Setting Mortar: ASTM C 270, Proportion Specification,
C. Latex-Modified Portland Cement Setting Mortar: Proportion and mix portland cement, aggregate, and
latex additive to comply with latex-additive manufacturer's written instructions and to produce a stiff
mixture with a moist surface when bed is ready to receive stone.
D. Mortar-Bed Bond Coat: Mix neat cement and water to a creamy consistency.
E. Latex-Modified Portland Cement Bond Coat: Proportion and mix portland cement, aggregate, and latex
additive to comply with latex-additive manufacturer's written instructions.
F. Cement-Paste Bond Coat: Mix either neat cement or cement and sand with water to a consistency similar
to that of thick cream.
G. Pointing Mortar: Comply with requirements indicated above for setting mortar, including type and the
following:
1. Pigmented Pointing Mortar: Select and proportion pigments with other ingredients to produce color
required. Do not exceed pigment-to-cement ratio of 1:10, by weight.
2. Colored-Aggregate Pointing Mortar: Produce color required by combining colored aggregates with
portland cement of selected color.
H. Joint Grout: Comply with mixing requirements in referenced ANSI standards and with manufacturer's
written instructions.
2.13 STONE FABRICATION
A. Select stone for intended use to prevent fabricated units from containing cracks, seams, and starts that
could impair structural integrity or function.
B. Fabricate stone to comply with requirements indicated and with the following references:
1. For granite, comply with recommendations in NBGQA's "Specifications for Architectural Granite."
2. For limestone, comply with recommendations in ILI's "Indiana Limestone Handbook."
3. For marble, comply with recommendations in MIA's "Dimension Stone - Design Manual."
4. For stone not otherwise indicated, comply with recommendations in MIA's "Dimension Stone -
Design Manual."
C. Cut stone to produce pieces of thickness, size, and shape indicated, including details on Drawings and
Shop Drawings.
1. Stone Edges: As indicated.
D. Pattern Arrangement: Fabricate and arrange stone units with veining and other natural markings to
comply with the following requirements:
1. Cut stone from one block or contiguous, matched blocks in which natural markings occur.
EHAF – CO – 01/03 -6 - Section 09638

2. Arrange units with veining as indicated on Drawings.

3. Arrange units in blend pattern.
E. Fabricate stone thresholds in sizes and profiles as indicated or required to provide transition between
adjacent floor finishes.
F. Fabricate stone stair treads in sizes and profiles indicated. Cut grooves about 3 mm wide by 1.5 mm deep
in stair treads as indicated.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
A. Vacuum clean or Sweep concrete substrates to remove dirt, dust, debris, and loose particles.
B. Remove substances from concrete substrates that could impair mortar bond.
C. Clean dirty or stained stone surfaces by thoroughly scrubbing with fiber brushes and then drenching with
clear water. Use only mild cleaning compounds.
A. Do necessary field cutting as stone is set. Cut lines straight and true and finish field-cut edges to match
shop-cut edges.
1. Use power saws with diamond blades to cut stone except for stone that is specified to have rough-
split edges.
B. Set stone to comply with Drawings and Shop Drawings.
C. Scribe and field-cut stone as necessary to fit at obstructions. Produce neat joints of size specified or
indicated.
D. Expansion- and Control-Joint Installation: Locate and install according to Drawings and Shop Drawings.
3.03 INSTALLATION TOLERANCES
A. Variation in Joint Width: Do not vary joint thickness more than 1.5 mm or 1/4 of nominal joint width,
whichever is less.
B. Variation in Surface Plane: Do not exceed 6 mm in 6 m maximum from level or slope indicated.
C. Variation in Plane between Adjacent Units (Lipping): Do not exceed 0.8-mm difference between planes of
adjacent units.
EHAF – CO – 01/03 -7 - Section 09638

3.04 INSTALLATION OF STONE DIRECTLY OVER CONCRETE
A. Saturate concrete with clean water several hours before placing setting bed. Remove surface water about
one hour before placing setting bed.
B. Apply mortar-bed bond coat to damp concrete and broom to provide an even coating that completely
covers the concrete. Do not exceed 1.5-mm thickness. Limit area of mortar-bed bond coat to avoid its
drying out before placing setting bed.
C. Apply mortar bed immediately after applying mortar-bed bond coat. Spread, tamp, and screed to uniform
thickness at elevations required for setting stone to finished elevations indicated.
D. Mix and place only that amount of mortar bed that can be covered with stone before initial set. Cut back,
bevel edge, and discard material that has reached initial set before stone can be placed.
E. Place stone before initial set of mortar occurs. Immediately before placing stone on setting bed, apply
uniform 1.5-mm thick bond coat to bed or to back of each stone unit.
F. Tamp and beat stone with a wooden block or rubber mallet to obtain full contact with setting bed and to
bring finished surfaces within indicated tolerances. Set each unit in a single operation before initial set of
mortar; do not return to areas already set and disturb stone for purposes of realigning finished surfaces or
adjusting joints.
G. Rake out joints to depth required to receive grout or pointing mortar as units are set.
H. Point joints after setting. Tool joints flat, uniform, and smooth, without visible voids.
3.05 INSTALLATION OF STONE OVER WATERPROOFING
A. Place membrane over substrates indicated to receive stone, lapped at least 100 mm at joints.
B. See Division 7 waterproofing Section for installation of waterproofing and protection board.
1. Provide cork joint filler at waterproofing that is turned up on vertical surfaces.
C. Place reinforcing wire fabric over [cleavage membrane] [waterproofing] [protection board], lapped at least
one full mesh at joints and supported so mesh becomes embedded in middle of setting bed. Hold edges
back from vertical surfaces about 1/2 inch (13 mm).
D. Place mortar bed over waterproofing or protection board with reinforcing wire fabric fully embedded in
middle of mortar bed. Spread, tamp, and screed to uniform thickness at elevations required for setting
stone to finished elevations indicated.
E. Mix and place only that amount of mortar bed that can be covered with stone before initial set. Cut back,
bevel edge, and discard material that has reached initial set before stone can be placed.
F. Place stone before initial set of mortar occurs. Immediately before placing stone on setting bed, apply
uniform 1.5-mm thick bond coat to bed or to back of each stone unit.
EHAF – CO – 01/03 -8 - Section 09638

G. Tamp and beat stone with a wooden block or rubber mallet to obtain full contact with setting bed and to
bring finished surfaces within indicated tolerances. Set each unit in a single operation before initial set of
mortar; do not return to areas already set and disturb stone for purposes of realigning finished surfaces or
adjusting joints.
H. Rake out joints to depth required to receive grout or pointing mortar as units are set.
I. Point joints after setting. Tool joints flat, uniform, and smooth, without visible voids.
3.06 STONE THRESHOLD INSTALLATION
A. At locations adjacent to stone flooring, install stone thresholds in same type of setting bed as abutting
stone flooring unless otherwise indicated.
1. Set thresholds in thin-set, latex-portland cement mortar to comply with ANSI A108.5 at locations
where mortar bed would otherwise be exposed above other adjacent paving and flooring.
B. At locations not adjacent to stone flooring, install stone thresholds in thin-set, latex-portland cement
mortar to comply with ANSI A108.5, water-cleanable epoxy adhesive to comply with ANSI A108.4.
3.07 STONE STAIR TREAD AND RISER INSTALLATION
A. Install stone stair treads and risers to comply with "Installation of Stone Directly over Concrete" Article.
B. Install stone stair treads and risers in thin-set, latex-Portland cement mortar to comply with ANSI A108.5
or water-cleanable epoxy adhesive to comply with ANSI A108.4.
3.08 GROUTING
A. Grout stone joints to comply with ANSI A108.10 and with manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Do not use sanded grout for polished stone.

2. Grout joints as soon as possible after initial set of setting bed. Force grout into joints, taking care
not to smear grout on adjoining stone and other surfaces. After initial set of grout, finish joints by
tooling to produce a slightly concave polished joint, free of drying cracks.
3. Cure grout by maintaining in a damp condition for seven days except as otherwise recommended
by manufacturer.
A. In-Progress Cleaning: Clean stonework as work progresses. Remove mortar fins and smears before
tooling joints.
B. Clean stonework after setting and grouting are complete. Use procedures recommended by stone
fabricator for types of application.
C. Apply sealer to cleaned stonework according to sealer manufacturer's written instructions.
EHAF – CO – 01/03 -9 - Section 09638

D. Prohibit traffic from installed stone for a minimum of 72 hours.
E. Protect installed stonework during construction with non staining kraft paper. Where adjoining areas
require construction work access, cover stonework with a minimum of 20-mm untreated plywood over non
staining kraft paper.
END OF SECTION
EHAF – CO – 01/03 -10 - Section 09638

New Adminstartion Building Dr.Ezz El-Din Fahmy
SECTION 09677
VINYL FLOORING
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including general and Special Conditions and division-1
specification sections, apply to work of this section.
A. This section covers the vinyl flooring as indicated on Drawings and specified herein and shall include
1. Homogeneous Permanent Conductive PVC Vinyl.
2. Vinyl PVC Homogeneous Antibacterial Vinyl.
3. Heavy Duty Vinyl Tiles.
4. Heterogeneous Sheet Vinyl Flooring for sports areas
5. Resilient Skirting.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Submittals shall be made in accordance with Contract Requirements Section 3 Article 5, 15 & 17 and
shall include the following items:
1. Product Data for each type of product specified. Include data on physical characteristics,
durability; fade resistance, and flame-resistance characteristics.
2. Shop drawings and layout plans showing all jointing and number of sheets required for every
surface requiring vinyl.
3. Samples for initial selection in the form of manufacturer's color charts consisting of actual
sections of floor coverings and accessories showing the full range of colors and patterns
available for each type of floor covering indicated.
4. Product certificates, in lieu of laboratory test reports when permitted by Supervisor, signed by
manufacturer of floor coverings certifying that their products comply with specified
requirements.
A. Single source Responsibility: Obtain each color, type, and pattern of vinyl floor covering from a single
source with resources to provide products of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties
without delaying the work.
B. Fire test-Response Characteristics: Provide Vinyl Flooring with the following:
1. Critical radiant flux: fire-resistant class Bfl-s1 according to EN 13501(Class I, not less than 0.45
W/sq. cm according to ASTM E 648)
2. Optical smoke Density: 450 or less according to ASTM E 662.
C. Electrical Resistance: Provide all Tiles with average electrical resistance of 1 to 1000 megohms
between an electrode placed on the floor and a ground connection when tested according to ASTM F
150.
EHAF – CO – 01/03 -1 - Section 09677

May 2012, Rev. (0) Vinyl Flooring
A. Deliver floor coverings and installation accessories to project site in original manufacturer's unopened
cartons and containers each bearing names of product and manufacturer, project identification, and
shipping and handling instructions.
B. Store and handle floor covering and related materials to prevent deterioration or damage due to
moisture, temperature changes, contaminates, corrosion, breaking, chipping, or other causes.
C. Store Tiles upright.
1.06 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
A. Install floor coverings and accessories after other finishing operations, including painting, have been
completed.
B. Where demountable partitions and other items are indicated for installation on top of finished floor
coverings, install floor coverings before these items are installed.
C. Do not install floor coverings until the concrete has cured and is sufficiently dry to bond with
adhesives as determined by floor covering manufacturer's recommended bond and moisture test.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIAL
A. HETEROGENEOUS PVC VINYL PLANKS FOR SPORTS AREAS FLOORING

1. Products: Heterogeneous non-directional vinyl flooring.
2. Design based on Forbo flooring systems, (Allura Wood –w6007 - country rustic oak)
3. Approved Manufacturer’s:
a. Forbo,
b. Armstrong.
c. Gerflor Sports Flooring;
d. Tarkett Flooring.
4. Sheet Vinyl Floor Covering: ASTM F 1913,

a. Overall Thickness: 2.5 mm
b. Surface layer: 0.7 mm pure PVC
5. Installation Method: Adhered.
6. Seaming Method: Chemically bonded.
7. Traffic-Surface Texture: Smooth
8. Color and Pattern: Rustic oak wood finish 120x20 cm.
B. ACCESSORIES
1. Trowelable leveling and patching compounds: Latex-modified, Portland-cement-based

formulation provided or approved by floor covering manufacturer for applications indicated.
2. Welding Bead: Solid-strand product of floor covering manufacturer for heat-welding seams.
3. Color: As selected by consultant from floor covering manufacturer's full range of colors.
4. Chemical Bonding Compound: Product of floor covering manufacturer for chemically bonding
seams.
5. Static-Control Adhesive: Adhesive product of floor covering manufacturer providing
conductive continuity for floor covering system.
EHAF – CO – 01/03 -2 - Section 09677
6. Grounding Strips: Metal or fabric grounding strips provided or approved by floor covering
manufacturer.
PART 3 EXECUTIONS
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas where installation of floor covering will occur, with installer present, to verify that
substrates and conditions are satisfactory for floor covering installation and comply with floor
covering manufacturer's requirements and those specified in this section.
B. Prior to setting all sheets inspects surfaces and arrange for the satisfactory correction of defects.
Grounds, bucks, outlet and receptacle boxes, rough plumbing and other fixtures and fittings shall be
in place, and trenches chases or other openings in walls properly closed.
C. Verify that all concrete slabs and subfloors are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, hardeners,
and other materials whose presence would interfere with bonding of adhesives.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Comply with manufacturer’s written instructions for surface preparation.

B. Use trowelable leveling and patching compound according to floor covering manufacturer's directions
for filling cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates.
C. Remove coatings, including curing compounds, and other substance that are incompatible with floor
covering adhesives and that contain soap, wax, and oil. Or silicone, by mechanical means, unless
otherwise indicated. Do not use solvents.
D. Remove protective film of oil or other coating from access flooring panels using method
recommended by access flooring manufacturer.
E. Broom or vacuum clean substrates to be covered by floor covering immediately before floor covering
installation. After cleaning, examine substrates for moisture, alkaline salts, carbonation, and dust.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. General: Comply with wall coverings manufacturer's written installation instructions applicable to
products and applications indicated, except where more stringent requirements apply.
B. Unroll Tiles floor coverings and allow them to stabilize before cutting and fitting.
C. Lay out floor Tiles to comply with the following:
1. Maintain uniformity of Tiles direction.
2. Arrange for a minimum number of seams and place them in inconspicuous
3. Avoid cross seams.
D. Scribe and cut floor covering to net fit vertical surfaces, permanent fixtures, and built-in furniture
including cabinets, pipes, outlets, edging, thresholds, and nosings.
E. Extend floor coverings into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, and similar openings.
F. Heat-welded Seams: Rout joints and heat weld with welding bead permanently fusing sections into a
completely seamless floor, Prepare, weld, and finish seams to produce a surface flush with adjoining
pieces of floor covering material.
G. Tiles floor coverings in both directions from center out to embed floor coverings in adhesive and
eliminate trapped air. At walls, door casings, and other locations where access by Tiles is impractical,
press floor coverings firmly in place with flat-bladed instrument.
EHAF – CO – 01/03 -3 - Section 09677

3.04 CLEANING-UP
A. Perform the following operations immediately after completing floor covering installation:
1. Remove visible adhesives and other surface blemishes using cleaner recommended by floor
covering manufacturer.
2. Sweep or vacuum floor thoroughly.
3. Do not wash floor until after time period recommended by floor covering manufacturer.
4. Damp-mop floor covering to remove marks and soil.
B. Do not move heavy and sharp objects directly over floor coverings. Place plywood or hardboard
panels over floor coverings and under objects while they are being moved.
C. Clean-up of all masking materials, equipment and debris from work area is the responsibility of the
Contractors.
END OF SECTION
EHAF – CO – 01/03 -4 - Section 09677

SECTION 09685
CARPET
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the contract, including General and Special Conditions and
Division 1 Specifications Sections, apply to this Section.
A. The Contractor shall supply and install Carpet tiles as specified per drawings at the rooms
indicated on finishing schedules and drawings. The Contractor also prepare floor surfaces to
receive the carpet. These surfaces shall have been previously trued and smoothed during
concrete works in accordance with the evenness shown below:
1. Evenness 5 mm under 2m rule in all directions
B. This Section includes the following:
1. Tufted patterned level cut tiles

2. Microtuft patterned level loop tile.
C. Related sections include the following:
1. Division 9 Section Resilient Wall Base and Accessories for resilient wall base and
accessories installed with carpet.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: for each type of product indicated. Include manufacturer’s written data on
physical characteristics, durability, and fade resistance. Include installation recommendations
for each type of substrate required.
B. Shop Drawings : Show the following:
1. Columns, doorways, enclose walls or partitions, built-in cabinets, and locations where
cutouts are required in carpet.
2. Carpet type, color, and dye lot.
3. Seam locations, types, and methods.
4. Type of installation.
5. Pattern type, repeat size, location, direction, and starting point.
6. Pile direction.
7. Type, color, and location of insets and borders.
8. Type, color, and location of edge, transition, and other accessory strips.
9. Transition details to other flooring materials.
C. Samples: For each color and texture required.
1. Carpet Tile: Full-size Sample.
EHAF – CO – 01/03 -1- Section 09685

May 2012 - Rev.(0) Carpet
2. Exposed Edge, Transition, and other Accessory Stripping: 12-inch- (300-mm-) long
Samples.
D. Product Schedule: Use same room and product designations indicated on Drawings and in
schedules.
E. Maintenance Data: For carpet to include in maintenance manuals specified in Division 1.

Include the following
1. Methods for maintaining carpet, including cleaning and stain-removal products and
procedures and manufacturer’s recommended maintenance schedule.
2. Precautions for cleaning materials and methods that could be detrimental to carpet.
A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who is certified by the Floor Covering Instillation
Board or who can demonstrate compliance with its certification program requirements.
B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide products with the critical radiant Flux classification
indicated in Part 2.
C. Product Options: Products and manufacturers named in Part 2 establish requirements for
product quality in terms of appearance, construction, and performance. Substitutions will not be
permitted.
D. Mockups: Before installing carpet, install mockups for each type of carpet installation required to
demonstrate aesthetic effects and qualities of materials and execution. Install mockups to
comply with the following requirements, using materials indicated for the completed Work:
1. Install mockups in the location and of the size indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by
Engineer.
2. Notify Engineer seven days in advance of dates and times when mockups will be
installed.
3. Demonstrate the proposed range of aesthetic effects and workmanship.
4. Obtain Engineer’s approval of mockups before starting work.
5. Maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for
judging the completed Work.
6. Remove mockups when directed.
7. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undamaged at time of
substantial completion.
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install carpet until wet work in spaces is complete and dry,
and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for
project when occupied for its intended use.
B. Do not install carpet over concrete slabs until slabs have cured and are sufficiently dry to bond
with adhesive and concrete slabs have pH range recommended by carpet manufacturer.
EHAF – CO – 01/03 -2- Section 09685
1.06 WARRANTY
A. General Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Article shall not deprive Owner of other
rights Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in
addition to, and run concurrent with, other warrant made by Contractor under requirements of
the Contract Documents.
B. Special Carpet Warranty: Written warranty, signed by carpet manufacturer agreeing to replace
carpet that does not comply with requirements or that fails within specified warranty period.
Warranty does not include deterioration or failure of carpet due to unusual traffic, failure of loss
of face fiber, edge raveling, snags, runs, and delimitation.
1. Warranty Period : 15 years from date of Taking over the project.
A. Furnish extra materials described below, before installation begins, that match products installed
and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing
contents.
B. Carpet: Full-width rolls equal to 2 percent of amount installed for each type indicated, but not
less than 8.3 m2.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MICROTUFT PATTERNED LEVEL LOOP CARPET TILES
A. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be

B. Basis of design: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following:
1. Interface Flor – Straightforward
i. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range

ii. Pattern: Match Architect's
C. Pile Material: 100 percent BCF solution dyed nylon contains pre consumer recycled content
D. Pile Characteristic: Level-loop Tile.
E. Pile Yarn Weight: 400g/m2 ±5%
F. Total Thickness: 4.8mm ±0.5mm
G. Total Weight: 4180g/m2 ±5%.
H. Gauge/Ends per 10cm: 5/64 - 50.4
EHAF – CO – 01/03 -3- Section 09685

I. Tuft / sq.m: 176.400±5%
J. Backing Type: Graphlex
K. Wear Classifications: Heavy Contract
L. Radiant Panel: (EN ISO 9239/1) CFI S1(EN ISO 13501)
M. Castor Chair Rating: ≥ 2.4 (EN 985)
N. Dimensional Stability: ≤ 0.2% (ISO 2551)
O. Vertical Electrical Resistance: 5x105 Ω - 2x1010 Ω

P P P P
P. Color Fastness – Light: 7 (ISO 105/B02)
2.02 TUFTED PATTERNED LEVEL CUT TILES
A. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be

B. Basis of design: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following:
2. Interface Flor – Accent Flannel
i. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range

ii. Pattern: Match Architect's
C. Pile Material: 100 percent Aquafil Alto Chroma solution dyed nylon
D. Pile Characteristic: Level-Cut Tile.
E. Pile Yarn Weight: 796g/m2 ±5%
F. Pile Height: 6.0mm ±0.3mm
G. Total Thickness: 8.0mm ±0.5mm
H. Total Weight: 4746 g/m2 ±5%.
I. Gauge/Ends per 10cm: 1/10 - 39.4
J. Tuft / sq.m: 159.570±5%
K. Backing Type: Graphlex
L. Wear Classifications: EN 1307 33 Heavy Contract
M. Radiant Panel: (EN ISO 9239/1) Euroclass CFI S1(EN ISO 13501)
N. Castor Chair Rating: ≥ 2.4 (EN 985)
O. Dimensional Stability: ≤ 0.2% (ISO 2551)
P. Color Fastness – Light: 6 (ISO 105/B02)
EHAF – CO – 01/03 -4- Section 09685

2.03 INSTALLATION ACCESSORIES
A. Trowelable leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, hydraulic-cement-based

formulation provided by or recommended by the following:
1. Carpet manufacturer.
B. Adhesives: Water-resistant, mildew-resistant, nonstaining type to suit products and subfloor

conditions indicated, that complies with flammability requirements for installed carpet and that is
recommended by the following:
C. Metal Edge Strips: Extruded aluminum with mill finish of width shown, of height required to
protect exposed edge of carpet, and of maximum lengths to minimize running joints.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions for compliance with requirements for maximum
moisture content, alkalinity range, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting carpet
performance. Verify that substrates and conditions are satisfactory for carpet installation and
comply with requirements specified.
B. Concrete Subfloors: Verify that concrete slabs comply with the following.
1. Slab substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, hardeners, and other
materials that may interfere with adhesive bond. Determine adhesion and dryness
characteristics by performing bond and moisture tests recommended by the following:
a. Carpet manufacturers
b. Subfloors are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Use trowelable leveling and patching compounds, according to manufacturer’s written

instructions, to fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates.
B. Remove coatings, including curing compounds, and other substances that are incompatible with
adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, without using solvents. Use mechanical
methods recommended in writing by the following:
C. Broom and vacuum clean substrates to be covered immediately before installing carpet. After
cleaning, examine substrates for moisture, alkaline salts, carbonation, or dust. Proceed with
installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
EHAF – CO – 01/03 -5- Section 09685

3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with carpet manufacturer’s written recommendations for direction of carpet; maintain
uniformity of carpet direction and lay of pile.
B. Do not bridge building expansion joints with carpet.
C. Cut and fit carpet to butt tightly to vertical surfaces, permanent fixtures, and built in furniture
including cabinets, pipes, outlets, edgings, thresholds, and nosing, Bind or seal cut edges as
recommended by carpet manufacturer.
D. Extend carpet into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, open bottomed obstructions, removable
flanges, alcoves, and similar openings.
E. Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future cutting
by repeating on finish flooring as marked on sub floor. Use nonpermanent, nonstaining marking
device.
F. Install pattern parallel to walls and borders.
A. Perform the following operations immediately after installing carpet.
1. Remove excess adhesive, and other surface blemishes using cleaner recommended by
carpet manufacturer.
2. Remove yarns that protrude from carpet surface-beater element.
B. Protect carpet against damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and
fixtures during the remainder of construction period. Use protection methods indicated or
recommended in writing 0by carpet manufacturer.
END OF SECTION
EHAF – CO – 01/03 -6- Section 09685

SECTION 09900
PAINTING
PART 1 GENERAL
1 specification Sections, apply to work of this Section.
A. The work includes painting and finishing of the following:
1 Painting of concrete / masonry

2 Painting of plaster
3 Painting of gypsum-boards
4 Painting of steel surfaces
5 Painting of wood surfaces
B. SURFACE TO BE PAINTED
Except where natural finish of materials is specifically noted as a surface not to be painted, paint
exposed surfaces whether or not Colours are designated in “Schedules”. Where items or surfaces
are not specifically mentioned, paint the same as similar adjacent materials or areas. If Colour or
finish is not designated, the Consultant will select these from standard Colours or finishes available.
Following categories of work are not included as part of field-applied finish work.
C. PRE-FINISHED ITEMS
Unless otherwise indicated, do not include painting when factory-finishing or installer-finishing is

specified for such items as (but not limited to) metal toilet enclosures, perfinished partition systems,
acoustic materials, Architectural woodwork and casework, and finished mechanical and electrical
equipment, including light fixtures, switchgear and distribution cabinets.
D. CONCEALED SURFACES
Unless otherwise indicated, painting is not required on surfaces such as walls or ceilings in
concealed areas and generally inaccessible areas, foundation spaces, furred areas, utility tunnels,
pipe spaces, duct shafts.
E. FINISHED METAL SURFACES
Unless otherwise indicated, metal surfaces of anodized aluminium, stainless steel, chromium plate,
copper, bronze and similar finished materials will not require finish painting.
F. OPERATING PARTS
Unless otherwise indicated, moving parts of operating units, mechanical and electrical parts, such as
valve and damper operators, linkages, sinkages, sensing devices, motor and fan shafts will not
require finish painting.
EHAF – CO – 01/03 -1 - Section 09900

May 2012 - Rev.(0) Painting
A. SINGLE SOURCE RESPONSIBILITY
Provide primers and other undercoat paint produced by same manufacturer as finish coats. Use only
thinners approved by paint manufacturer, and use only within recommended limits.
B. COORDINATION OF WORK
Review other sections of these specifications in which prime paints are to be provided to ensure
compatibility of total coatings system for various substrates. Upon request from other trades, furnish
information or characteristics of finish materials provided for use, to ensure compatible prime coats
are used.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
1. PRODUCT DATA
Submit manufacturer’s technical information including paint label analysis and application
instructions for each materials proposed for use.
2. SAMPLES
a. Prior to beginning work, Contractor shall submit samples for initial colour selection in form of
manufacturer’s colour charts to the Consultant. After colour selection, the Consultant will
furnish a list of colours for the respective surfaces to be coated.
b. The Contractor shall provide samples as described in Contract Requirements Section 1300
"Submittals", samples shall be of each Colour and material, with texture to simulate actual
conditions,samples shall be on representative samples 300x 300 mm hardboard. Provide a
list of material and application for each coat of each sample. Label each sample as to
location and application. Resubmit samples until the required sheen, colour and texture are
achieved.
c. The Consultant may request to prepare the samples on selected locations of the site.
Provide a listing of materials and application for each coat of each finish sample.
d. Final acceptance of Colours will be from samples applied on the job.
1.05 DELIVERY AND STORAGE
A. Deliver materials to job site in original, new and unopened packages and containers bearing
manufacturer’s name and label, and the following information:
1. Name of title of material.

2. Manufacturer’s stock number and date of manufacture.
3. Manufacturer’s name.
4. Contents by volume, for major pigment (if required) and vehicle constituents.
5. Thinning instructions.
6. Application instructions.
EHAF – CO – 01/03 -2 - Section 09900

7. Colour name and number.
Store materials not in actual use in tightly covered containers. Maintain containers used in storage of
paint in a clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue.
Protect from freezing and over heating where necessary. Keep storage area neat and orderly.
Remove oily rags and waste daily. Take all precautions to ensure that workmen and work areas are
adequately protected from fire hazards and health hazards resulting from handling, mixing and
application of paints.
1.06 JOB CONDITIONS
A. Apply water-base paints only when temperature of surfaces to be painted and surrounding air
temperatures are between 10°C and 32°C, unless otherwise permitted by paint manufacturer’s
printed instructions.
B. Apply solvent-thinned paints only when temperature of surface to be painted and surrounding air
temperatures are between 7°C and 35°C, unless otherwise permitted by paint manufacturer’s printed
instructions.
C. Do not apply paint in rain, fog or mist; or when relative humidity exceeds 85%; or to damp or wet
surfaces; unless otherwise permitted by paint manufacturer’s printed instructions.
D. Painting may be continued during inclement weather if areas and surfaces to be painted are
enclosed and maintained within temperature limits specified by paint manufacturer during application
and drying periods.
1.07 GUARANTEE
A. The Contractor shall submit a guarantee for anti weather coats for a period not less than two years.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIAL QUALITY
A. Provide best quality grade of various types of coatings as regularly manufactured by acceptable paint
materials manufacturers. Materials not displaying manufacturer’s identification as a standard, best-
grade product will not be acceptable.
B. Proprietary names used to designate Colours or materials are not intended to imply that products of
named manufacturer are required to exclusion of equivalent products of other manufacturers.
2.02 MATERIALS
A. COLOUR PIGMENTS (IF REQUIRED)
Pure, non-fading, applicable types to suit substrates and service indicated.
EHAF – CO – 01/03 -3 - Section 09900

B. EMULSION PAINTS (WATER-BASED)
This type of paint shall be used where shown on drawings and finishes schedules, usage as identified
in drawings shall be for public interior and exterior paintings, and shall comply with the following:
-Gloss percentage shall be satisfactory to the Consultant.
-Application methods shall be by brush, roller or spray according to texture and surface appearance
requirements.
-These paints shall be generally of a low odour.

- VOC shall not exceed 100gm/liter to comply with SCAQMD Rule 1113 to meet Leed requirements.
C. PHYSICALLY-DRYING (SOLVENT-BASED) PAINTS
This type of paint shall be used where shown on drawings and finishes schedules, usage as identified
in drawings shall be for interior locations where humidity is constantly high wear resistance is needed;
exterior locations where excellent weather resistance and a semi-gloss finish is desired, and shall
comply with the following:
- Excellent washability
- Good wear resistance
- Application: Quick drying, Smooth, uniform finish.
D. CHEMICALLY CURING PAINTS
1. OXIDATIVE DRYING, ALKYD PAINTS
A. ALKYD RESIN-BASED PAINTS
This type of paint shall be used where shown on drawings and finishes schedules, typical areas of
use are locations where a tough, cleanable coating is required, and shall comply with the following:
-Gloss percentage shall be satisfactory to the Consultant.
-Application methods shall be by brush, roller or spray according to texture and surface appearance
requirements.
Good flow characteristics.
B. ALKYD-BASED UNDERCOATING
Alkyd-based undercoating paints are mainly used as a medium coat after the primer for a following
gloss- or semi-gloss finish coat.
The paint shall have a homogeneous consistency by normal manual stirring. Coating shall be easy
with a brush or a roller. In case of spraying the paint may be diluted at a ratio not exceeding 10 % by
volume with a thinner recommended by the manufacturer.
Drying time: Surface dry after 4 hours; hard dry after 24 hours; Opacity shall be not less than 90 %.
The colour of the applied undercoating shall be close to that of the final coat.
C. ALKYD VARNISH
This type of paint shall be used where shown on drawings and finishes schedules.
Alkyd varnish shall be a transparent coating, which gives a gloss or semi-gloss finish.
It shall be washable and have a good wear resistance.
EHAF – CO – 01/03 -4 - Section 09900

D. MODIFIED ALKYD’S
URETHANE-ALKYD VARNISH
Urethane-alkyd varnish shall be a transparent coating, which gives a gloss or semi-gloss finish. It
shall also be washable and have a high wear resistance.
2. EPOXY COATING
Typical areas of use are concrete floors, wet areas, steelwork etc.
Epoxy coating shall be for interior and exterior use and shall have the following properties:
1. Alkali resistance
2. Good abrasion resistance
3. Chemical resistance
4. Application by brush and spray
5. VOC shall not exceed 100 gm/litre complying with SCAQMD role 1113 to meet Leed
requirements.
3. POLYURETHANE COATING
This type of paint shall be used where shown on drawings and finishes schedules. Typical areas of
use are concrete floors, wet areas, steelwork etc.
Polyurethane coating shall be for interior and exterior use and shall have the following properties:
1. Superior weather resistance

2. Good abrasion resistance
3. Good colour and gloss retention.
4. Fade resistant
E. SPECIAL PAINTS
1. ALUMINIUM PAINT
Aluminium paint is mainly used for painting fuel tanks. It reflects a good portion of the sun’s
radiation.
1. It shall be composed of aluminium powder, varnish resin and / or alkyd medium of low acid and
ready for use.
2. The paint shall, with stirring readily, form a smooth uniform mixture suitable for application by
brush, roller or spray. The paint shall not be diluted for spraying by more than 5 % by volume.
3. Drying time: It shall be surface dry within 4 hours and hard dry within 24 hours.
4. 4.0 Opacity: It shall not be less than 99 %.
5. 5.0 Weathering: The paint shall show no colour fading or cracking at 60 deg.C and 50 to 55 %
humidity for a duration of 500 hours.
6. Petroleum resistance: The paint shall show no blisters or flexibility signs, compared to a non-
exposed paint.
7. Colour: The dry paint shall have an aluminium/metal appearance.
2. ROAD MARKING PAINT
The paint may be alkyd- or acrylic/vinyl-based.
EHAF – CO – 01/03 -5 - Section 09900

1. The paint shall have a homogeneous consistency by normal manual stirring. Application shall be
easy with a brush or a roller and in case of spraying the paint shall be diluted at a ratio of 10 to
20% by volume, with a thinner recommended by the manufacturer.
2. 2.0 Drying time: One thin coating layer shall be surface dry after 15 minutes and shall be hard dry
after 24.
3. Opacity shall be not less than:
80 % for yellow paint
90 % for white paint
100 % for black paint
4. Resistance to artificial weathering: When tested according to GS Draft ‘Effect of Weathering on
Paints’, for 500 h, the coating shall not show any signs of blistering, checking, cracking or flaking.
The luminance factor after the test shall be at least as follows:
White 75%
Yellow 55 %
3. SPECIAL WOOD PAINTS (EXTERIOR)
1. Primer
Primer with anti-fungus OS, applied by immersion process, shall comply with BS 5589 or an
equivalent Standard.
Standard primer, water or solvent-borne shall comply with BS 5082 or BS 5358 respectively.
2. Semi-Transparent Stain Finish
This is a semi-transparent, water-based, low-built stain finish.

Semi-transparent stain finish shall meet the following properties:
- Good flexibility
- Resistant to UV
- Water repellent
3. Opaque Stain Finish
Opaque stain finish shall be water or solvent-based, medium built, of indicated colour and shall
meet the following properties:
- Good flexibility
- Resistant to UV
- Water repellent
- Good hiding power
4. Anti-weather coating
Ant-weather coating shall be water-based, of indicated colour and shall meet the following
properties:
- Good flexibility
- Resistant to UV
- Water repellent
- Good hiding power
- Fade resistant
EHAF – CO – 01/03 -6 - Section 09900

4. FIRE TREATMENT PAINT
Fire Treatment paint should comply with the manufacturer specifications. Testing for the fire rated
units should be as specified in ASTM E119.
5. ARCHITECTURAL SPECIAL FINISHES

Special finishes shall comply with the manufacturer's specifications, VOC shall not exceed 50 gm/liter
complying with SCAQMD Rule 1113 to meet Leed requirements.
6. ANTI CARBONATION FLEXIBLE PROTECTIVE COAT
- Decorative, Flexible, Anti-carbonation, UV stable and waterproof protective coat based on styrene-
acrylic copolymer .It is a single component emulsion containing inert pigments.
- The material shall be mixed and applied in accordance with the manufacture’s instructions .
- VOC shall not exceed 50 gm/liter complying with GS-11 to meet Leed requirements.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSPECTION
A. Applicator must examine areas and conditions under which painting work is to be applied and notify
Contractor in writing of conditions detrimental to proper and timely completion of work. Do not proceed
with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to applicator.
B. Starting of painting work will be constructed as Applicator’s acceptance of surfaces and conditions
within any particular area.
C. Do not paint over dirt, rust, scale, grease, moisture, scuffed surfaces, or conditions otherwise
detrimental to formation of a durable paint film.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. GENERAL SURFACE PREPARATION
1. Perform preparation and cleaning procedures in accordance with paint manufacturer’s

instructions and as herein specified, for each particular substrate condition.
2. Generally the Surfaces to be painted shall be stable, firm, dry and free from dust, sand, loose old
paint, laitance, dirt, grease and oil. It is the Contractor's responsibility to make sure that these
conditions are established by adequate cleaning procedures.
3. Provide barrier coats over incompatible primers or remove and re-prime as required. Notify
Consultant in writing of any anticipated problems in using the specified coating systems with
substrates primed by others.
4. Remove hardware, hardware accessories, machined surfaces, plates, lighting fixtures, and similar
items in place and not to be finish-painted, or provide surface-applied protection prior to surface
preparation and painting operations. Remove, if necessary, for complete painting of items and
adjacent surfaces. Following completion of painting of each space or area, reinstall removed
items.
EHAF – CO – 01/03 -7 - Section 09900

5. Clean surfaces to be painted before applying paint or surface treatments. Remove oil and grease
prior to mechanical cleaning. Program cleaning and painting so that contaminants from cleaning
process will not fall onto wet, newly-painted surfaces.
6. All adjoining areas not to be painted shall be masked and all necessary precautions taken to
prevent contamination of same.
B. GENERAL MATERIALS PREPARATION
1. Mix and prepare painting materials in accordance with manufacturer’s directions.
2. Maintain containers used in mixing and application of paint in a clean condition, free of foreign
materials and residue.
3. Stir materials before application to produce a mixture of uniform density, and stir as required
during application. Do not stir surface film into material. Remove film and, if necessary, strain
material before using.
3.03 GENERAL APPLICATION PROCEDURES
A. GENERAL
1. Apply paint in accordance with manufacturer’s directions. Use applicators and techniques best
suited for substrate and type of materials being applied.
2. Provide finish coats which are compatible with prime paints used.
3. Apply additional coats when undercoats, stains or other conditions show through final coat of paint,
until paint film is of uniform finish, Colour and appearance. Give special attention to ensure that
surfaces, including edges, corners, crevices, welds, and exposed fasteners receive a dry film
thickness equivalent to that of flat surfaces.
4. Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture same as similar exposed surfaces. Paint
surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment or furniture with prime coat only before final
installation of equipment.
5. Paint interior surfaces of ducts, where visible through registers or grilles, with a flat, non-specular
black paint.
6. Paint back sides of access panels, and removable or hinged covers to match exposed surfaces.
7. Finish exterior doors on tops, bottoms and side edges same as exterior faces, unless otherwise
indicated.Sand lightly between each succeeding enamel or varnish coat.
8. Omit first coat (primer) on metal surfaces which have been shop-primed and touch-up painted,
unless otherwise indicated.
B. SCHEDULING PAINTING
1. Apply first-coat material to surfaces that have been cleaned, pretreated or otherwise prepared for
painting as soon as practicable after preparation and before subsequent surface deterioration.
2. Allow sufficient time between successive coatings to permit proper drying. Do not recoat until
paint has dried to where it feels firm, does not deform or feel sticky under moderate thumb
EHAF – CO – 01/03 -8 - Section 09900

pressure and application of another coat of paint does not cause lifting or loss of adhesion of the
undercoat.
C. MINIMUM COATING THICKNESS
Apply materials at not less than manufacturer’s recommended spreading rate, to establish a total dry
film thickness as indicated or, if not indicated, as recommended by coating manufacturer.
D. MECHANICAL WORK (IF REQUIRED)
1. Painting of mechanical work is limited to those items exposed in mechanical equipment rooms
and in occupied spaces.
2. Mechanical Items to be painted include, but are not limited to, the following:
- Piping, pipe hangers, and supports.

- Heat exchangers.
- Tanks.
- Ductwork, insulation.
- Motor, mechanical equipment, and supports.
- Accessory items.
E. PRIME COATS
1. Apply prime coat of material which is required to be painted or finished, and which has not been
prime coated by others.
2. Recoat primed and sealed surfaces where is evidence of suction spots or unsealed areas in first
coat, to assure a finish coat with no burn-through or other defects due to insufficient sealing.
F. STIPPLE ENAMEL FINISH
Roll and redistribute paint to an even and fine texture. Leave no evidence of rolling such as laps,
irregularity in texture, skid marks, or other surfaces imperfections.
G. PIGMENTED (OPAQUE) FINISHES
Completely cover to provide an opaque, smooth surface of uniform finish, colour, appearance and
coverage. Cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, runs, sags, ropiness or other surface
imperfections will not be acceptable.
H. TRANSPARENT (CLEAR) FINISHES
Use multiple coats to produce glass-smooth surface film of even luster. Provide a finish free of lap,
cloudiness, colour irregularity, runs, brush marks, orange peel, nail holes, or other surface
imperfections.
I. COMPLETED WORK
Match approved samples for Colour, texture and coverage. Remove, refinish or repaint work not in
compliance with specified requirements.
EHAF – CO – 01/03 -9 - Section 09900

3.04 PAINTING OF CONCRETE / MASONRY / PLASTER / GYPSUM BOARDS
A. GENERAL
1. Prepare cementitious surfaces of concrete, concrete block, and cement plaster to be

painted by removing efflorescence, chalk, dust, dirt, grease, oils, and by roughening as
required to remove glaze.
2. Determine alkalinity and moisture content of surfaces to be painted by performing
appropriate tests. If surfaces are found to be sufficiently alkaline to cause blistering and
burning of finish paint, correct this condition before application of paint. Do not paint over
surfaces where moisture content exceeds that permitted in manufacturer’s printed
directions.
3. Clean concrete floor surfaces scheduled to be painted with a commercial solution of
muriatic acid, or other etching cleaner. Flush floor with clean water to neutralize acid, and
allow to dry before painting.
4. The following painting systems shall be provided for the given substrates.
B. PLASTER EMULSION FINISH
4 coats with total film thickness not less than 100 microns.
The Four Coats shall be as follows:
1. Prime Coat
Pure, untinted oil paint.
2. First Coat
Plastic emulsion paint thinned with 35% water maximum.
3. Second Coat
4. Third Coat
C. EXTERNAL PAINTING
1. Substrates of concrete, masonry or cement-based rendering shall receive a primer or sealer,

water- or solvent-borne, depending on the subsequent coats. The primer/sealer shall have alkali
resistance, good binding and sealing properties and shall be from the same manufacturer as the
subsequent coats.
2. Apply intermediate and final coat of paint indicated. Follow strictly manufacturer's guidelines for
application method, standard film thickness, coating intervals etc. Use same application method
as has been used for the samples and approved by the Consultant.
3. If a textured coat has to be applied, there shall be only one coat unless otherwise indicated. Make
sure, that the used application method results in a film thickness similar to manufacturer's data.
4. Before application of paints with no or low vapour permeability make sure that the substrate is
fully cured and has reached a moisture content of less than 4%.
EHAF – CO – 01/03 -10 - Section 09900

D. INTERNAL PAINTING
1. Substrates of concrete, masonry, plaster or gypsum board shall receive a primer/sealer if required
to establish a uniform absorptive capacity.
2. Gypsum boards, unless otherwise indicated, shall receive a coat of waterborne filler before the
application of a primer or final coats. It shall be applied by steel trowel and result in a smooth and
even finish. For wet rooms use only fillers which are recommended by the manufacturer for this
purpose (e.g. acrylic based fillers).
3. Apply two coats of paint indicated. Follow strictly manufacturer's guidelines for application
method, standard film thickness, coating intervals etc. Use same application method as has been
used for the samples and approved by the Consultant.
3.05 PAINTING OF FERROUS METALS
1. Clean ferrous surfaces, which are not galvanized or shop-coated, of oil, grease, dirt, loose mill
scale and other foreign substances by solvent or mechanical cleaning.
2. Touch-up shop-applied prime coats wherever damaged or bare, where required by other sections
of these specifications.
3. Clean and touch-up with same type shop primer.
4. The following painting systems shall be provided for the given substrates.
A. FERROUS METALS LUSTERLESS (FLAT) FINISH
finish coats over primer, with total dry film thickness not less than 75 microns.
1. PRIME COAT
Red Lead Base Primer. Prime coat is not required on items delivered shop primed.
2. FIRST AND SECOND FINISH COATS
Interior Flat Latex Base Paint.
3.06 GALVANIZED SURFACES
Clean free of oil and surface contaminants with non-petroleum based solvent
A. SPRAY COATING
Carry out surface preparation as recommended by manufacturer of primer. Apply one coat of primer
recommended by the manufacturer for galvanized surfaces. Apply intermediate and final coat of
paint indicated. Make sure that these coats are compatible with the primer. Spray- painting, airless
or air-spray, are the preferred application methods for steel, unless the actual circumstances do not
allow using these methods.
B. POWDER- ORGANIC COATING
Powder organic coating of galvanized steel shall be shop-applied and meet the requirements of BS
6497 or an equivalent Standard.
EHAF – CO – 01/03 -11 - Section 09900

3.07 PAINTING OF ALUMINIUM
A. Aluminium building components like windows, doors etc. shall generally be delivered to site with the
final paint finish. They shall therefore be handled carefully to avoid any damage. Any repair by patch-
painting on site has to be approved by the Consultant.
B. SPRAY-PAINTING
Painting of Aluminium shall generally be shop-applied, by either airless- or air-spraying method with
type of painting system indicated, and meet the requirements of BS 4842 or an equivalent Standard.
C. POWDER- ORGANIC COATING
Powder organic coating of aluminium shall be shop-applied and meet the requirements of BS 6496
or an equivalent Standard.
3.08 PAINTING OF ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
A. Alkyd varnish should be used only internally. External applied painting should give the wood a
minimum ultra-violet protection, that means a certain opacity should be reached.
B. Any architectural woodwork shall not be delivered to site before a priming coat of indicated type has
been applied, or if not, as recommended by the manufacturer of the indicated painting system.
C. Alkyd gloss paint system shall be applied in two coats; preferably sprayed. The dried paint shall be
highly vapour permeable if used on external surfaces.
1. One alkyd undercoat as specified in Part 2 of this Section
2. One alkyd finish coat of indicated gloss and Colour
D. Alkyd varnish shall be applied in two coats on the primed substrate, preferably sprayed unless the
circumstances do not allow it.
E. Joinery wood stain of indicated type and colour shall be applied in two coats on the primed substrate.
Transparent wood stain shall not be used on external surfaces.
A. The right is reserved by Contracting Authority to invoke the following material testing procedure at any
time, and any number of times during period of field painting.
B. Engage services of an independent testing laboratory to sample paint being used. Samples of
materials delivered to project site will be taken, identified and sealed, and certified in presence of
Contractor.
C. Testing laboratory will perform appropriate tests for any or all of following characteristics: Abrasion
resistance, apparent reflectivity, flexibility, washability, absorption, accelerated weathering, dry
opacity, accelerated yellowness, recoating, skinning, colour retention, alkali resistance and
quantitative materials analysis.
D. If test results show that material being used does not comply with specified requirements, Contractor
may be directed to stop painting work, and remove non-complying paint; pay for testing; repaint
surfaces coated with rejected paint; remove rejected paint from previously painted surfaces if, upon
repainting with specified paint, the two coatings are non-compatible.
EHAF – CO – 01/03 -12 - Section 09900

3.10 CLEAN-UP AND PROTECTION
A. CLEAN-UP
1. During progress of work, remove from site discarded paint materials, rubbish, cans and rags at
end of each work day.
2. Upon completion of painting work, clean window glass and other paint-spattered surfaces.
Remove spattered paint by proper methods of washing and scraping, using care not to scratch
or otherwise damage finished surfaces.
B. Protection
1. Protect work of other trades, whether to be painted or not, against damage by painting and
finishing work. Correct any damage by cleaning, repairing or replacing, and repainting, as
acceptable to Consultant.
2. Provide “Wet Paint” signs as required to protect newly-painted finishes. Remove temporary
protective wrappings provided others for protection of their work, after completion of painting
operations.
3. At the completion of work of other trades, touch-up and restore all damaged or defaced painted
surfaces.
END OF SECTION
EHAF – CO – 01/03 -13 - Section 09900

SECTION 09960
HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATINGS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.02 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes surface preparation and application of high-performance coating systems on the
following substrates:
1. Exterior Substrates:
a. Concrete, horizontal surfaces.
2. Interior Substrates:
a. Concrete, horizontal surfaces.
1. Division 5 Sections for shop priming of metal substrates with primers specified in this Section.
2. Division 9 painting Sections for special-use coatings and general field painting.
1.03 SUBMITTALS

B. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of finish-coat product indicated.
C. Samples for Verification: For each type of coating system and in each color and gloss of finish coat
indicated.
1. Submit Samples on rigid backing, 200 mm square.
2. Step coats on Samples to show each coat required for system.
3. Label each coat of each Sample.
4. Label each Sample for location and application area.
D. Product List: For each product indicated. Cross-reference products to coating system and locations
of application areas. Use same designations indicated on Drawings and in schedules.
E. LEED Submittals: Product Data for Credit EQ 4.1: For installation adhesives, including printed
statement of VOC content
A. Master Painters Institute (MPI) Standards:

1. Products: Complying with MPI standards indicated and listed in "MPI Approved Products List."
EHAF – CO – 01/03 -1 - Section 09960

May 2012, Rev. (0) High-Performance Coatings
2. Preparation and Workmanship: Comply with requirements in "MPI Architectural Painting

Specification Manual" for products and coating systems indicated.
B. Mockups: Apply benchmark samples of each coating system indicated to verify preliminary selections
made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for
materials and execution.
1. Architect will select one surface to represent surfaces and conditions for application of each
type of coating and substrate.
a. Wall and Ceiling Surfaces: Provide samples of at least 9 sq. m.
b. Other Items: Architect will designate items or areas required.
2. Apply benchmark samples after permanent lighting and other environmental services have
been activated.
3. Final approval of color selections will be based on benchmark samples.
a. If preliminary color selections are not approved, apply additional benchmark samples of
additional colors selected by Architect at no added cost to Owner.
A. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in well-ventilated areas with ambient
temperatures continuously maintained at not less than 7 deg C.
1. Maintain containers in clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue.
2. Remove rags and waste from storage areas daily.
A. Apply coatings only when temperature of surfaces to be coated and surrounding air temperatures are
between 10 and 35 deg C.
B. Do not apply coatings in snow, rain, fog, or mist; when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; at
temperatures less than 3 deg C above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces.
A. Furnish extra materials described below that are from same production run (batch mix) as materials
applied and that are packaged for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1. Quantity: Furnish an additional 5 percent, but not less than 3.8 L of each material and color
applied.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATINGS, GENERAL
A. Material Compatibility:
EHAF – CO – 01/03 -2 - Section 09960

1. Provide materials for use within each coating system that are compatible with one another and
substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by
manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.
2. Provide products of same manufacturer for each coat in a coating system.
B. VOC Content of Field-Applied Interior Paints and Coatings: Provide products that comply with the
following limits for VOC content when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA
Method 24):
1. Floor Coatings: VOC not more than 100 g/L.
2. Flat Interior Topcoat Paints: VOC content of not more than 50 g/L.
3. Nonflat Interior Topcoat Paints: VOC content of not more than 150 g/L.
4. Floor Coatings: VOC not more than 100 g/L.
2.02 POLYURETHANE COATINGS
A. Polyurethane, Two-Component, Pigmented, as selected by the Engineer from the manufacturers

range of colors.
1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be
incorporated into the Work
2. VOC Content: Minimum E Range of E2.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for
maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of work.
1. Maximum Moisture Content of Substrates: When measured with an electronic moisture meter
as follows:
a. Concrete: 12 percent.
2. Verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility with existing
finishes or primers.
3. Begin coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected and
surfaces are dry.
4. Coating application indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.
3.01 PREPARATION
A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Architectural Painting
Specification Manual" applicable to substrates indicated.
B. Remove plates, machined surfaces, and similar items already in place that are not to be coated. If
removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of item, provide surface-applied
protection before surface preparation and coating.
1. After completing coating operations, reinstall items that were removed; use workers skilled in
the trades involved.
EHAF – CO – 01/03 -3 - Section 09960
C. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of coatings, including dirt, oil, grease, and
incompatible paints and encapsulants.
D. Concrete Substrates: Remove release agents, curing compounds, efflorescence, and chalk. Do not
coat surfaces if moisture content or alkalinity of surfaces to be coated exceeds that permitted in
1. Clean surfaces with pressurized water. Use pressure range of 10 350 to 27 580 kPa at 150 to
300 mm.
2. Abrasive blast clean surfaces to comply with SSPC-SP 7/NACE No. 4, "Brush-Off Blast
Cleaning."
3.02 APPLICATION
A. Apply high-performance coatings according to manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Use applicators and techniques suited for coating and substrate indicated.
2. Coat surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture same as similar exposed surfaces.
Before final installation, coat surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment or furniture with
prime coat only.
3. Coat back sides of access panels, removable or hinged covers, and similar hinged items to
match exposed surfaces.
B. Tint each undercoat a lighter shade to facilitate identification of each coat if multiple coats of the same
material are to be applied. Tint undercoats to match color of finish coat, but provide sufficient
difference in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat.
C. If undercoats or other conditions show through final coat, apply additional coats until cured film has a
uniform coating finish, color, and appearance.
D. Apply coatings to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks,
runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Produce sharp glass lines and color breaks.
A. Owner reserves the right to invoke the following procedure at any time and as often as Owner deems
necessary during the period when coatings are being applied:
1. Owner will engage the services of a qualified testing agency to sample coating material being
used. Samples of material delivered to Project site will be taken, identified, sealed, and certified
in presence of Contractor.
2. Testing agency will perform tests for compliance with specified requirements.
3. Owner may direct Contractor to stop applying coatings if test results show materials being used
do not comply with specified requirements. Contractor shall remove noncomplying coating
materials from Project site, pay for testing, and recoat surfaces coated with rejected materials.
Contractor will be required to remove rejected materials from previously coated surfaces if, on
recoating with complying materials, the two coatings are incompatible.
A. At end of each workday, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags, and other discarded materials from
Project site.
EHAF – CO – 01/03 -4 - Section 09960

B. After completing coating application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered coatings by
washing, scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces.
C. Protect work of other trades against damage from coating operation. Correct damage by cleaning,
repairing, replacing, and recoating, as approved by Architect, and leave in an undamaged condition.
D. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced
coated surfaces.
3.05 EXTERIOR HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATING SCHEDULE
A. Concrete Substrates, Vertical Surfaces:
1. Water-Based, Light-Industrial Coating System:

a. Prime Coat: Water-based, light-industrial coating, MPI #110, gloss matching topcoat.
b. Intermediate Coat: as recommended by the manufacturer
c. Topcoat: Water-based, light-industrial coating.
d. System below corresponds to MPI EXT 3.1D, which requires intermediate coat for
Premium Grade system and omits intermediate coat for Custom Grade system.
B. Concrete Substrates, Horizontal Surfaces:
1. Polyurethane, Pigmented, Over Epoxy Coating System:

a. Prime Coat: Epoxy, cold-cured unless otherwise directed by the manufacturer.
b. Intermediate Coat: Epoxy, cold-cured unless otherwise directed by the manufacturer.
c. Topcoat: Polyurethane, two-component, pigmented unless otherwise directed by the
manufacturer.
END OF SECTION
EHAF – CO – 01/03 -5 - Section 09960

Technical Specification
SECTION 10260
IMPACT-RESISTANT WALL PROTECTION
PART 1 - GENERAL
101 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and 1
Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.02 SUMMARY

1. Wall guards.
2. Handrails.
3. Bed locators.
4. Corner guards.
5. Sheet and panel wall coverings.
6. Kick and armor plates.
7. Door frame protectors.
8. Doorknob protectors.
1. Division 5 Section "Metal Fabrications" for steel angle and bent plate corner guards fabricated
from rolled metal.
2. Division 6 Section "Rough Carpentry" for wood blocking and grounds for surface-mounted wall
guards, corner guards, and handrails.
3. Division 8 Section "Door Hardware" for stainless-steel mop, kick, armor, and push plates.
C. Alternates: Refer to Division 1 Section "Alternates" for description of Work in this Section affected by
alternates.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include physical characteristics, such as durability, resistance to fading, and flame
resistance, for each impact-resistant wall protection system component indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: Show locations, extent, and installation details of each impact-resistant wall
protection system component. Show methods of attachment to adjoining construction.
C. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts consisting of sections of vinyl plastic
material showing the full range of colors and textures available for each impact-resistant wall
protection system component indicated.
D. Samples for Verification: For the following products, showing the full range of color and texture
variations expected in each impact-resistant wall protection system component. Prepare Samples
from the same material to be used for the Work.
EHAF – CO – 01/03 -1 - Section 10260

May 2012, Rev. (0) Impact-Resistant Wall Protection
1. Wall and Corner Guards (300 mm) long Samples of each type of impact-resistant wall
protection system component required. Include examples of joinery, corners, and field
splices.
2. Sheet or Panels: (150-by-150-mm) square Samples of each impact-resistant wall protection
system component required.
E. Material Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency indicating compliance of each impact-
resistant wall protection system component with requirements indicated, based on tests performed
by testing agency within the past five years.
F. Maintenance Data: For each impact-resistant wall protection system component to include in
maintenance manuals specified in Division 1.
1. Include recommended methods and frequency for maintaining optimum condition of vinyl
plastic covers under anticipated traffic and use conditions. Include precautions against using
cleaning materials and methods that may be detrimental to vinyl plastic finishes and
performance.
A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed installation of impact-resistant

wall protection system components similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this
Project and whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service
performance.
B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing impact-resistant wall protection
system components similar to those required for this Project and with a record of successful in-
service performance.
C. Source Limitations: Obtain each color, grade, finish, and type of impact-resistant wall protection
system component from a single source with resources to provide components of consistent quality in
appearance and physical properties.
D. Product Options: Information on Drawings and in Specifications establishes requirements for
systems aesthetic effects and performance characteristics. Aesthetic effects are indicated by
dimensions, arrangements, alignment, and profiles of components and assemblies as they relate to
sightlines, to one another, and to adjoining construction. Performance characteristics are indicated
by criteria subject to verification by one or more methods including preconstruction testing, field
testing, or in-service performance.
E. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of impact-resistant
wall protection system and are based on the specific system indicated. Other manufacturers systems
with equal performance characteristics may be considered. Refer to Division 1 Section
"Substitutions."
1. Do not modify intended aesthetic effects, as judged solely by Architect, except with Architects
approval. If modifications are proposed, submit comprehensive explanatory data to Architect
for review.
F. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide impact-resistant wall protection system components
with the following surface-burning characteristics, as determined by testing materials identical to
those required in this Section per ASTM E 84 by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to
authorities having jurisdiction. Identify impact-resistant wall protection system components with
appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency.
1. Flame Spread: 25 or less.
2. Smoke Developed: 450 or less.
G. Impact Strength: Provide impact-resistant wall protection system components with a minimum impact
resistance of (1356 J/m) of width when tested according to ASTM D 256, Test Method A.
EHAF – CO – 01/03 -2 - Section 10260

A. Store wall surface-protection materials in original undamaged packages and containers inside a well-
ventilated area protected from weather, moisture, soiling, extreme temperatures, and humidity.
1. Maintain room temperature within the storage area at not less than 70 deg F (21 deg C) during
the period plastic materials are stored. Keep sheet material out of direct sunlight to avoid
surface distortion.
2. Store rigid plastic corner-guard covers in a vertical position, and rigid plastic wall guard and
handrail covers in a horizontal position for a minimum of 72 hours, or until the plastic material
attains the minimum room temperature of 70 deg F (21 deg C).
A. Furnish extra materials described below, before installation begins, that match products installed and
that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1. Impact-Resistant Wall Protection System Units: Full-size units of maximum length, including
vinyl plastic cover and aluminum retainer, equal to 2 percent of each type, color, and texture of
each type of unit installed, but not less than two units.
a. Include accessory components as required. Replacement materials shall be from the same
production run as materials installed. Package replacement materials with protective covering,
identified with appropriate labels.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering impact-

resistant wall protection system products that may be incorporated into the Work.
B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide impact-resistant wall protection

system products
2.02 MATERIALS
A. Extruded Rigid Plastic: Textured, chemical- and stain-resistant, high-impact-resistant, PVC or acrylic-
modified vinyl plastic; thickness as indicated; with a minimum impact resistance of 25.4 ft-lbf/in.
(1356 J/m) of width when tested according to ASTM D 256, Test Method A.
1. Color and Texture: Match Architect's samples.
2. Color and Texture: As indicated by referencing manufacturer's designations.
3. Color and Texture: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range for these
characteristics.
B. Plastic Sheet Wall Covering Material: Semirigid, textured, chemical- and stain-resistant, high-impact-
resistant, PVC or acrylic-modified vinyl plastic sheet; thickness as indicated; with a minimum impact
EHAF – CO – 01/03 -3 - Section 10260

resistance of 25.4 ft-lbf/in. (1356 J/m) of width when tested according to ASTM D 256, Test Method
A.
1. Color and Texture: Match Architect's samples.

2. Color and Texture: As indicated by referencing manufacturer's designations.
3. Color and Texture: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range for these
characteristics.
C. Polycarbonate Plastic Sheet: Abrasion-resistant, clear, transparent polycarbonate plastic sheet with
an impact-resistance rating of 16 ft-lbf/in. (864 J/m) of width when tested according to ASTM D 256,
Test Method A.
D. Copolymer Plastic Sheet: Abrasion-resistant, clear, transparent copolymer plastic sheet with an
impact-resistance rating of 16 ft- lbf/in. (864 J/m) of width when tested according to ASTM D 256,
Test Method A.
E. Aluminum Extrusions: Provide alloy and temper recommended by the manufacturer for the type of
use and finish indicated, but with not less than the strength and durability properties specified in
ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M) for alloy 6063-T5
F. Stainless-Steel Plate: Type 304, minimum 0.0625 inch (1.6 mm).
G. Fasteners: Provide aluminum, nonmagnetic stainless-steel, or other noncorrosive metal screws,

bolts, and other fasteners compatible with aluminum components, hardware, anchors, and other
items being fastened. Use theftproof fasteners where exposed to view.
H. Adhesive: Type recommended by the manufacturer for use with material on the substrate indicated.
2.03 WALL GUARDS
A. Crash-Rail-Type Wall Guards: Nominal (203 mm) high by (25 mm) deep; heavy-duty assembly
consisting of a snap-on-type rigid plastic cover installed over a continuous aluminum retainer
mounted at height indicated.
1. Cover: Extruded, rigid plastic, minimum (2.8 mm) thick, in profile indicated.
2. Retainer: Continuous, one-piece, extruded-aluminum retainer; minimum (1.6 mm) thick; with
continuous rubber or vinyl bumper cushion centered in the extrusion.
a. Mounting Type: Surface mounted flush on wall.
b. Mounting Type: Surface mounted on cushion spacers.
c. Mounting Type: Extended mounting on high-impact mounting brackets.
3. Accessories: Provide prefabricated, injection-molded end caps and inside and outside corners
with concealed splices, cushions, mounting hardware, and other accessories as required.
a. End caps and inside and outside corners shall match plastic cover color and shall be
field adjustable for close alignment with snap-on plastic covers.
B. Bumper-Rail-Type Wall Guards: Continuous, snap-on-type plastic cover installed over a continuous
aluminum retainer mounted at height indicated.
1. Cover: Extruded, rigid plastic, minimum (2.0 mm) thick, in dimensions and profiles indicated.
EHAF – CO – 01/03 -4 - Section 10260
2. Retainer: Continuous, one-piece, extruded-aluminum retainer; minimum (1.83 mm) thick.

b. Mounting Type: Surface mounted on (13-mm-) thick cushion spacers.
c. Mounting Type: Extended mounting on high-impact mounting brackets.
a. End caps and inside and outside corners shall match plastic cover color and shall be
field adjustable for close alignment with snap-on plastic covers.
C. Rub-Rail-Type Wall Guards: Snap-on-type plastic cover installed over a continuous aluminum
retainer mounted at height indicated.
2.Retainer: Continuous, one-piece, extruded-aluminum retainer; minimum (1.83 mm) thick.

b. Mounting Type: Surface mounted on (13-mm-) thick cushion spacers.
a. End caps and inside and outside corners shall match plastic cover color and shall
be field adjustable for close alignment with snap-on plastic covers.
D. Chair-Rail-Type Wall Guards: (203-mm-) high, rigid plastic sheet attached to the wall at wainscot
height with adhesive or double-faced adhesive tape.
E. Chair-Rail-Type Wall Guards: (101-mm-) high, clear, transparent polycarbonate or copolymer plastic
sheet. Attach to the wall at wainscot height using countersunk screws through predrilled holes.
2.04 CORNER GUARDS
A. Surface-Mounted, Resilient Plastic Corner Guards: Surface-mounted, resilient plastic corner-guard

assembly consisting of a snap-on-type plastic cover installed over a continuous aluminum retainer,
height as indicated.
B. Flush-Mounted, Resilient Plastic Corner Guards: Full-wall-height, flush-mounted, resilient plastic

corner-guard assembly consisting of a snap-on-type plastic cover installed over a continuous
aluminum retainer.
a. Corner Radius: (6.35 mm).

b. Corner Radius: (31.75 mm).
2. Retainer: Continuous, one-piece, extruded-aluminum retainer; minimum (1.58 mm) thick.
3. Accessories: Provide prefabricated, injection-molded top cap and aluminum base with
concealed splices, cushions, mounting hardware, and other accessories as required.
EHAF – CO – 01/03 -5 - Section 10260

a. Top caps shall match color of plastic covers and shall be field adjustable for close
alignment with snap-on plastic covers.
C. Fire-Rated, Resilient Plastic Corner Guards: Full-wall-height, resilient plastic corner-guard assembly
consisting of a snap-on-type plastic cover installed over a continuous aluminum retainer and a
continuous galvanized- or stainless-steel-covered intumescent fire barrier.
1. Fire-Resistance Rating: Two hours according to UL where installed in fire-resistance-rated,
metal-framed gypsum board partitions complying with requirements indicated as part of UL's
fire-resistance rating.
a. Corner Radius: (6.35 mm).
b. Corner Radius: (31.75 mm)
3. Retainer: Continuous, one-piece, extruded-aluminum retainer; minimum (2.77 mm) thick;
attached to a galvanized steel cover over manufacturer's standard intumescent fire barrier.
4. Accessories: Provide aluminum base with concealed splices, cushions, mounting hardware,
and other accessories as required.
D. Surface-Mounted, Plastic Corner Guards: Embossed, resilient plastic PVC or acrylic-modified vinyl
sheet corner guards; height as indicated. Provide 90-degree turn, unless otherwise indicated; and
formed edges.
E. Surface-Mounted, Plastic Corner Guards: Clear, transparent polycarbonate or copolymer plastic

corner guards; height as indicated. Provide 90-degree turn, unless otherwise indicated; mounting
holes (203 mm) o.c.; and formed edges.
1. Wing Size: (19 by 19 mm).

2. Wing Size: (28.6 by 28.6 mm).
3. Wing Size: (63.5 by 63.5 mm).
4. Mounting Method: Countersunk screws with mounting holes (2.5 mm) o.c.
5. Mounting Method: Clear self-adhesive.
6. Mounting Method: Double-faced, self-adhesive foam tape.
7. Mounting Method: Corner clips.
F. Stainless-Steel Corner Guards: Paper-covered, satin-finish, (1.6-mm) minimum, stainless-steel sheet

corner guards; height as indicated. Provide 90-degree turn, unless otherwise indicated; and formed
edges.
1. Wing Size: (28.6 by 28.6 mm).
2. Wing Size: (63.5 by 63.5 mm).
3. Wing Size: (89 by 89 mm).
4. Wing Size: (114.3 by 114.3 mm).
5. Mounting Method: Countersunk screws with mounting holes (203 mm) o.c.
6. Mounting Method: Corner clips.
7. Mounting Method: Double-faced, self-adhesive foam tape.
8. Mounting Method: Built-in.
9. Corner Radius: (3.2 mm).
10. Corner Radius: (19 mm).
EHAF – CO – 01/03 -6 - Section 10260

11. Corner Radius: (38 mm).
2.05 RUBBER WHEEL STOPPER
A. General: resilient rubberized wheel stopper consisting of prefabricated rubber section to details
indicated on drawings, fixed to stainless steel plate.
B. Stainless steel base plate: stainless steel plate, of thickness 1.6mm minimum, with continuous
welded pins for entering throw rubberized bumper. Length of pins shall be to approved shop
drawings to prevent pulling the bumper out of the base plate.
C. Fasteners for Anchoring to railings: use concealed fastener fabricated from stainless steel.
2.06 FABRICATION
A. General: Fabricate impact-resistant wall and door protection systems to comply with requirements
indicated for design, dimensions, details, finish, and member sizes, including thicknesses of
components.
B. Preassemble components in the shop to greatest extent possible to minimize field assembly.
Disassemble only as necessary for shipping and handling.
C. Fabricate components with tight seams and joints with exposed edges rolled. Provide surfaces free
of wrinkles, chips, dents, uneven coloration, and other imperfections. Fabricate members and fittings
to produce flush, smooth, and rigid hairline joints.
D. Brackets, Flanges, Fittings, and Anchors: Provide wall brackets, flanges, miscellaneous fittings, and
anchors for interconnecting members to other construction.
E. Provide inserts and other anchoring devices for connecting components to concrete or masonry.
Fabricate anchoring devices to withstand imposed loads. Coordinate anchoring devices with the
supporting structure.
2.07 FINISHES, GENERAL
A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for
recommendations for applying and designating finishes.
B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary
covering before shipping.
C. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are

acceptable if they are within one-half of the range of approved Samples. Noticeable variations in the
same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are acceptable if they
are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.
D. Color: As selected by Architect from the full range of industry colors and color densities.
EHAF – CO – 01/03 -7 - Section 10260

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas and conditions in which impact-resistant wall protection system components and
impact-resistant wall covering materials will be installed.
1. Complete finishing operations, including painting, before installing impact-resistant wall
protection system components.
B. Impact-Resistant Wall Covering Materials: Wall surfaces to receive impact-resistant wall covering
materials shall be dry and free from dirt, grease, loose paint, and scale.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. General: Before installation, clean substrate to remove dust, debris, and loose particles.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Install impact-resistant wall protection system components level, plumb, and true to line without
distortions.
1. Do not use materials with chips, cracks, voids, stains, or other defects that might be visible in the
finished Work.
B. Install aluminum retainers, mounting brackets, and other accessories according to the manufacturer's
written instructions.
1. Where splices occur in horizontal runs of more than (6.1 m), splice aluminum retainers and
plastic covers at different locations along the run.
3.04 CLEANING
A. General: Immediately on completion of installation, clean plastic covers and accessories using a
standard ammonia-based household cleaning agent. Clean metal components according to the
B. Remove excess adhesive using methods and materials recommended by the manufacturer.
C. Remove surplus materials, rubbish, and debris, resulting from installation, on completion of work and
leave installation areas in neat, clean condition.
END OF SECTION
EHAF – CO – 01/03 -8 - Section 10260

New Adminstartion Building Technical Specifications Dr.Ezz El-Din Fahmy
SECTION 10270
CABLE MANAGEMENT ACCESS FLOORING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Cable Management Access Flooring System provides a cable management access flooring structure with
accessible cable trenches throughout in a grid pattern, facilitating easy distribution of electrical, networking
and telecommunication cables under easily removable cable trench caps.
A. The Cable Management Access Floor System will consist of Main Panels, Base Connectors to connect
Main Panels in a manner that sets them apart, forming standard distance cable trenches, fully accessible
Central Caps and Flank Caps to cover the cable trenches. Standard height of the flooring systems shall be
low-profile of 150 mm (6”), 100 mm (4”), 76 mm (3”), 60 mm (2.36”), 50 mm (2”) and 40 mm (1.57”) high.
B. Main Panel is made of steel in-filled with light weight cement, factory assembled, height of 100 mm, with
four pedestals fixed at corners of the panel. Panel size shall be 510 mm X 510 mm (20.07”x20.07”). Main
Panel shall be installed using base connector to connect pedestals of the main panels, connecting the main
panels shall be without gluing, nailing or drilling.
C. Cable trenches shall be reticulated both ways within every 600 mm (23.62"). Clearance of cable trenches
shall be 5 mm less than the floor height. Opening width of cable trench shall be 95 mm (3.54”). Inside
capacity of the cable trench shall be no less than 100 mm (3.94") in width. Cable trenches shall be fully
accessible, covered by removable trench caps. The trench caps are made of steel, thickness no less than
2.0 mm (0.08"). Assembly of Cable Trench plus the Main Panel shall compose a module set of 600 X 600
mm (23.62" X 23.62").
D. The system shall be able to adjust height from top. The Central Cap shall have 16 mm diameter (0.623”)
holes at four corners. Screws to lock the Central Caps to the main panel, shall be anti-loose treatment to
prevent loosing
E. The Cable Management Floor System when assembled is non-combustible and shall meet BS: 476 Part 4,
"non-combustible" classification 1.
A. Structural Performance: CISCA A/F, "Recommended Test Procedures for Access Floors":
1. Concentrated Loads: shall be more than 450 Kg, with a top-surface deflection under load and a
permanent set not to exceed 2.0mm in accordance with ASTM E-196
2. Uniform Ultimate Loads: shall be more than 4000 kg / sq.m without failing, according to CISCA A/F,
Section II, "Ultimate Loading."
3. Rolling Loads: Of the following magnitude, with a combination of local and overall deformation not to
exceed 1.02 mm according to CISCA A/F, Section III, “Rolling Loads."
B. Seismic Performance: Provide access flooring system capable of withstanding the effects of seismic
motions determined according to ASCE 7, "Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures":
Section 9, "Earthquake Loads."
EHAF – CO – 01/03 -1 - Section 10270

May 2012, Rev. (0) Cable Management Access Flooring
1.04 SUBMITTALS
B. Shop Drawings: Include layout, details, sections, and relationship to adjoining Work.
Samples: For each material and exposed finish indicated
C. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with NFPA 75 requirements for raised flooring.
D. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections, demonstrate aesthetic effects, and set quality standards for
1. Size to be an area no less than five floor panels in length by five floor panels in width.
Completion.
E. Pre installation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
1.06 STANDARDIZED TECHNICAL RULES TO BE FOLLOWED BY THE CONTRACTOR:
A. All components and accessories, supplied by the manufacturer, shall be of first grade. Use of refurbished
materials is prohibited.
B. The Cable Management System shall meet non-combustible rating, tested in accordance with BS 476:
Part 4.
C. Method for testing Concentrated Load and Uniform Load shall be per ASTM E-196: "Standard Practice for
Gravity Load Testing of floors and flat roofs", as recognized under Federal, State and Municipal Building
Codes.
D. All tests shall be conducted by independent testing laboratory regularly.
E. All components delivered to job sites shall be in original, unopened package labeled with product name
and packing descriptions.
F. All flooring components should be supplied by the Manufacturer. Accessories, supplied by sources other
than the Manufacturer, should be approved by the manufacturer to ensure compatibility and integration.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 Manufacturers
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that
may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. ASM Modular Floors Inc.

2. InterfaceAR.
EHAF – CO – 01/03 -2 - Section 10270

3. Maxcess Technologies, Inc.

4. Tate Access Floors, Inc.
5. Netfloor
B. Basis-of-Design Product: Netfloor Camasscrete - CR 1000 A series or a comparable product by one of

the mentioned manufacturers
2.02 FLOOR PANELS AND UNDERSTRUCTURE
A. MAIN PANEL: Size 510 mm X 510 mm (20.07" X 20.07") square. Steel Top and bottom plates, powder
coating, light weight re-enforced cement in-filled, to form a 28 mm thick panel body. Factory assembled 4
built-in pedestals fixed at corners of the panel body. Total height shall be 100 mm.
B. CENTRAL CAP: 170 mm X 170 mm (6.69" X 6.69") square, 2.3 mm (0.09") thickness, all steel, protection
against corrosion by electro deposition or powder coating.
C. FLANK CAP: 211 mm X 120 mm (8.31" X 4.72"), 2.3 mm (0.09") thickness, all steel, protection against
corrosion by electro deposition or powder coating.
D. BASE CONNECTOR: 180 mm X 180 mm (7.09" X 7.09"), 7 mm (0.28") height. Steel, black, protection
against corrosion by electro deposition or powder coating.
2.03 ACCESSORIES:
A. Ramps, Starting Cap, Wall Rail, Edge Rail, aluminum Free Standing skirting, Cable-Exit Cap (Flank Cap
with 60 mm diameter opening), grommets, as indicated on the contract drawings.
2.04 FLOOR COVERINGS
A. Floor covering shall be 600 X 600 mm or 500 X 500 mm commercial rate carpet tile or commercial rate
vinyl tile of size 600 mm X 600 mm, thickness no less than 4.5 mm.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
A. Examine substrates for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of work.
B. Lay out floor panel installation to keep the number of cut panels at floor perimeter to a minimum. Avoid
using panels cut to less than 152 mm.
C. Locate each pedestal, complete any necessary subfloor preparation, and vacuum clean subfloor to
remove dust, dirt, and construction debris before beginning installation.
D. Before installation, any irregular sub-floor condition such as dampness, leaks, and indentation that would
affect quality of the finished floorings, shall be removed or patched
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. The system shall be installed in accordance with manufacturer's guidelines and installation manual.
B. Installation shall not be conducted if in-door temperature of the job site falls lower than -5 degree
centigrade (23º F)
EHAF – CO – 01/03 -3 - Section 10270

C. Sub-floor of the job site shall be generally level; elevation deviation shall not exceed more than 10
mm (3/8 inch) within 1 meter (3.3 feet) in all directions.
D. All cracks, holes and imperfections of the sub-floor shall be patched.
3.03 CLEANING AND MAINTENANCE
A. Cable trenches of the system and cavity under the Main Panel will be vacuum cleaner.
B. Electrical contractor shall connect the outlet box to building ground.
END OF SECTION
EHAF – CO – 01/03 -4 - Section 10270

SECTION 10271
ACCESS FLOORING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
1. Access flooring panels and understructure.

2. Floor panel coverings.
A. Structural Performance: CISCA A/F, "Recommended Test Procedures for Access Floors":
1. Concentrated Loads: not less than 25 KN, with a top-surface deflection under load and a permanent
set not to exceed, respectively, 2.54 and 0.25 mm according to CISCA A/F, Section I, "Concentrated
Loads."
2. Ultimate Loads: not less than 25 KN, without failing, according to CISCA A/F, Section II, "Ultimate
Loading."
3. Rolling Loads: Of the following magnitude, with a combination of local and overall deformation not to
exceed 1.02 mm according to CISCA A/F, Section III, "Rolling Loads."
4. Stringer Load Testing: 334 N to 3781 N at center of span with a permanent set not to exceed 0.25
mm, as determined per CISCA A/F, Section IV, "Stringer Load Testing."
5. Pedestal Axial Load Test 22 240 N to 26 690 N axial load per pedestal, according to CISCA A/F,
Section V, "Pedestal Axial Load Test."
6. Verify requirements for pedestal overturning moment in seismic zones with authorities Impact-load
performance is not included in CISCA A/F.
B. Floor Panel Impact-Load Performance: 34.0 kg to 79.4 kg when dropped from 914 mm onto a 6.5-sq. cm
area located anywhere on panel, without failing.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
B. Shop Drawings: Include layout, details, sections, and relationship to adjoining Work.
C. Samples: For each material and exposed finish indicated.
1. Product Data for Credit EQ 4.4: For particleboard used in steel-encapsulated, wood core panels,
documentation indicating that particleboard contains no urea formaldehyde.
D. Product test reports.
EHAF – CO – 01/03 -1 - Section 10271

May 2012, Rev. (0) Access Flooring
A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with NFPA 75 requirements for raised flooring.

B. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections, demonstrate aesthetic effects, and set quality standards for
1. Size to be an area no less than five floor panels in length by five floor panels in width.
Completion.
C. Pre installation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 FLOOR PANELS AND UNDERSTRUCTURE
A. Available Manufacturers:
1. AMICO-Genesis; Alabama Metal Industries Corporation.
2. InterfaceAR.
3. Tate Access Floors, Inc.
4. Lindner AG- Germany
B. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the product indicated on
Drawings.
C. Floor Panels, General: Provide modular panels complying with the following requirements that one
person, using a portable lifting device, can interchange with other field panels without disturbing adjacent
panels or understructure:
1. Nominal Panel Size: 600 X 600 mm.

2. Fabrication Tolerances: Fabricate panels to the following tolerances:
a. Size and Squareness: Plus or minus 0.38 mm of required size, with a squareness tolerance
of plus or minus 0.015 0.38 mm.
b. Flatness: Plus or minus 0.50 mm, measured on a diagonal on top of panel.
D. Formed-Steel Panels: Fabricated with die-cut flat top sheet and die-formed and stiffened steel bottom pan
formed from cold-rolled steel sheet and joined together by resistance welding, with metal surfaces
protected against corrosion by manufacturer's standard factory-applied finish to produce units of the
following type:
1. Solid Panels: Calcium Sulphate panels, flat, solid top surface.
2. Perforated Panels: Perforated top surface with holes of number, spacing, and size standard with
manufacturer to produce a nominal open area.
a. Quantity: As shown on Drawings.

b. Finish: Manufacturer's standard
EHAF – CO – 01/03 -2 - Section 10271

E. Pedestals: Assembly consisting of base, column with provisions for height adjustment, and head (cap);
made of steel.
1. Provide pedestals designed for use in seismic applications.
2. Base: Square or circular base with not less than 103 sq. cm of bearing area.
3. Column: Of height required to bring finished floor to elevations indicated. Weld to base plate.
4. Head: Designed to support understructure system indicated.
a. Provide sound-deadening pads or gaskets at contact points between heads and panels.
F. Stringer Systems: Modular steel stringer systems
1. Stringers: Snap-on.
2. Provide continuous gasket at contact surfaces between panel and stringers.
2.02 FLOOR PANEL COVERINGS
A. Provide bare panels without factory-applied floor coverings on traffic surfaces.
B. General: Provide factory-applied floor coverings of type indicated that are laminated by access flooring
manufacturer to tops of floor panels
C. Colors, Textures, and Patterns: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range
D. Standard Plastic Laminate: NEMA LD 3, High-Wear type, fabricated in one piece to cover each panel face
1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering

products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
2. Manufacturers:
a. Formica Corporation.
b. Nevamar Company, LLC.
c. Lindner AG – Germany
3. Basis-of-Design Product: Lindner Norit , Type NORTEC 30ST

4. 3.5mm, thickness
2.03 ACCESSORIES
A. Adhesives: Manufacturer's standard adhesive for bonding pedestal bases to subfloor.
1. Provide adhesive with a VOC content of 70 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59,
EHAF – CO – 01/03 -3 - Section 10271

B. Post-Installed Anchors: For anchoring pedestal bases to subfloor, provide [2] to [4] post-installed
expansion anchors made from carbon-steel components, zinc plated to comply with ASTM B 633,
Class Fe/Zn 5 (5 microns) for Class SC 1 service condition mild, with the capability to sustain, without
failure, a load equal to 1.5 times the loads imposed by pedestal overturning moment on fasteners, as
determined by testing per ASTM E 488, conducted by a qualified independent testing agency.
C. Cutouts: Provide cutouts for cable penetrations and service outlets with additional support, if needed.
1. Number, Size, Shape, and Location: As indicated.

2. Provide foam-rubber pads for sealing annular space formed in cutouts by cables.
D. Service Outlets: Standard UL-listed and -labeled assemblies.
1. Structural Performance: Cover capable of supporting a 4448-N concentrated load.

2. Location: In center of panel quadrant, unless otherwise indicated.
3. Receptacles and Wiring: Equip each service outlet with power receptacles to comply with the
requirements.
E. Diffusers: Manufacturer's standard round diffusers, 102 mm to 203 mm in diameter, formed from
polycarbonate plastic, manually adjustable flow regulator, dirt and dust receptacle, trim ring, underfloor
compression mounting ring; and complying with the following requirements:
1. Air-Distribution Characteristics: 47 L/s at 24-Pa static pressure and a maximum noise criterion
rating of 15.
2. Structural Performance: Capable of supporting a 2669-N concentrated load.
3. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Classified 94V-0 per UL 94.
F. Cavity Dividers: Manufacturer's standard metal dividers located where indicated to divide underfloor
cavities.
G. Perimeter Support: Manufacturer's standard method for supporting panel edge and forming transitions.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
A. Examine substrates for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of work.
B. Lay out floor panel installation to keep the number of cut panels at floor perimeter to a minimum. Avoid
using panels cut to less than 152 mm.
C. Locate each pedestal, complete any necessary subfloor preparation, and vacuum clean subfloor to
remove dust, dirt, and construction debris before beginning installation.
EHAF – CO – 01/03 -4 - Section 10271

3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install access flooring system and accessories under supervision of access flooring manufacturer's
authorized representative to produce a rigid, firm installation that complies with performance requirements
and is free of instability, rocking, rattles, and squeaks.
B. Set pedestals by post-installed mechanical anchors.
C. Install flooring panels securely in place, properly seated with panel edges flush. Do not force panels into
place.
D. Scribe perimeter panels to provide a close fit with adjoining construction with no voids greater than 3 mm
where panels abut vertical surfaces.
1. To prevent dusting, seal cut edges of steel-encapsulated, wood-core panels with sealer
recommended in writing by panel manufacturer.
E. Cut and trim access flooring at a remote location to prevent contamination of subfloor under access
flooring already installed.
F. Ground flooring system as recommended by manufacturer and as needed to comply with performance
requirements for electrical resistance of floor coverings.
G. Clean and vacuum subfloor area as installation of floor panels proceeds.
H. Seal underfloor air cavities at construction seams, penetrations, and perimeter to control air leakage as
recommended in writing by manufacturer.
I. Install access flooring without change in elevation between adjacent panels and within the accepted
tolerances.
3.03 ADJUSTING, CLEANING, AND PROTECTION
A. Prohibit traffic on access flooring for 24 hours and removal of floor panels for 72 hours after installation to
allow pedestal adhesive to set.
B. After completing installation, vacuum clean access flooring and cover with continuous sheets of reinforced
paper or plastic. Maintain protective covering until time of Substantial Completion.
C. Replace access flooring panels that are stained, scratched, or otherwise damaged or that do not comply
with specified requirements.
END OF SECTION
EHAF – CO – 01/03 -5 - Section 10271

SECTION 10425
SIGNS
PART 1 GENERAL

A. Drawings and general provisions of contract, including general and Special Conditions and division-
1 specification sections, apply to work of this section.
A. This section covers furnishing and installation of signage system and plastic laminate identification
signs for the project, wording, and letter styles and sizes shall be as indicated on the construction
drawings or as specified herein.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Drawings and Data. Complete specifications, detailed drawings, and setting or erection drawings
shall be submitted in accordance with the procedure set forth in the Submittals section.
B. Full size paper templates shall be provided, indicating the spacing for each line of letters and the
locations of all stud bolts, as a guide for the drilling of holes in the masonry or concrete wall.
C. Cast acrylic Signs. A complete listing of all name plates and number plates covered by this section
shall be submitted for review in accordance with the Submittals section. Listing shall contain the
exact wording proposed for each sign, the size of the sign, the size of the lettering and the
proposed mounting method.
D. Interior Signage System. Complete specifications and details, including typical sign elevations and
mounting details, and a complete listing of all signs to be provided shall be submitted in accordance
with the procedure set forth in the Submittals section. The listing shall include sign size, text, colors,
and installation locations.
E. Samples. Two samples each of the previous items shall be submitted. Samples shall be
resubmitted as required until acceptable.
F. Shop Drawings: For each type of sign indicated.
G. Provide plans, elevations, and at least (1:20) scale sections of typical members and other
components. Show anchors, reinforcement, accessories, layout, and installation details relative to
materials and dimensions of individual components, profiles, and finishes.
H. Provide message list, including details of wording and lettering layout, at least half size. Include
full-size details of special graphics.
I. Provide Wiring Diagrams: Details of wiring for electrical service from manufacturer for internally
illuminated signs. Differentiate between manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring.
J. Show required location of connections to electrical service.
EHAF – CO – 01/03 -1- Section 10425

May 2012 - Rev.(0) Signs
1.04 WARRANTY
A. The contractor shall submit a warranty covering all the manufacturing defects but not limited to the
following:
1. Coating degradation.
2. Chalking.
3. Fading.
4. Cracking.
1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING.
A. Protection. All signs and assemblies shall be protected during fabrication, shipment, storage, and
installation to prevent damage. Damaged units will be rejected and shall be replaced at no additional
cost to the Employer.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 STAIRCASES AND FLOOR SIGNAGE.
A. These spaces locations shall be indicated by a silver electro statically coated aluminum panels 3mm
thick with a varying heights according to working drawings.
B. These panels shall be located in each floor, and at each staircase .
C. Panels shall be fixed to electro statically coated aluminum frames using tongue and groove method
as indicated on drawings.
D. The fixation system shall be easy and flexible to use.
E. The aluminum plates shall be fixed by sliding on the aluminum frame bars and closed upon by a
moveable aluminum bar from one side.
2.02 STAIRCASES EXITS AND PUBLIC AREAS SIGNAGE.
A. These types shall be Cast Acrylic Sheets 3 mm cast (not extruded or continuous cast) methyl
methacrylate monomer plastic sheet.
B. Graphics and text shall be either laser engraved or Surface-Applied, Die-Cut Vinyl Copy depending
on signage type (illuminated or opaque) Provide die-cut characters from non reflective vinyl film with
pressure-sensitive adhesive backing. Apply copy to exposed face of sign panel.
C. Standard panel sizes shall be as required (250 mm X 200 mm), for approved text composition 15 mm
margin all around. Colors: white background, 25 mm letters according to approved colors.
D. Sheet corners shall be square. Mounting: electro statically coated aluminum frame with Drilled and
edge sealed holes for four fasteners as indicated in drawings. Provide masonry anchors, screws, and
straps as required and accepted for various substrates.
E. The emergency exit sign shall be (400 mm X 200 mm) of cast acrylic sheet 3 mm thick. White
Translucent Sheet: provide white translucent sheet of density required to produce uniform brightness
and minimum halation effects.
EHAF – CO – 01/03 -2- Section 10425

F. Opaque Sheet: Where sheet material is indicated as "opaque," provide colored opaque acrylic sheet
in colors and finishes indicated, text shall be engraved according to approved samples and text style.
G. Both "emergency exit" sign and "Warning - No Lifting Allowed" sign letters text shall be of 50 mm
height according to approved colors.
H. All signs shall be fixed on indicated locations as per drawings.
I. These types shall be either wall mounted (parallel or perpendicular to wall) or ceiling hung according
to indicated on drawings.
J. All hang signs and perpendicular to wall signs shall be readable from both faces while panels fixed
parallel to walls shall be a one face readable signs.
K. All signs shall be framed by an electro statically coated aluminum frames as shown on working
drawings.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION.
A. Signs shall be installed at the locations detailed or as directed, in accordance with the manufacturer's
recommendations and the final shop drawings. Damaged units or components shall be removed and
replaced at no cost to the Employer.
B. All signs shall be cleaned to the satisfaction of the Project Engineer using recommended methods,
upon completion of the installation and again, just prior to acceptance of the project.
END OF SECTION
EHAF – CO – 01/03 -3- Section 10425

SECTION 10540
ENTRANCE CANOPY
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION
A. Provide fixed Custom Canopy as shown on the drawings, as specified, and as needed for a
complete and proper installation.
B. The drawings show the extent of the work, the dimensioned aluminum profile, glass sections and
ploy carbonate sheets covering to be provided.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Indicate on shop drawings, system and components dimensions, components within assembly,
Drawings shall show canopy layout, required design loads per local building code, structural
members and footing sizes.
B. Canopy erection drawings shall be furnished at time of shipment. Piece marks shall be specified to
facilitate easy field identification of all major components .
C. Submit calculations as required and as specified herein for the elements of the Glass and Steel
columns. Calculations shall contain the seal of specialized Contractor’s Consultant which shall be
approved by the Engineer. Submit calculations as specified herein.
1. Submit engineering calculations to show that maximum deflections do not exceed
specified performance requirements under full design loading.
2. Submit calculations of pressure equalization.
D. Samples: Submit three samples of each type of material to be used on the project, with respective
finishes
1. Samples shall represent physical and chemical properties, finishes and colors to be
supplied for Engineers selection and approval.
A. Design and size members to withstand dead loads and live loads as calculated in accordance with
the local applicable codes and as measured in accordance with ANSI/ASTM E 330.
B. Deflection of the horizontal members shall not exceed 1/300.
C Vibration Harmonics, wind whistles, noises caused by thermal movement, thermal

movement transmitted to other connected elements, loosening, weakening or fracturing of
attachments or components of system are not permitted.
1.04 REFERENCES
A. ASTM International:
1. ASTM A36/A36M - Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel.
2. ASTM A53/A53M - Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-
Coated,
Welded and Seamless.
EHAF – CO – 01/03 -1 - Section 10540

May 2012 - Rev.(0) Entrance Canopy
3. ASTM A123/A123M - Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron
and Steel Products.
4. ASTM A153/A153M - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel
Hardware.
5. ASTM A167 - Standard Specification for Stainless and Heat-Resisting Chromium-Nickel
Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip.
6. ASTM A276 - Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Bars and Shapes.
7. ASTM A297/A297M - Standard Specification for Steel Castings, Iron-Chromium and Iron-
Chromium-Nickel, Heat Resistant, for General Application.
8. ASTM A283/283M - Standard Specification for Low and Intermediate Tensile Strength
Carbon Steel Plates.
9. ASTM A307 - Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60 000 PSI Tensile
Strength.
10. ASTM A312/A312M - Standard Specification for Seamless and Welded Austenitic Stainless
Steel Pipes.
11. ASTM A325M - Standard Specification for High-Strength Bolts for Structural Steel Joints
(Metric).
12. ASTM A354 - Standard Specification for Quenched and Tempered Alloy Steel Bolts, Studs,
and
Other Externally Threaded Fasteners.
13. ASTM A500 - Standard Specification for Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel
Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes.
14. ASTM C794 - Standard Test Method for Adhesion-in-Peel of Elastomeric Joint Sealants.
15. ASTM C920 - Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants.
16. ASTM D412 - Standard Test Methods for Vulcanized Rubber and Thermoplastic Rubbers
and Thermoplastic Elastomers -Tension.
1.05 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with

minimum Five years documented experience.
B. Design Canopy system under direct supervision of specialized Contractor’s Consultant which shall
be approved by the Engineer.
C. Installer: Company specializing in performing Work of this section with minimum five years
documented experience which shall be approved by Canopy manufacturer.
D. Sealant Installer: Installer of sealant materials shall have a minimum five (5) years of successful
experience in the application of sealants and shall be certified by the manufacturer for use of
sealants to be installed. Sealant contractor shall require sealant manufacturer to review the joint
conditions and details for the work. Contractor shall submit written certification from the sealant
manufacturer for the following:
1. Joints are of the proper size and design.

2. The materials supplied are compatible with adjacent materials and backing.
3. The materials will provide permanent watertight seals.
4. The materials will provide permanent watertight seals.
5. The materials supplied meet specified performance requirements.
EHAF – CO – 01/03 -2 - Section 10540

1.06 MOCK-UP
A. Construct mock-up indicating typical Canopy construction including all materials and conditions. Size
mock-up minimum: 1 x 1 m.
B. Locate where directed by Architect/Engineer.
C. Incorporate accepted mockup as part of Work.
1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION
A. Provide wrapping or strippable material to protect prefinished aluminum surfaces. Do not use
adhesive papers or spray coatings that bond when exposed to sunlight or weather.
1.08 FIELD MEASUREMENTS
A. Verify field measurements prior to fabrication.
1.09 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate the Work with installation of roofing system and structural curb.
1.10 WARRANTY
A. Furnish Ten year manufacturer warranty for Glass and Steel Canopy.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. GENERAL
1. All materials shall be new, of good quality and without defects that would lessen the quality of
the product .
2. All materials shall conform to the specifications and standard practices of the latest editions
of the AISC Manual of Steel Construction, AISIS specifications for the Design of Cold Formed
Members, ASTM A6 Standard
3. Specifications for General Requirements for Rolled Steel Plates, Shapes, Sheets and Bars
for Structural Use, and AWS D1.1 for welded connections
EHAF – CO – 01/03 -3 - Section 10540

2.02 FABRICATION, GENERAL

A. Provide fixed Canopy and accessories of design, material, sizes, depth, arrangement, and
thickness as indicated on drawings and as required for optimal performance with respect to
strength; durability; and uniform appearance.
B. Provide aluminum and glass profile similar to the existing profile of the elevations.
C. Provide poly carbonate covering as required for optimal performance with respect to thickness,
color, strength and uniform appearance.
B. Include supports, anchorage, and accessories required for complete assembly
2.03 COMPONENTS:
A. Steel Tubes:
1. Tube material shall conform to ASTM A500 Gr. B or equivalent minimum.
2. Assembly to consist of a hollow tube with forged cone welded on each end. Tube ends to
remain open. Substitution of sealed tubes not acceptable.
B. Steel columns covered with stainless steel

1. Conforming to A1S1 C1045 material - normalized. They shall be drilled and tapped as
necessary. Extra holes other than those specifically shown in approved drawings not
permitted. Two piece joinery is not acceptable.
2. Joints using gusset plates, two piece assemblies or friction fit shall not be used.
Bolts: Shall conform to ASTM A307, A325 or A490 or equivalent.
C. Glass : Clear Float Glass, Type I, class 1, transparent. : ASTM C 1036, Type I, Quality-
Q3, Class I, complying with the following requirements:
1. Thermal Properties (EN 673)

a. Ug-Value: 2.7 (W/m2.K)
2. Light Properties (EN 410)

a. Light Transmission: 37%
b. Light Reflection: 19%
c. Internal light Reflection: 35%
3. Energy Properties: EN 410 ISO9050

a. Direct Energy Transmission: 26 25
b. Energy Reflection: 13 12
c. Total Energy Absorption 61 63
4. Solar Absorp. Glass 1(a e 1) 59 60
5. Solar Absorp. Glass 2(a e 2) 2 3
6. Solar Factor (g) 35 34
7. Shading Coefficient 0.4 0.39
8. U-V Transmission 13
D. Poly carbonate Sheets: shall conform to the following requirements:
1. Plastic Glazing: Polycarbonate sheet; ASTM C 1349, with polished finish.

a. Nominal Thickness as indicated on drawings
b. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
c. Flame-Spread Index: 75 or less.
d. Provide safety glazing labeling.
E. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B211, Alloy 6063-T5.
EHAF – CO – 01/03 -4 - Section 10540

F. Fasteners: Fasteners shall be aluminum or stainless steel. Provide types, gauges and lengths to
suit unit installation conditions.
G. Anchors and Inserts: Use non-Ferrous metal or hot dip galvanized anchors and inserts for
installation and elsewhere as required for corrosion resistance. Use stainless steel or lead
expansion bolt devices for drill-in place anchors. Furnish inserts, as required, to be set into
concrete or masonry work.
2.04 STRUCTURE
A. The structure should be made from painted steel & Stainless Steel columns as per the drawing.
B. The cables and fitting should be manufactured by the same supplier.
C. The cables should be pretension by specialist in this field using appropriate tensioning machine
and techniques.
D. The fittings should be connected to the cable by swaged connection made by the cable
manufacturer.
E. The main contractor designs the supporting beams, columns and foundation, which can take the
high forces from the cable pre-tensioning and reaction.
F. Design software should allow for the cable design and should be used by qualified design
engineer with experience in this field not less than 7 years.
2.05 ACCESSORIES
A. Flashings: As recommended by manufacturer of Glass and Steel Canopy system conforming to

requirements specified in Section 07620.
B. Touch-Up Primer for Galvanized Steel Surfaces: Zinc rich type.
C. Fasteners: Non-corrosive type as recommended by Glass and Steel Canopy manufacturer.
D. Anchorage Devices: Type recommended by manufacturer.
2.06 FABRICATION
A. Form Steel Canopy rafters as true shapes and forms as indicated on Drawings.
B. Fit and secure joints and corners to make joints rigid, with connections that are flush, hairline, and
weatherproof.
C. Fabricate components to allow for expansion and contraction with minimum clearance and shim
spacing around perimeter of assembly.
D. Maintain continuous air and vapor barrier throughout assembly, with barrier plane aligned with
inside pane of glazing continuing to heel bead of glazing sealant.
E. Drain water entering exterior joints, condensation occurring in glazing channels, and migrating
moisture occurring within system, to exterior.
2.07 SUNSHADE CONSTRUCTION

A. Components: All blades and outrigger components shall be 6063-T5 aluminum alloy.
B. Blades shall be of sizes as shown on Drawings, extruded aluminum airfoil design. Blades
shall be factory assembled to outriggers using stainless steel, type F, thread cutting
screws through internal screw slots in blades. Welding is not acceptable. Blades must be
removable in case of damage. Fasteners to be hex head.
C. Blades to be rotated 45 degrees from vertical and spaced to provide 42 degree sun cut off
angle.
D. No Fascia is required.
E. Sunshade system to attach to Aluminum Wall Bracket to be supplied and designed by
sunshade manufacturer.
EHAF – CO – 01/03 -5 - Section 10540

2.08 SHOP FINISHING
A. Painted Tubes, connectors, tension cables and bases: AA-M12C12R1x non-specular as fabricated
mechanical finish, chemically cleaned, and prepared for applied coating; with organic coating.
B. Painted Aluminum Surfaces: AA-M12C12R1x non-specular as fabricated mechanical finish,
chemically cleaned, and prepared for applied coating; with organic coating.
1. High Performance Powder Coating: Polyester Powder coating system complying with AAMA
2604 of thickness minimum 80 to 100 micron.
2. Color: As selected.
C. All truss tubes shall be hot dip galvanized on both exterior and interior surfaces to a minimum zinc
film thickness of 55 microns as per ASTM A123-84. All threaded or tapped parts shall be electro-
galvanized according to ASTM B633-85.
D. Welding of tube ends to be done before galvanizing or by special manufacturing technique which
does not damage finish. Application of zinc rich primer over weld as corrosion protection in lieu of
the above is not acceptable.
E. Colors and sheen shall be uniform with no variations detectable by the naked eye at a 1500mm
distance. Metallic disbursement shall be uniform.
F. Exposed fastenings if occurring: Finished and colored to match the finish and color of the material
in which they appear. The paint finish or other finish provided shall be permanent and durable.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 SITE PREPARATION
A. Contractor shall ensure that other trades and personnel are not scheduled to be working
in canopy erection area during steel erection.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Anchor bolts and templates shall be shipped to the site prior to pouring canopy footings in
accordance with permit drawings. Anchor bolts may be requested subsequent to canopy
order placement
B. Canopy delivery schedule shall be coordinated.
C. Structural steel shall be set plumb, square and level in accordance with erection Drawings
provided with shipment.
D. Erection of structural steel shall be in accordance with the latest AISC Specifications and
Local Codes of Standard Practice.
E. All structural bolts shall be tightened by the turn-of-the-nut method as specified in the
latest Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts.
F. Fascia, and drain systems, as well as other accessories shall be assembled in
accordance with Erection Drawings provided with shipment.
END OF SECTION
EHAF – CO – 01/03 -6 - Section 10540

SECTION 10615
DEMOUNTABLE PARTITIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.02 SUMMARY

1. Demountable unitized-panel partitions.
2. Glass Panels Partitions.
1. Division 16 Sections for electrical and communication system connections.
A. Structural Performance: Provide partitions capable of withstanding the effects of gravity loads and the
following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated:
1. Load-Bearing Capacity of Panel System: Not less than 136-kg concentrated and 0.041-kg/linear
mm distributed proof load when tested according to BIFMA X 5.6, Section 6, Table 1.
2. Transverse-Load Capacity of Panel System: Lateral deflection of not more than 1/120 of the overall
span when tested under a uniformly distributed load of 24.4 kg/sq. m according to ASTM E 72.
3. Seismic Performance: Provide partitions capable of withstanding the effects of earthquake motions
determined according to ASCE 7, “Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures”.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
B. Shop Drawings: For partitions. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.
1. For installed products indicated to comply with design loads, include structural analysis data signed
and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.
C. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans, drawn to scale, on which penetrations and ceiling-mounted
items are shown and coordinated with partitions.
EHAF – CO – 01/03 -1 - Section 10615

May 2012, Rev. (0) Demountable Partitions
D. Samples for Initial Selection: For units with factory-applied color finishes.
E. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required, prepared on Samples of size indicated
below.
1. Panel Finish Face: Manufacturer's standard-size unit, but not less than 75 mm square.
2. Linear Trim: 300-mm long Samples.
3. Door Finish Face: Manufacturer's standard-size unit, but not less than 75 mm square.
4. Glazing: Manufacturer's standard-size unit, but not less than 75 mm square.
F. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing
agency, for each type of partition.
G. Maintenance Data: For partitions to include in maintenance manuals.
A. Sound Transmission Characteristics: Where STC ratings are indicated, provide partitions with STC rating
that was determined by testing an identical system according to ASTM E 90 and classified according to
ASTM E 413 by a qualified independent testing agency.
B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide partitions complying with the following requirements:
1. Where indicated, provide partitions identical to those of assemblies tested for fire resistance per
ASTM E 119 by UL or a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
a. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Indicated by design designations from UL's "Fire Resistance

Directory" or from the listings of another testing and inspecting agency.
2. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Provide partitions per ASTM E 84:
a. Flame-Spread Index: 25 or less.

b. Smoke-Developed Index: 450 or less.
C. Fire-Rated Door and Frame Assemblies: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled
by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire ratings indicated.
1. Test Pressure: Test at atmospheric neutral pressure according to NFPA 252 or UL 10B.
2. Test Pressure: Test according to NFPA 252 or UL 10C. After 5 minutes into the test, neutral
pressure level in furnace shall be established at 1016 mm or less above the sill.
3. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories (if indicated): Listed and labeled as defined in
NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked
for intended use.
D. Mockups: Before installing partitions, build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and
to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution.
Completion.
EHAF – CO – 01/03 -2 - Section 10615

A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install partition components until building is enclosed and
finishing operations, including ceiling and floor-covering installation and painting, are complete.
B. Field Measurements: Indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.
C. Coordination of Work: Coordinate layout and installation of partition components with other units of
Work. Installation of ceilings, floor coverings, lighting fixtures, HVAC equipment, and fire-suppression
systems should be completed before partitions are installed.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 General
A. Manufacturers: for panels, Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. Matfor Aluxol
2. Wilson Partitions
3. Panel Systems Manufacturing, Inc.;
4. Panelfold Inc.;
5. Hufcor
6. Acme Architectural Walls
2.02 DEMOUNTABLE UNITIZED-PANEL PARTITIONS
A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Matfor “Look” Demountable
Partitions Systems
B. Panels: Gypsum Board Panel.

1. Thickness overall: 88mm
2. Thickness panel to panel: 74mm
3. Width: 1200mm.
4. Finish: As indicated.
5. Colors: Textures, and Patterns: As selected by Architect.
C. Accessory Panels: Manufacturer's standard and as indicated on drawings.
D. Framing: Studs, top and bottom track

1. Aluminum.
E. Panel Joint Closure: As indicated.
F. Trim: hollow, flat, slotted, adjustable for variations in floor and ceiling levels.
1. Trim Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range and Match with Architect's
samples.
G. Frame Finishes: as indicated in drawings
EHAF – CO – 01/03 -3 - Section 10615

H. Hardware: As specified in Division 8 Section "Door Hardware
I. Glazing: Fully tempered clear float glass as indicated on drawings and complying with Division 8 Section
"Glazing."
1. Thickness of double glass: 8mm, can receive integral blinds
J. Acoustical Rating: STC 42db.
K. Insulation: Rock Wool 45mm thick, 40kg/m3 density with particle board
L. Fire-Resistance Rating of Partition Assemblies: 1 hour unless otherwise indicated on drawings.
M. Seals: Open cell, 32 kg/cu. m.
2.2 GLASS PANELS PARTITIONS
A. Glass Panels: Aluminum Framed glass panel partition system with acoustical properties, including panels,
seals, suspension system, operators, and accessories.
B. Panel Construction: Manufacturer's standard glazed panels, reinforced as required to support panel from
suspension components and with reinforcement for hardware attachment. Fabricate panels with tight
hairline joints and concealed fasteners. Fabricate panels so finished in-place partition is rigid; level;
plumb; aligned, with tight joints and uniform appearance; and free of bow, warp, twist, deformation, and
surface and finish irregularities.
C. Glass and Glazing: See Division 8 Section "Glazing."
1. Safety Glass: Provide glass products complying with testing requirements in 16 CFR 1201, for
Category II materials, unless those of Category I are expressly indicated and permitted.
2. Glass: Manufacturer's standard glass and glass assemblies as indicated and complying with
requirements in Division 8 Section "Glazing," and as follows:
a. Tempered Glass: ASTM C 1048, Kind FT (fully tempered), Type I (transparent flat glass),
Class 1 (clear).
b. Glass Thickness: 8mm thick, can receive integral blinds
3. Glazing System: double glazed system.
D. Dimensions: Fabricate demountable glass panel partitions to form an assembled system of dimensions
1. Thickness overall : 88mm,
2. Thickness panel to panel : 74mm
E. STC: Not less than 46 dB
F. Panel Closure: Manufacturer's standard.
EHAF – CO – 01/03 -4 - Section 10615

G. Hardware: Manufacturer's standard as required to operate operable panel partition and accessories; with
decorative, protective finish.
H. Finishes:
1. Aluminum: Complete RAL range
2.3 SEALS
A. General: Provide types of seals indicated that produce panel partitions complying with acoustical and fire-
resistive performance requirements and the following:
1. Manufacturer's standard seals.

2. Seals made from materials and in profiles that minimize sound leakage.
3. Seals fitting tight at contact surfaces and sealing continuously between adjacent panels and
between panel partition perimeter and adjacent surfaces.
2.03 FABRICATION
A. Demountable Unitized Panels and Glass Panels: Factory-assembled, flush, hollow unit construction; with
faces smooth and free of buckles, oil canning, and seams; and insulated with solidly packed, inorganic,
mineral filler. Fabricate panels for installation with concealed fastening devices and pressure-fit
components that will not damage ceiling or floor coverings. Fabricate panels with continuous light-and-
sound seals at floor, ceiling, and other locations where panels abut fixed construction.
1. Factory glaze panels to the greatest extent possible.
B. Components: Fabricate components for installation with concealed fastening devices and pressure-fit
members that will not damage ceiling or floor coverings. Fabricate for installation with continuous seals at
floor, ceiling, and other locations where partition assemblies abut fixed construction and for installation of
sound attenuation insulation in partition cavities.
2.04 FINISHES, GENERAL
A. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary
protective covering before shipping.
B. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are acceptable if
they are within one-half of the range of approved Samples. Noticeable variations in the same piece are
not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are acceptable if they are within the range
of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.
EHAF – CO – 01/03 -5 - Section 10615

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install partition systems rigid, level, plumb, and aligned. Install seals to prevent light and sound
transmission at connections to floors, ceilings, fixed walls, and abutting surfaces.
1. Installation Tolerance: Install each partition so that surfaces vary not more than 3 mm from the
plane formed by the faces of adjacent partitions.
B. Install door-and-frame, glazing-and-glazing-frame assemblies securely anchored to partitions and with

doors aligned and fitted. Install and adjust door hardware for proper operation.
1. Install fire-rated door frames according to NFPA 80.
3.02 DEMONSTRATION
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to demonstrate and train Owner's maintenance

personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain partitions. Refer to Division 1 Section "Demonstration and
Training."
END OF SECTION
EHAF – CO – 01/03 -6 - Section 10615

SECTION 10651
OPERABLE PANEL PARTITIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
1. Manually operated, acoustical panel partitions.

2. Electrically operated, acoustical panel partitions.
3. Manually operated, fire-rated panel partitions.
4. Manually operated, glass panel partitions.

A. Delegated Design: Design operable panel partitions including comprehensive engineering analysis by a
qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated.
B. Seismic Performance: Operable panel partitions shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions
determined according to SEI / ASCE 7.
1. The term "withstand" means "the panels will remain in place without separation of any parts from
the assembly when subjected to the seismic forces specified."
C. Acoustical Performance: Provide operable panel partitions tested by a qualified testing agency for the
following acoustical properties according to test methods indicated:
1. Sound-Transmission Requirements: Operable panel partition assembly tested for laboratory
sound-transmission loss performance according to ASTM E 90, determined by ASTM E 413, and
rated for not less than the STC indicated.
2. Acoustical Performance Requirements: Installed operable panel partition assembly, identical to
partition tested for STC, tted for NIC according to ASTM E 336, determined by ASTM E 413, and
rated for 10 dB less than STC value.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.
1. Indicate storage and operating clearances. Indicate location and installation requirements for
hardware and track, blocking, and direction of travel.
C. Samples: For each type of exposed material, finish, covering, or facing indicated.
EHAF – CO – 01/03 -1 - Section 10651

May 2012 – Rev.(0) Operable Panel Partitions
D. Delegated-Design Submittal: For operable panel partitions indicated to comply with performance
requirements, including analysis data and calculations signed and sealed by the qualified professional
engineer responsible for their preparation.
1. Design Calculations: Calculate requirements for seismic restraints.
E. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans, drawn to scale and coordinated with each other, based
on input from installers of the items involved:
F. Setting Drawings: For embedded items and cutouts required in other work including support-beam,
mounting-hole template.
G. Seismic Qualification Certificates: For operable panel partitions, accessories, and components, from
manufacturer.
H. Product certificates.
I. Product test reports.
J. Field quality-control reports.
K. Operation and maintenance data.
L. Warranty: Sample of special warranty.

A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufacturer that is certified for chain of custody by an FSC-
accredited certification body.
B. Installer Qualifications: An employer of workers trained and approved by manufacturer.
C. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to Division 1 Section "Quality Requirements" for
testing indicated.
D. Forest Certification: Fabricate products with wood, wood veneers, and wood-based panel products
produced from wood obtained from forests certified by an FSC-accredited certification body to comply with
FSC STD-01-001, "FSC Principles and Criteria for Forest Stewardship."
E. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide panels with finishes meeting one of the following as
determined by testing identical products by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to
authorities having jurisdiction:
1. Surface-Burning Characteristics: As determined by testing per ASTM E 84.
2. Fire Growth Contribution: Meeting acceptance criteria of local code and authorities having
jurisdiction when tested according to [NFPA 265] / [NFPA 286].
F. Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: Comply with NFPA 80, based on testing according to UL 10B.
1. Oversize Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: For units exceeding sizes of tested assemblies provide
certification by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction that doors comply with
standard construction requirements for tested and labeled fire-rated door assemblies except for
size.
G. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a
H. Pre installation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
EHAF – CO – 01/03 -2 - Section 10651

I. Protectively package and sequence panels in order for installation. Clearly mark packages and panels
with numbering system used on Shop Drawings. Do not use permanent markings on panels.
1.06 WARRANTY
components of operable panel partitions that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty
period.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Steel Frame: Steel sheet, manufacturer's standard thickness.

B. Steel Face/Liner Sheets: Tension-leveled steel sheet, manufacturer's standard thickness.
C. Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by aluminum producer and finisher for type of use, corrosion
resistance, and finish indicated; manufacturer's standard strengths and thicknesses for type of use.
D. Wood Frame: Clear, vertical-grain, straight, kiln-dried, fire-retardant-treated wood; of manufacturer's
standard species.
E. Gypsum Board: ASTM C 36/C 36M.
F. Cement Board: ASTM C 1288.
G. Plywood: DOC PS 1.
H. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, made with binder containing no urea formaldehyde.
I. Medium-Density Fiberboard: ANSI A208.2, made with binder containing no urea formaldehyde.
2.02 OPERABLE ACOUSTICAL PANELS
A. Operable Acoustical Panels: Operable wooden acoustical panel partition system, including panels, seals,
finish facing, suspension system, operators, and accessories.
products that may be incorporated into the work.
Drawings.
B. Panel Operation: Manually operated hinged panels.
C. Panel Construction: Provide top reinforcement as required to support panel from suspension components
and provide reinforcement for hardware attachment. Fabricate panels with tight hairline joints and
concealed fasteners. Fabricate panels so finished in-place partition is rigid; level; plumb; aligned, with
EHAF – CO – 01/03 -3 - Section 10651

tight joints and uniform appearance; and free of bow, warp, twist, deformation, and surface and finish
irregularities.
D. Dimensions: Fabricate operable acoustical panel partitions to form an assembled system of dimensions
indicated and verified by field measurements.
E. Panel Closure: Manufacturer's standard.
F. Hardware: Manufacturer's standard as required to operate operable panel partition and accessories; with
2.03 OPERABLE FIRE-RATED PANELS
A. Operable Fire-Rated Panels: Operable fire-rated acoustical panel partition system, including panels,
seals, finish facing, suspension system, operators, and accessories.

Drawings.
B. Panel Operation: Manually operated, individual / manually operated, paired panels.
C. Panel Construction: Provide top reinforcement as required to support panel from suspension components
and provide reinforcement for hardware attachment. Fabricate panels with tight hairline joints and
concealed fasteners. Fabricate panels so finished in-place partition is rigid; level; plumb; aligned, with
tight joints and uniform appearance; and free of bow, warp, twist, deformation, and surface and finish
irregularities.
D. Dimensions: Fabricate operable fire-rated panel partitions to form an assembled system of dimensions
E. Panel Closure: Manufacturer's standard fire-rated closure.
F. Hardware: Manufacturer's standard as required to operate fire-rated operable panel partition and
accessories; with decorative, protective finish.
2.04 OPERABLE GLASS PANELS

A. Operable Glass Panels: frameless glass panel partition system, including panels, seals, suspension
system, operators, and accessories.

Drawings.
B. Panel Construction: Manufacturer's standard glazed panels, reinforced as required to support panel from
suspension components and with reinforcement for hardware attachment. Fabricate panels with tight
hairline joints and concealed fasteners. Fabricate panels so finished in-place partition is rigid; level;
EHAF – CO – 01/03 -4 - Section 10651

plumb; aligned, with tight joints and uniform appearance; and free of bow, warp, twist, deformation, and
surface and finish irregularities.
C. Glass and Glazing: See Division 8 Section "Glazing."
1. Safety Glass: Provide glass products complying with testing requirements in 16 CFR 1201, for
Category II materials, unless those of Category I, are expressly indicated and permitted.
2. Glass: Manufacturer's standard glass and glass assemblies as indicated and complying with
requirements in Division 8 Section "Glazing," and as follows:
a. Tempered Glass: ASTM C 1048, Kind FT (fully tempered), Type I (transparent flat glass),
Class 1 clear / Class 2 tinted, Quality-Q3.
b. Tempered Patterned Glass: ASTM C 1048, Kind FT (fully tempered), Type II (patterned flat
glass), Class 1 (clear), Form 3 (patterned); and of quality, finish, and pattern specified.
c. Laminated Glass: ASTM C 1172.
d. Insulating-Glass Units: Factory-assembled units consisting of sealed lites of glass as
indicated, separated by a dehydrated interspace, and complying with ASTM E 774 for
Class CBA units.
e. Glass Thickness: Manufacturer's standard thickness for indicated requirements.
3. Glazing System: Manufacturer's standard factory-glazing system.
D. Dimensions: Fabricate operable glass panel partitions to form an assembled system of dimensions
E. Panel Closure: Manufacturer's standard.
F. Hardware: Manufacturer's standard as required to operate operable panel partition and accessories; with
G. Finishes:
1. Exposed Metal: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range as follows:
a. Aluminum: Powder Coating.
2.05 SEALS
A. General: Provide types of seals indicated that produce operable panel partitions complying with acoustical
and fire-resistive performance requirements and the following:
1. Manufacturer's standard seals.
2. Seals made from materials and in profiles that minimize sound leakage.
3. Seals fitting tight at contact surfaces and sealing continuously between adjacent panels and
between operable panel partition perimeter and adjacent surfaces, when operable panel partition is
extended and closed.
B. Horizontal Bottom Seals: PVC-faced, mechanical, retractable, constant-force-contact seal exerting
uniform constant pressure on floor when extended, ensuring horizontal and vertical sealing and resisting
panel movement.
EHAF – CO – 01/03 -5 - Section 10651

1. Mechanically Operated for Acoustical Panels: Extension and retraction of bottom seal by operating
handle or built-in operating mechanism, with operating range not less than 50 mm between
retracted seal and floor finish.
2. Mechanically Operated for Fire-Rated Panels: Extension and retraction of bottom seal by
operating handle or built-in operating mechanism, with operating range not less than 50 mm
between retracted seal and floor finish.
3. Automatically Operated for Acoustical Panels: Extension and retraction of bottom seal
automatically operated by movement of partition, with operating range not less than 50 mm
between retracted seal and floor finish.
2.06 FINISH FACING

A. General: Provide finish facings for panels that comply with indicated fire-test-response characteristics and
that are factory applied to operable panel partitions with appropriate backing, using mildew-resistant no
staining adhesive as recommended by facing manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Color/Pattern: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
B. Vinyl-Coated Fabric Wall Covering: Manufacturer's standard, mildew-resistant, washable, vinyl-coated
fabric wall covering; complying with CFFA-W-101-D for type indicated; Class A.
C. Carpet Wall Covering: Manufacturer's standard[ nonwoven, needle-punched carpet with fibers fused to
backing], from same dye lot, treated to resist stains.
D. Fabric Wall Covering: [Manufacturer's standard fabric] [100 percent polyolefin woven fabric] <Insert fabric
description>, from same dye lot, treated to resist stains.
E. High-Pressure Decorative Laminate: NEMA LD 3, Horizontal grade.
F. Wood Veneer: Laminated to fire-retardant-treated wood core with moisture-resistant adhesive, of wood
species indicated.
G. Paint: Manufacturer's standard factory-painted finish.
H. Cap-Trimmed Edges: Protective perimeter-edge trims with tight hairline joints concealing edges of panel
and finish facing.
I. Trimless Edges: Fabricate exposed panel edges so finish facing wraps uninterrupted around panel,
covering edge and resulting in an installed partition with facing visible on vertical panel edges, without trim,
for minimal sightlines at panel-to-panel joints.
2.07 SUSPENSION SYSTEMS

A. Suspension Tracks: Steel or aluminum mounted directly to overhead structural support designed for type
of operation, size, and weight of operable panel partition indicated. Size track to support partition
operation and storage without damage to suspension system, operable panel partitions, or adjacent
construction. Limit track deflection to no more than 2.54 mm between bracket supports. Provide a
continuous system of track sections and accessories to accommodate configuration and layout indicated
for partition operation and storage.
B. Carriers: Trolley system as required for configuration type, size, and weight of partition and for easy
operation; with ball-bearing wheels.
EHAF – CO – 01/03 -6 - Section 10651

C. Track Intersections, Switches, and Accessories: As required for type of operation, storage, track
configuration, and layout indicated for operable panel partitions, and compatible with partition assembly
specified. Fabricate track intersections and switches from steel or aluminum.
1. Multidirectional Switches: Adjustable switch configuring track into L, T, or X intersections and
allowing panels to be moved in all pass-through, 90-degree change, and cross-over travel direction
combinations.
D. Aluminum Finish: manufacturer's standard, factory-applied, decorative finish unless otherwise indicated.
E. Steel Finish: Manufacturer's standard, factory-applied, corrosion-resistant, and protective coating unless
2.08 ELECTRIC OPERATORS

A. General: Provide factory-assembled electric operation system of size and capacity recommended and
provided by operable panel partition manufacturer for partition specified; with electric motor and factory-
prewired motor controls, speed reducer, chain drive, remote-control stations, control devices, and
accessories required for proper operation. Include wiring from motor control to motor. Coordinate
operator wiring requirements and electrical characteristics with building electrical system.
B. Comply with NFPA 70.
C. Control Equipment: Complying with NEMA ICS 1, NEMA ICS 2, and NEMA ICS 6.
D. Motor Characteristics: Sufficient to start, accelerate, and operate connected loads at designated speeds,
within installed environment, with indicated operating sequence, and without exceeding nameplate rating
or considering service factor. Comply with NEMA MG 1.
E. Remote-Control Stations: Two single-key-operated, constant-pressure control stations located remotely
from each other on opposite sides and opposite ends of partition run. Wire in series to require
simultaneous activation of both key stations to operate partition. Each three-position control station
labeled "Open," "Close," and "[Off] [Stop]." Provide two keys per station.
F. Obstruction-Detection Devices: Provide each motorized operable panel partition with automatic safety
sensor that causes operator to immediately shut off motor
G. Limit Switches: Adjustable switches, interlocked with motor controls and set to automatically stop
operable panel partition at fully extended and fully stacked positions.
H. Emergency Release Mechanism: Quick disconnect-release of electric-motor drive system, permitting
manual operation in event of operating failure.
2.09 ACCESSORIES
A. Pass Doors: Fabricated to comply with recommendations the U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers
Compliance Board's ADA-ABA Accessibility Guidelines. Swinging door built into and matching panel and
thickness complete with frames and operating hardware. Hinges finished matching other exposed
hardware.
B. Storage Pocket Door: Full height at end of partition runs to conceal stacked partition; of same materials,
finish, construction, thickness, and acoustical qualities as panels; complete with operating hardware and
acoustical seals at soffit, floor, and jambs. Hinges in finish to match other exposed hardware.
EHAF – CO – 01/03 -7 - Section 10651

C. Electric Interlock: Provide each motorized operable panel partition with electric interlocks at locations
indicated, to prevent operation of operable panel partition under the following conditions:
1. On storage pocket door, to prevent operation if door is not in fully open position.
2. On partitions at location of convergence by another partition, to prevent operation if merging
partitions are in place.
D. Windows: As indicated.
E. Vertical Edge Trim: Manufacturer's standard transparent trim to protect vertical edges of glass in
frameless panels.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. General: Comply with ASTM E 557 except as otherwise required by operable panel partition
manufacturer's written installation instructions.
B. Install operable panel partitions and accessories after other finishing operations, including painting, have
been completed.
C. Install panels from marked packages in numbered sequence indicated on Shop Drawings.
D. Broken, cracked, chipped, deformed, or unmatched panels are not acceptable.
E. Broken, cracked, deformed, or unmatched gasketing or gasketing with gaps at butted ends is not
acceptable.
3.02 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust operable panel partitions to operate smoothly, without warping or binding. Lubricate hardware
electric operator and other moving parts.
B. Adjust pass doors and storage pocket doors to operate smoothly and easily, without binding or warping.
Check and readjust operating hardware. Confirm that latches and locks engage accurately and securely
without forcing or binding.
A. Light-Leakage Test: Illuminate one side of partition installation and observe vertical joints and top and
bottom seals for voids; adjust partitions for acceptable fit.
B. Testing Methodology: Perform testing of installed operable panel partition for noise isolation according to
ASTM E 336, determined by ASTM E 413, and rated for not less than NIC indicated. Adjust and fit
partitions to comply with NIC test method requirements.
C. Testing Extent: Testing agency shall randomly select one operable panel partition installation for testing.
D. Repair or replace operable panel partitions that do not comply with requirements.
EHAF – CO – 01/03 -8 - Section 10651

E. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of
repaired, replaced, or additional work with specified requirements.
F. Prepare test and inspection reports.
3.04 DEMONSTRATION
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust,

operate, and maintain operable panel partitions.
END OF SECTION
EHAF – CO – 01/03 -9 - Section 10651

SECTION 10800
TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of contract, including general and Special Conditions and division-1
specification sections, apply to work of this section.
A. This section covers toilet accessories as indicated on the Drawings and specified herein and shall
include the following items:
1. Mirrors
2. Toilet paper holders
3. Towel racks
4. Clothes hooks
5. Paper towel dispenser/disposal bins
6. Soap dispenser
7. Hand and hair dryer
8. Handicapped grab bars
A. All bathroom and toilet accessories work shall be performed in strict accordance with the
corresponding American standards ASTM & Federal standards FS, as noted herein below or other
equivalent International Standards.
Non corrosive general services steel pipes ASTM A269
Flat glass general specifications ASTM A666
Mirror Glass specifications FS DD-M-411C
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Contractor shall submit to the Consultant for approval in accordance with Section 01330 the following
items:
1. Materials list and equipment data
2. Certificates of origin, data sheets and technical reports
3. 4 copies of the shop drawings
4. Sample of each type of accessory
5. Installation and maintenance instructions
6. A detailed Method statement describing all work steps according to approved manufacturers
instructions
EHAF – CO – 01/03 -1 - Section 10800

May 2012, Rev. (0) Toilet and Bath Accessories
A. The contractor shall deliver all required quantities to site in unopened original containers indicated on it
the approved manufacturer trade mark and data sheet.
B. The contractor shall store all products of these sections according to approved manufacturer's
recommendations such that to assure its safety against any unfavorable conditions or scratching,
cracking and breaking etc…
C. Any materials spoiled due to storage and transport or any works in general etc. shall not be used and
will be replaced by new ones at contractor's own expenses.
1.06 WARRANTY
A. The contractor shall submit a warranty for a period not less than 10 years covering all the
manufacturing defects but not limited to the following:
1. Coating degradation.
2. Chalking.
3. Fading.
4. Cracking.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 GENERAL
A. Accessories shall be of constructed of corrosion-resisting steel and have stain stainless steel finish.
Surface-mounted accessories shall be mounted on concealed back plates unless otherwise specified.
Accessories installed without back plates shall have concealed fastenings.
B. Provide all anchor fasteners or other devices necessary for completely secure installations.
2.02 MIRRORS
A. Mirrors shall be a 6 mm thick with Silvering, electroplated copper coating, and protective organic
coating complying with FS DD-M-411.
B. Mirror-shelf combination units shall be of size as shown on Drawings and shall consist of stainless
steel channel frame with an integral heavy gage shelf, electro statically copper plated, polished plate
glass mirror.
C. All mirrors and mirror accessories shall be guaranteed for 10 years. Units shall be supplied from an
approved manufacturer.
2.03 TOILET PAPER HOLDERS
A. The contractor shall supply single toilet paper holder as indicated on drawings.
B. Toilet paper holder units shall be constructed of china holder of required shape color and size
approved by the Consultant, rollers shall consist of stainless steel brackets and chrome-plated roller
with heavy duty internal springs.
EHAF – CO – 01/03 -2 - Section 10800

2.04 TOWEL RACKS
A. Towel racks shall be 450 mm long, 20 mm diameter polished chrome finish towel bar supported by
two stainless steel brackets providing a projection of 80 mm. brackets shall be fixed to the walls using
special polished chrome finish items according to approved manufacturer’s recommendations and
approved samples by the Consultant.
2.05 CLOTHES HOOKS
A. Clothes hooks shall be of stainless steel consisting of a 50 mm by 50 mm walls plate and a 50 mm

extending hook bar. Clothes hooks shall be fixed in indicated locations as shown on drawings and
shall be according to approved manufacturer's recommendations and approved samples by the
Consultant.
2.06 PAPER TOWEL DISPENSER AND WASTE RECEPTACLE COMBINATIONS
A. Shall be constructed with polished chrome finish, exposed surfaces stain-finished, one piece flange
stainless steel construction and no mitered corners.
B. Cabinet door shall be wrap-free, hung on continuous polished chrome finish steel piano hinge fitted
with tumbler lock.
C. Waste receptable shall be stainless steel secured to frame with tumbler lock, removable for servicing,
capacity 12 gallons.
D. Push door waste receptacle shall be self-closing door hung on spring loaded piano hinge lettered
“PUSH”.
2.07 SOAP DISPENSERS
A. Surface-mounted tank-type 1.18 liter (40 oz) soap dispenser, rectangular-shaped, equipped with soap
level gauge.
B. Shall be liquid type, vertical style, positive shut-off soap valve with metal moving parts of polished
chrome finish and CP brass cylinder, and a view level indicator permitting instant check on soap
supply. With polyethylene reservoir concealed below deck.
C. Shall have a polished chrome finish wall plate bracket welded to back of tank, mechanically locking
into separate concealed stainless steel wall plate, providing a sturdy theft proof installation.
2.08 HAND AND HAIR DRYERS
A. Electric hand and hair dryers by hot air shall include a motor of 1/10 HP, 7500 rpm at rated load and
protected by a 5 Amp fuse. Fan shall be a double inlet centrifugal type and shall deliver 4.3 cu m per
minute through a 2000 Watt heating element and temperature shall not be raised at the discharge end
nozzle above 62° C at an ambient room temperature of 22° C.
B. The timing mechanism shall be designed to operate the dryer for a period of 30 seconds after
actuation by the push button.
C. All exposed portions of iron casting to be finished with acid-resisting polished chrome.
2.09 HANDICAPPED GRAB BARS
A. The contractor shall supply a polished chrome finish grab bars of 900 mm length, 38 mm diameter and
1.3 mm thickness .
B. Grab bars shall slip resistant on gripping areas ,and shall be fixed using two stainless plates 75 mm X
75 mm such that the distant from the wall finishing to the grab bar is at least 38 mm from the inside.
EHAF – CO – 01/03 -3 - Section 10800

PART 3 EXECUTIONS
A. Surface of fastening devices exposed after installation shall have the same finish as the attached
accessory. Exposed screw heads shall be oval. Specified heights above floor are approximate and are
to the centre of the accessory, unless otherwise indicated or specified. Upon completion of the
installation of accessories, the surface shall be protected with strippable plastic or by other approved
means pending final acceptance by the Consultant.
B. Surface-mounted accessories except as hereinafter specified, shall be installed with machine or wood
screws in metal or fiber shields or sleeves, or with toggle bolts, as required by the construction. Back
plates shall be installed in the same manner or shall be provided with lugs or anchors and set in
mortar as required by the construction.
C. Mirror-shelf combination units shall be installed on concealed polished chrome finish wall hangers with
shelf 1.30 m above the floor.
D. Toilet paper holders shall be installed on concealed polished chrome finish mounting brackets 750
mm above the floor.
E. Towel racks shall be installed on concealed polished chrome finish mounting brackets 1 m above the
floor.
F. Clothes hooks shall be installed on concealed polished chrome finish mounting brackets 1.60 m above
the floor.
END OF SECTION
EHAF – CO – 01/03 -4 - Section 10800

SECTION 11140
PEDSTARIN CONTROL EQUIPMENT
PART I – GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. This section covers the furnishing and installation of a complete Security Turnstile. Provide complete system
that has been fabricated and tested for proper operation. It includes rotor assembly, shield assembly, barrier
assembly, mechanism housing and security system as required for installation.
B. Swing Gates Turnstile
C. Tandem Full Height Turnstiles
D. Versatile Turnstiles
E. Mantrap Turnstile
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 08110 – Steel Doors and Frames

B. Section 16123 - Electrical Supply and Termination
A. Manufacturer shall be a company specializing in the supply of security turnstiles with a minimum of 10 years
experience.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit project specific shop drawings and finish samples.

B. Indicate pertinent dimensions, general construction, component connections and location, anchorage methods
and location, hardware, and installation details.
A. Deliver material to job site in manufacturer’s packaging undamaged, compete with installation instructions.
B. Store off ground, under cover, protected from weather and construction activities.
1.06 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS
A. Install security turnstile on the finished floor. Floor must be deal level at any point within the footprint of the
turnstile.
EHAF – CO – 01/03 -1 – Section 11140

May 2012, Rev. (0) Pedestrian Control Equipment
1.07 WARRANTY
Manufacturer shall warrant its products against defects in material and workmanship for a period of one (1)
year from the date of substantial completion or one and one half (1½) years from date of shipment. This
warranty excludes glass breakage, normal wear on finishes or damage that occurs due to abuse, misuse or
acts of God.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURER
A. Boon Edam Inc.

B. Hinckley,
C. Sentronic International
2.02 TURNSTILE CONSTRUCTION
A. Mechanism Housing: is constructed from an 8” structural aluminum channel (7” for stainless steel units). All
electrical and mechanical components are attached to the channel. The channel and operating mechanism are
covered by a 16 gauge stainless steel cover, 8 1/8”(7 1/8” for SS) Wide x 60” Long x 5” High.
B. Ceiling Plate: fabricated from 16 gauge steel attaches to the mechanism housing and spans the shield
assembly, providing stability and support for the turnstile.
C. Rotor Assembly: consists of 3 rotor posts with twelve rows of rotor arms which are welded to the front of each
rotor post (galvanized). Each rotor section is set at a position 120 degrees apart from one another. The top and
bottom of the entire rotor assembly is held together by a flange. Each rotor section attaches to the flange using
a 3/8” x 3” grade 5 fastener.
D. Barrier: consists of a barrier post and eleven arms welded (galvanized) and equally spaced at an offset to the
rotor assembly.
E. Shield Assembly: consists of 9 vertical posts welded (galvanized) to 2 rolled top and bottom tubes. The radius
of the shield assembly follows the rotor movement, guides patron flow and permits internal card reader cabling.
F. All components are constructed in such a manner as to eliminate all structural weaknesses.
2.03 EQUIPMENT
A. Rotor assembly: consists of three pieces of 2” square x 11” gauge tubing, each known as the rotor posts.
Construction material is dependent on the finish of the units (i.e carbon steel for galvanized and powder coated
units, stainless steel for stainless steel units, and aluminum for aluminum units.)
B. Arms: are 1 ½” scheduled 40 steel tubing. Each arm is closed with a force fit plastic cap to prevent injuries for
galvanized and powder coated units. 1 3/8” 16 gauge stainless steel type 304 for the stainless steel and
aluminum type units. Each stainless steel arm has a spun closed, ground and polished end.
C. Shield Assembly: is constructed from 1 ½” schedule 40 vertical and 2” x 2” 1/8” rolled horizontal tubing. All
components are welded to form a one-piece construction for galvanized and powder coated standard sized
units. The stainless steel, aluminum, 4 armed rotor, and extended sized units all have 3 vertical steel channels
with ¼” x 1 ½” curved ribs bolted to the vertical channels with construction material dependent on the finish of
the unit.
EHAF – CO – 01/03 -2 – Section 11140

D. Barrier Assembly: is designed to prevent passage in the reverse direction. It is fabricated using a 2” x 2” x 1/8”
vertical post with the horizontal 1 ½” schedule 40 arms welded perpendicularly to the post for galvanized and
powder coated, 1 3/8” 16 gauge stainless steel type 304 for the stainless steel and aluminum (EA) type units.
Each stainless steel arm has a spun closed, ground and polished end.
E. Bottom Bearing: is of the self-lubricating, waterproof and dustproof, sealed thrust type. The bearing is on a 9” x
1” clear anodized aluminum base plate. The base plate attaches to the floor by 3 anchor bolts, 3/8” x 2” long.
Has a dynamic load capacity in excess of 3200 lbs, a static load capacity of over 31,000 lbs. and maximum
rated RPM of 1700. (Anchors not included)
2.04 SECURITY EQUIPMENT
A. Actuation: Turnstile actuation by external card reader, biometric reader, key pad or remote push button.
2.05 DIMENSIONS
A. Passage width: not less than 25”

B. Overall height (electrical / mechanical): 84”- 89” as indicated on drawings and selected by Architect from
manufacturer’s full range.
C. Overall width: 60” – 96”
D. Capacity / minute2: 15 for single rotor, and 2x15 for dual rotors.
2.06 HARDWARE/MATERIALS
A. The locking and unlocking of the turnstile is accomplished by use of low voltage, 24 VDC, system. Activation is
by a momentary, isolated normally open dry contact closure.
B. Electrical controls are available in both entrance and exit directions. Controls may be fail-safe, fail-lock or any
combination, in either controlled direction.
C. All fail-lock applications include a mechanical key release, which shall allow free passage in case of an
emergency.
D. Once a direction of passage is opened, it shall remain open until the user proceeds through to the other side of
the turnstile. Once the user proceeds through the turnstile, the reset system automatically re-locks the turnstile
and readies it for the next user. The system shall stay open until the user proceeds through unless an optional
time out relay is used.
E. Double turnstiles can have as many as two controlled entry points and two controlled exit points. Each of the
controls points operates completely independently from any other direction of travel.
2.07 FINISHES
A. Hot dipped galvanized

B. Powder coated black. Other colors of powder coating available.
C. All # 304 stainless steel
D. Clear anodized aluminum is the standard finish on the aluminum unit with stainless steel arms
E. All stainless steel components on all units are polished to a #4B satin finish.
EHAF – CO – 01/03 -3 – Section 11140

2.08 VERSATILE TURNSTILES
A. This system of turnstile combines metal detection with the Dual Shield anodized aluminum turnstile. The fully
integrated system combines aesthetic appeal with real control for installations demanding accurate and
efficient monitoring of persons carrying metal objects.
2.09 MANTRAP TURNSTILE

This system provides the highest level of security through a two-stage entry process. The turnstile’s design
shall ensure that access is restricted to authorized users only.
Two-stage entry for maximum security
A. This high security system is specifically designed for very high security applications requiring positive
identification through a biometric device.
B. Use of the mantrap turnstile involves a two-stage entry process with independent controls for each stage:
1. At the initial stage, the user is required to present a valid form of identification. The turnstile shall rotate
90-degrees and allow access into the second quadrant.
2. Next, a second device (typically a biometric reader) verifies the individual’s identity before completing
the final 90-degree rotation to allow access into the secure area.
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Inspection: Installer must examine the location and advise the Contractor of any site conditions unacceptable
for proper installation of product. These conditions include but are not limited to the following:
1. Floor must be deal level at any point within the footprint of the turnstile.
Install shall not begin until these unacceptable conditions are rectified.
B. Erection: Install turnstiles in accordance with manufacturer’s printed instructions. Set units level, plumb and with
uniform hairline joints. Anchor securely into place. Use only factory trained installers.
C. Adjustment: Installer shall adjust turnstile, hardware and sensors for smooth operation and proper performance.
D. Maintenance: Follow maintenance procedures as outlined in the Instruction or Operation Maintenance Manual.
E. Cleaning: Clean metal and glass surfaces carefully after installation to remove excess caulk, dirt and labels.
END OF SECTION
EHAF – CO – 01/03 -4 – Section 11140

SECTION 12492
VERTICAL BLINDS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.02 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes vertical blinds.
B. Related Sections:The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:
1. Division 6 Section "Miscellaneous Carpentry" for wood blocking and grounds for mounting
vertical blinds.
2. Division 8 Sections for window walls with vertical blinds mounted on window frames.
3. Division 8 Sections for windows with vertical blinds mounted on window frames.
4. Division 16 Sections for electrical service and connections for motorized blind operation.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of

the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections.
B. Product data for each type of vertical blind specified. Include printed data on physical
characteristics.
C. Shop drawings showing location and extent of blinds. Show installation details at and
relationship to adjoining work. Include elevations indicating blind units. Indicate location
of blind controls.
D. Maintenance data for vertical blinds to include in the operation and maintenance manual
specified in Division 1. Include the following:
1. Methods for maintaining vertical blinds and finishes.

2. Precautions for cleaning materials and methods that could be detrimental to
finishes and performance
EHAF – CO – 01/03 -1 - Section 12492

May 2012, Rev. (0) Vertical Blinds
A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide vertical blinds identical to those tested for

the following fire-test-response characteristics as determined by UL or another testing
and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
1. Test Method: NFPA 701.

2. Rating: Pass.
B. Mockups: Before installing vertical blinds, construct mockups for each form of
construction and finish required to verify selections made under sample submittals and to
demonstrate aesthetic effects as well as qualities of materials and execution. Build
mockups to comply with the following requirements, using materials indicated for final unit
of Work.
1. Locate mockups on-site in the location and of the size indicated or, if not indicated,
as directed by the Consultant.
2. Notify the Consultant one week in advance of the dates and times when mockups
will be constructed.
3. Demonstrate the proposed range of aesthetic effects and workmanship.
4. Obtain the Consultant 's acceptance of mockups before start of final unit of Work.
5. Retain and maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a

standard for judging the completed Work.
a. When directed, demolish and remove mockups from Project site.
b. Accepted mockups in an undisturbed condition at the time of Substantial

Completion may become part of the completed Work.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. MHZ
B. Kirsh
C. Silent Gliss
D. El Akkad
E. El Hakim
2.02 FABRICATION
A. Unit Sizes: Obtain units fabricated in sizes to fill window and other openings as follows,
measured at 23 deg C.
EHAF – CO – 01/03 -2 - Section 12492

1. Blind Units Installed Between (Inside) Jambs: Width equal to (6 mm) per side or (12 mm)
total less than jamb to jamb dimension of opening in which each blind is installed. Length
equal to (6 mm), plus or minus (3 mm), less than head to sill dimension of opening in which
each blind is installed.
B. Installation Fasteners: Not less than 2 fasteners per bracket, fabricated from metal
noncorrosive to blind hardware and adjoining construction; support blind units under
conditions of normal use.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions for compliance with requirements for
installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of vertical louver blinds.
Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install blinds level and plumb. Do not remove warning labels describing hazards of
vertical blinds.
3.03 ADJUSTING
Adjust components and accessories for proper operation.
3.04 CLEANING
A. Clean blind surfaces, according to manufacturer's instructions, after installation.
B. Remove surplus materials, packaging, rubbish, and debris resulting from installation.
Leave installation areas neat, clean, and ready for use.
END OF SECTION
EHAF – CO – 01/03 -3 - Section 12492

SECTION 12497
DRAPERIES AND TRACKS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes draperies and drapery tracks.
B. Allowances: Furnish the following under the allowances indicated as specified in Division 1 Section
"Allowances":
1. The Work shall include double track of three channels, tailoring and fabrication of fabrics supplied by
the of 100%polyester FR (fire rated) fabric, wooden or steel frame, all required elements, accessories
and hardware for fixations as per drawings and approved samples and all necessary items to
complete the work as per specification & drawings.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For the following:
Tracks: Include maximum weights of draperies that can be supported.
a. Motorized Tracks: Indicate motor weights, motor-mounting requirements, and electrical

requirements.
Fabrics and textile: ( Supplied by the Employer)
B. Shop Drawings: For tracks. Show installation and anchorage details, locations of components and
controls, and field measurements.
Draperies: Show sizes, locations, and details of installation.
C. Coordination Drawings: For track installation; reflected ceiling plans drawn to scale and coordinating track
installation with openings and ceiling-mounted items.
D. Samples: For each drapery and for each fabric color and texture required.
E. Product Schedule: Use same designations indicated on Drawings.
F. Product Certificates: For each fabric treated with flame retardant, signed by fabric supplier.
G. Maintenance data.
EHAF – CO – 01/03 -1- Section 12497

May 2012, Rev. (0) Draperies And Tracks
A. Installer Qualifications: For draperies and tracks, fabricator of draperies.
B. Source Limitations: For draperies, obtain each color and pattern of fabric and trim from one dye lot.
C. Retain paragraph below if flame-retardant treatments are required for drapery fabrics. Model codes
require testing according to NFPA 701, Test Method 1 or 2, as appropriate, for draperies used in certain
occupancies. See "Drapery Flame-Resistance Testing" Article in the Evaluations for a discussion of the
applicability of each test method.
D. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: For fabrics treated with fire retardants, provide products that pass
NFPA 701 as determined by testing of fabrics that were treated using treatment-application method
intended for use for this Project by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction.
E. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100,
by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.
F. Corded Window Covering Product Standard: Provide drapery tracks operated by pull cords complying
with ANSI A100.1.
G. Mockups: Install mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate
aesthetic effects and set quality standards for fabrication and installation.
A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with
protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1. Track Carriers: For each size indicated, equal to 5 percent of amount installed, but no fewer than
10 of each size.
2. Track Controls: For each type indicated, equal to 5 percent of amount installed, but no fewer than
10 of each size.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 DRAPERY TRACKS
A. Manually Operated Track :
1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products that may be
2. Retain subparagraph above for nonproprietary or first subparagraph below for semiproprietary
specification. Refer to Division 1 Section "Product Requirements."
EHAF – CO – 01/03 -2- Section 12497

3. Construction: Extruded aluminum, slotted for mounting at interval of not more than 610 mm
o.c., and bendable to radii indicated.
a. Lengths and Configurations: As indicated on Drawings.

b. Finish: Lacquered, white color RAL9016.
4. Mounting Brackets: Aluminum, of type suitable for fastening track to surface indicated and
designed to support weight of track assembly and drapery plus force applied to operate track.
a. Mounting Surface: Ceiling.
5. Installation Fasteners: Sized to support track assembly and drapery, and fabricated from metal
compatible with track, brackets, and supporting construction. Provide two fasteners to fasten each
bracket to supporting construction.
6. Operation: As per drawing details.
7. Manufacturers:
b. MHZ
c. Kirsh
d. Silent Gliss
2.02 DRAPERY FABRICS
A. All Fabrics for draperies will be supplied by the Owner.
2.03 DRAPERY FABRICATION
A. Fabricate draperies in heading styles and fullnesses indicated. Fabricate headings to stand erect. If less
than a full width of fabric is required to produce panel of specified fullness, use equal widths of not less
than one-half width of fabric located at ends of panel.
1. One-Way-Stacking Draperies: Add 127 mm to overall width for returns.
2. Center-Opening Draperies: Add 254 mm to overall width for overlap.
B. Seams: Sew vertical seams with twin-needle sewing machine with selvage trimmed and overlocked. Join
widths so that patterns match and vertical seams lay flat and straight without puckering. Horizontal seams
are not acceptable.
C. Side Hems: Double-turned, 38 mm wide hems consisting of three layers of fabric, and blind stitched so
that stitches are not visible on face of drapery.
D. Bottom Hems: Double-turned, 102 mm wide hems consisting of three layers of fabric, and weighted and
blind stitched so that weights and stitches are not visible on face of drapery.
1. Sew in square lead weights at each seam and at panel corners.
EHAF – CO – 01/03 -3- Section 12497

E. Interlinings: Extend from top of drapery to within 13 mm of lining's bottom hem and to leading edge of side
hems to produce full-shadowed appearance.
F. Linings: Equal to widths of drapery fabric and joined to drapery fabric at top by inside invisible seam, and
hand stitched at side hems and shadowed with 38 mm return of face fabric.
1. Bottom Hem: Blind stitch to drapery fabric.
G. Manufacturers:
1. El Akkad
2. El Hakim
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 DRAPERY TRACK INSTALLATION
A. Install track systems according to manufacturer's written instructions, level and plumb, and at height and
location in relation to adjoining openings as indicated on Drawings.
B. Isolate metal parts of tracks and brackets from concrete, masonry, and mortar to prevent galvanic action.
Use tape or another method recommended in writing by track manufacturer.
3.02 DRAPERY INSTALLATION
A. Where draperies abut overhead construction, hang draperies so that clearance between headings and
overhead construction is 6.4 mm.
B. Where draperies extend to floor, install so that bottom hems clear finished floor by not more than 25 mm
and not less than13 mm.
C. Where draperies extend to windowsill, install so that bottom hems hang above sill line and clear sill line by
not more than 13 mm.
3.03 Insert other length requirements, if necessary, to suit Project
3.04 ADJUSTING
A. After hanging draperies, test and adjust each track to produce unencumbered, smooth operation.
B. Steam and dress down draperies as required to produce crease- and wrinkle-free installation.
C. Remove and replace draperies that are stained or soiled.
END OF SECTION
EHAF – CO – 01/03 -4- Section 12497


Arch. Specs PDF

Încărcat de

Informații document

Titlu original

Drepturi de autor

Formate disponibile

Partajați acest document

Partajați sau inserați document

Opțiuni de partajare

Vi se pare util acest document?

Este necorespunzător acest conținut?

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

Arch. Specs PDF

Încărcat de

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

BG EGYPT NEW ADMINISTRATION

SUBMISSION DATE : JULY 2012

DOCUMENT III : TECHNICAL CONDITIONS *

Part2 : Bill of Quantities

* Indicates the documents included in this book

Document III : Technical Conditions

Part 1 : Technical Specifications

Volume 1 : Architectural Technical Specifications

Division 02 Site Works

Division 03 Concrete Works

Division 04 Masonry Works

Division 05 Metal Works

Division0 6 Wood and Plastics

Division 07 Moisture and Thermal Protection

Section 07410 Metal Roof & Wall Panels

Division 08 Doors and Windows

1. Preparing subgrades for slabs-on-grade, walks, pavements, grasses and plants.

A. Backfill: Soil material used to fill an excavation.

EHAF – CO – 01/03 -1 - Section 02300

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS

2.01 SOIL MATERIALS

3.02 EXCAVATION, GENERAL

3.03 EXCAVATION FOR STRUCTURES

EHAF – CO – 01/03 -3 - Section 02300

3.04 EXCAVATION FOR WALKS AND PAVEMENTS

3.05 EXCAVATION FOR UTILITY TRENCHES

A. Excavate trenches to indicated gradients, lines, depths, and elevations.

3.06 SUBGRADE INSPECTION

3.07 UNAUTHORIZED EXCAVATION

EHAF – CO – 01/03 -4 - Section 02300

3.08 STORAGE OF SOIL MATERIALS

3.09 UTILITY TRENCH BACKFILL

A. Place backfill on subgrades free of mud, frost, snow, or ice.

3.10 SOIL FILL

EHAF – CO – 01/03 -5 - Section 02300

3.11 SOIL MOISTURE CONTROL

3.12 COMPACTION OF SOIL BACKFILLS AND FILLS

3.14 SUBBASE AND BASE COURSES UNDER PAVEMENTS AND WALKS

EHAF – CO – 01/03 -6 - Section 02300

3.15 DRAINAGE COURSE UNDER CONCRETE SLABS-ON-GRADE

A. Place drainage course on subgrades free of mud, frost, snow, or ice.

3.16 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

EHAF – CO – 01/03 -7 - Section 02300

3.18 DISPOSAL OF SURPLUS AND WASTE MATERIALS

EHAF – CO – 01/03 -8 - Section 02300

1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. This Section includes the following:

B. Related Sections include the following:

1.03 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

EHAF – CO – 01/03 -1 - Hot- Mix Asphalt Paving

1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE

EHAF – CO – 01/03 -2 - Hot- Mix Asphalt Paving

1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

1.07 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Environmental Limitations: Do not apply asphalt materials if substrate is wet or excessively

2.02 ASPHALT MATERIALS

EHAF – CO – 01/03 -3 - Hot- Mix Asphalt Paving

2.03 AUXILIARY MATERIALS

A. Herbicide: Commercial chemical for weed control, registered by Environmental Protection

EHAF – CO – 01/03 -4 - Hot- Mix Asphalt Paving

Medium duty (passenger car area) asphalt paving. Ordinary

3.02 COLD MILLING

3.03 PATCHING AND REPAIRS